Marka: Bonfiglioli Model: Agile Sterowanie: Skalarne / Wektorowe (w otwartej pętli) Silniki: asynchroniczne i synchroniczne (napędy serwo)
Agile
Operating Instructions
Frequency inverter 230 V / 400
0.09 kW ... 11 kW
Content
Content
CONTENT .................................................................................................................. 3
1
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE DOCUMENTATION ................................ 11
1.1
This document........................................................................................................... 12
1.2
Warranty and liability ............................................................................................... 12
1.3
Obligation ................................................................................................................. 13
1.4
Copyright .................................................................................................................. 13
1.5
Storage...................................................................................................................... 13
2
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION ON USE ..................... 14
2.1
Terminology .............................................................................................................. 14
2.2
Designated use ......................................................................................................... 15
2.3 Misuse ....................................................................................................................... 15
2.3.1
Explosion protection .................................................................................................. 15
2.4
Residual risks ............................................................................................................ 16
2.5
Safety and warning signs at frequency inverter....................................................... 16
2.6 Warning information and symbols used in the user manual .................................... 17
2.6.1
Hazard classes .......................................................................................................... 17
2.6.2
Hazard symbols ........................................................................................................ 17
2.6.3
Prohibition signs ....................................................................................................... 17
2.6.4
Personal safety equipment ......................................................................................... 18
2.6.5
Recycling ................................................................................................................. 18
2.6.6
Grounding symbol ..................................................................................................... 18
2.6.7
ESD symbol .............................................................................................................. 18
2.6.8
Information signs ...................................................................................................... 18
2.7
Directives and guidelines to be adhered to by the operator .................................... 19
2.8
Operator's general plant documentation .................................................................. 19
2.9 Operator's/operating staff's responsibilities ............................................................ 19
2.9.1
Selection and qualification of staff .............................................................................. 19
2.9.2
General work safety .................................................................................................. 19
2.10
Organizational measures ....................................................................................... 20
2.10.1 General .................................................................................................................... 20
2.10.2 Use in combination with third-party products ............................................................... 20
2.10.3 Transport and Storage............................................................................................... 20
2.10.4 Handling and installation ........................................................................................... 20
2.10.5 Electrical connections ................................................................................................ 20
2.10.5.1 The five safety rules ........................................................................................... 21
2.10.6 Safe operation .......................................................................................................... 21
2.10.7 Maintenance and service/troubleshooting .................................................................... 22
2.10.8 Final decommissioning............................................................................................... 22
This document
3
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Content
3
DEVICE OVERVIEW ........................................................................................... 23
3.1
Inverter type and warning signs on the device ........................................................ 23
3.2
Type designation ....................................................................................................... 24
3.3
Software Version Identification ................................................................................ 25
3.4
Overview of components and connection terminals ................................................ 26
3.5
Number of control terminals ..................................................................................... 26
4
4.1
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 27
Safety ........................................................................................................................ 27
4.2 Installation ............................................................................................................... 27
4.2.1
Size 1 (3~:0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW) ............................................... 28
4.2.2
Size 2 (3~: 3.0 kW to 5.5 kW; 1~: 1.5 kW to 2.2 kW) .................................................. 29
4.2.3
Size 3 (5.5 kW to 11.0 kW) ........................................................................................ 30
5
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 31
5.1
Safety ........................................................................................................................ 31
5.2
Electrical connections overview ............................................................................... 32
5.3
EMC Information ....................................................................................................... 32
5.4 Dimensioning of conductor cross-section................................................................. 34
5.4.1
Typical cross-sections ................................................................................................ 35
5.5
Mains Connection ...................................................................................................... 36
5.6 Motor Connection...................................................................................................... 38
5.6.1
Length of motor cables, without filter ......................................................................... 39
5.6.2
Motor cable length, with output filter du/dt ................................................................. 40
5.6.3
Motor cable length, with sinus filter ............................................................................ 40
5.6.4
Group drive .............................................................................................................. 40
5.6.5
Brake resistor ........................................................................................................... 41
5.7 Control terminals Standard connection .................................................................... 43
5.7.1
Circuit for control via control terminals ........................................................................ 46
5.7.2
Circuit for control via operator panel ........................................................................... 46
5.7.3
Further setting options for control terminals ................................................................ 47
5.7.4
Evaluation logic of digital inputs ................................................................................. 48
5.7.5
Overview of voltage inputs and outputs ...................................................................... 49
5.7.6
External DC 24 V power supply .................................................................................. 49
5.7.7
Installation notes according to UL508c ........................................................................ 50
6
COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................. 51
6.1 Operator panel .......................................................................................................... 52
6.1.1
Menus ...................................................................................................................... 52
6.1.1.1
Selection of Data sets ......................................................................................... 54
6.1.1.2
Menu for communication setup ............................................................................ 55
6.1.2
Motor control with operator panel............................................................................... 56
6.1.3
Set a parameter to the factory setting ........................................................................ 60
6.1.4
Restrict the scope of operation ................................................................................... 60
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
4
This document
Content
6.2 First commissioning .................................................................................................. 60
6.2.1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 61
6.2.2
Start first commissioning of an asynchronous motor..................................................... 61
6.2.3
Start first commissioning of a synchronous motor ........................................................ 65
6.2.4
Status messages during commissioning (SS…) ............................................................. 68
6.2.5
Warnings during commissioning (SA…) ....................................................................... 68
6.2.6
Error messages during commissioning (SF…) ............................................................... 70
6.2.7
Check direction of rotation ......................................................................................... 71
6.2.8
Selection of actual value display ................................................................................. 71
6.2.9
Commissioning without Setup .................................................................................... 72
6.2.10 Optional Optimization of motor characteristics ............................................................. 72
6.2.10.1 Speed Controller: Softer set up ............................................................................ 72
6.2.10.2 Speed Controller: Stronger set up ........................................................................ 72
6.2.10.3 Voltage Constant ................................................................................................ 73
6.2.10.4 Insufficient Torque during Start of FOC and SYNCH ............................................... 73
6.2.10.5 Cross coupling compensation............................................................................... 73
6.3
Commissioning of a communication interface.......................................................... 74
6.4
After first commissioning.......................................................................................... 80
6.5
Typical functions ....................................................................................................... 91
6.6
Error Acknowledgment via keypad ........................................................................... 98
6.7 Applications .............................................................................................................. 99
6.7.1
Pump ....................................................................................................................... 99
6.7.2
Fan ........................................................................................................................ 100
6.7.3
Fan or pump with closed control loop ....................................................................... 101
6.7.4
Fan for heating, ventilation, air conditioning system ................................................... 103
6.7.5
Conveying plant ...................................................................................................... 104
6.7.6
Compressor ............................................................................................................ 105
6.7.7
Travel applications .................................................................................................. 106
6.7.8
Torque control ........................................................................................................ 107
6.8
7
Set-up via the Communication Interface ............................................................... 108
PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS .......................................................................... 110
7.1 Inverter Data .......................................................................................................... 110
7.1.1
Control level ........................................................................................................... 110
7.1.2
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 111
7.1.3
Set password .......................................................................................................... 112
7.1.4
Programming .......................................................................................................... 113
7.2 Machine data........................................................................................................... 113
7.2.1
Rated motor parameters .......................................................................................... 113
7.2.2
Further motor parameters........................................................................................ 114
7.2.3
Device test ............................................................................................................. 117
7.2.3.1
Earth fault and short circuit test (Test 1) ............................................................ 117
7.2.3.2
Load test (Test 2) ............................................................................................. 118
7.2.3.3
Start device test via operator panel .................................................................... 120
7.2.3.4
Start device test via control software or bus system ............................................ 120
7.2.3.5
Automatic device test after error switch-off......................................................... 121
7.2.3.6
Fan test ........................................................................................................... 121
7.3 Operational Behavior .............................................................................................. 122
7.3.1
Control ................................................................................................................... 122
7.3.2
Starting behavior .................................................................................................... 123
7.3.3
Stopping behavior ................................................................................................... 127
This document
5
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Content
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
Auto start ............................................................................................................... 129
Flying Start ............................................................................................................. 129
Direct current brake ................................................................................................ 131
Positioning ............................................................................................................. 132
7.4 Error and warning behavior .................................................................................... 135
7.4.1
Overload Ixt ........................................................................................................... 135
7.4.2
Temperature .......................................................................................................... 136
7.4.3
Controller status ..................................................................................................... 136
7.4.4
Frequency switch-off limit ........................................................................................ 137
7.4.5
External error ......................................................................................................... 137
7.4.6
Motor temperature .................................................................................................. 137
7.4.6.1
Technical demands on measuring resistors ......................................................... 140
7.4.7
Phase failure .......................................................................................................... 141
7.4.8
Automatic Error Acknowledgment ............................................................................. 142
7.5 Reference Values .................................................................................................... 142
7.5.1
Reference frequency channel ................................................................................... 142
7.5.1.1
Limits .............................................................................................................. 145
7.5.1.2
Positive and negative reference frequencies ........................................................ 145
7.5.1.3
Fixed frequencies ............................................................................................. 146
7.5.1.4
Ramps ............................................................................................................. 147
7.5.1.5
Blocking frequencies ......................................................................................... 150
7.5.1.6
JOG frequency ................................................................................................. 151
7.5.2
Reference percentage channel ................................................................................. 151
7.5.2.1
Limits .............................................................................................................. 154
7.5.2.2
Positive and negative reference percentages ....................................................... 154
7.5.2.3
Fixed percentages ............................................................................................ 154
7.5.2.4
Ramps ............................................................................................................. 155
7.5.3
Motor potentiometer ............................................................................................... 156
7.5.3.1
Operation modes of motor potentiometer ........................................................... 156
7.5.3.2
Ramp of motor potentiometer ........................................................................... 156
7.5.3.3
Motor potentiometer via digital inputs ................................................................ 157
7.5.3.4
Keypad motorpoti: Control via operator panel ..................................................... 160
7.5.4
Electronic gear ........................................................................................................ 163
7.5.4.1
Scope of function ............................................................................................. 163
7.5.4.2
Operation modes of electronic gear .................................................................... 163
7.5.4.3
Gear factor ...................................................................................................... 165
7.5.4.4
Offset .............................................................................................................. 166
7.5.4.5
Actual values ................................................................................................... 166
7.5.4.6
Adjustment Options .......................................................................................... 166
7.6 Control inputs and outputs ..................................................................................... 168
7.6.1
Multifunction input MFI1 .......................................................................................... 168
7.6.1.1
Multifunction input set as analog input MFI1A ..................................................... 169
7.6.1.2
Multifunction input set as digital input MFI1D ...................................................... 174
7.6.2
Multifunction input MFI2 .......................................................................................... 175
7.6.2.1
Multifunction input set as analog input MFI2A ..................................................... 175
7.6.2.2
Multifunction input set as digital input MFI2D ...................................................... 181
7.6.3
Multifunction output MFO1 ....................................................................................... 182
7.6.4
Digital input/output IN3D/OUT3D ............................................................................. 186
7.6.5
Digital outputs ........................................................................................................ 187
7.6.5.1
Digital message ................................................................................................ 189
7.6.5.2
Setting frequency ............................................................................................. 190
7.6.5.3
Reference value reached ................................................................................... 190
7.6.5.4
Flux forming finished ........................................................................................ 191
7.6.5.5
Release brake .................................................................................................. 192
7.6.5.6
Current limitation ............................................................................................. 192
7.6.5.7
External fan ..................................................................................................... 192
7.6.5.8
Warning mask .................................................................................................. 192
7.6.5.9
Warning mask, application ................................................................................ 195
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
6
This document
Content
7.6.6
Digital inputs .......................................................................................................... 196
7.6.6.1
List of control signals ........................................................................................ 197
7.6.6.2
Start command ................................................................................................ 200
7.6.6.3
3-Wire Control.................................................................................................. 200
7.6.6.4
Motor potentiometer ......................................................................................... 201
7.6.6.5
Fixed frequency changeover .............................................................................. 201
7.6.6.6
Fixed percentage changeover ............................................................................ 201
7.6.6.7
Jog Start.......................................................................................................... 202
7.6.6.8
Error Acknowledgment ...................................................................................... 202
7.6.6.9
Thermal contact ............................................................................................... 202
7.6.6.10 n-/T-control changeover ................................................................................... 203
7.6.6.11 Dataset changeover .......................................................................................... 203
7.6.6.12 Handshake Traverse ......................................................................................... 204
7.6.6.13 Brake chopper release ...................................................................................... 204
7.6.6.14 User warning ................................................................................................... 204
7.6.6.15 External error ................................................................................................... 205
7.6.6.16 PLC ................................................................................................................. 205
7.6.6.17 Multiplexer/demultiplexer .................................................................................. 205
7.6.7
Input PWM/repetition frequency/pulse train .............................................................. 207
7.6.7.1
PWM input ....................................................................................................... 208
7.6.7.2
Repetition frequency input ................................................................................ 209
7.6.7.3
Pulse train ....................................................................................................... 209
7.6.7.4
Further setting options ...................................................................................... 211
7.7
V/f characteristic .................................................................................................... 211
7.8 Linear V/f characteristic ......................................................................................... 211
7.8.1
Dynamic voltage pre-control .................................................................................... 213
7.9 Control functions .................................................................................................... 213
7.9.1
Intelligent current limits........................................................................................... 213
7.9.2
Voltage controller .................................................................................................... 215
7.9.3
PID controller (technology controller) ....................................................................... 220
7.9.4
Functions of sensorless control ................................................................................. 227
7.9.4.1
Slip compensation ............................................................................................ 227
7.9.4.2
Current limit value controller ............................................................................. 228
7.9.5
Functions of field-orientated control.......................................................................... 229
7.9.5.1
Current controller ............................................................................................. 229
7.9.5.2
Torque controller .............................................................................................. 231
7.9.5.3
Speed controller ............................................................................................... 233
7.9.5.4
Acceleration pre-control .................................................................................... 236
7.9.5.5
Field controller ................................................................................................. 237
7.9.5.6
Modulation controller ........................................................................................ 238
7.9.6
Real-time tuning (optimizing motor parameters in operation) ...................................... 239
7.10
Special functions.................................................................................................. 240
7.10.1 Pulse width modulation ........................................................................................... 240
7.10.2 Fan ........................................................................................................................ 241
7.10.3 Standby mode and energy saving function ................................................................ 241
7.10.4 Brake chopper and brake resistor ............................................................................. 242
7.10.4.1 Dimensioning of brake resistor .......................................................................... 243
7.10.5 Motor chopper ........................................................................................................ 244
7.10.6 Motor Protection ..................................................................................................... 245
7.10.6.1 Motor protection by Motor Circuit Breaker ........................................................... 245
7.10.6.2 Motor Protection by I2t- monitoring .................................................................... 248
7.10.7 V-belt monitoring .................................................................................................... 250
7.10.8 Traverse function .................................................................................................... 250
7.10.9 System data ........................................................................................................... 253
7.10.10
Service interval monitoring ................................................................................... 253
7.10.11
Copy parameters ................................................................................................. 253
7.10.11.1 Copying using the operator panel...................................................................... 254
This document
7
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Content
7.10.11.2 Copying using the PC control software............................................................... 256
7.10.12
Converter Profibus from/to Internal Notation.......................................................... 256
8
ENERGY SAVING ............................................................................................. 257
8.1
Energy saving function ........................................................................................... 257
8.2
Quadratic V/f characteristic ................................................................................... 259
8.3
Standby mode ......................................................................................................... 260
8.4
Further energy saving options ................................................................................ 263
9
ACTUAL VALUES .............................................................................................. 265
9.1 Actual values of frequency inverter ........................................................................ 265
9.1.1
STO Status ............................................................................................................. 267
9.2
Actual values of machine ........................................................................................ 267
9.3 Actual values of the system .................................................................................... 268
9.3.1
Actual system value ................................................................................................ 268
9.4
Actual value memory .............................................................................................. 268
9.5
Actual values of the CAN system bus...................................................................... 270
9.6
Actual values CANopen ........................................................................................... 270
9.7
Actual values Modbus and VABus ........................................................................... 270
9.8
Actual values Ethernet ............................................................................................ 270
10
SERVICE ....................................................................................................... 271
10.1
Safety ................................................................................................................... 271
10.2
Regular service work ........................................................................................... 271
10.3
Monitoring of service interval.............................................................................. 273
10.3.1 DC-link ................................................................................................................... 273
10.3.2 Fan ........................................................................................................................ 274
10.3.3 Reset service interval .............................................................................................. 276
11
11.1
TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................ 277
General technical data ......................................................................................... 277
11.2
Device data .......................................................................................................... 278
11.2.1 AGL202 (3~:0.18 to 0.55 kW, 1~:0.09 to 0.25 kW, 230 V) ......................................... 279
11.2.2 AGL202 (3~:0.75 to 2.2 kW, 1~:0.37 to 1.1 kW, 230 V)............................................. 280
11.2.3 AGL202 (3~:3.0 to 4.0 kW, 1~:1.5 to 2.2 kW, 230 V) ................................................ 281
11.2.4 AGL202 (3~:5.5 to 7.5 kW, 1~:3.0 kW, 230 V).......................................................... 282
11.2.5 AGL402 (0.25 to 2.2 kW) ......................................................................................... 283
11.2.6 AGL402 (3.0 to 11.0 kW) ......................................................................................... 284
11.2.7 Increase of switching frequency ............................................................................... 285
11.3
Control electronics ............................................................................................... 286
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
8
This document
Content
11.4
12
12.1
Operation diagrams ............................................................................................. 288
OPTIONS ...................................................................................................... 290
Safety ................................................................................................................... 290
12.2
Shield sheets........................................................................................................ 290
12.2.1 Shield sheet for control cables.................................................................................. 290
12.2.1.1 Dimensions ...................................................................................................... 292
12.2.2 Shield sheet for motor cables ................................................................................... 293
12.2.2.1 Size 1 and 2 (3~: 0.18 kW to 5.5 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 2.2 kW) ............................ 293
12.2.2.2 Size 3 (3~: 5.5 kW to 11.0 kW; 1~: 3kW) .......................................................... 294
12.3
Brake resistor ...................................................................................................... 295
12.3.1 230 V devices ......................................................................................................... 296
12.3.2 400 V devices ......................................................................................................... 296
12.4
Line choke ............................................................................................................ 297
12.4.1 1x230 V connection ................................................................................................. 297
12.4.2 3x230 V connection ................................................................................................. 298
12.4.3 3x400 V connection ................................................................................................. 298
12.4.4 Dimensions ............................................................................................................ 299
12.5
Input filter ........................................................................................................... 300
12.5.1 Footprint filter ........................................................................................................ 300
12.5.2 Booktype filter ........................................................................................................ 302
12.5.3 Interference suppression class ................................................................................. 303
12.5.3.1 AC 3x400 V ...................................................................................................... 303
12.5.3.2 AC 3x230 V ...................................................................................................... 305
12.5.3.3 AC 1x230 V ...................................................................................................... 306
12.6
Communication module ....................................................................................... 307
12.7
USB adaptor ......................................................................................................... 307
12.8
Resource pack...................................................................................................... 307
12.9
Assembly variants ................................................................................................ 308
12.9.1 Feed-through assembly (This assembly set is not included in delivery.) ....................... 309
12.9.1.1 Cooling air flow rate required and energy dissipation ........................................... 309
12.9.1.2 Size 1 (3~: 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW)...................................... 310
12.9.1.3 Size 2 (3~: 3.0 kW to 5.5 kW; 1~: 1.5 kW to 2.2 kW) ......................................... 311
12.9.1.4 Size 3 (5.5 kW to 11.0 kW) ............................................................................... 312
12.9.2 Cold Plate (This assembly set is not included in delivery.) ........................................... 314
12.9.2.1 Range of application ......................................................................................... 314
12.9.2.2 Required thermal properties of the external heat sink .......................................... 314
12.9.2.3 Additional fan or liquid cooling ........................................................................... 316
12.9.2.4 Application notes .............................................................................................. 316
12.9.2.5 Assembly ......................................................................................................... 317
12.9.3 Vibration-proof (This assembly set is not included in delivery.) .................................... 321
12.9.3.1 Size 1 (3~: 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW)...................................... 321
12.9.3.2 Size 2 (3~: 3.0 kW to 5.5 kW; 1.5 kW to 2.2 kW) ............................................... 322
12.9.3.3 Size 3 (3~: 5.5 kW to 11.0 kW) ......................................................................... 323
12.9.4 DIN rail (This assembly set is not included in delivery.) .............................................. 324
12.9.4.1 Size 1 (3~: 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW)...................................... 324
13
13.1
ERROR PROTOCOL ....................................................................................... 325
Error list ............................................................................................................... 325
This document
9
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Content
13.1.1
Error messages ....................................................................................................... 326
13.2
Error environment ............................................................................................... 329
13.3
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 331
14
OPERATIONAL AND ERROR DIAGNOSIS ..................................................... 335
14.1
Status of digital signals ....................................................................................... 335
14.2
Controller status .................................................................................................. 335
14.3
Warning status and warning status application .................................................. 336
15
PARAMETER LIST ......................................................................................... 339
15.1
Actual values (Menu Actual) ................................................................................ 339
15.2
Parameters (Menu PARA) .................................................................................... 343
INDEX ................................................................................................................... 354
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
10
This document
General information about the documentation
1
General information about the documentation
For the series of devices AGL (Agile) is for the safety-related commissioning and operation to be complied with the following documentation:
• This Operating instructions
• Application manual “Functional Safety Agile”
For better clarity, the documentation is structured according to the customer-specific requirements
made on the frequency inverter.
Quick start guide
The Quick Start Guide describes the basic steps required for mechanical and electrical installation of
the frequency inverter. The guided commissioning supports you in the selection of necessary parameters and the configuration of the frequency inverter by the software.
Operating instructions
The Operating Instructions describe and document all functions of the frequency inverter. The parameters required for adapting the frequency inverter to specific applications as well as the wide range of
additional functions are described in detail.
Application manual
The application manual supplements the documentation for purposeful installation and commissioning
of the frequency inverter. Information on various subjects connected with the use of the frequency
inverter is described specific to the application.
Installation instructions
The installation manual describes the installation and use of devices, complementing the “Quick Start
Guide” and the user manual.
The following instructions are available for the Agile series:
Operating Instructions Agile
Quick Start Guide Agile
Application manual “Functional Safety”.
Application manuals
Communication
Functions of the frequency inverter.
Installation and commissioning. Delivered with the device.
Description of the Functions and usage of the integrated Functional
Safety.
Communication via the RS485 interface at terminal X21:
Manuals Modbus and VABus.
Communication via the control terminals X12.5 and X12.6:
system bus and CANopen®.
Application manual PLC
CM-232/CM-485: Manuals Modbus and VABus.
CM-CAN: Manuals system bus and CANopen®.
CM-PDPV1: Manual Profibus-DP-V1.
CM-VABus/TCP: Manual for Ethernet Module CM-VABus/TCP
(i.P.)
CM-ModbusTCP: Manual for Ethernet Module CM-Modbus/TCP (i.P.)
CM-EtherCAT®: Manual for Ethernet Module CM-EtherCAT® … (i.P.)
CM-ProfiNet: Manual for Ethernet Module CM-ProfiNet
(i.P.)
CM-EtherNet-I/P: Manual for Ethernet Module CM-EtherNet-I/P (i.P.)
Logic linking of digital signals. Functions for analog signals such as
comparisons and mathematical functions. Graphic functional block
programming.
The products for CANopen® communication comply with the specifications of the user organization
CiA® (CAN in Automation).
The products for EtherCAT® communication comply with the specifications of the user organization
ETG (EtherCAT Technology Group).
This document
11
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
General information about the documentation
1.1
This document
The present user manual complements the “Quick Start Guide” for the frequency inverters of the
AGL 202 and ACU 402 device series.
The user manual contains important information on the installation and use in its specified
application range. Compliance with this user manual contributes to avoiding risks, minimizing
repair cost and downtimes and increasing the reliability and service live of the frequency inverter.
For this reason, make sure you read the user manual carefully.
WARNING
Compliance with the documentation is required to ensure safe operation of the frequency inverter. BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH shall not be held liable for any damage
caused by any non-compliance with the documentation.
In case any problems occur which are not covered by the documentation sufficiently,
please contact the manufacturer.
1.2
Warranty and liability
BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH would like to point out that the contents of this user manual do not
form part of any previous or existing agreement, assurance or legal relationship. Neither are they
intended to supplement or replace such agreements, assurances or legal relationships. Any obligations
of the manufacturer shall solely be based on the relevant purchase agreement which also includes the
complete and solely valid warranty stipulations. These contractual warranty provisions are neither
extended nor limited by the specifications contained in this documentation.
The manufacturer reserves the right to correct or amend the specifications, product information and
omissions in these operating instructions without notice. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any
damage, injuries or costs which may be caused by the aforementioned reasons.
In addition to that, BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH excludes any warranty/liability claims for any personal and/or material damage if such damage is due to one or more of the following causes:
•
inappropriate use of the frequency inverter,
•
non-compliance with the instructions, warnings and prohibitions contained in the documentation,
•
unauthorized modifications of the solar inverter,
•
insufficient monitoring of parts of the machine/plant which are subject to wear,
•
repair work at the machine/plant not carried out properly or in time,
•
catastrophes by external impact and Force Majeure.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
12
This document
General information about the documentation
1.3
Obligation
This user manual must be read before commissioning and complied with. Anybody entrusted with
tasks in connection with the
•
transport,
•
assembly,
•
installation of the frequency inverter and
•
operation of the frequency inverter
must have read and understood the user manual and, in particular, the safety instructions in order to
prevent personal and material losses.
1.4
Copyright
In accordance with applicable law against unfair competition, this user manual is a certificate. Any
copyrights relating to it shall remain with
BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain B6
47807 Krefeld
Germany
These user manual is intended for the operator of the frequency inverter. Any disclosure or copying of
this document, exploitation and communication of its contents (as hardcopy or electronically) shall be
forbidden, unless permitted expressly.
Any non-compliance will constitute an offense against the copyright law dated 09 September 1965,
the law against unfair competition and the Civil Code and may result in claims for damages. All rights
relating to patent, utility model or design registration reserved.
1.5
Storage
The documentation form an integral part of the frequency inverter. It must be stored such that it is
accessible to operating staff at all times. In case the frequency inverter is sold to other users, this user
manual must also be handed over.
Obligation
13
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
General safety instructions and information on use
2
General safety instructions and information on use
The chapter " General safety instructions and information on use " contains general safety instructions
for the Operator and the Operating Staff. At the beginning of certain main chapters, some safety instructions are included which apply to all work described in the relevant chapter. Special work-specific
safety instructions are provided before each safety-relevant work step.
2.1
Terminology
According to the documentation, different activities must be performed by certain persons with certain
qualifications.
The groups of persons with the required qualification are defined as follows:
Operator
This is the entrepreneur/company who/which operates the frequency inverter and uses it as per the
specifications or has it operated by qualified and instructed staff.
Operating staff
The term Operating Staff covers persons instructed by the Operator of the frequency inverter and
assigned the task of operating the frequency inverter.
Qualified staff
The term Qualified Staff covers staff who is assigned special tasks by the Operator of the frequency
inverter, e.g. installation, maintenance and service/repair and troubleshooting. Based on their qualification and/or know-how, qualified staff must be capable of identifying defects and assessing functions.
Qualified electrician
The term Qualified Electrician covers qualified and trained staff who has special technical know-how
and experience with electrical installations. In addition, Qualified Electricians must be familiar with the
applicable standards and regulations, they must be able to assess the assigned tasks properly and
identify and eliminate potential hazards.
Instructed person
The term Instructed Person covers staff who was instructed and trained about/in the assigned tasks
and the potential hazards that might result from inappropriate behavior. In addition, instructed persons must have been instructed in the required protection provisions, protective measures, the applicable directives, accident prevention regulations as well as the operating conditions and verified their
qualification.
Expert
The term Expert covers qualified and trained staff who has special technical know-how and experience
relating to frequency inverter. Experts must be familiar with the applicable government work safety
directives, accident prevention regulations, guidelines and generally accepted rules of technology in
order to assess the operationally safe condition of the frequency inverter.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
14
Terminology
General safety instructions and information on use
2.2
Designated use
The frequency inverter is designed according to the state of the art and recognized safety regulations.
The frequency inverters are electrical drive components intended for installation in industrial plants or
machines. Commissioning and start of operation is not allowed until it has been verified that the machine meets the requirements of the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and DIN EN 60204-1.
The frequency inverters meet the requirements of the low voltage directive 2006/95/EEC and DIN
EN 61800-5-1. CE-labeling is based on these standards. Responsibility for compliance with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC lies with the operator. Frequency inverters are only available at specialized
dealers and are exclusively intended for commercial use as per EN 61000-3-2.
No capacitive loads may be connected to the frequency inverter.
The technical data, connection specifications and information on ambient conditions are indicated on
the rating plate and in the documentation and must be complied with in any case.
2.3
Misuse
Any use other than that described in " Designated use " shall not be permissible and shall be considered as misuse.
For example, the machine/plant must not be operated
•
by uninstructed staff,
•
while it is not in perfect condition,
•
without protection enclosure (e.g. covers),
•
without safety equipment or with safety equipment deactivated.
The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from such misuse. The sole risk
shall be borne by the operator.
2.3.1
Explosion protection
The frequency inverter is an IP 20 protection class device. For this reason, use of the device in explosive atmospheres is not permitted.
Designated use
15
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
General safety instructions and information on use
2.4
Residual risks
Residual risks are special hazards involved in handling of the frequency inverter which cannot be eliminated despite the safety-compliant design of the device. Residual risks are not obviously identifiable
and can be a potential source of injury or health hazard.
Typical residual hazards include:
Electrical hazard
Danger of contact with energized components due to a defect, opened covers or enclosures or improper working on electrical equipment.
Danger of contact with energized components inside of the frequency inverter if no external disconnection device was installed by the operator.
Electrostatic charging
Touching electronic components bears the risk of electrostatic discharges.
Thermal hazards
Risk of accidents by hot machine/plant surfaces, e.g. heat sink, transformer, fuse or sine filter.
Charged capacitors in DC link
The DC link may have dangerous voltage levels even up to three minutes after shutdown.
Danger of equipment falling down/over, e.g. during transport
Center of gravity is not the middle of the electric cabinet modules.
2.5
Safety and warning signs at frequency inverter
•
Comply with all safety instructions and danger information provided on the frequency inverter.
•
Safety information and warnings on the frequency inverter must not be removed.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
16
Residual risks
General safety instructions and information on use
2.6
Warning information and symbols used in the user manual
2.6.1
Hazard classes
The following hazard identifications and symbols are used to mark particularly important information:
DANGER
Identification of immediate threat holding a high risk of death or serious injury if not
avoided.
WARNING
Identification of immediate threat holding a medium risk of death or serious injury if
not avoided.
CAUTION
Identification of immediate threat holding a low risk of minor or moderate physical injury if not avoided.
NOTE
Identification of a threat holding a risk of material damage if not avoided.
2.6.2
Symbol
Hazard symbols
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
General hazard
Electrical voltage
2.6.3
Symbol
Suspended load
Hot surfaces
Prohibition signs
Meaning
No switching; it is forbidden to switch
the machine/plant, assembly on
Warning information and symbols used in the
user manual
17
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
General safety instructions and information on use
2.6.4
Symbol
Personal safety equipment
Meaning
Wear body protection
2.6.5
Symbol
Recycling
Meaning
Recycling, to avoid waste, collect all
materials for reuse
2.6.6
Symbol
Grounding symbol
Meaning
Ground connection
2.6.7
Symbol
ESD symbol
Meaning
ESD: Electrostatic Discharge (can
damage components and assemblies)
2.6.8
Symbol
Information signs
Meaning
Tips and information making using the
frequency inverter easier.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
18
Warning information and symbols used in the
user manual
General safety instructions and information on use
2.7
Directives and guidelines to be adhered to by the operator
The operator must follow the following directives and regulations:
•
Ensure that the applicable workplace-related accident prevention regulations as well as other applicable national regulation are accessible to the staff.
•
An authorized person must ensure, before using the frequency inverter, that the device is used in
compliance with its designated use and that all safety requirements are met.
•
Additionally, comply with the applicable laws, regulations and directives of the country in which
the frequency inverter is used.
•
Any additional guidelines and directives that may be required additionally shall be defined by
the operator of the machine/plant considering the operating environment.
2.8
•
Operator's general plant documentation
In addition to the user manual, the operator should issue separate internal operating instructions
for the frequency inverter. The user manual of the frequency inverter must be included in the user
manual of the whole plant.
2.9
Operator's/operating staff's responsibilities
2.9.1
Selection and qualification of staff
•
Any work on the frequency inverter may only be carried out by qualified technical staff. The staff
must not be under the influence of any drugs. Note the minimum age required by law. Define the
staff's responsibility in connection with all work on the frequency inverter clearly.
•
Work on the electrical components may only be performed by a qualified electrician according to
the applicable rules of electrical engineering.
•
The operating staff must be trained for the relevant work to be performed.
2.9.2
General work safety
•
In addition to the user manual of the machine/plant, any applicable legal or other regulations
relating to accident prevention and environmental protection must be complied with. The staff
must be instructed accordingly.
Such regulations and/or requirements may include, for example, handling of hazardous media and
materials or provision/use of personal protective equipment.
•
In addition to this user manual, issue any additional directives that may be required to meet specific operating requirements, including supervision and reporting requirements, e.g. directives relating to work organization, workflow and employed staff.
•
Unless approved of expressly by the manufacturer, do not modify the frequency inverter in any
way, including addition of attachments or retrofits.
•
Only use the frequency inverter if the rated connection and setup values specified by the manufacturer are met.
•
Provide appropriate tools as may be required for performing all work on the frequency inverter
properly.
Directives and guidelines to be adhered to by the
operator
19
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
General safety instructions and information on use
2.10
Organizational measures
2.10.1 General
•
Train your staff in the handling and use of the frequency inverter and the machine/plant as well
as the risks involved.
•
Use of any individual parts or components of the frequency inverter in other parts of the operator's machine/plant is prohibited.
•
Optional components for the frequency inverter must be used in accordance with their designated
use and in compliance with the relevant documentation.
2.10.2 Use in combination with third-party products
•
Please note that BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH will not accept any responsibility for compatibility
with third-party products (e.g. motors, cables or filters).
•
In order to enable optimum system compatibility, BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON GmbH office components facilitating commissioning and providing optimum synchronization of the machine/plant
parts in operation.
•
If you use the frequency inverter in combination with third-party products, you do this at your
own risk.
2.10.3 Transport and Storage
•
The frequency inverters must be transported and stored in an appropriate way. During transport
and storage the devices must remain in their original packaging.
•
The units may only be stored in dry rooms which are protected against dust and moisture and are
exposed to little temperature deviations only. The requirements of DIN EN 60721-3-1 for storage,
DIN EN 60721-3-2 for transport and labeling on the packaging must be met.
•
The duration of storage without connection to the permissible nominal voltage may not exceed
one year.
2.10.4 Handling and installation
•
Do not commission any damaged or destroyed components.
•
Prevent any mechanical overloading of the frequency inverter. Do not bend any components and
never change the isolation distances.
•
Do not touch any electronic construction elements and contacts. The frequency inverter is
equipped with components which are sensitive to electrostatic energy and can be damaged if
handled improperly. Any use of damaged or destroyed components will endanger the machine/plant safety and shall be considered as a non-compliance with the applicable standards.
•
Only install the frequency inverter in a suitable operating environment. The frequency inverter is
exclusively designed for installation in industrial environments.
•
If seals are removed from the case, this can result in the warranty becoming null and void.
2.10.5 Electrical connections
•
The five safety rules must be complied with.
•
Never touch live terminals. The DC link may have dangerous voltage levels even up to three
minutes after shutdown.
•
When performing any work on/with the frequency inverter, always comply with the applicable
national and international regulations/laws on work on electrical equipment/plants of the country
when the frequency inverter is used.
•
The cables connected to the frequency inverters may not be subjected to high-voltage insulation
tests unless appropriate circuitry measures are taken before.
•
Only connect the frequency inverter to suitable supply mains.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
20
Organizational measures
General safety instructions and information on use
2.10.5.1
The five safety rules
When working on/in electrical plants, always follow the five safety rules:
1. Isolate
2. Secure to prevent restarting
3. Check isolation
4. Earth and short-circuit,
5. Cover or shield neighboring live parts.
2.10.6
Safe operation
•
During operation of the frequency inverter, always comply with the applicable national and international regulations/laws on work on electrical equipment/plants.
•
Before commissioning and the start of the operation, make sure to fix all covers and check the
terminals. Check the additional monitoring and protective devices according to the applicable national and international safety directives.
•
During operation, never open the machine/plant
•
Do not connect/disconnect any components/equipment during operation.
•
The machine/plant holds high voltage levels during operation, is equipped with rotating parts
(fan) and has hot surfaces. Any unauthorized removal of covers, improper use, wrong installation
or operation may result in serious injuries or material damage.
•
Some components, e.g. the heat sink or brake resistor, may be hot even some time after the machine/plant was shut down. Don't touch any surfaces directly after shutdown. Wear safety gloves
where necessary.
•
The frequency inverter may hold dangerous voltage levels until the capacitor in the DC link is discharged. Wait for at least 3 minutes after shutdown before starting electrical or mechanical work
on the frequency inverter. Even after this waiting time, make sure that the equipment is deenergized in accordance with the safety rules before starting the work.
•
In order to avoid accidents or damage, only qualified staff and electricians may carry out the work
such as installation, commissioning or setup.
•
In the case of a defect of terminals and/or cables, immediately disconnect the frequency inverter
from mains supply.
•
Persons not familiar with the operation of frequency inverters must not have access to the frequency inverter. Do not bypass nor decommission any protective facilities.
•
The frequency inverter may be connected to power supply every 60 s. This must be considered
when operating a mains contactor in jog operation mode. For commissioning or after an emergency stop, a non-recurrent, direct restart is permissible.
•
After a failure and restoration of the power supply, the motor may start unexpectedly if the Auto
Start function is activated.
If staff is endangered, a restart of the motor must be prevented by means of external circuitry.
•
Before commissioning and the start of the operation, make sure to fix all covers and check the
terminals. Check the additional monitoring and protective devices according to EN 60204 and applicable the safety directives (e.g. Working Machines Act or Accident Prevention Directives).
Organizational measures
21
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
General safety instructions and information on use
2.10.7 Maintenance and service/troubleshooting
•
Visually inspect the frequency inverter when carrying out the required maintenance work and
inspections at the machine/plant.
•
Perform the maintenance work and inspections prescribed for the machine carefully, including the
specifications on parts/equipment replacement.
•
Work on the electrical components may only be performed by a qualified electrician according to
the applicable rules of electrical engineering. Only use original spare parts.
•
Unauthorized opening and improper interventions in the machine/plant can lead to personal injury
or material damage. Repairs on the frequency inverters may only be carried out by the manufacturer or persons authorized by the manufacturer. Check protective equipment regularly.
•
Before performing any maintenance work, the machine/plant must be disconnected from mains
supply and secured against restarting. The five safety rules must be complied with.
2.10.8 Final decommissioning
Unless separate return or disposal agreements were made, recycle the disassembled frequency inverter components:
• Scrap metal materials
• Recycle plastic elements
• Sort and dispose of other component materials
Electric scrap, electronic components, lubricants and other utility materials must be
treated as special waste and may only be disposed of by specialized companies.
In any case, comply with any applicable national disposal regulations as regards environmentally compatible disposal of the frequency inverter. For more details, contact
the competent local authorities.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
22
Organizational measures
Device overview
3
Device overview
This chapter describes the characteristic of the Agile series.
3.1
Inverter type and warning signs on the device
•
Determine the type of frequency inverter.
•
Verify that the rated input voltage corresponds to the local power supply.
•
Verify that the recommended motor shaft power of the frequency inverter corresponds to the
rated power of the motor.
[1] Labeling for Functional Safety (if applicable). Please check the Application manual “Functional
Safety”.
[2] Labeling for UL508c (if applicable)
Specifier
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
-15 2
-18 2
-19 2
-19 3
-21 3
-22 3
-23 3
Frame size
1
2
3
Recommended motor shaft power at specified power supply
AGL 402: AC 3x400 V AGL 202: AC 3x230 V AGL 202: AC 1x230 V
-0,18 kW
0,09 kW
0,25 kW
0,25 kW
0,12 kW
0,37 kW
0,37 kW
0,18 kW
0,55 kW
0,55 kW
0,25 kW
0,75 kW
0,75 kW
0,37 kW
1,1 kW
1,1 kW
0,55 kW
1,5 kW
1,5 kW
0,75 kW
2,2 kW
2,2 kW
1,1 kW
3,0 kW
3,0 kW
1,5 kW
4,0 kW
4,0 kW
2,2 kW
5,5 kW
--5,5 kW
5,5 kW
3,0 kW
7,5 kW
7,5 kW
3,0 kW
9,2 kW
--11,0 kW
---
Inverter type and warning signs on the device
23
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Device overview
3.2
Type designation
Basic Type designation
1
Series:
AGL 202: inverter Agile 1xAC 200 – 15 %…240 V + 10 %
3xAC 200 – 15 %…240 V + 10 %
AGL 402: inverter Agile 3xAC 360…480 V +/- 10 %
2
Size (Power)
Coding see previous chapter
3
Size (mechanical size)
1 = Size 1
2 = Size 2
3 = Size 3
4
EMC Filter
F = integrated (default)
5
Design Version
A = standard cooling (default)
C = Cold Plate (optional)
Optional-Type designation
A
Mounting:
(blank)
= panel fixing (default)
MPSV
= feed-through no fan
MDIN
= DIN rail (size 1 only)
MNVIB
= vibration proof mounting
B
Communication module
(blank)
= no module (default)
CM-CAN
= CANopen interface
CM-PDPV1
= Profibus DP-V1 interface
CM-232
= RS232 interface
CM-485
= 2nd RS485 interface (VABus & Modbus)
CM-VABus/TCP
= Ethernet Protocol VABus/TCP
CM-Modbus/TCP
= Ethernet Protocol Modbus/TCP
CM-EtherCAT®
= EtherCAT® Protocol
CM-ProfiNet
= ProfiNet Protocol
CM-EtherNet-I/P
= EtherNet-I/P Protocol
C
Memory Extension
(blank)
= no memory card (default)
RP
= Resource Pack (MMC memory card)
D
Software Version
(blank)
= Standard (default)
The name plate shows the options at delivery.
Most of the options (with the exception of the Software Version) can be refitted by the
user. Also the later modification (in example removing a CM module) is possible.
Devices with Functional Safety are marked accordingly. For information regarding the
marking please comply with the application manual “Functional Safety”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
24
Type designation
Device overview
3.3
Software Version Identification
The Software version plate is situated right from the memory
card slot and left from the Control terminals.
Software Version Identification
25
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Device overview
3.4
Overview of components and connection terminals
Mains connection
Relay output, potential-free
Heat sink
Type plate
Operator panel
Plug-in section for
optional communication module
Communication interface X21
with RJ45 connection
Control terminals
Memory card slot
Motor connection
Mains voltage connection
The safety instructions must be complied with strictly.
Motor Connection
The safety instructions must be complied with strictly.
Control terminals and relay output
The safety instructions must be complied with strictly.
CAN connection terminals
Operator panel
Port for memory card (MMC)
Communication interface X21 2
Port for one of the optional communication modules (see
previous chapter for list)
3.5
4
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
See
Chapter 5.5
Chapter 5.1
Chapter 5.6
Chapter 5.1
Chapter 5.7
Chapter 5.1
Separate instructions on System bus or
CANopen® 1.
Chapter 6.1
Chapter 7.10.11 and 12.8
Separate instructions on VABus or Modbus.
Separate instructions on the protocols.
Number of control terminals
digital inputs
digital inputs for enable
digital input/output
multifunction inputs: digital/analog input
digital output
multifunction output: digital/analog/frequency
1 input for external voltage supply DC 24 V
1 reference voltage output DC 10 V
1 voltage output DC 24 V
1 relay output, potential-free
Control terminals for system bus or protocol
CANopen®
The products for CANopen® communication comply with the specifications of the user organization CiA® (CAN
in Automation).
Install an interface adapter for connection of a PC. This enables configuration and monitoring using the PC
software VPlus.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
26
Overview of components and connection
terminals
Mechanical Installation
4
Mechanical Installation
The frequency inverters of degree of protection IP20 are designed, as a standard, for installation in
electrical cabinets.
During installation, both the installation and the safety instructions as well as the device specifications
must be complied with.
4.1
Safety
WARNING
To avoid serious physical injury or considerable damage to property, only qualified staff
may work on the devices.
WARNING
During assembly, make sure that no foreign particles (e.g. chips, dust, wires, screws,
tools) can get inside the frequency inverter. Otherwise there is the risk of short circuits
and fire.
The frequency inverter complies with protection class IP20 only if the covers, components and terminals are mounted properly.
Overhead Installation or installation in horizontal position is not permissible.
NOTE
Mount the devices with sufficient clearance to other components so that the cooling air
can circulate freely. Avoid soiling by grease and air pollution by dust, aggressive gases,
etc.
Suction intakes of fans may not be covered.
4.2
Installation
Mounting distance
d
d & gt; 100 mm
d
Safety
27
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Mechanical Installation
4.2.1
Size 1 (3~:0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
--0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
Dimensions
170
60
120
220 (+3)
244 200
30
Assembly
Use screws M6.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
28
Installation
Mechanical Installation
4.2.2
Size 2 (3~: 3.0 kW to 5.5 kW; 1~: 1.5 kW to 2.2 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-15 2
-18 2
-19 2
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
1.5
2.2
--
3ph.
kW
3.0
4.0
--
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
3.0
4.0
5.5
Dimensions
196
80
138
250 200
220 (+3)
40
Assembly
Use screws M6.
Installation
29
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Mechanical Installation
4.2.3
Size 3 (5.5 kW to 11.0 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-19 3
-21 3
-22 3
-23 3
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
3.0
3.0
---
3ph.
kW
5.5
7.5
---
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
5.5
7.5
9.2
11
Dimensions
125
205
90
138
250 200
220 (+3)
Assembly
Use screws M6.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
30
Installation
Electrical Installation
5
Electrical Installation
This chapter describes the electrical installation of the Agile series.
5.1
Safety
WARNING
The electrical installation must be carried out by qualified electricians according to the
general and regional safety and installation directives.
The documentation and device specification must be complied with during installation.
Before any assembly or connection work, discharge the frequency inverter. Verify that
the frequency inverter is discharged.
Do not touch the terminals because the capacitors may still be charged.
Only connect suitable voltage sources. The nominal voltage of the frequency inverter
must correspond to the supply voltage.
The frequency inverter must be connected to ground potential.
If voltage supply is switched on, no covers of the frequency inverter may be removed.
The connecting cables must be protected externally, considering the maximum voltage and current
values of the fuses. The mains fuses and cable cross-sections are to be selected according to
EN 60204-1 and DIN VDE 0298 Part 4 for the nominal operating point of the frequency inverter. According to UL/CSA, the frequency inverter is suitable for operation at a supply network of a maximum
of 480 VAC which delivers a maximum symmetrical current of 5000 A (effective value) if protected by
fuses of class RK5. Only use copper cables with a temperature range of 60/75 °C.
In the case of special applications, you may also have to comply with further guidelines and instructions.
The frequency inverters are to be grounded properly, i.e. large connection area and with good conductivity. The leakage current of the frequency inverters may be & gt; 3.5 mA. According to EN 50178 a
stationary installation must be provided. The protective conductor cross-section required for grounding the fixing plate must be selected according to the size of the unit. In these applications, the crosssection must correspond to the recommended cross-section of the wire. Refer to chapter 5.4
“Dimensioning of conductor cross-section”.
CAUTION
Degree of protection IP20 is only achieved with terminals plugged and properly mounted covers.
Connection conditions
− The frequency inverter is suited for connection to the public or industrial supply mains according to
the technical data.
− It must be checked, based on the specifications of EN 61000-3-2, if the devices can be connected
to the public supply means without taking additional measures. Increased requirements in connection with the specific application of the frequency inverter are to be met by means of optional
components. Commutating chokes and EMC filters are optionally available.
− Operation on unearthed mains (IT mains) is admissible after pulling out the IT mains plug-in
jumper.
Interference-free operation with residual current device is guaranteed at a tripping current ≥ 30 mA if
the following points are observed:
− All-current sensitive residual current devices (Type B to EN 50178)
− Use EMC filters with reduced leakage current or, if possible, do not use EMC filters at all.
− The length of the shielded motor cable is ≤ 10 m and there are no additional capacitive components between the mains or motor cables and PE.
For connection to IT mains, refer to chapter 5.5 “Mains Connection”.
Safety
31
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
5.2
Electrical connections overview
For connection refer to the corresponding chapter.
5.3
EMC Information
The frequency inverters are designed according to the requirements and limit values of product norm
EN 61800-3 with an interference immunity factor (EMI) for operation in industrial applications. Electromagnetic interference is to be avoided by expert installation and observation of the specific product
information.
Measures
•
Install the frequency inverters on a metal mounting panel that is connected to the equipotential
bonding. Ideally, the mounting panel should be galvanized, not painted.
•
Provide proper equipotential bonding within the plant. Plant components such as control cabinets,
control panels, machine frames must be connected to the equipotential bonding by means of low
inductive wire mesh.
•
Connect the shields of the cables on both sides to the mounting panel that is not painted and
connected to the equipotential bonding.
•
Connect the shield of analog control cables to the equipotential bonding only on one side near to
the frequency inverter.
•
Connect the frequency inverter and other components, e.g. external filters and other components
to the equipotential bonding via short cables.
•
Keep the cables as short as possible; make sure that cables are installed properly using appropriate cable clamps, etc.
•
Contactors, relays and solenoids in the electrical cabinet are to be provided with suitable interference suppression components.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
32
Electrical connections overview
Electrical Installation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
fuse
circuit breaker
line choke (optional)
input filter (optional)
cable shield
brake resistor (optional)
output filter (optional)
Optional shield sheets can be used for the cable shielding. Refer to chapter 12.2 “Shield sheets”.
Mains Connection
Install the mains supply cable separate from the control and data cables and the motor cable.
DC link connection
The frequency inverter may be connected via the terminals " - " and " + " of terminal block X10 to further Agile- or ACTIVE-devices or to a common direct voltage source. Cables longer than 300 mm are
to be shielded. The shield must be connected across a wide area contact on both sides to the unpainted conductive mounting panel.
Control connection
Control and signal cables must be kept physically separate from the power cables.
Analog signal lines must be shielded. The shield is to be connected to the unpainted conductive
mounting panel that is connected to equipotential bonding. An optional shield sheet can be used for
shielding. Refer to chapter 12.2.1 “Shield sheet for control cables”.
Motor and brake resistor
Connect the shield of the motor cable to the unpainted conductive mounting panel that is connected
to equipotential bonding.
An optional shield sheet can be used for shielding. Refer to chapter 12.2.2 “Shield sheet for motor
cables”.
The signal cable used for monitoring the motor temperature must be kept separate from the motor
cable. Connect the shield of this line on both sides.
If a brake resistor is used, the connection cable must be shielded. Connect the shield in consideration
of EMC.
EMC Information
33
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
Line choke
Line chokes reduce mains harmonics and reactive power. Additional the increase of product life is
possible. Consider the reduction of the maximum output voltage if a line choke is installed.
The line choke must be installed between mains connection and input filter.
BONFIGLIOLI provides applicable line chokes. Refer to chapter 12.4 “Line choke”.
Input filter
Input filters reduce the conducted radio-frequency interference voltage. The input filter must be installed upstream on mains side of the frequency inverter.
CAUTION
The frequency inverters meet the requirements of the low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC
and the requirements of the EMC directive 2004/108/EC. The EMC product standard EN
61800-3 relates to the drive system. The documentation provides information on how
the applicable standards can be complied if the frequency inverter is a component of the
drive system. The declaration of conformity is to be issued by the supplier of the drive
system.
5.4
Dimensioning of conductor cross-section
•
The cable dimensions must be selected according to the current load and voltage drop to be expected.
•
Select the cable cross-section of the cables such that the voltage drop is as small as possible. If
the voltage drop is too great, the motor will not reach its full torque.
•
Comply with any additional national and application-specific regulations and the separate UL instructions. For typical mains fuses, refer to chapter 11 " Technical data " .
Select cross-sections of PE conductor according to EN61800-5-1:
Mains cable
Mains cable up to 10 mm²
Mains cable 10…16 mm²
Mains cable 16…35 mm²
Mains cable & gt; 35 mm²
Operating Instructions Agile
Protective conductor
Install two protective conductors of the same size as the mains
cable, or one protective conductor of a size of 10 mm².
Install one protective conductor of the same size as the mains
cable.
Install one protective conductor with a cross-section of 16 mm².
Install one protective conductor of half the size of the mains cable.
06/2013
34
Dimensioning of conductor cross-section
Electrical Installation
5.4.1
Typical cross-sections
The following table provides an overview of typical cable cross-sections (copper cable with PVC insulation, 30 °C ambient temperature, continuous mains current max. 100% rated input current). Actual
cable cross-section requirements may deviate from these values due to actual operating conditions.
Single-phase connection (L1/N), 230 V
Type
Mains cable
PE-conductor
-01
0.09kW
-02 0.12 kW
-03 0.18 kW
-05 0.25 kW
1.5 mm²
2x1.5 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
-07 0.37 kW
-09 0.55 kW
-11 0.75 kW
-13
1.1 kW
-15
1.5 kW
-18
2.2 kW
2.5 mm²
2x2.5 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
-19
3.0 kW
4 mm²
2x4 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
-21
3.0 kW
1)
Connection on protective earth on mounting plate.
Motor cable
1.5 mm²
1.5 mm²
1.5 mm²
Three-phase connection (L1/L2/L3), 230 V
Type
Mains cable
PE-conductor
-01 0.18 kW
-02 0.25 kW
-03 0.37 kW
-05 0.55 kW
1.5 mm²
2x1.5 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
-07 0.75 kW
-09
1.1 kW
-11
1.5 kW
-13
2.2 kW
-15
3.0 kW
-18
4. kW
2.5 mm²
2x2.5 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
-19
5.5 kW
4 mm²
2x4 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
-21
7.5 kW
6 mm²
2x6 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
1)
Connection on protective earth on mounting plate.
Motor cable
1.5 mm²
1.5 mm²
4 mm²
4 mm²
Three-phase connection (L1/L2/L3), 400 V
Type
Mains cable
PE-conductor
-03 0,25 kW
-02 0,37 kW
-05 0.55 kW
-07 0.75 kW
1.5 mm²
2x1.5 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
-09
1.1 kW
-11
1.5 kW
-13
2.2 kW
-15
3.0 kW
-18
4.0 kW
-19
5.5 kW
-21
7.5 kW
2.5 mm²
2x2.5 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
-22
9.2 kW
-23 11.0 kW
4 mm²
2x4 mm² or 1x10 mm² 1)
1)
Connection on protective earth on mounting plate.
Motor cable
1.5 mm²
2.5 mm²
4 mm²
Please note, that the mentioned typical cross sections do not consider other factors like fuses. Comply
with applying local standards and applying branch standards.
Dimensioning of conductor cross-section
35
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
5.5
Mains Connection
DANGER
Disconnect the frequency inverter from mains voltage and protect it against being energized unintentionally.
Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged.
Wait for some minutes until the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to
work at the unit.
When the frequency inverter is disconnected from power supply, the mains, DC-link
voltage and motor terminals may still be live for some time.
The mains fuses and cable cross-sections are to be selected according to EN 60204-1 and DIN VDE
0298 Part 4 for the nominal operating point of the frequency inverter. According to UL/CSA, approved
Class 1 copper lines with a temperature range of 60/75°C and matching mains fuses are to be used
for the power cables. The electrical installation is to be done according to the device specifications and
the applicable standards and directives.
CAUTION
The control, mains and motor lines must be kept physically separate from one another.
The cables connected to the frequency inverters may not be subjected to high-voltage
insulation tests unless appropriate circuitry measures are taken before.
Minimum Torque to tighten the screws: 0.5 Nm (4.6 lb-in)
Maximum Torque to tighten the screws: 0,6 Nm (5,3 lb-in)
Recommended sizes of Mains fuses F1 are described in the technical data chapter 11.2 “Device data”.
: Only for in DC link connections.
Comply with the notes on cable cross-sections in chapter 5.4 " Dimensioning of conductor crosssection " .
Cable cross-sections mm2
0,2 … 4 (flexible cable with sleeve)
Mains terminals:
0,2 … 6 (rigid cable)
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
36
Mains Connection
Electrical Installation
Connection to IT mains
For connection to IT mains, pull out the plug-type jumper.
NOTE
Removing the jumper reduces interference immunity and increases the emitted interference. Interference immunity can be increased by means of external filters.
Additional work for EMC conformity may be possible. Comply with the EMC information.
Mains Connection
37
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
5.6
Motor Connection
DANGER
Disconnect the frequency inverter from mains voltage and protect it against being energized unintentionally.
Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged.
Wait for some minutes until the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to
work at the unit.
When the frequency inverter is disconnected from power supply, the mains, DC-link
voltage and motor terminals may still be live for some time.
When using pluggable terminals: Do not switch on the device while the plugs are disconnected, the IP protection is only warranted with plugged terminals.
BONFIGLIOLI recommends connecting the motor to the frequency inverter using shielded cables.
•
Connect the cable shield to PE potential properly, i.e. with good conductivity, on both sides.
•
The motor cables must be kept physically separate from the control and network cables.
The user must comply with the applicable limits stipulated in the relevant national and international
directives as regards the application, the length of the motor cable and the switching frequency.
Connect in delta connection or star connection according to the motor data.
Delta connection
Star connection
X2
X2
U V W
U V W
Rb1 Rb2
U VW
Rb1 Rb2
U VW
M
3
M
3
Minimum Torque to tighten the screws: 0.5 Nm (4.6 lb-in)
Maximum Torque to tighten the screws: 0,6 Nm (5,3 lb-in)
Comply with the notes on cable cross-sections in chapter 5.4 " Dimensioning of conductor crosssection "
Cable cross-sections mm2
0.2 … 4 (flexible cable with sleeve)
Motor terminals:
0.2 … 6 (rigid cable)
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
38
Motor Connection
Electrical Installation
5.6.1
Length of motor cables, without filter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
-15 2
-18 2
-19 2
-19 3
-21 3
-22 3
-23 3
Permissible length of motor cable without output filter
Agile 202
Agile 402
1ph.
3ph.
3ph.
unshielded cable
shielded cable
kW
kW
kW
0.09
0.18
-0.12
0.25
0.25
0.18
0.37
0.37
0.25
0.55
0.55
50 m
25 m
0.37
0.75
0.75
0.55
1.1
1.1
0.75
1.5
1.5
1.1
2.2
2.2
1.5
3.0
3.0
2.2
4.0
4.0
100 m
50 m
--5.5
3.0
5.5
5.5
3.0
7.5
7.5
100 m
50 m
--9.2
--11
The specified lengths of the motor cables must not be exceeded if no output filter is installed.
Motor Connection
39
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
5.6.2
Motor cable length, with output filter du/dt
Longer motor cables can be used after taking appropriate measures, e.g. use of low-capacitance cables and output filters. The following table contains recommended values for the use of output filters.
Type
Mains supply
Power
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
-15 2
-18 2
-19 2
-19 3
-21 3
-22 3
-23 3
5.6.3
Motor cable length with output filter
Agile 402
3ph.
3ph.
unshielded cable
kW
kW
0.18
-0.25
0.25
0.37
0.37
0.55
0.55
150 m
0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
300 m
-5.5
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
300 m
-9.2
-11
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
-3.0
3.0
---
shielded cable
100 m
200 m
200 m
Motor cable length, with sinus filter
Motor cables can be longer if sinus filters are used. By conversion in sinus-shaped currents, highfrequency portions which might limit the cable length are filtered out. Consider the voltage drop
across the cable length and the resulting voltage drop at the sinus filter. The voltage drop results in
an increase of the output current. The frequency inverter must be suitable for the higher output current. This must be considered in the projecting phase.
In the case of motor cable lengths exceeding 300 m, contact BONFIGLIOLI service.
5.6.4
Group drive
In the case of a group drive (several motors at one frequency inverter), the total length must be divided across the individual motors according to the value given in the table. See chapters 5.6.1 and 0.
Use a thermal monitoring element on each motor (e.g. PTC resistor) in order to avoid damage.
A group drive with synchronous server motors is not possible.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
40
Motor Connection
Electrical Installation
5.6.5
Brake resistor
Installing a brake resistor if feedback of generator energy is expected. Overvoltage shutdowns can be
avoided by this.
DANGER
Disconnect the frequency inverter from mains voltage and protect it against being energized unintentionally.
Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged.
Wait for some minutes until the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to
work at the unit.
When the frequency inverter is disconnected from power supply, the mains, DC-link
voltage and motor terminals may still be live for some time.
WARNING
During operation, the surface of the brake resistor can reach high temperatures. The
surface can keep high temperatures after operation for a certain time. Do not touch the
brake resistor during operation or operational readiness of the frequency inverter. Noncompliance may result in skin burn.
Install a safeguard for protection against contact or fix warning labels.
Do not install the brake resistor in the proximity to flammable or heat-sensitive materials.
Do not cover the brake resistor.
CAUTION
Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends using a temperature switch. Depending on the selected
resistor the temperature switch is integrated as a standard or optional available. A detailed list is included in Chapter 12.3 “Brake resistor”. The temperature switch disconnects the frequency inverter from mains supply if the brake resistor is overloaded.
Using Brake resistors without temperature switches can result in critical states.
Motor Connection
41
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
Minimize cable lengths.
X2
U V W
L1
L2
L3
Rb1 Rb2
K1
K1
Minimum Torque to tighten the screws: 0.5 Nm (4.6 lb-in)
Maximum Torque to tighten the screws: 0,6 Nm (5,3 lb-in)
NOTE
BONFIGLIOLI provides suitable brake resistors. Refer to chapter 12.3 “Brake resistor”.
For calculation of brake resistance refer to chapter 7.10.4.1 “Dimensioning of brake
resistor”.
NOTE
DC-connection requires a power estimation of the complete system. The brake resistor
is operational dependent on the enable of the frequency inverter. The contactor K1
must disconnect all plant components from the mains.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
42
Motor Connection
Electrical Installation
5.7
Control terminals Standard connection
CAUTION
The unit may only be connected with the power supply switched off.
Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged.
Switch off power supply before connecting or disconnecting the control inputs and outputs. Verify that the keyed control inputs and outputs are deenergized before connecting or disconnecting them. Otherwise, components may be damaged.
Factory settings
External power supply (optional)
Relay output
Imax = 1 A
240 VAC or 24 VDC
Input
24 VDC ±10%
GND
X10.1
P533 103-Inv. Error X10.2
X10.3
Signal
X13.1
X13.2
OUT2D
Error Signal
Output
24 VDC
Digital inputs
X11.1
Umax = 30 VDC
Start Clockwise
Start Anticlockwise
Fixed Frequency
Change-Over 1
Error Acknowledgment
IN1D
IN2D
IN4D
IN5D
STOA
Enable
STOB
P559 1-PNP
(active: 24 V)
Digital output
15 ... 30 VDC, Imax = 100 mA
X11.4 P68 71-IN1D
P531 2-Run
X13.5
signal
X11.5 P69 72-IN2D
Multi-function output
X12.2 P103 75-IN5D
P550 10-Analog MFO1A
X13.6
P553 7-Absolute value
Actual frequency X13.2
X11.3
X13.3
Umax = 30 VDC
IN3D
P276
X12.5
Terminals:
System bus
P558 0-Input IN3D
0 ... 10 VDC
GND
MFI2
Motor thermal contact
°C
CAN GND
Modbus or VABus
P395
X21: VABus
X13.4
X12.3
X21
RJ45
RS485
P452 1-Voltage 0...10 V
P475 1-Analog value MFI1A
X13.2
X12.4 P562 3-Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
M
GND
Bus termination
GND
P70 73-IN3D
Output
MFI1
CAN H
CAN L
Multi-function inputs
Reference speed
GND
X12.6
X11.6 P559 1-PNP
Cable shielding
MFO1
+
U proportional to
V
actual frequency
CANopen or
CAN system bus
(active: 24 V)
10 VDC
Run Signal
X12.1 P66 74-IN4D
Digital Input/Output
Data Set Change-Over 1
OUT1D
X11.2
P204 532-MFI2D (HW)
P570 0 Off
1 Thermal contact, P204:
Warning only
2 Thermal contact, P204:
Error switch-off
3 Thermal contact, P204:
Error switch-off 1 min delayed
Comply with the technical data of control terminals: See chapter 11.3 " Control electronics " .
For evaluation of the motor thermo contact, parameter Operation Mode Motor-PTC 570 must be set.
See Chapter 7.4.6 " Motor temperature“.
Via parameters Digital inputs PNP/NPN 559, the logic evaluation at IN1D, IN2D, IN4D and IN5D is
changed.
Control terminals Standard connection
43
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
OUT1D
MFO1
10 VDC out
24 VDC IN
GND
STOB
Electrical Installation
CAN L
CAN H
MFI1
MFI2
IN4D
IN5D
X13 1 2 3 4 5 6
X13
X12
X11
X10
IN3D/OUT3D
IN2D
STOA
IN1D
GND
24 VDC OUT
X12 1 2 3 4 5 6
X21
RJ45
X10
+24 VDC
OUT2D
321
X11 1 2 3 4 5 6
Potential free
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
44
Control terminals Standard connection
Electrical Installation
Factory settings
Digital inputs:
Terminal
Signal for functions
Function
X11.4
IN1D
71
IN1D
X11.5
IN2D
72
IN2D
X12.1
IN4D
74
IN4D
X12.2
IN5D
75
IN5D
X11.3
STOA
70
Enable (fixed assignment)
X13.3
STOB
70
Enable (fixed assignment)
Changeover of evaluation at digital inputs:
Terminal
Start Clockwise 68
Start Anticlockwise 69
Fixed Frequency Change-Over 1 66
Error Acknowledgment 103
Enable
Operation modes
X11.4
IN1D
0 NPN (active: 0 V)
X11.5
IN2D
Digital inputs
PNP/NPN 559
X12.1
IN4D
1 PNP (active: 24 V)
X12.2
IN5D
Multifunction inputs (analog input/digital input):
Terminal
X12.3
X12.4
Operation modes
Analog:
MF11A
Digital:
MF1D
Analog:
MFI2A
Digital:
MFI2D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function
voltage 0…10 V
current 0…20 mA
digital NPN (active: 0V)
digital PNP (active: 24V)
current 4…20 mA
voltage, characteristic
current, characteristic
Operation
Mode
MFI1
Operation
Mode
MFI2
Reference Frequency
Source 1 475, Reference Percentage
Source 1 476
Thermo contact for
P570 204,
Set Operation Mode
Motor Temp. 570 to
voltage
1
0 … 10V
digital
PNP
3
(active:
0V)
452
562
1, 2 or 3
Digital output:
Terminal
Function
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) 531
X13.5
OUT1D
Multifunction output (analog output/digital output):
Terminal
2
Run Signal
Operation modes
1
MFO1D
MFO1A
X13.6
MFO1F
MFO1F
Operation
Mode
MFO1
(X13.6)
550
Digital MFO1D
Analog (PWM)
MFO1A
Repetition frequency (RF)
MFO1F
Pulse Train (PT)
MFO1F
10
20
30
Relay output:
Terminal
Function
Setting Frequency
Abs. value of
7
actual frequency
Digital: Source
MFO1D 554
Analog: Source
MFO1A 553
4
RF/PT:Output Value MFO1F 555
1
Actual Frequency
PT: Scaling Frequency 557
Function
Operation Mode OUT2D (X10/Relay) 532
X10
OUT2D
Digital input/output:
Terminal
103
Inv. error signal
Operation modes
IN3D
X11.6
OUT3D
Operation
Mode Terminal
X11.6 558
Function
Input
0
IN3D
Digital
inputs
PNP/NPN
559
1
Output
OUT3D
NPN (active: 0 V)
PNP (ac1
tive: 24 V)
0
Op.Mode OUT3D (X11.6)
533
Data Set ChangeOver 1 70
103
Inv. error
signal
IN: input, OUT: output, MFI: Multi-function input MFO: Multi-function output,
D: digital, A: analog, F: frequency, PT: pulse train, RF: Repetition frequency, Op. Mode: Operation Mode
Control terminals Standard connection
45
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
5.7.1
Circuit for control via control terminals
The motor is started via start signals on the control terminals. The circuit shows the input signals required as a minimum and the control terminals in factory settings.
1.5 mm
2
max. 2.5 mm
2
Start cw:
Start ccw:
VDC out:
n:
E:
5.7.2
Start clockwise operation
Start anticlockwise operation
Voltage output
Speed
Enable
Circuit for control via operator panel
STOB
The motor is started via the operator panel. The circuit shows the input signals required as a minimum and the control terminals in factory settings.
X13
3
X11
1
VDC out:
E:
STOA
E
24 VDC out
X12
3
1.5 mm2
max. 2.5 mm2
Voltage output
Enable
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
46
Control terminals Standard connection
Electrical Installation
5.7.3
Further setting options for control terminals
The block diagram only shows a selection of possible uses of the inputs and outputs.
Control terminals Standard connection
47
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
5.7.4
Evaluation logic of digital inputs
The evaluation logic of the digital inputs and multifunction inputs - in digital operation mode - can be
changed over via parameter settings.
•
Select “0 - NPN (active: 0 V)” or “1 - PNP (active: 24 V)” for parameter Digital inputs
PNP/NPN 559.
Digital inputs
Terminal
X11.4
Input
IN1D
0-
NPN (active: 0 V)
Low-switching (with negative signal).
X11.5
IN2D
1-
PNP (active: 24 V)
High-switching (with positive signal). Factory
setting.
X11.6
IN3D
X12.1
IN4D
X12.2
IN5D
Digital inputs PNP/NPN 559
PNP
NPN
Multifunction inputs
Terminal
Input
X12.3
MFI1
Terminal
Input
Operation Mode MFI1 452
3
digital NPN (active: 0 V)
Low-switching (with negative signal).
4
digital PNP (active: 24 V)
High-switching (with positive signal).
Operation Mode MFI2 562
MFI2
digital NPN (active: 0 V)
Low-switching (with negative signal).Factory setting.
4
X12.4
3
digital PNP (active: 24 V)
High-switching (with positive signal).
PNP
Operating Instructions Agile
NPN
06/2013
48
Control terminals Standard connection
Electrical Installation
10 VDC OUT
Overview of voltage inputs and outputs
24 VDC IN
GND
5.7.5
X13 1 2 3 4 5 6
X13
X12
X11
GND
24 VDC OUT
X12 1 2 3 4 5 6
X11 1 2 3 4 5 6
5.7.6
External DC 24 V power supply
An external power supply DC 24 V can be connected to control terminals X13.1/X13.2. The external
power supply enables parameter configuration, maintenance of input/output functions and communication, even while the mains voltage is switched off.
Input voltage range
Rated input current
Peak inrush current
External fuse
Safety
Requirements to be met by external power supply
DC 24 V ±10%
Max. 1.0 A (typically 0.45 A)
Typically: & lt; 15 A (max. 100 µs)
Via standard fuse elements for rated current, characteristic: slow
Safety extra low voltage (SELV) according to EN 61800-5-1
NOTE
The digital inputs and the DC 24 V terminal of the electronic control equipment can
withstand external voltage up to DC 30 V. Higher voltages may destroy the unit.
Use suitable external power supply units with a maximum output current of DC 30 V or
use appropriate fuses to protect the unit.
Operation of the frequency inverter is not affected if the mains voltage is switched on and the external power supply is switched off.
Exceptions:
Mains voltage must be switched on for the following functions. The function is not enabled if only an
external power supply is applied.
− The relay output X10 is controlled only if mains voltage is switched on.
− The heat sink fan and the internal fan are controlled only if mains voltage is switched on.
Control terminals Standard connection
49
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Electrical Installation
5.7.7
Installation notes according to UL508c
For an installation according to UL508c the motor must be supervised regarding the thermal behavior.
The connection and the parameter settings for the temperature motor supervision is described in
chapter 5.7 “Control terminals Standard connection”.
For an installation according to UL508c only allowed fuses can be used for mains protection. The allowed fuses are described in chapter 11.2 “Device data”.
For an installation according to UL508c the in chapter 11.2 “Device data” described maximum temperatures must not be exceeded.
For an installation according to UL508c only 60/75°C copper conductors are allowed to be used.
For an installation according to UL508c the devices are only allowed to be used in environments according to Pollution Degree 2.
According to UL508c Warn- or Marking labels are not allowed to be removed.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
50
Control terminals Standard connection
Commissioning
6
Commissioning
The unit may also be commissioned as described in the Quick Start Guide. This guide is supplied with
the device.
In this chapter, first commissioning and commissioning for typical applications are described.
WARNING
The frequency inverter may only be commissioned by qualified staff.
Prior to commissioning, all covers must be fixed, all standard equipment components of
the frequency inverter must be installed, and the terminals must be checked.
Procedure:
Chapter
4
5
5.7.1
5.7.2
6.1.2
6.4
6.5
6.7
Control terminals Standard connection
51
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.1
Operator panel
Start motor.
Increase speed in motor potentiometer
function.
Stop motor.
Switch to the higher parameter number.
If fault is present:
RUN
STOP
Increase parameter values.
Fault reset
ESC
ENT
ESC
Reduce speed in motor potentiometer funcCancel. Back to prevition.
ous menu.
EN T
Switch to the lower parameter number.
Confirm settings.
RUN
Reduce parameter values.
Reverse direction of
rotation in motor po+
EN T
tentiometer function.
Press arrow key for a short time to set a value in discrete steps.
Keep arrow key pressed for a quick value changing.
When setting a parameter value the default value can be selected by pressing both arrow keys at the
same time.
RUN
STOP
The access to the parameter menu and setup menu can be locked with a password. Please refer to
the notes in chapter 7.1.3 “Set password”.
The RUN and STOP key can be locked by parameter Local/Remote 412. Please refer to chapter 7.3.1 “Control” and chapter 7.5.3.4.1 “Control via reference frequency channel”.
6.1.1
Menu
Actual
Para
Local
Setup
Copy
Menus
Functions
Shows actual values. An actual value for permanent display during operation can be selected.
Set parameters. The following selection limits the number of visible and adjustable parameters.
Easy
For elementary applications and quick commissioning. Setting options for about
40 … 50 parameters (dependent on Configuration 30).
Std
For standard applications. Setting options for about 180 parameters.
Pro
For higher requirements. Setting options for about 380 parameters.
The limitation of the number of parameters can also be set via parameter Control level 28. All actual values are displayed, independent of the control level.
Control the motor by means of the operator panel.
Poti F
Set output frequency (drive speed).
Poti P
Set percentage values. For example in torque control or PID-control.
Jog
Keep pressed RUN-key: The drive operates with fixed set frequency.
Test
For finding errors and defects at the frequency inverter, sensors, the load and
the electrical connections.
Guided commissioning. Select control method and motor type. Enter motor data.
Guided commissioning also for the available communication interfaces.
Full
For first commissioning. Entry and measurement of motor data.
Motor
Only motor data measurement.
Buscon For commissioning of a communication interface.
Copy parameters by means of a memory card.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
52
Operator panel
Commissioning
Operator panel
53
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.1.1.1
Selection of Data sets
The 4 data sets can be set up differently if required. By default all 4 data sets are set up identically.
By default the parameter number is shown. If a dot and a digit is shown in extension to the Parameter
number, a data set was already selected or changed individually before.
For the Selection comply with the following steps:
• To change all data sets:
o Move in the parameter menu to the requested parameter (Up/Down).
o Check if the parameter number is shown without following dot and digit.
o Press 1x ENT.
• To change a single data set:
o Move in the parameter menu to the requested parameter (Up/Down).
o To select a data set, press and hold ENT and select with Up/Down the requested data
set. Release ENT.
o Press 1x ENT.
Not all parameters are data set changeable. The parameter list in this manual contains
all information concerning data sets.
Contains a parameter different values in the data set, the selection of the parameter
will automatically show data set 1. If the data sets differ they can only be be changed
individually via Keypad.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
54
Operator panel
Commissioning
6.1.1.2
Menu for communication setup
Operator panel
55
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.1.2
Motor control with operator panel
Poti F - variable frequency
The function Poti F is applicable for variable speed operation.
Select one of the following settings for parameter Local/Remote 412:
− 3 - Control via keypad
− 4 - Control via keypad or contacts(factory setting)
•
Select “5 - Keypad motor potentiometer” 1 for parameter Reference frequency source 1 475 or
Reference frequency source 2 492.
•
Switch on enable signals at digital inputs STOA (terminal X11.3) and STOB (terminal X13.3).
•
Select via arrow keys. Confirm by pressing ENT.
Confirm
by pressing ENT.
Start drive
RUN
The drive accelerates to the sum of Reference frequency source 1 475 and
Reference frequency source 2 492. The displayed value is the totalized reference value.
Operation
mode
493 2:
0 - Off: 0 Hz.
1 - The reference frequency can be both positive and negative.
2 - Positive only.
3 - Inverted.
Set speed
Increase speed.
Decrease speed.
− Press for a short time to change the frequency by increments of 0.1 Hz.
− Keep pressed to change the frequency 3 by Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti
473 (factory setting 2 Hz/s).
Attention!
The change of direction of rotation can occur if Minimum Frequency 418 is
set to 0 Hz.
Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 limit the setting
range.
Stop drive
The drive stops. Deceleration (clockwise) 421 or Deceleration (anticlockwise) 423 is applied.
Status
Keep pressed for 1 second. The drive status is displayed.
Change
direction of
rotation
RUN
ENT The direction of rotation changes.
Change sign
1
2
3
Sign reversal of the reference value. The direction of rotation is reversed
at the next start.
Factory setting of parameter Reference frequency source 2 492. In the factory setting the reference frequency
value can be set via operator panel (keypad).
In the factory setting the reference frequency value can be positive (clockwise rotation) or negative (anticlockwise rotation).
Value “0” cannot be set if parameter Minimum Frequency 418 (factory setting 3.50 Hz) limits the setting
range.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
56
Operator panel
Commissioning
WARNING
The key RUN starts the drive, if the enable signals at digital inputs STOA (terminal
X11.3) and STOB (terminal X13.3) are switched on. The start or stop of the drive is
possible, even if menu Poti F is currently not selected. For example the start of the drive
is possible if menu PARA for parameter settings or menu ACTUAL for actual value display is selected.
Display of drive status:
The drive rotates at the reference frequency value. The reference frequency
value is the sum of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference frequency
source 2 492.
The drive is stopped. The alternating display shows the reference frequency
value and the message STOP.
The selection Poti F is only available if the parameter Local/Remote 412 was set like
described above.
Operator panel
57
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Poti P - variable percentage reference value
The function Poti P is applicable for operation with variable percentage values, in example this is used
with the technology controller and the direct torque control.
Select one of the following settings for parameter Local/Remote 412:
− 3 - Control via keypad
− 4 - Control via keypad or contacts (factory setting)
•
Select “5 - Keypad motor potentiometer” 1for parameter Reference percentage source 1 476 or
Reference percentage source 2 494.
•
Switch on enable signals at digital inputs STOA (terminal X11.3) and STOB (terminal X13.3).
•
Select via arrow keys. Confirm by pressing ENT.
•
Select via arrow keys. Confirm by pressing ENT.
Start drive
RUN The displayed reference value is the sum of Reference percentage source 1
476 and Reference percentage source 2 494.
Operation
mode 495 2:
0 - Off: 0%.
1 - The reference value can be both positive and negative.
2 - Positive only.
3 - Inverted.
Set percentage
value
Increase percentage value.
Decrease percentage value.
− Press for a short time to change the frequency by increments of 0.1%.
− Keep pressed to change the percentage value by Ramp PercentageMotorpoti 509 (factory setting: 10%/s).
The change of sign can occur if Minimum Frequency 418 is set to 0 Hz.
Minimum reference percentage 518 and Maximum reference percentage 519
limit the setting range.
Change sign
RUN
ENT The sign of the reference percentage value changes. Only possible for
torque control (parameter n-/T-Control Change-Over 164).
Display of drive status:
The reference percentage value at rotating drive. The reference percentage value is the sum of Reference percentage source 1 476 and Reference percentage
source 2 494.
The drive is stopped. The alternating display shows the reference percentage
value and the message STOP.
1
2
Factory setting of parameter Reference frequency source 2492. In the factory setting the reference frequency
value can be set via operator panel (keypad).
In the factory setting the reference percentage value can be positive or negative.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
58
Operator panel
Commissioning
The selection Poti P is only available if the parameter Local/Remote 412 was set like
described above.
JOG
The function JOG is applicable for fixed speed operation.
•
Switch on enable signals at digital inputs STOA (terminal X11.3) and STOB (terminal X13.3).
•
If digital inputs are intended for start-signals: Switch off the signals of the parameters Start
clockwise 68 and Start anticlockwise 69 1.
•
Select via arrow keys. Confirm by pressing ENT.
•
Select via arrow keys. Confirm by pressing ENT.
Start drive
RUN Keep pressed: The drive accelerates to the JOG frequency 489 (factory setting
5 Hz).
For clockwise rotation: Set the JOG frequency 489 to positive values.
For anticlockwise rotation: Set the JOG frequency 489 to negative values.
Set the acceleration value for clockwise rotation in parameter Acceleration
(clockwise) 420.
Set the acceleration value for anticlockwise rotation in parameter Acceleration
anticlockwise 422.
Parameter Maximum frequency 419 limits the adjustable frequency range.
Stop drive
RUN Release the key: The drive decelerates and comes to a standstill.
Set the deceleration value for clockwise rotation in parameter Deceleration
(clockwise) 421.
Set the deceleration value for anticlockwise rotation in parameter Deceleration
anticlockwise 423.
Change
direction of
rotation
ENT The direction of rotation changes.
The direction of rotation can be changed while the drive rotates or at standstill.
Display of drive status:
The drive rotates at JOG frequency 489.
The drive is stopped.
The alternating display shows the Jog frequency value and the message STOP.
The function JOG can also be activated via a digital input. Refer to chapter 7.5.1.6
“JOG frequency” and 7.6.6.7 “Jog Start”.
The selection JOG is available independent of the setting of parameter Local/Remote 412.
1
The commands Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise have a higher priority than the start of the function JOG.
Operator panel
59
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.1.3
Set a parameter to the factory setting
Select the parameter number in menu “Para”. Confirm by pressing ENT.
Press simultaneously. The parameter shows now the value of the factory setting.
ENT
6.1.4
Press ENT to confirm this value as the new value for the parameter.
Restrict the scope of operation
The scope of operation can be restricted.
Lock the functions start, stop and change direction of rotation at the operator panel: Refer to chapter
7.5.3.4.1 “Control via reference frequency channel”.
Lock the setting of the reference frequency: Refer to chapter 7.5.1 “Reference frequency channel”.
Lock the setting of the reference percentage: Refer to chapter 7.5.2 “Reference percentage channel”.
6.2
First commissioning
During commissioning with “Setup/Full” a control method (according to V/f-characteristic or fieldorientated control) and the connected motor type (asynchronous or synchronous motor) can be selected. The motor data must be entered according to the motor type-plate. Further motor data is
measured automatically. The prompt of basic parameter entries like maximum frequency or acceleration is displayed. After Setup the drive is operational.
Select “Full” setup if the frequency inverter is commissioned for the first time.
Select “Motor” setup if only the motor data are to be measured and other settings are not to be
changed.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
60
First commissioning
Commissioning
6.2.1
Overview
Note: The overview shows the sequence for an asynchronous motor.
When commissioning synchronous servo motors, the motor type (BCR, BTD, “Other”) has to be selected additionally and the order of the entry of the motor parameters is adjusted.
6.2.2
Start first commissioning of an asynchronous motor
•
Switch on enable at STOA (X11.3) and STOB (X13.3).
•
Switch off enable at IN1D (X11.4) and IN2D (X11.5), if a circuit for control via control terminals is
installed.
•
Switch on the power supply.
•
Start commissioning (Setup) on operator panel.
First commissioning
61
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
If the unit is in “as-delivered” condition or after resetting the unit to the factory settings, the guided
commissioning procedure is started automatically. The operator panel displays the menu item " Setup " .
Guided commissioning can also be opened by selecting the " Setup " menu.
RUN
STOP
ENT
ESC
Setup
Parameter
Display
Start commissioning.
ENT
Using arrow keys, select:
or
− Complete commissioning or
− Measure motor data only.
− Commissioning of a communication interface
Refer to chapter “
Note
− Select “Full” setup if the frequency inverter is commissioned for
the first time.
− Select “Motor” setup if only the motor data are to be measured
and other settings are not to be changed.
ENT
Select data set 0.
Select another data set for commissioning of several motors or for
different operating points.
ENT
P30
Configuration (control method).
ENT
Using arrow keys, select:
− 410 - IM 2: sensor-less field-orientated control or
or
or
− 610 - PMSM 3: sensor-less field-orientated control
− 110 - IM 1: sensor-less control(SLC) or
ENT
Please note: If you changed the configuration, the device resets.
Please execute the before mentioned steps anew.
1
2
3
For simple applications (e.g. fans, pumps). Control according to V/f-characteristic. In the case of control via
operator panel: Select “UF”. IM: Induction machine (asynchronous motor).
Control of an induction machine (asynchronous motor). For higher demands on speed or torque accuracy. In
the case of control via operator panel: Select “Foc”.
Control of a synchronous motor, for higher demands on speed or torque accuracy. In the case of control via
operator panel: Select “Synch”. PMSM: Permanently magnetized synchronous motor.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
62
First commissioning
Commissioning
Parameter
Display
Enter motor data according to motor rating plate:
V
Hz kW A
min-1 cos ϕ
230/400 50 0.25 1.32-0.76 1375 0.77
P376
(Example of rating plate)
Rated mechanical power
ENT
Set the value using the arrow keys.
Note
Press the arrow keys for 1 s to set each figure individually.
1s
The following rated values are automatically preset if the last set
value of rated mechanical power corresponds to a BONFIGLIOLI motor. If a BONFIGLIOLI motor is connected check and confirm the
values.
P370
Rated voltage in V.
P371
Rated current in A.
ENT
ENT
P372
Rated speed in rpm.
ENT
P374
Rated Cos-Phi
(Enter if 110 “UF” or 410 “FOC” was selected for P30.)
P375
Rated frequency in Hz.
ENT
ENT
If “STO” is displayed, enable must be switched on via STOA (X11.3)
and STOB (X13.3).
Auto-tuning (auto set-up). Confirm to start the measurement of further motor parameters. Consider the following note for another setting option.
Note
If a BONFIGLIOLI motor is connected and the rated values have been
confirmed, “Calc” instead of “tune” is displayed. In this case further
motor parameters are not measured. The data is loaded and stored.
If instead an auto-tuning should be done, use the arrow keys to
switch from “Calc” to “tune”.
Auto-tuning (auto set-up). Further motor parameters are measured
automatically if “tune” was selected.
Wait until the auto-tuning operation is complete and the next parameter prompt is displayed.
If " Motor " (measurement of motor data only) was selected at the
beginning of the setup procedure, " ready " is displayed.
P420
Acceleration (clockwise) in Hz/s.
Ramp gradient. Change rate [Hz/s] of output frequency after a
change of the reference value or after a start command.
ENT
ENT
P421
Deceleration (clockwise) in Hz/s.
First commissioning
63
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Parameter
Display
Ramp gradient. Change rate [Hz/s] of output frequency after a
change of the reference value or after a stop or brake command.
ENT
P418
Minimum Frequency in Hz.
Minimum motor speed [Hz]. The frequency will not drop below this
value even if a lower reference frequency is selected.
ENT
P419
Maximum Frequency in Hz.
Maximum motor speed [Hz]. The frequency will not rise above this
value even if a higher reference frequency is selected.
ENT
Commissioning (Setup) complete and ready for operation.
Finish the guided commissioning. The device executes a reset. 2 seconds after the message “done” is visible, the reset is done automatically.
Drive enabled.
ENT
− For further setting options, select " Para " menu or
− start the drive. Via the operator panel or via signals at control
terminals.
Start motor via operator panel:
Select “local” menu for manual operation.
Select " Poti F " (motor potentiometer) menu.
ENT
ENT
Switch on STOA (X11.3) and STOB (X13.3).
Press RUN button.
The motor is accelerated to the value of P418 (minimum frequency).
Factory setting 3.50 Hz.
Using the arrow keys, set the speed.
RUN
Start the drive via signals at control terminals:
Switch on Start clockwise at IN1D (X11.4) or
Start anticlockwise at IN2D (X11.5).
The motor is accelerated to the value of P418 (minimum frequency).
Factory setting 3.50 Hz.
By means of a voltage 0 ... 10 V on MFI1 (X12.3) set the speed. For
potentiometer connection refer to chapter 5.7.1 “Circuit for control
via control terminals”.
Optional optimization of motor characteristics
The motor characteristics are set correctly for most of the applications with the default settings. In
some cases optimization of the motor characteristics can be necessary or improve the performance
significantly. The optimization possibilities are described in chapter 6.2.10.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
64
First commissioning
Commissioning
6.2.3
Start first commissioning of a synchronous motor
•
Switch on enable at STOA (X11.3) and STOB (X13.3).
•
Switch off enable at IN1D (X11.4) and IN2D (X11.5), if a circuit for control via control terminals is
installed.
•
Switch on the power supply.
•
Start commissioning (Setup) on operator panel.
If the unit is in “as-delivered” condition or after resetting the unit to the factory settings, the guided
commissioning procedure is started automatically. The operator panel displays the menu item " Setup " .
Guided commissioning can also be opened by selecting the " Setup " menu.
RUN
STOP
ENT
ESC
Setup
Parameter
Display
Start commissioning.
ENT
Using arrow keys, select:
or
− Complete commissioning or
− Measure motor data only.
− Commissioning of a communication interface
Refer to chapter “
Note
− Select “Full” setup if the frequency inverter is commissioned for
the first time.
− Select “Motor” setup if only the motor data are to be measured
and other settings are not to be changed.
ENT
Select data set 0.
Select another data set for commissioning of several motors or for
different operating points.
ENT
P30
Configuration (control method).
ENT
Using arrow keys, select:
− 410 - IM 2: sensor-less field-orientated control or
or
or
− 610 - PMSM 1: sensor-less field-orientated control
− 110 - IM 1: sensor-less control(SLC) or
1
2
For simple applications (e.g. fans, pumps). Control according to V/f-characteristic. In the case of control via
operator panel: Select “UF”. IM: Induction machine (asynchronous motor).
Control of an induction machine (asynchronous motor). For higher demands on speed or torque accuracy. In
the case of control via operator panel: Select “Foc”.
First commissioning
65
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Parameter
Display
ENT
Please note: If you changed the configuration, the device resets.
Please execute the before mentioned steps anew.
− BCR-motor series of Bonfiglioli Vectron
oder
− BTD- motor series of Bonfiglioli Vectron
− Other synchronous servo motor
oder
ENT
Enter motor data according to the name plate:
.
Standstill Torque M0 in Nm
ENT
Set the value using the arrow keys.
Note
Press the arrow keys for 1 s to set each figure individually.
P371
1s
Rated current in A
ENT
If a BCR or BTD motor of Bonfiglioli Vectron was selected, the following data are preselected based on the standstill torque and the rated
current. If a BONFIGLIOLI motor is connected check and confirm the
values. If a motor of another manufacturer was connected, please
enter the values manually.
P370
Rated voltage in V
The real AC rated voltage of the motor has to be set up (marked bold
in the following). This results in entering:
AC 330 V Motor = DC 560 V Motor = AC 400 V FI System voltage
AC 200 V Motor = DC 320 V Motor = AC 230 V FI System voltage
ENT
P376
Rated mechanical power in kW.
For the BCR and BTD motors, the rated mechanical power is listed in
the motor catalogue.
ENT
P372
Rated speed in rpm.
ENT
P373
.
No. of pole pairs
ENT
P375
Rated frequency in Hz
ENT
If “STO” is displayed, enable must be switched on via STOA (X11.3)
and STOB (X13.3).
Auto-tuning (auto set-up). Confirm to start the measurement of further motor parameters. Consider the following note for another set-
1
Control of a synchronous motor, for higher demands on speed or torque accuracy. In the case of control via
operator panel: Select “Synch”. PMSM: Permanently magnetized synchronous motor.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
66
First commissioning
Commissioning
Parameter
Display
ting option.
ENT
Note
If a BONFIGLIOLI motor is connected and the rated values have been
confirmed, “Calc” instead of “tune” is displayed. If “calc” is selected,
no further motor parameters are measured. The data is loaded and
stored.
If instead an auto-tuning should be done, use the arrow keys to
switch from “Calc” to “tune”.
Auto-tuning (auto set-up). Further motor parameters are measured
automatically if “tune” was selected.
Wait until the auto-tuning operation is complete and the next prompt
is displayed.
P383
If Motor “Other” was selected at the beginning of the setup procedure, the determined Voltage constant is displayed. Correct this setting, if the value is known from the motor data sheet.
For Bonfiglioli motors, this step is not necessary and the Voltage constant is set automatically.
.
ENT
ENT
If the Voltage constant is unknown, set the value to Zero. The Setup
will determine the Voltage constant automatically if the value is set to
zero.
If " Motor " (measurement of motor data only) was selected at the
beginning of the setup procedure, " ready " is displayed.
P420
Acceleration (clockwise) in Hz/s
Ramp gradient. Change rate [Hz/s] of output frequency after a
change of the reference value or after a start command.
P421
Deceleration (clockwise) in Hz/s
Ramp gradient. Change rate [Hz/s] of output frequency after a
change of the reference value or after a stop or brake command.
P418
Minimum Frequency in Hz.
Minimum motor speed [Hz]. The frequency will not drop below this
value even if a lower reference frequency is selected.
ENT
ENT
ENT
P419
Maximum Frequency in Hz.
Maximum motor speed [Hz]. The frequency will not rise above this
value even if a higher reference frequency is selected.
ENT
Commissioning (Setup) complete and ready for operation.
Finish the guided commissioning. The device executes a reset. 2 seconds after the message “done” is visible, the reset is done automatically.
Drive enabled.
ENT
− For further setting options, select " Para " menu or
− start the drive. Via the operator panel or via signals at control
terminals.
Start motor via operator panel:
First commissioning
67
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Parameter
Display
Select “local” menu for manual operation.
ENT
Select " Poti F " (motor potentiometer) menu.
ENT
Switch on STOA (X11.3) and STOB (X13.3).
Press RUN button.
The motor is accelerated to the value of P418 (minimum frequency).
Factory setting 3.50 Hz.
Using the arrow keys, set the speed.
RUN
Start the drive via signals at control terminals:
Switch on Start clockwise at IN1D (X11.4) or
Start anticlockwise at IN2D (X11.5).
The motor is accelerated to the value of P418 (minimum frequency).
Factory setting 3.50 Hz.
By means of a voltage 0 ... 10 V on MFI1 (X12.3) set the speed. For
potentiometer connection refer to chapter 5.7.1 “Circuit for control
via control terminals”.
Optional optimization of motor characteristics
The motor characteristics are set correctly for most of the applications with the default settings. In
some cases optimization of the motor characteristics can be necessary or improve the performance
significantly. The optimization possibilities are described in chapter 6.2.10.
6.2.4
Status messages during commissioning (SS…)
The following status messages are possible during commissioning (setup):
Status message
SS000 OK
SS001 PC Phase 1
SS002 PC Phase 2
SS003 STO
SS004
SS010
SS030
Parameter identification
Setup already active
No Release
SS031
Error
SS032
Warning Phase
Asymmetry
Setup not carried out
SS099
6.2.5
Meaning
Auto setup routine has been carried out.
The plausibility check (PC) of the motor data is active.
The calculation of dependent parameters is active.
The parameter identification demands enable on digital input
STOA and STOB.
The rated motor values are checked by the parameter identification feature.
The setup routine via the operator panel is being carried out.
No enable signal. The parameter identification demands enable on
digital input STOA and STOB.
Error during the auto set-up routine. Check the value of Actual
error 259.
The parameter identification feature diagnosed an unbalance during the measurements in the three motor phases.
The setup is not carried out until now.
Warnings during commissioning (SA…)
If an error or a warning is signaled during commissioning, the following causes are possible.
Code
SA001
SA002
Warning Messages
Message
Meaning
The value of the parameter Rated Voltage 370 is out of the rated voltage
Rated voltage range of the frequency inverter. The maximum reference voltage is indicated on the nameplate of the frequency inverter.
For an asynchronous motor, the calculated efficiency is in the limit range.
Efficiency
Check Rated Voltage 370, Rated Current 371 and Rated Power 376.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
68
First commissioning
Commissioning
SA003
SA004
SA021
SA022
SA041
SA042
SA051
SA052
SA053
Warning Messages
The value entered for parameter Rated Cosine Phi 374 is outside of the
Rated cos-phi
normal range (0.6 to 0.95). Correct the value.
Slip frequen- For an asynchronous motor, the calculated slip is in the limit range. Check
Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency 375.
cy
Stator reThe following causes are possible: The motor cable cross-section is not
sistance high sufficient. The motor cable is too long. The motor cable is connected incorvalue
rectly.
Rotor reThe following causes are possible: The motor cable cross-section is not
sistance high sufficient. The motor cable is too long. The motor cable is connected incorvalue
rectly.
Rated Slip
Correction
Check Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency 375.
Factor low
value
Rated Slip
Correction
Check Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency 375.
Factor high
value
The motor data for star connection were entered, the motor, however, is
Check motor connected in delta. Change motor cable connections for star connection.
connection
Check motor data entered for delta connection. Repeat commissioning
(Setup) via operator panel.
The machine data for delta connection were entered, the motor, however,
Check motor is connected in star. Change motor cable connections for delta connection.
connection
Check motor data entered for star connection. Repeat commissioning (Setup) via operator panel.
Check motor
Check connections at frequency inverter and motor.
connection
If an error or a warning is signaled:
− Press ESC to correct a parameter value after an error message or warning.
− Press ENT to suppress a warning message. Setup is continued. It is recommended that the entered
data be checked.
In the case of problems not triggering an error message, you can try to find an appropriate measure,
following the instructions in chapter 13.3 " Troubleshooting " .
If errors or warning messages occur during operation, proceed according to the instructions in chapters 13.1.1 " Error messages " and 14.3 " Warning status and warning status application " .
First commissioning
69
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.2.6
Error messages during commissioning (SF…)
If an error or a warning is signaled during commissioning, the following causes are possible.
Code
SF001
SF002
SF003
SF004
SF005
SF006
SF007
SF011
SF012
SF021
SF022
SF026
Error messages
Meaning
The value entered for parameter Rated Current 371 is too low. Correct the
value.
The value for parameter Rated Current 371 is too high, referred to parameters Rated Power 376 and Rated Voltage 370. Correct the values.
The value entered for parameter Rated Cosine Phi 374 is wrong (greater
Rated cos-phi
than 1 or smaller than 0.3). Correct the value.
The calculated slip frequency is negative. Check and, if necessary, correct
Negative slip
the values entered for parameters Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency
frequency
375.
The calculated slip frequency is too high. Check and, if necessary, correct
Slip frequenthe values entered for parameters Rated Speed 372 and Rated Frequency
cy too high
375.
The calculated total output of the drive is lower than the rated power. CorPower balrect and check, if necessary, the value entered for parameter Rated Power
ance
376.
Config. not
The set configuration is not supported by the set-up routine.
supported
The main inductance measurement has failed because the motor has a high
slip. Correct the rated motor values in parameters 370, 371, 372, 374,
Inductance
375 and 376. Carry out the set-up routine again. In case an error message
measurement
is displayed again, enter the value 110 for parameter Configuration 30
failed
(sensorless control according to V/f-characteristic) if value 410 was set so
far. Carry out the set-up routine again.
The leakage inductance measurement has failed because the motor has a
high slip. Correct the rated motor values in parameters 370, 371, 372,
Inductance
374, 375 and 376. Carry out the set-up routine again. In case an error
measurement
message is displayed again, enter the value 110 for parameter Configurafailed
tion 30 (sensorless control according to V/f-characteristic) if value 410 was
set so far. Carry out the set-up routine again.
The measurement of the stator resistance did not deliver a plausible value.
Resistance
Check the cables at the terminals of the motor and the frequency inverter
measurement
for proper connection and check the contacts for corrosion and safe confailed
tact. Carry out the set-up routine again.
The measurement of the rotor resistance did not deliver a plausible value.
Resistance
Check the cables at the terminals of the motor and the frequency inverter
measurement
for proper connection and check the contacts for corrosion and safe confailed
tact. Carry out the set-up routine again.
Setup abortThe setup-routine is aborted.
ed
Message
Rated current
too low
Rated current
too high
If an error or a warning is signaled:
− Press ESC to correct a parameter value after an error message or warning.
− Press ENT to suppress a warning message. Setup is continued. It is recommended that the entered
data be checked.
In the case of problems not triggering an error message, you can try to find an appropriate measure,
following the instructions in chapter 13.3 " Troubleshooting " .
If errors or warning messages occur during operation, proceed according to the instructions in chapters 13.1.1 " Error messages " and 14.3 " Warning status and warning status application " .
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
70
First commissioning
Commissioning
6.2.7
Check direction of rotation
WARNING
The unit may only be connected with the power supply switched off.
Make sure that the frequency inverter is discharged.
Dangerous voltage may be present at the motor terminals and the terminals of the
brake resistor even after the frequency inverter has been disconnected from power supply. Wait for some minutes until the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting
to work at the unit.
To check if the reference value and the actual direction of rotation of the drive correspond to one
another, proceed as follows:
•
Operate the drive at low speed, i.e. specify a reference value of approx. 10%.
•
Switch on frequency inverter enable briefly:
signal at digital inputs STOA and STOB as well as IN1D (Start clockwise) or
signal at digital inputs STOA and STOB as well as IN2D (Start anticlockwise).
•
Check if the motor shaft turns in the required direction.
In case the sense of rotation is wrong, exchange two motor phases, e.g. U and V at the terminals of
the frequency inverter. The mains-side connection of the frequency inverter does not affect the sense
of rotation of the drive. In addition to checking the drive, the corresponding actual values and operating messages can be read out by means of the operator panel.
NOTE
When using a synchronous motor (in example BCR-, BTD-motor from BONFIGLIOLI) the
correct phase sequence must be complied with. A mix up of the phases leads to the loss
of the correct motor control and typically a fault message.
6.2.8
Selection of actual value display
During drive operation the display of the operator panel indicates the actual frequency (factory setting). This is the value of parameter Actual Frequency 241.
The actual value for permanent display during operation can be selected:
•
Select menu “Actual”. Confirm by pressing ENT.
•
By means of the arrow keys select the number of the parameter the value of which is to be displayed. Confirm by pressing ENT. The value is displayed.
•
Press ENT for at least 1 second. The display flashes.
The selected value is displayed permanently during drive operation.
Example: Select the working hours (operating hours in which the output stage of the inverter is active) for permanent display.
First commissioning
71
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.2.9
Commissioning without Setup
After electrical connection, the motor (that is selected according to the technical data of the frequency
inverter) is ready for operation. The parameters of the frequency inverter must be set to the factory
setting. Commissioning by means of Setup with the operator panel is not necessary.
After first switch-on the Setup message is displayed automatically. Select an actual value (for example
Actual Frequency 241) in menu “Actual” to hide this message.
If the operation should be changed between asynchronous motor (setting 110 or 410 of Configuration 30) and synchronous motor (setting 610 of Configuration 30) the frequency inverter must be
reset to the factory setting. This enables commissioning without Setup via operator panel.
6.2.10 Optional Optimization of motor characteristics
The motor characteristics are set correctly for most of the applications with the default settings. In
some cases optimization of the motor characteristics can be necessary or improve the performance
significantly.
The following optimizations usually result from the described behavior:
Objectionable or faulty behavior:
Overfrequency or Overcurrent error switch off
Motorspeed swings
Motor hums audible
Motor doesn’t follow fast enough to a Reference value
step
Vibration response at low speeds (often occurs with
unknown or inexact motor data)
Jerky or oscillating behavior at approx. 5 % of the rated
frequency (Transition from current impression to Field
oriented control)
Unsufficient Torque during Start of FOC and SYNCH
6.2.10.1
Controller
Speed Controller
Speed Controller
Speed Controller
Speed Controller
Chapter
6.2.10.1
6.2.10.1
6.2.10.1
6.2.10.2
Voltage Constant
6.2.10.3
Voltage Constant
6.2.10.3
Starting behavior
6.2.10.4
Speed Controller: Softer set up
If regularly a fault “Overfrequency” or “Overcurrent” occurs or the connected motor hums (even at
zero speed) or the motor speed oscillated, then the Speed controller is typically set to dynamic.
Set Amplification 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 721 lower and Integral Time 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 722 higher.
Please note, that Speed Control Switch-Over Limit 738 offers different settings of the speed controller for different speed ranges. Above the Switch-Over threshold the parameters Amplification 2
(|f| & gt; P738) 723 and Integral Time 2 (|f| & gt; P738) 724 are effective for the speed controller.
With setting Speed Control Switch-Over Limit 738 = 0, Amplification 1 (|f| & lt; P738)
721 and Integral Time 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 722 are effective over the complete frequency
range.
Comply with chapter 7.9.5.3.
6.2.10.2
Speed Controller: Stronger set up
If the motor doesn’t follow dynamic enough a reference value step (“load step”), more dynamic settings of the speed controller can enhance the dynamic behavior.
Set Amplification 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 721 higher and Integral Time 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 722 lower. Please note,
that Speed Control Switch-Over Limit 738 offers different settings of the speed controller for
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
72
First commissioning
Commissioning
different speed ranges. Above the Switch-Over threshold the parameters Amplification 2 (|f| & gt; P738)
723 and Integral Time 2 (|f| & gt; P738) 724 are effective for the speed controller.
Comply with chapter 7.9.5.3.
In different applications the Acceleration Pre-Control can enhance additionally the dynamic behavior,
please comply with the notes in chapter 7.9.5.4.
Depending on the application (inverter power, motor power, gear power, driven load)
and its load the frequency inverter might not be able to supply physically the requested
power. In this case the dynamic behavior has to be adjusted to the environmental conditions or the project planning has to be checked.
6.2.10.3
Voltage Constant
After the Setup was completed including the motor tuning, the Voltage constant can be changed
manually. If the Voltage Constant is not set optimum, the result might be a jerky or oscillating behavior at approx. 5 % of the rated frequency (transition from starting current impression to Field Oriented
Control, the exact transition point is defined via Frequency limit 624).
Proceed with the Optimization of the Voltage Constant as follows:
• Rotate the motor at approx 50 % of the rated speed without load.
• Check the Actual value Rotor flux 225.
• Change the Voltage constant 383 until the Rotor flux 225 equals 101 %.
With Motors with a high pole pair number it can occur, that the Voltage constant cannot
be entered in the valid value range up to 6500.00 mVmin. In this case you can enter
the value with factor 10 smaller. In the device the ratio input voltage/rated speed is
validated and the factor 10 is corrected automatically (if necessary).
Comply with chapter 7.2.2 “Further motor parameters”.
6.2.10.4
Insufficient Torque during Start of FOC and SYNCH
In the sensorless control the motor rotation is controlled below the Frequency limit 624 via a current
impression with Starting current 623. Both parameters are set up during the Autotuning. Frequency
limit 624 is set to approx. 5 % of the Rated frequency. The value can be reduced in most applications. Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends to set up the Frequency limit 624 always & gt; 2.5 % of the rated
frequency and at least 1 Hz. Check your changes via the Scope function.
Starting current 623 affects the Torque during the Start. If the Torque during the Start should be
increased, increase Starting current 623.
WARNING
Please note, that a continous operation with a high Starting current can overload the
motor thermally and eventually even destruct the motor. Always check the thermal stability of the motor after increasing the Starting current.
Comply with chapter 7.3.2 “Starting behavior”.
6.2.10.5
Cross coupling compensation
Using permanent excited synchronous motors can require a cross coupling compensation in individual
cases for high stator frequencies. This is typically necessary if changes in the speed controller do not
result in further improvements in the control behavior and the control behavior shows small oscillations at high stator frequencies.
• Rotate the motor at approx 66 % of the rated speed without load.
First commissioning
73
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
•
•
Check the Actual value Isd 215.
Change the Cross-Coupling Factor 746 until the oscillations are minimal in Isq 225.
NOTE
Too high values set as Cross-Coupling Factor 746 can result in Overcurrent switchoffs. Change the value in small steps (max. 5 % per step).
6.3
Commissioning of a communication interface
The communication interfaces can be put into operation by means of the menu “Setup” at the operator panel. Even without the knowledge of the parameter number(s) a communication interface can be
set up quick and easy. Further communication parameters can be set in the menu “Para”. The communication manuals describe the setting options and protocols in detail.
Protocol selection
Display
Use the arrow keys to select menu “Setup”.
ENT
Use the arrow keys to select:
Commissioning of a communication interface(bus configuration)
ENT
Use the arrow keys to select a protocol:
CANopen
Profibus
1
Systembus
Modbus
VABus
TCP/IP (Ethernet-Interfaces without EtherCAT®)
ENT
EtherCAT® doesn’t require parameterization at the frequency inverter. The settings are
done for EtherCAT® completely via the PLC.
1
Selection is possible only if an optional communication module CM-PDPV1 is installed.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
74
Commissioning of a communication interface
Commissioning
CANopen
Parameter
Display
387
CAN Node Number
385
CAN Baudrate
276
CAN interface setting(CM-CAN/X12).
− Set the terminals X12.5 and X12.6 to protocol CANopen.
Or:
− Set an optional communication module CM-CAN to
CANopen.
.
.
.
Node ID 1
ENT
ENT
ENT
Bus configuration,
SETUP communication
ENT
Baud rate
P385
ENT
Node ID
P387
ENT
Deactivated
CANopen at X12.5 and X12.6.
(System bus at module CM-CAN.)
ENT
kBaud
ENT
Interface setting
P276
ENT
CANopen at module CM-CAN.
(System bus at X12.5 and X12.6.)
Profibus
Parameter
391
Display
Profibus Node-ID
Node. ID
.
.
ENT
ENT
ENT
Bus configuration,
Profibus
SETUP communication
Commissioning of a communication interface
Node ID
P391
75
ENT
ENT
Deactivated
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Systembus
Parameter
Display
900
Node-ID
903
Baudrate
276
CAN interface setting (CM-CAN/X12).
− Set the terminals X12.5 and X12.6 to system bus.
Or:
− Set an optional communication module CM-CAN to system bus.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
76
Commissioning of a communication interface
Commissioning
Modbus
Parameter
Display
1376
Modbus Address (Node-ID).
1504
Modbus Baudrate
1503
Modbus Mode (RTU or ASCII)
1375
Modbus Parity
395
Interface setting. Protocol (CM/X21).
− Set the service interface X21 to Modbus.
Or:
− Set an optional communication module CM-232 or CM485 to Modbus.
Commissioning of a communication interface
77
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
VABus
Parameter
Display
Select the interface for settings of VABus parameters. (Service interface X21 or communication module).
− Select service interface X21 for VABus communication.
Or:
− Select an optional communication module CM-232 or CM485 for VABus communication. The menu item is only
displayed if a communication module is installed.
394
CM: VABus Node-ID.
An optional communication module CM-232 or CM-485 was
selected.
1501
X21: VABus Node-ID.
The service interface X21 was selected.
10
Baudrate.
An optional communication module CM-232 or CM-485 was
selected.
1500
Baudrate.
The service interface X21 was selected.
395
Interface setting. Protocol (CM/X21).
− Set the service interface X21 to VABus.
Or:
− Set an optional communication module CM-232 or CM485 to VABus.
Or:
− Set the service interface X21 and an optional communication module CM-232 or CM-485 to VABus.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
78
Commissioning of a communication interface
Commissioning
TCP/IP
Parameter
Display
1432
Set up the IP address.
This is done in 4 steps. The dots mark the current position.
1433
Set up the Subnet mask.
This is done in 4 steps. The dots mark the current position.
1434
Set up the Gateway address.
This is done in 4 steps. The dots mark the current position.
1435
Set up the DNS server address.
This is done in 4 steps. The dots mark the current position.
1436
If a DHCP Server should and can be used, this setting is
used.
0 = Off/Disabled
1 = On/Enabled
When the DHCP is enabled, the above settings are not required.
APPLY: Must be used after the configuration of the above
settings. Only if the settings are applied, they are taken
over. If this was not successful, an error or timeout message might occur.
RELOAD: Reload can be used to reload the default values. If
this was not successful, an error or timeout message might
occur.
Commissioning of a communication interface
79
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.4
After first commissioning
After execution of the " Setup " function, the device can be adjusted to the relevant application via the
following parameters. Not all setting options are listed. The parameters can be set in the menu “Para”.
Control level
Parameter
P28
1
2
3
Easy: Parameters for quick commissioning.
Standard: The most common parameters can be set.
Professional: Extended access to parameters.
(Factory setting)
Local/Remote, control via contacts or keypad
P412
0
3
4
5
The commands start, stop and direction of rotation (parameters Start Clockwise
68, Start Anticlockwise 69) can be entered via digital inputs.
The commands start, stop and direction of rotation can be entered via the operator panel.
The commands start, stop and direction of rotation can be entered via the operator panel or via digital inputs. Factory setting.
Control of direction of rotation (parameter Start Clockwise 68, Start Anticlockwise 69) and signal Start 3-Wire Ctrl. 87 via digital inputs.
Further settings are applicable for control via bus system.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
80
After first commissioning
Commissioning
Selection of reference frequency
P475
P492
Reference Frequency Source 1.
Reference frequency source 2.
Additional reference value, only for combination of two
0 Zero
20
1 Analog Value MFI1A (P475)
30
2 Analog Value MFI2A
40
3 Fixed Frequency
2501
4 Motorpot. via Digital Inputs
2502
5 Keypad-Motorpot. (P492)
10 Repetition Frequency
(Factory setting)
reference sources.
Fieldbus Reference Value
Technology Controller
Electronic gear
PLC-Output Frequency 1
PLC-Output Frequency 2
Not all possible reference frequency sources are shown.
After first commissioning
81
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Ramp rise time
P430
(Factory setting)
Accelerated and uniform acceleration and deceleration via S-curve. Thereby the jerk
during acceleration and deceleration is reduced. The value is used both for clockwise
and anticlockwise operation. (0 ms)
Torque control
P164
(Factory setting)
Reference torque
6
On
P476
1
Analog Value MFI1A
7
Off
2
Analog Value MFI2A
71
Changeover via
3
Fixed Percentage
…
digital inputs
4
Motorpot. via Digital Inputs
5
Keypad-Motorpot.
Speed control is switched off when torque control is switched on.
P30 must be set to 410 (asynchronous motor) or 610 (synchronous motor).
Speed control
P720
(Factory setting)
Optimize speed controller
P721
Amplification 1 (|f| & lt; P738) (10)
P722
Integral Time 1 (|f| & lt; P738) (104 ms)
0
Speed controller off
1
Switched on
Limits
P728 Current limit
P730 Torque limit
P739 Power limit
The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency (P418) and Maximum
Frequency (P419).
P30 must be set to 410 (asynchronous motor) or 610 (synchronous motor).
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
82
After first commissioning
Commissioning
Digital inputs
(Factory setting)
Evaluation logic
P559
P452
P562
0
1
Terminal
NPN (active: 0 V)
PNP (active: 24 V)
Multi-function MFI1
3 digital NPN (active: 0 V)
4 digital PNP (active: 24 V)
Multi-function MFI2
3 digital NPN (active: 0 V)
4 digital PNP (active: 24 V)
NPN
GND
X11.4
X11.5
X12.1
X12.2
X11.6
IN1D
IN2D
IN4D
IN5D
X12.3
IN3D
MFI1
X12.4
MFI2
7
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
532
Off
IN1D
IN2D
IN3D
IN4D
IN5D
MFI1D
MFI2D
MFI2D
(Hardware)
24 VDC
IN1D
X11.4
IN2D
X11.5
IN4D
X12.1
IN5D
X12.2
P558=0
X11.6
IN3D
MFI1
X12.3
MFI2
X12.4
High: ≤ DC 5 V
Function
P[ ]
PNP
X11.4
X11.5
X12.1
X12.2
P558=0
X11.6
X12.3
X12.4
High: ≥ DC 10 V
P68 (Start clockwise)
P69 (Start anticlockwise)
P70 (Data Set Change-Over 1)
(P558 = 0 - Input IN3D)
P66 (Fixed Frequency Change-Over 1)
P103 (Error Acknowledgement)
P204 (Thermo contact for P570)
Other possible functions
P62
Frequency Motorpoti Up
P63
Frequency Motorpoti Down
P67
Fixed Frequency Change-Over 2
P71
Data Set Change-Over 2
P72
Percent Motorpoti Up
P73
Percent Motorpoti Down
P75
Fixed Percent Change-Over 1
P76
Fixed Percent Change-Over 2
P87
P95
P164
P183
(Not all
Start 3-Wire Ctrl.
Brake Chopper Release
n-/T-Control Change-Over
External Error
functions are listed.)
Assign a function to a digital input (IN1D…IN5D, MFI1D, MFI2D):
Select the parameter of the function.
Set the parameter to the digital input (selection 71…75, 76, 77).
Digital outputs
Function
P531
2
P532
Terminal
Run Signal
X13.5
103
Inverted Error Signal
X10
P533
103
Inverted Error Signal
P558 = 1 (output)
X11.6
P554
4
Setting Frequency
P550 = 1 (digital)
X13.6
After first commissioning
83
(Factory setting)
Other possible functions
0 Off
1 Ready or Standby Signal
3 Error Signal
5 Reference Frequency reached
6 Reference Percentage reached
7 Ixt-Warning (overload)
8 Warning Heat Sink Temperature
9 Warning Inside Temperature
10 Warning Motor Temperature
11 Warning, General
(Not all functions are listed.)
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Analog inputs
P452
P454
P455
P456
P457
P562
P564
P565
P566
P567
Multi-function MFI1
1 Voltage 0…10 V
2 Current 0…20 mA
5 Current 4…20 mA
6 Voltage, charact.
7 Current, charact.
Point
Point
Point
Point
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X2/Y2
X2/Y2
MFI1: P456/P457 MFI2: P466/P467
f [Hz]
P419
X12.3
(2%)
(0%)
(98%)
(100%)
MFI1 MFI2
P452 P562 =6
P452 P562 =7
Multi-function MFI2
1 Voltage 0…10 V
2 Current 0…20 mA
5 Current 4…20 mA
6 Voltage, charact.
7 Current, charact.
Point
Point
Point
Point
(Factory setting)
Terminal
X12.4
0V
0 mA
+10 V U [V]
+20 mA
P419
MFI1: P454/P455 MFI2: P464/P465
X1/Y1
X1/Y1
(2%)
(0%)
(98%)
(100%)
Factory setting
P419: Maximum frequency,
Reference percentages: Limitation to P519
Set a multifunction input (MFI) as analog input:
Preset characteristic:
Define a characteristic:
Define reference value:
MFI1
MFI2
P452
P562 = 1, 2 or 5
P452
P562 = 6 or 7 and
Set the characteristic points.
via MFI1:
via MFI2:
Frequency
Percentage
P475 or P492 =
P476 or P494 =
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
2 - Analog Value MFI2A
Analog outputs
P550
Multi-function output MFO1
10 Analog (PWM) MFO1A
P551
P552
Analog: Voltage 100% (10 V)
Analog: Voltage 0% (0 V)
P553
7
(Factory setting)
U [V]
24
Terminal
X13.6
P551 10
P552 0
Abs. Actual Frequency(0 Hz…P419)
Other possible output values
0 Off
10 Abs. Reference Percentage
(P476+P494)
20 Abs. Iactive (active current)
30 Abs. Pactive (active power)
31 Abs. T (torque)
P553=7
32
33
0%
100%
0 Hz
P419 (fmax)
Abs. Inside Temperature
Abs. Heat Sink Temperature
51 DC-Link Voltage
52 V (output voltage)
(Not all functions are listed.)
Via multifunction output (MFO1), output analog value:
Set MFO1 as analog output.
Set the voltage range (0…22 V) for output.
Select the value to be output.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
84
After first commissioning
Commissioning
Motor potentiometer
Control via digital inputs or operator panel.
P474
P475
or
P492
(Factory setting)
Save the reference value.
The last reference value set via the motor potentiometer is saved. After shut-down and
restart, the drive will be accelerated to this value.
0 Not Latching
1 Latching
Define reference value via motor potentiometer:
Reference frequency source 1
0 Zero
4 Motorpot. via Digital Inputs
5 Keypad-Motorpot.
Reference frequency source 2
0 Zero
4 Motorpot. via Digital Inputs
5 Keypad-Motorpot.
Motor potentiometer via digital inputs:
P62
7 Off
P63
71 IN1D
72 IN2D
73 IN3D
74 IN4D
75 IN5D
76 MFI1D
77 MFI2D
… other signal sources
Select digital inputs for P62 and P63.
P62 IN[]D: Increase reference value.
P63 IN[]D: Reduce reference value.
Keypad motor potentiometer:
▲: Increase reference value.
▼: Reduce reference value.
P473
Ramp for Motor potentiometer (2.00 Hz/s); limited to values from P420 to P423.
After first commissioning
85
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Fixed Frequencies
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(0.00
(10.00
(25.00
(50.00
(5.00
(10.00
(25.00
(50.00
(Factory setting)
P480
P481
P482
P483
P485
P486
P487
P488
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Hz)
Hz)
Hz)
Hz)
Hz)
Hz)
Hz)
Hz)
P66
P67
P131
7 Off
P66
P67
P131 Selection
71 IN1D
0
0
0
P480
72 IN2D
1
0
0
P481
73 IN3D (P558: 0 - Input)
1
1
0
P482
74 IN4D
0
1
0
P483
75 IN5D
0
1
1
P485
76 MFI1D(P452: 3 - NPN or 4 - PNP)
1
1
1
P486
77 MFI2D (P562: 3 - NPN or 4 - PNP)
1
0
1
P487
… other signal sources
0
0
1
P488
Via the signal states at the digital inputs, the fixed frequencies can be selected.
P475 or P492: 3 - Fixed Frequency.
The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency (P418) and Maximum
Frequency (P419).
Blocking Frequencies
(Factory setting)
Reference frequencies are hidden. Mechanical resonance of the plant can be avoided.
Two blocking frequencies can be set.
Reference
value
output
P447
P448
1st Blocking Frequency (0.00 Hz)
2nd Blocking Frequency (0.00 Hz)
P449
Frequency Hysteresis (0.00 Hz)
Select the frequency range to be hidden.
In this range, there is no stationary operating point.
P449 P449
P447
fBlocking - hysteresis
P447 - P449
Reference value
internal
fBlocking + hysteresis
P447 + P449
PWM input
A PWM signal at input IN2D (X11.5) can be used as reference value.
P496
10
11
PWM, 0 … 100%
PWM, -100 … 100%
of P419 (maximum frequency) or of P519 (maximum
reference percentage)
P652 and P653; for scaling
P476 or P494:
10
Repetition percentage
The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency (P418) and Maximum
Frequency (P419).
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
86
After first commissioning
Commissioning
Repetition frequency input
P496
A frequency signal at input IN2D (X11.5) can be used as reference value.
Evaluation
20 RF (Repetition frequency) single evaluation:
One signal edge
21 RF (Repetition frequency) double evaluation:
Both signal edges
P497 (Divider); for scaling
P475 or P492:
10
Repetition Frequency Input
The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency (P418) and Maximum
Frequency (P419).
Pulse train input
A pulse train signal at input IN2D (X11.5) can be used for specification of the reference
value. The frequency of the pulse train signal on the input can be modified via a scaling factor.
P496
30
Factory setting
Pulse train
fReference [Hz]
P654 (scaling frequency)
(P419) 50
P475 or P492:
10
Repetition
frequency
P476 or P494:
10
P654=25000
Repetition
percentage
25000 fIN2D [Hz]
(P654)
The Speed Control is always limited by the Minimum Frequency (P418) and Maximum
Frequency (P419).
After first commissioning
87
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Starting behaviour (V/f)
if
P620
P623
(Factory setting)
P30: 110 - IM: sensor-less control (SLC), V/f characteristic
The motor is magnetized (flux-formation, P781) and, if selected, a starting current
(P623) is impressed. The IxR compensation compensates the voltage drop at the stator
resistor.
Operation Mode
0 Off
Control according to V/f characteristic.
1 Magnetization
Set P780 and P781.
2 Magnetization +Current Impression
Set P623, P624, P780 and P781.
3 Magnetization + IxR-Compensation
Set P624, P780 and P781.
4 Magnetization + Current Impression +
Set P623, P624, P780 and P781.
IxR-Compensation
12 Magnetization +Current Impression
Set P623, P624, P780 and P781.
with Ramp Stop
For high start torque.
14 Magnetization + Current Impression
Set P623, P624, P780 and P781.
with Ramp Stop + IxR-Compensation
For high start torque.
Starting Current (value: IFIN) 1
For sufficient torque if a high start torque is required. The start current is impressed until the
output frequency reaches the value of P624.
PI controller for start current
P621
P part (2.00)
P622
I part (50 ms)
P624
P780
Max. Flux-Formation Time (300 ms)
The current during flux-formation (value of P781) is not impressed longer than this
time.
P781
1
Frequency Limit (2.60 Hz)
The starting current is impressed up to this output frequency.
Current during Flux-Formation (value: IFIN)
Upon startup, this current value is impressed. The time for current impression is limited
by P780.
Nominal value of frequency inverter
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
88
After first commissioning
Commissioning
Starting behaviour (field-oriented)
(Factory setting)
if
P623
P30: 410 - IM: sensor-less field-oriented control "
P30: 610 - PMSM: sensor-less field-oriented control "
Starting Current (value: IFIN) 1
For sufficient torque if a high start torque is required. The start current is impressed until the
output frequency reaches the value of P624.
P624
Frequency Limit (2.60 Hz)
The starting current is impressed up to this output frequency.
779
Min. Flux-Formation Time
The current during flux-formation (P781) is impressed at least for this time.
P780
Max. Flux-Formation Time (P30=410: 1000 ms), (P30=610: 50 ms)
The current during flux-formation (P781) is impressed not longer than this time.
P781
Current during flux-formation (value: IFIN)
Upon startup, this current value is impressed. The time for current impression is limited
by P780.
Stopping behaviour
(Factory setting)
P630
0
1
…
11
…
43
P68 and P69 = 1: Coast to Stop, P68 and P69 = 0: Coast to Stop
P68 and P69 = 1: Coast to Stop, P68 and P69 = 0: Stop and Switch Off
P68 and P69 = 1: Stop and Switch Off, P68 and P69 = 0: Stop and Switch Off
P68 and P69 = 1: Emergency Stop and Switch Off, P68 and P69 = 0: Stop and
DC brake
DC brake (only if P30 = 110): As from standstill, the direct current P631 (braking current) is impressed for the time of P632 (braking time).
Via P68 (Start Clockwise) and P69 (Start Anticlockwise) the motor stopping behavior is
controlled. For state P68 and P69 = logic 1, a stopping behavior must be selected. For
state P68 and P69 = logic 0, a stopping behavior must be selected.
1
Nominal value of frequency inverter
After first commissioning
89
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
V/f characteristic
if
(Factory setting)
P30: 110 - IM: sensorless control
606
Type V/f characteristic
1 Linear
Linear characteristic.
2 Quadratic
For applications where the torque increases quadratically to the
speed. Suitable for energy saving.
600
Starting Voltage (5.0 V)
Output voltage at output frequency of 0 Hz.
601
Voltage Rise (10%)
Increase of output voltage deviating from linear characteristic.
602
Rise Frequency (20%)
Increase of output voltage deviating from linear characteristic.
603
Cut-Off Voltage (230,0 or 400.0 V)
Coordinate for setting of V/f characteristic.
604
Cut-Off Frequency (50 Hz)
Coordinate for setting of V/f characteristic.
Linear
Quadratic
The working range is between P418 (minimum frequency 3.50 Hz) and P419 (maximum frequency 50 Hz).
Motor temperature monitoring
570
Evaluate thermo contact at MFI1 (X12.4):
1 Thermo contact, P204: Warning only
2 Thermo contact, P204: Error Switch-Off
3 Thermo contact, P204: Error Switch-Off 1 minute delayed
Further evaluations: PTC, KTY, PT1000.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
90
After first commissioning
Commissioning
6.5
Typical functions
The tables show a selection of setting options.
Control type and motor type
Control type and motor type can also be selected during commissioning via operator panel (Setup). If
the control type is changed, a device reset is executed immediately.
V/f characteristic, asynchronous motor
Field-orientated
control,
asynchronous
motor
Field-orientated
control,
synchronous
motor
(Factory setting)
Set P30 to " 110 - IM: sensor-less control (SLC)“ 1.
For P606, select " 1 - linear " or " 2 - quadratic " .
P600 … P605: Set V/f characteristic.
P620: Set start behavior.
P630: Set stop behavior.
Set P30 to " 410 - IM: sensor-less field-oriented control 2 " .
Chapter
7.1.2
7.7, 8.2
7.7
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.1.2
P780, P781: Set start behavior.
P630: Set stop behavior.
Set functions of field-orientated control.
Set P30 to " 610 - PMSM: sensor-less field-oriented control 3 " .
P780, P781: Set start behavior.
P630: Set stop behavior.
Set functions of field-oriented control.
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.9.5
7.1.2
7.3.2
7.3.2
7.9.5
Set motor speed (reference frequency)
Operator panel
Analog input
Fixed Frequencies
Digital signals
Communication
interface
1
2
3
4
(Factory setting)
Set P492 to " 5 - Keypad motorpoti " .
In " Local " menu, select function " Poti F " .
Using the arrow keys, set the output frequency (motor speed).
Set P475 to " 1 - analog value MFI1A " .
Voltage input at MFI1 (terminal X12.3). The motor speed is proportional to the voltage at MFI1.
Set P475 or P492 to " 3 - Keypad motorpoti " .
In P480 … P488, set frequency values.
For P66, P67, P131, select digital inputs.
Select a frequency value via these digital inputs.
Set P475 or P492 to " 4 - Motorpoti via digital inputs " .
For P473, set an acceleration value.
For P62 (Motorpoti up) and P63 (Motorpoti down), select digital
inputs.
Signals at the chosen digital inputs increase the output frequency
(motor speed).
The reference frequency is transmitted via a bus system.
Set P475 or P492 to " 20 - Fieldbus Reference Value " .
Chapter
7.5.1
7.5.1
7.5.1
7.5.1.3
7.6.6.5
7.5.1
7.5.3.3.1
7.6.6.4
Protocol 4
For simple applications (e.g. fans, pumps). In the case of control via operator panel: Select " UF " .
Control of an induction machine (asynchronous motor). For higher demands on speed or torque accuracy. In
the case of control via operator panel: Select " Foc " .
Control of a synchronous motor. For higher demands on speed or torque accuracy. In the case of control via
operator panel: Select " Synch " .
Instructions on relevant protocol.
Typical functions
91
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Acceleration and deceleration
Accelerate
clockwise and
anticlockwise
S-curve
(Factory setting)
Can be set separately for clockwise and anticlockwise operation.
Clockwise:
Define how fast the output frequency changes if
P420 and P421
the reference frequency is changed or during
startup, stops, or braking operations.
Anticlockwise:
P422 and P423
P430: The drive is accelerated and decelerated more uniformly and
load surges are avoided.
Chapter
7.5.1.4
(Factory setting)
Set P30 to 410 (asynchronous motor) or 610 (synchronous motor).
Set P164 to " 6 -On " or to a signal source (e.g. digital input). Via the
signal source the changeover to torque control can be effected.
Chapter
7.1.2
7.9.5.2
7.6.6.10
Set P494 to " 5 - Keypad-Motorpot. " .
In " Local " menu, select function " Poti P " .
Using the arrow keys, set the reference torque (percentage referred
to the nominal motor torque).
Set P476 to " 1 - Analog Value MFI1A " (terminal X12.3).
Set P452 to " 1 - Voltage 0…10 V " .
The reference torque is proportional to the voltage at MFI1.
7.5.3.4.2
P418
P419
P767
P768
7.5.1.1
7.5.1.4
Reference torque
Setting via:
Operator panel
Analog input
Limitation via:
Limits
Speed Controller
Minimum Frequency (only in current impression phase)
Maximum Frequency
Frequency Upper Limit
Frequency Lower Limit
7.5.2
7.6.1
7.9.5.3.1
Setting inputsand outputs
IN1D (X11.4)
IN2D (X11.5)
IN4D (X12.1)
IN5D (X12.2)
Evaluation logic
IN3D/OUT3D
(X11.6)
Evaluation logic
(Factory setting)
Assign signal " 71 - IN1D " to a function. (P68)
Assign signal " 72 - IN2D " to a function (P69) or
set as input for PWM, repetition frequency or pulse train via P496.
Assign signal " 74 - IN4D " to a function. (P71)
Assign signal " 75 - IN5D " to a function. (P103)
P559: Select PNP (active 24 V) or NPN (active: 0 V) for IN1D …
IN5D.
Chapter
7.6.6
7.6.6
7.6.7
7.6.6
7.6.6
7.6.6
P558: Set as input or output.
Input:
Assign signal " 73 - IN3D " to a function. (P70)
Output:
Select a function via P533.
P559: PNP (active 24 V) or NPN (active: 0 V).
7.6.4,
7.6.6
7.6.5
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
92
Typical functions
Commissioning
MFI1 1 (X12.3)
MFI2 3 (X12.4)
MFO1 5 (X13.6)
OUT1D (X13.5)
OUT2D (X10)
Relay
1
2
3
4
5
(Factory setting)
P452: Select analog (voltage/current) or digital (PNP/NPN).
Analog:
For setting of reference frequency:
Set P475 or P492 to " 1 - Analog Value MFI1A " .
Setting range: P418 … P419.
For setting of reference percentage 2:
Set P476 or P494 to " 1 - Analog Value MFI1A " .
Setting range: P518 … P519.
Adjustable characteristic if P452 = 6 or 7.
Digital:
Assign signal " 76 - MFI1D " to a function.
P562: Select analog (voltage/current) or digital (PNP/NPN).
Analog:
For setting of reference frequency:
Set P475 or P492 to " 2 - analog value MFI2A " .
Setting range: P418 … P419.
For setting of reference percentage 4:
Set P476 or P494 to " 2 - analog value MFI2A " .
Setting range: P518 … P519.
Adjustable characteristic if P462 = 6 or 7.
Digital:
Assign signal " 77 - MFI2D " to a function.
Temperature monitoring with thermo contact:
Set P204 to " 532 - MFI2D (Hardware) " .
Set P570 to 1, 2 or 3 (motor temperature: warning or
error switch-off).
Chapter
7.6.1
P550: Select analog, digital, repetition frequency or pulse train output.
Digital:
Select a function via P554.
Analog:
Via P553, select a signal for the output. (7 - Abs. Actual Frequency).
Repetition Via P555, select a frequency value for the output.
frequency Set P556 for representation of incremental encoder.
Pulse
Scale delivered frequency value via P557.
train
The value is referred to P419 (maximum frequency).
7.6.3
Select a function via P531. (2 - Run Signal)
Select a function via P532. (103 - Inv. Error Signal)
7.6.5
7.6.5
7.5.1
7.5.1.1
7.5.2
7.5.2.1
7.6.1.1.2
7.6.6
7.6.2
7.5.1
7.5.1.1
7.5.2
7.5.2.1
7.6.2.1.2
7.6.6
7.6.6.9
7.4.6
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.5.1.1
Multifunction input 1:
e.g. for PID controller (P475/P492 = 30 - technology controller " ) or for the torque controller (P164).
Multifunction input 2:
e.g. for PID controller (P475/P492 = 30 - technology controller " ) or for the torque controller (P164).
Multifunction output
Typical functions
93
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Data set for parameter values and motor data
Data set for
setup
(Factory setting)
For motor data of different motors or adjustment to different operating
points.
Select " Setup " menu. Press ENT.
The data set selection is displayed.
Select the data set where the entered and measured motor data and
parameter values are to be saved.
Chapter
-
− Select data set 0 if all data sets are to contain the same parameter
values.
− Select one of the data sets 1 ... 4 for commissioning of several motors or for different operating points.
Example: For auto set-up (auto-tuning) and motor data, select data
set 1.
.
.
.
ENT
ENT
Data set
Change parameter value
Set parameter values in a certain data set:
In menu " Para " , select the parameter to be set.
Keeping ENT pressed, press arrow key. The last digit shows the data
set.
Release ENT and press again. Now, you can set the parameter value
using the arrow buttons.
Example: Set nominal motor voltage P370 in data set 2.
Switch over
data set
7.6.6.11
Select digital inputs for P70 (73 - IN3D) and P71 (74 - IN4D).
Select a data set value via these digital inputs.
PID controller (technology controller)
Switch on
Reference
Value
Actual value
Control behaviour
Start
(Factory setting)
Process control (e.g. pressure, flow rate, temperature).
Set P475 or P492 to " 30 - Technology controller " .
For P476 or P494, select the source specifying the reference value.
Chapter
For P478, select the input where the actual value is applied. The actual
value can also be received via a communication interface.
P444 proportional component (amplification), P445 integral component
(integral time), P446 differential component (derivative time).
P68 (71 - IN1D) or P69 (72 - IN2D).
7.9.3
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
94
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.9.3
7.6.6.2
Typical functions
Commissioning
Electronic gear
Reference
value for
slave drive
Switch on
Gear factor
Master drive
(Factory setting)
Synchronization of drives.
Set P496 to " 20 - repetition frequency single evaluation: " or " 21 - Repetition frequency double evaluation " . IN2D (X11.5) is the frequency
input.
Set P497 (typically identical to P556 of the master drive).
Set P475 or P492 to " 40 - electr. gear " .
Fixed
Set P689 to " 1 - (P. 685 Numerator)/(P. 686 Denominator) " . Set P685 and P686.
Variable Set P689 to " 2 - (Analog Numerator)/(P. 686 Denominator) "
or " 3 - (P. 685 Numerator)/(Analog Denominator) " . Set the
range via P687 and P688.
For P476 or P494, select a signal source. Via the signal
source the gear factor can be changed during operation.
Output MFO1: Set P550 to " 20 - Repetition Frequency MFO1F " .
For P555, select a frequency source (1- Actual Frequency). Via P556,
set the output frequency.
Chapter
7.6.7
7.6.7.2
7.5.1
7.5.4.3.1
7.5.4.3.2
7.5.2
7.6.3
Positioning
P458 to " 1 - Reference positioning " . The reference point is detected via
digital input IN1D (terminal X11.4).
In P460, enter the travel distance in motor revolutions.
Chapter
7.3.7
PLC: Logic functions and functions with analog quantities
Via graphic functional block programming or via entries in a table,
analog quantities can be influences and logic links to digital signals can
be created.
1
Chapter/
instruction
7.6.6.16,
PLC 1
Application manual " PLC " .
Typical functions
95
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Monitoring and protective functions
Motor Temperature
Motor circuit
breaker
Mains failure
DC –Link
Voltage
Phase failure
(Factory setting)
Temperature monitoring with thermo contact at MFI2.
Set P204 to " 532 - MFI2D (Hardware) " .
Set P562 to " 3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - Digital PNP (active:
24 V) " .
Set P570 (0 - off) to 1 (warning only), 2 (immediate error switch-off),
or 3 (error switch-off 1 minute delayed).
Temperature measurement at MFI2, temperature monitoring and display with KTY measuring resistor or resistor PT1000.
Set P617 to a temperature value. If the value is reached, a warning
message will be effected or the frequency inverter will be switched off
(depending on setting of P570).
Set P562 to voltage input or current input.
PTC
Set P570 to 11 (warning), 12 (immediate error switch-off),
or 13 (error switch-off 1 minute delayed).
KTY
Set P570 to 21 (warning), 22 (immediate error switch-off),
or 23 (error switch-off 1 minute delayed).
PT1000
Set P570 to 31 (warning), 32 (immediate error switch-off),
or 33 (error switch-off 1 minute delayed).
P226 shows the measured motor temperature.
PTC resistor (motor PTC) does not enable temperature measurement.
P617 is inoperable for this evaluation. The evaluation is dependent on
the used resistor.
The motor ratings are monitored. If the motor is overloaded an error
switch-off or a warning message will be effected.
Set P571 for single motor operation or multiple motor operation and
choose if an error switch-off or a warning message is to be effected.
Short mains failures are bridged.
Via P670 select mains support. Set P671 and P672. If the voltage
drops below the value set in P671, the DC link voltage is controlled to
the value set in P672.
Via P670, set Ud limitation. Set P680. The DC link voltage is limited to
the value of P680 if it increases in generator operation mode or during
braking operations.
The frequency inverter is shut down if a mains or motor phase fails.
Via P576, select error switch-off or shutdown.
Chapter
7.6.6.9
7.6.2
7.4.6
7.4.6
7.4.6
7.6.2
7.4.6
7.4.6
7.4.6
9.2
7.10.6
7.10.6
7.9.2
7.9.2
7.4.7
Control mechanical brake
Activation
Delayed start
Shutdown
For addressing a brake via a digital output: Select " 41 - Brake release "
for one of the parameters 531 (OUT1D), 532 (OUT2D relay), 533
(OUT3D) or 554 (MFO1).
Set P625. When the brake release time has elapsed the drive accelerates. This protects the brake against damage.
Via P630, select the stopping behavior of the drive.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
96
Chapter
7.6.5.5
7.3.2
7.3.3
Typical functions
Commissioning
Energy saving
Switch off
display
Switch off
functions
Energy saving function
Quadratic V/f
characteristic
Other
Set a time in P1510. If no key is pressed on the operator panel during
this time, the display will be switched off.
Via P1511, select which functions are to be switched off: Operator
panel, digital inputs and outputs, communication or fan. The frequency
inverter switches the functions off thus reducing power consumption if
enable is switched off via digital inputs STOA and STOB.
For P30, “110 - IM sensor-less control (SLC)” or “410 - IM: sensor-less
field-oriented control” must be selected.
Via P1550, select if the possible energy savings are to be determined
automatically or specified via an entered value (P1551).
Via P1551, select which digital input or logic signal is to be used for
starting the energy saving function.
For load behavior with torque increasing quadratically to speed (e.g.
fan). For control according to V/f characteristic. For P30, " 110 - IM
sensor-less control (SLC) " must be selected.
Via P606, set the characteristic to " 2 - quadratic " .
Set up the V/f characteristic using parameters 600 … 604.
E.g. temperature-controlled fans, automatic switch frequency changeover, energy-optimized braking.
Chapter
8
8
8.1
8.2
8.4
Service
Service interval
The time remaining until service of DC link (P1530) and fan (P1531)
can be displayed.
If the time is expired, a message in P1533
DC-Link:
P1534
or a warning will be output. The reaction
Fan:
P1535
can be set up.
Chapter
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.2
Test functions
Chapter
Earth fault/
short circuit
test
Load test
Start test
Automatic
test
For finding errors and defects at the frequency inverter, sensors, the
load and the electrical connections.
Test for earth fault or short-circuit with DC link potential.
Test of IGBTs, the load (e.g. for short circuit), current measurement
and for broken cables.
With opera- Switch on enable at inputs STOA and STOB.
tor panel
Select menu item " Test " in " Local " menu.
Select test 1. Comply with the instructions in chapter
7.2.3.1 “Earth fault and short circuit test (Test 1)”.
Then, select test 2.
With PC
Via P1540, select " 11 - Start Test 1 " or " 12 - Start
software
Test 2 " .
VPlus
Via P1542, select which test is to be started each time after an error
switch-off.
7.2.3.1
7.2.3.2
7.2.3.3
7.2.3.4
7.2.3.5
Kapitel
Test of fan
Start test
Typical functions
The function of the fans is tested
With opera- Switch on enable at inputs STOA and STOB.
tor panel
Select menu item " Test " in “Local” menu.
Select Test 3. Press ENT. The fans must rotate.
Press ESC.
97
06/2013
7.2.3.6
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Communication
(Factory setting)
CAN System
bus
CANopen®
Interface at terminals X12.5 and X12.6.
− Protocol via terminals X12.5 and X12.6 or
− Interface at optional communication module CM-CAN.
Instructions
System
bus
CANopen
For parameter CAN Interface (CM-CAN/X12) 276, select the protocol
for terminals X12.5/X12.6 or for the communication module. You can
choose either CAN system bus or CANopen®.
Modbus
(RTU/ASCII)
VABus
− Interface at connection X21 (RJ45 socket) or
− optional communication module CM-232 or CM-485.
− Interface at connection X21 (RJ45 socket) or
− optional communication module CM-232 or CM-485.
Profibus-DP
TCP/IP
6.6
Via parameter Protocol (CM/X21) 395, select the protocol for terminal
X21 or for the communication module. You can choose either Modbus
or VABus. If Modbus is selected, choose either RTU or ASCII via parameter Modbus Mode 1503.
Optional communication module CM-PDPV1.
Optional communication module with Ethernet communication TCP/IP
Modbus
VABus
PDP-V1
Ethernet
module
Error Acknowledgment via keypad
If a fault occurs, a device reset can be executed via the STOP key. A reset via the STOP key can only
be executed, if Parameter Local/Remote 412 allows the control via keypad (see chapter 7.3.1
“Control”).
Further possibilities to execute a fault reset are described in chapter 7.6.6.8 “Error Acknowledgment”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
98
Error Acknowledgment via keypad
Commissioning
6.7
Applications
The parameters required for typical applications are listed. Selecting an application makes commissioning easier. Depending on the application, additional settings may be required.
Note
The PC software VPlus provides application masks for easy commissioning of applications.
6.7.1
30
420
421
492
493
418
419
420
447
449
475
606
630
651
1550
1552
Pump
Parameters
Configuration
Acceleration (clockwise)
Deceleration (clockwise)
Reference frequency source 2
Operation mode (reference frequency
source)
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Acceleration (clockwise)
1st Blocking frequency
Frequency Hysteresis
Reference frequency source 1
Type V/f characteristic
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1
|P68 & P69=0) (stopping behavior)
Operation mode (auto start)
Operation mode energy saving function
Energy saving function on
68 Start Clockwise
69 Start Anticlockwise
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) (digital
531
output)
532 Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
Applications
Recommenced setting
110 IM: sensorless control (V/f characteristic)
10 Hz/s
-0.01 Hz
0 - Zero
1 - (+/- reference)
10 Hz
53 Hz
10 Hz/s
0 Hz
0 Hz
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
2 - quadratic
11 - (Stop, Off | Stop, Off)
0 - Off
2 - Automatic
163 - Reference Frequency reached
71 - IN1D
7 - Off
2 - Run signal
103 - Inv. error signal
99
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.7.2
30
68
421
492
493
418
419
420
447
475
606
630
645
651
1550
1552
Fan
Parameters
Configuration
Start Clockwise
Deceleration (clockwise)
Reference frequency source 2
Operation mode (reference frequency
source)
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Acceleration (clockwise)
1st Blocking frequency
Reference frequency source 1
Type V/f characteristic
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1
|P68 & P69=0) (stopping behavior)
Operation mode Flying Start
Operation mode (auto start)
Operation mode energy saving function
Energy saving function on
68 Start Clockwise
69 Start Anticlockwise
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) (digital
531
output)
532 Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Recommenced setting
110 IM: sensorless control (V/f characteristic)
71 - IN1D
-0.01 Hz
0 - Zero
1 - (+/- reference)
10 Hz
53 Hz
50 Hz/s
0 Hz
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
2 - quadratic
0 - (Coast to Stop | Coast to Stop)
2 - On, according to reference
0 - Off
2 - Automatic
163 - Reference Frequency reached
71 - IN1D
7 - Off
2 - Run signal
103 - Inv. error signal
100
Applications
Commissioning
6.7.3
30
480
418
419
420
421
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
449
475
476
478
480
492
493
494
495
606
618
630
651
1550
1552
Fan or pump with closed control loop
Parameters
Configuration
Fixed frequency 1
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Acceleration (clockwise)
Deceleration (clockwise)
Operation mode actual value failure
Max. I component
Maximum frequency
Minimum frequency
Amplification
Integral time
Derivative time
1st Blocking frequency
Frequency Hysteresis
Reference frequency source 1
Reference percentage source 1
Actual percentage source
Fixed frequency 1 (in case of actual
value failure)
Reference frequency source 2
Operation mode (reference frequency
source)
Reference percentage source 2
Operation mode (reference percentage
source)
Type V/f characteristic
Backlash
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1
|P68 & P69=0) (stopping behavior)
Operation mode (auto start)
Operation mode energy saving function
Energy saving function on
68 Start Clockwise
69 Start Anticlockwise
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) (digital
531
output)
532 Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
Applications
Recommenced setting
110 IM: sensorless control (V/f characteristic)
0 Hz
10 Hz
53 Hz
5 Hz/s
-0.01 Hz
1 - active, fixed frequency 1
50 Hz
53 Hz
0 Hz
1
1000 ms
0 ms
0 Hz
0 Hz
30 - Technology Controller (PID controller)
2 - Analog Value MFI2A
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
0 Hz
0 - zero
1 - (+/- reference)
0 - zero
2 - positive only
2 - quadratic
0%
0 - (Coast to Stop | Coast to Stop)
0 - Off
Automatic
163 - Reference Frequency reached
71 - IN1D
72 - IN2D
2 - Run signal
103 - Inv. error signal
101
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
102
Applications
Commissioning
6.7.4
30
418
419
420
421
447
449
475
492
493
558
573
606
630
645
651
1550
1552
Fan for heating, ventilation, air conditioning system
Parameters
Configuration
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Acceleration (clockwise)
Deceleration (clockwise)
1st Blocking frequency
Frequency Hysteresis
Reference frequency source 1
Reference frequency source 2
Operation mode (reference frequency
source)
Operation mode terminal X11.6 (digital
input/output)
Operation mode (intelligent current
limits)
Type V/f characteristic
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1
|P68 & P69=0) (stopping behavior)
Operation Mode Flying Start
Operation mode (auto start)
Operation mode energy saving function
Energy saving function on
68 Start Clockwise
69 Start Anticlockwise
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) (digital
531
output)
532 Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
Operation mode OUT3D (X11.6) (digital
533
input/output)
Applications
Recommenced setting
110 IM: sensorless control (V/f characteristic)
10 Hz
50 Hz
10 Hz/s
-0.01 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
1 - analog value MFI1A
0 - zero
1 - (+/- reference)
1 - Output OUT3D
11 - Ixt + Tc (limitation to overload and max. heat
sink temperature)
2 - quadratic
0 - (Coast to Stop | Coast to Stop)
2 - On, according to reference
1 - On
Automatic
163 - Reference Frequency reached
71 - IN1D
7 - Off
2 - Run signal
103 - Inv. error signal
25 - Warning Mask
103
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.7.5
Conveying plant
Parameters
Configuration
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Acceleration (clockwise)
Deceleration (clockwise)
1st Blocking frequency
Frequency Hysteresis
Reference frequency source 1
Reference frequency source 2
Operation mode (reference frequency
493
source)
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1
630
|P68 & P69=0) (stopping behavior)
645 Operation Mode Flying Start
Recommenced setting
110 IM: sensorless control (V/f characteristic)
10 Hz
53 Hz
5 Hz/s
5 Hz/s
0 Hz
0 Hz
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
0 - zero
1 - (+/- reference)
68 Start Clockwise
69 Start Anticlockwise
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) (digital
531
output)
532 Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
71 - IN1D
7 - Off
2 - Run signal
30
418
419
420
421
447
449
475
492
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
0 - (Coast to Stop | Coast to Stop)
2 - On, according to reference
103 - Inv. error signal
104
Applications
Commissioning
6.7.6
Compressor
Parameters
Configuration
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Acceleration (clockwise)
Deceleration (clockwise)
1st Blocking frequency
Frequency Hysteresis
Reference frequency source 1
Reference frequency source 2
Operation mode (reference frequency
493
source)
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1
630
|P68 & P69=0) (stopping behavior)
30
418
419
420
421
447
449
475
492
670 Operation mode (voltage controller)
68 Start Clockwise
69 Start Anticlockwise
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) (digital
531
output)
532 Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
Applications
Recommenced setting
110 IM: sensorless control (V/f characteristic)
10 Hz
50 Hz
12.5 Hz/s
-0.01 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
0 - zero
1 - (+/- reference)
0 - (Coast to Stop | Coast to Stop)
3 - Ud limitation and mains support active
(Ud: DC link voltage)
71 - IN1D
7 - Off
2 - Run signal
103 - Inv. error signal
105
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.7.7
Travel applications
Parameters
Configuration
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Acceleration (clockwise)
Deceleration (clockwise)
Reference frequency source 1
Fixed frequency 1
Fixed frequency 2
Fixed frequency 3
Fixed frequency 4
Reference frequency source 2
Operation mode (reference frequency
493
source)
Operation mode terminal X11.6 (digi558
tal input/output)
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1
630
|P68 & P69=0) (stopping behavior)
30
418
419
420
421
475
480
481
482
483
492
68
69
66
67
Start Clockwise
Start Anticlockwise
Fixed frequency Change-Over 1
Fixed frequency Change-Over 2
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) (digi531
tal output)
532 Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Recommenced setting
110 IM: sensorless control (V/f characteristic)
10 Hz
50 Hz
15 Hz/s
15 Hz/s
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
10 Hz
25 Hz
40 Hz
50 Hz
3 - Fixed frequency
1 - (+/- reference)
0 - Input IN3D
11 - (Stop, Off | Stop, Off)
71 - IN1D
7 - Off
73 - IN3D
74 - IN4D
2 - Run signal
103 - Inv. error signal
106
Applications
Commissioning
6.7.8
Torque control
The Torque control can be used in applications where a torque should be used as reference value
instead of a frequency.
Via parameter n/T Control Change-Over 164 a jerk less switch over from Speed Control to Torque
Control is possible.
100 % Torque refer to the calculated Torque from Rated Mech. Power 376 (Motor power) and Rated
Speed 372 (Motor nominal speed).
The Torque control is only available in configurations 410 FOC and 610 SYNC.
164
418
419
420
421
447
449
475
476
477
492
493
494
495
518
519
520
521
562
630
651
767
768
Parameters
n-/T-Control Change-Over
Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency
Acceleration (clockwise)
Deceleration (clockwise)
1st Blocking frequency
Frequency Hysteresis
Reference frequency source 1
Reference percentage source 1
Gradient percentage ramp
Reference frequency source 2
Operation mode (reference frequency
source)
Reference percentage source 2
Operation mode (reference percentage
source)
Minimum reference percentage
Maximum reference percentage
Fixed percentage 1
Fixed percentage 2
Operation Mode MFI2 (Multifunction
input 2)
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1
|P68 & P69=0) (stopping behavior)
Operation mode (auto start)
Frequency Upper limit
Frequency Lower limit
66
67
68
69
70
71
75
76
Fixed frequency Change-Over 1
Fixed frequency Change-Over 2
Start Clockwise
Start Anticlockwise
Data set Change-Over 1
Data set Change-Over 2
Fixed percent Change-Over 1
Fixed percent Change-Over 2
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) (digital
531
output)
532 Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
Recommenced setting
74 - IN4D
0 Hz2)
53 Hz
5 Hz/s
-0.01 Hz 1)
0 Hz
0 Hz
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
2 - Analog Value MFI2A
100%/s
0 – zero
1 - (+/- reference)
0 – zero
2 - positive only
0%
100%
0%
20%
1 - Voltage 0…10 V
0 - (Coast to Stop | Coast to Stop)
0 – Off
50 Hz
-50 Hz
7 – Off
7 – Off
71 - IN1D
7 – Off
7 – Off
7 – Off
7 – Off
7 – Off
2 - Run signal
103 - Inv. error signal
1) The setting -0.01 Hz effects the usage of the same ramp like stated in Parameters Acceleration
Clockwise 420.
1) Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends to set Minimum frequency 418 & gt; Frequency limit 624. Comply
with the notes in chapter 7.9.5.2 “Torque controller”.
Applications
107
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Commissioning
6.8
Set-up via the Communication Interface
796 SETUP Selection
Parameter-setting and commissioning of the frequency inverter via one of the communication interfaces include the plausibility check and the parameter identification functions. The parameter selection
during the guided commissioning procedure includes the basic parameters. These are based on
standard applications and support commissioning.
CAUTION
Parameter settings may only be changed by qualified staff. Before starting the commissioning process, read the documentation and comply with the safety instructions.
At the beginning of the auto set-up of a synchronous motor, the motor shaft will be
aligned when enable is switched on. It must be ensured that, personal or material damage is excluded.
For parameter SETUP Selection 796, choose a function.
The function will be executed as soon as enable is switched on at digital inputs STOA and STOB.
The functions are also carried out automatically one after the other during the guided commissioning
procedure.
SETUP Selection 796
0 - Clear Status
1 - Continue
2 - Abort
10 - Complete Setup, DS0
11
12
13
14
-
Complete Setup, DS1
Complete Setup, DS2
Complete Setup, DS3
Complete Setup, DS4
Plaus.-Check Machine
20 Data, DS0
Operating Instructions Agile
Function
The auto set-up routine does not perform a function.
The warning message is acknowledged and the auto set-up routine is continued.
The auto set-up routine is stopped and a RESET of the frequency
inverter is performed.
The auto set-up routine is performed in data set 0 and the parameter values are stored in all of the four data sets identically (recommended).
The parameter values of the auto set-up are stored in data set 1.
The parameter values of the auto set-up are stored in data set 2.
The parameter values of the auto set-up are stored in data set 3.
The parameter values of the auto set-up are stored in data set 4.
The auto set-up routine checks the rated motor parameters in the
four data sets (plausibility check).
06/2013
108
Set-up via the Communication Interface
Commissioning
SETUP Selection 796
21 22 23 24 30 31 32 33 34 40 41 42 43 44 -
Plaus.-Check
Data, DS1
Plaus.-Check
Data, DS2
Plaus.-Check
Data, DS3
Plaus.-Check
Data, DS4
Machine
Machine
Machine
Machine
Calculation and ParaIdent., DS0
Calculation and ParaIdent., DS1
Calculation and ParaIdent., DS2
Calculation and ParaIdent., DS3
Calculation and ParaIdent., DS4
Para-Ident. Machine
Data only, DS0
Para-Ident. Machine
Data only, DS1
Para-Ident. Machine
Data only, DS2
Para-Ident. Machine
Data only, DS3
Para-Ident. Machine
Data only, DS4
Function
The rated motor parameters in data set 1 are checked for plausibility.
The rated motor parameters in data set 2 are checked for plausibility.
The rated motor parameters in data set 3 are checked for plausibility.
The rated motor parameters in data set 4 are checked for plausibility.
The auto set-up routine determines extended motor data via the
parameter identification feature, calculates dependent parameters
and stores the parameter values in all of the four data sets identically.
Further motor data are measured, dependent parameters are
calculated and the parameter values are saved in data set 1
Further motor data are measured, dependent parameters are
calculated and the parameter values are saved in data set 2
Further motor data are measured, dependent parameters are
calculated and the parameter values are saved in data set 3
Further motor data are measured, dependent parameters are
calculated and the parameter values are saved in data set 4
Extended motor data are measured and saved identically in all
data sets. Other parameter values already set are maintained.
Extended motor data are measured and saved data set 1. Other
parameter values already set are maintained.
Extended motor data are measured and saved data set 2. Other
parameter values already set are maintained.
Extended motor data are measured and saved data set 3.
Extended motor data are measured and saved data set 4. Other
parameter values already set are maintained.
797 Setup Status
The individual steps of the auto set-up routine can be monitored and checked via parameter SETUP
Status 797. The setup routine via the communication interface continuously updates the status parameter which can be read out via the interface.
Message
OK
PC Phase 1
PC Phase 2
STO
Parameter identification
Setup already active
No Release
Error
Warning Phase Asymmetry
Setup not carried out
Status messages
Meaning
Auto set-up routine has been carried out.
The plausibility check of the motor data is active.
The calculation of dependent parameters is active.
The parameter identification demands enable on digital input STOA and
STOB.
The rated motor values are checked by the parameter identification feature.
The setup routine via the operator panel is being carried out.
No enable signal. The parameter identification demands enable on digital
input STOA and STOB.
Error during the auto set-up routine.
The parameter identification feature diagnosed an unbalance during the
measurements in the three motor phases.
The setup is not carried out until now.
If a warning message is output or an error occurs during Setup, refer to chapter 6.2.5 “Warnings during commissioning”.
Set-up via the Communication Interface
109
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7
Parameter descriptions
This chapter contains the parameter descriptions. Please note, that some parameters are described
more in detail in additional documentations. These are the parameters of the communication interfaces and the PLC function.
7.1
Inverter Data
Parameters can be set via the operator panel or the optional PC software VPlus (Version 6.0.1 or
higher).
0 Serial Number
The Serial Number 0 is entered on the type plate during the production of the frequency inverter.
Information on the device type and the production data with 8-digit number are displayed. In addition, the serial number is printed on the rating plate.
Serial Number 0:
For example: 9120801234 (serial no.)
1 Optional modules
Modular extension of the hardware is possible via the plug-in slot. The communication module detected by the frequency inverter (Parameter Optional module 1) and the corresponding designations are
displayed on the operator panel and in the optional control software VPlus after initialization. For the
parameters which can be set for the communication module, refer to the corresponding operating
instructions.
For example: CM-485
12 Inverter Software Version
The firmware stored in the frequency inverter defines the available parameters and functions of the
software. The software version is indicated in parameter Inverter Software Version 12. In addition,
the 9-digit software key is printed on the rating plate of the frequency inverter.
For example: Inverter Software Version 12: 6.1.4
On the rating plate: Version: 6.1.4; Software: 152 800 011
15 Copyright
(c) 2012 BONFIGLIOLI VECTRON
16 Power Module Software Version
The power module of the frequency inverter features its own processor. The firmware of the power
module is output via parameter Power Module Software Version 16.
29 User Name
The User Name 29 can be entered via the optional control software VPlus. The name can be made up
of 32 alphanumerical characters.
7.1.1
Control level
28 Control level
The Control level 28 defines the scope of the functions to be parameterized. These operating instructions describe the parameters on the third control level. These parameters should only be set by qualified users.
Parameters
No. Identification
28 Control level
Operating Instructions Agile
Min.
1
06/2013
110
Setting
Max.
3
Fact. sett.
1
Inverter Data
Parameter descriptions
Selection on operator panel
Easy
Standard
Professional
Control level 28
1 - Parameters for quick commissioning.
2 - The parameters most used can be set.
3 - All parameters can be set.
7.1.2
Configuration
30 Configuration
The Configuration 30 determines the control behavior with which the electric motor is controlled. The
operating instructions describe the following configurations and the relevant parameters in the third
Control level 28 (adjustment of parameter Control level 28 to value 3).
Configuration 110, IM 1: sensor-less control
Configuration 110 contains the functions for variable-speed control of an asynchronous motor in a
wide range of standard applications (e.g. for control of fans and pumps). The motor speed is set according to the V/f characteristic in accordance with the voltage/frequency ratio.
Configuration 410, IM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) 2
Configuration 410 contains the functions for sensor-less, field-orientated control of an asynchronous
motor. The current motor speed is determined from the present currents and voltages in combination
with the motor parameters. Separate control of torque and flux-forming current enables high drive
dynamism at a high load moment. In this configuration, parallel connection of several 3-phase motors
is possible to a limited extent only.
Configuration 610, PMSM 3: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC)
Configuration 610 contains the functions for sensor-less, field-orientated control of a synchronous
motor. The current motor speed is determined from the present currents and voltages in combination
with the motor parameters. Separate control of torque and flux-forming current enables high drive
dynamism at a high load moment. This configuration is intended for the connection of a single motor.
Parallel connection of several synchronous motors is not intended and possible to a very limited extent
only.
Configuration
Asynchronous motor
Function
Speed control
Torque control
Switch-over speed/torque control
Dynamic voltage pre-control
Intelligent current limits
Voltage controller
PID controller (technology controller)
Slip compensation
Current limit value controller
Current controller
Acceleration pre-control
Field controller
1
2
3
V/f characteristic
Chapter
110
7.9.5.3
x
7.9.5.2
7.6.6.10
7.8.1
x
7.9.1
x
7.9.2
x
7.9.3
x
7.9.4.1
x
7.9.4.2
x
7.9.5.1
x
7.9.5.4
7.9.5.5
Synchronous
motor
Field-orientated control
410
x
x
x
610
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Asynchronous motor
Direct moment control
Permanently excited synchronous motor.
Inverter Data
111
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Configuration
Asynchronous motor
Function
Modulation controller
Starting behavior
Starting current impression
Flux-formation
Stopping behavior
Direct current brake
Auto start
Flying Start
Energy saving
Energy saving function (Flux reduction)
Reference point positioning
PLC function
Frequency reference channel
Reference percentage channel
Fixed frequencies
Fixed percentages
Blocking frequencies
Input PWM/repetition frequency/pulse
train
Brake chopper
Motor circuit breaker
V-belt monitoring
Motor chopper
Real-time tuning
7.1.3
V/f characteristic
Chapter
110
7.9.5.6
7.3.2
x
7.3.2
x
7.3.2
x
7.3.3
x
7.3.6
x
7.3.4
x
7.3.5
x
8
x
8.1
x
7.3.7
x
7.6.6.16
x
7.5.1
x
7.5.1.3
x
7.5.1.3
x
7.5.2
x
7.5.1.5
x
Synchronous
motor
Field-orientated control
410
x
x
x
x
x
610
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
7.5.4
x
x
x
7.10.4
7.10.6
7.10.7
7.10.5
7.9.6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Set password
27 Set password
As a protection against unauthorized access, the parameter Set password 27 can be set such that
anyone who wants to change parameters must enter this password before. A change of parameter is
only possible if the password is entered correctly. If the Set password 27 parameter is set to zero, no
password is required for access to the parameters. The previous password is deleted.
Parameters
No. Identification
27 Set password
Min.
0
Setting
Max.
999
Fact. sett.
0
If a password is set the password entry is necessary for
− modification of parameter values
− start of Setup
− upload of parameter values from memory card to frequency inverter
The correct entered password unlocks all functions for 10 minutes. After 10 minutes the password
protection is switched on again automatically.
The modification of a password is possible in control level 3 (parameter Control level 28).
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
112
Inverter Data
Parameter descriptions
The control facilities of the operator panel are not locked. For the restriction of control facilities refer
to chapter 7.5.1 “Reference frequency channel”, 7.5.2 “Reference percentage channel” and 7.3.1
“Control”.
7.1.4
Programming
34 Program(ming)
The parameter Program(ming) 34 enables acknowledgment of a fault message and resetting to the
factory settings.
Program(ming) 34
123 -
Reset
4444 - Default
Function
A hardware reset is done (Behavior like Mains-Off/Mains-On).
The parameters of the selected configuration, except for a few exceptions, are reset to the default settings. The display of the control unit
reads " dEFLt " .
Parameters Control level 28 and Configuration 30 are not changed during resetting
to factory settings (Program(ing) 34 = 4444).
With Keypad Parameter default settings:
Select P34 in Menu Para. Press both arrow keys to jump to value 4443. Set P34 to
4444 and confirm with ENT. This sets all parameters to the default values.
7.2
Machine data
The input of the machine data is the foundation for the functionality of the control functions and
methods. You will have to enter the motor ratings during the guided commissioning (setup).
7.2.1
Rated motor parameters
370 Rated voltage
371 Rated current
372 Rated speed
373 No. of pole pairs
374 Rated cosine Phi
375 Rated frequency
376 Rated mechanical power
Parameterize the rated motor data according to the rating plate of the motor of the motor data sheet.
The default settings of the machine parameters are based on the nominal data of the frequency inverter and a four-pole asynchronous motor. The machine data required for the control functions and
methods are checked for plausibility and calculated in the course of the commissioning.
Parameter Rated cosine Phi 374 is not available in configuration 610 (synchronous
motors).
No.
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
Parameters
Description
Rated voltage
Rated current
Rated speed
No. of pole pairs
Rated cosine Phi
Rated frequency
Rated mechanical power
Machine data
Min.
0.17⋅UFIN
0.01⋅IFIN
30 min-1
1
0.01
10.00 Hz
0.01⋅PFIN
113
Setting
Max.
2⋅UFIN
10⋅ oc⋅IFIN
60000 min-1
24
1.00
1000.00 Hz
10⋅PFIN
06/2013
Fact. sett.
UFIN
IFIN
nN
2
cos(ϕ)N
50.00 Hz
PFIN
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
UFIN = Nominal Frequency inverter voltage, usually 400 V or 230 V
IFIN = Nominal Frequency inverter output current
PFIN = Nominal Frequency inverter power
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter.
In the case of asynchronous machines, the speed can be increased at a constant torque if the motor
winding can be switched over from star to delta connection. The changeover leads to a modification of
the dependent rated figures by a square root of three.
NOTE
The rated data of the motor are to be entered according to the specifications on the
rating plate for the motor connection type used (star or delta connection). If the data
entered deviate from the rating plate, the parameters will not be identified correctly.
Parameterize the rated data according to the rating plate of the motor for the wiring of
the motor winding. Consider the increased rated current of the connected asynchronous
motor.
Input via operator panel
− The motor ratings must be entered when the " Setup " menu is selected on the operator panel.
− The motor ratings can be entered in menu " Para " for parameters 370 … 376.
7.2.2
Further motor parameters
In particular the field-orientated control requires the determination of further data which cannot be
read off the rating plate of the asynchronous or synchronous motor for the precise calculation of the
machine model. In the course of the guided commissioning (setup), the parameter identification is
carried out to measure the further motor parameters.
The values of the following parameters will not be measured by the frequency inverter during the
guided commissioning (setup). Changing the measured values is normally not required.
Configuration 30 = 110
Asynchronous motor
Stator resistance 377
Leakage coefficient 378
Configuration 30 = 410
Asynchronous motor
Rated voltage correction factor 368
Stator resistance 377
Leakage coefficient 378
Rated magnetising current 716
Rated slip correction factor 718
Configuration 30 = 610
Synchronous motor
Stator resistance 1190
Voltage constant 383, if no input before
Stator inductance 384
377 Stator resistance (asynchronous motor)
1190 Stator resistance (synchronous motor)
The resistance of the stator winding is measured during the guided commissioning. The measured
value is saved as a phase value in parameter Stator resistance 377 and is 3 times smaller than the
winding resistance in delta connection.
By default, the stator resistance of a standard motor is entered to match the reference output of the
frequency inverter.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
114
Machine data
Parameter descriptions
Parameters
No.
Description
377 Stator resistance 1)
1190 Stator resistance 2)
1)
2)
Min.
0 mΩ
0.001 Ω
Setting
Max.
65535 mΩ
100.000 Ω
Fact. sett.
RsN
10.000 Ω
In settings 110 and 410 of parameter Configuration 30.
In setting 610 of parameter Configuration 30.
Stator resistance asynchronous motor:
For sensorless control according to V/f characteristic (setting 110 for Configuration 30): The stator
resistance of an asynchronous motor can be optimized while the machine is in no-load operation. At
the stationary operating point, the torque-forming current Isq 216 and/or the estimated Active current 214 should be zero. Due to the temperature-dependent of the stator resistance, the adjustment
should be done at a winding temperature which is also reached during normal operation.
A correct measurement will optimize the control functions.
For sensorless field-orientated control according to V/f characteristic (setting 410 for Configuration
30): The stator resistance value determined during the guided commissioning procedure is suitable
for most applications and does not have to be optimized.
Stator resistance synchronous motor:
The stator resistance value of a synchronous motor is entered during commissioning. The stator resistance is needed particular of operation at low speeds and should be available and entered as exactly as possible for this reason. The Stator resistance 1190 refers to the quantity between two motor
phases and can typically be taken from the data sheet of the motor.
The stator resistance value determined during the guided commissioning procedure is suitable for
most applications and does not have to be optimized.
378 Leakage Coefficient (asynchronous motor)
The leakage coefficient of the motor defines the ratio of the leakage inductivity to the main inductivity. The torque and flux-forming current components are thus coupled via the leakage coefficient. Optimization of the leakage coefficient within the field-orientated control systems demands acceleration
to various operating points of the drive. Unlike the torque-forming current Isq 216, the flow-forming
current Isd 215 should be largely independent of the load torque. The flow-forming current component is inversely proportional to the leakage coefficient. If the leakage coefficient is increased, the
torque-forming current increases and the flux-forming component drops. The adjustment should result in a relatively constant actual current Isd 215, matching the set Rated magnetizing current 716,
regardless of the load on the drive.
The sensor-less control system uses the parameter Leakage Coefficient 378 in order to optimize the
synchronization to one drive.
Parameters
No.
Description
378 Leakage Coefficient
Min.
1.0%
Setting
Max.
20.0%
Fact. sett.
7.0%
716 Rated magnetising current (asynchronous motor, field-orientated control)
The Rated magnetising current 716 is a measure for the current in the motor. The motor voltage will
build up accordingly in no-load operation (depending on speed). The guided commissioning determines this value at approx. 30% to 50% of the Rated current 371. This current can be compared to
the field current of an externally excited direct current machine.
Parameters
No.
Description
716 Rated magnetising current
Min.
0.01⋅IFIN
Setting
Max.
oc⋅IFIN
Fact. sett.
0.3⋅IFIN
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter
Machine data
115
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
The rated magnetizing current determined during the guided commissioning procedure is set to an
optimized value and does not have to be adjusted.
718 Rated slip correction factor (asynchronous motor, field-orientated control)
The rotor time constant results from the inductivity of the rotor circuit and the rotor resistance. Due to
the temperature-dependence of the rotor resistance and the saturation effects of the iron, the rotor
time constant is also dependent on temperature and current. The load behavior and thus the rated
slip depend on the rotor time constant. The guided commissioning determines the machine data during the parameter identification and sets the parameter Rated slip correction factor 718 accordingly.
The value calculated by the rotor time constants can be read out via the actual value Current rotor
time constant 227. Parameter identification (during guided commissioning " Setup " ) should be done
while the motor is cold.
Parameters
No.
Description
718 Rated slip correction factor
Min.
0.01%
Setting
Max.
300.00%
Fact. sett.
100.00%
383 Voltage constant (synchronous motor)
In Configuration 610 (parameter Configuration 30) for control of synchronous motors, the control
behavior should be optimized by setting parameter Voltage constant 383.
The auto-setup during the guided commissioning (setup) identifies the voltage constant of the synchronous motor. If a value & gt; 0 mV was entered before manually, the voltage constant will not be
determined during auto-setup. The entered value is maintained.
For the voltage constant, refer to the motor data sheet. In the motor data sheet, the value may be
V
. This value can be taken over for Parameter Voltage constant 383.
indicated in
U
1000
min
Parameters
No.
Description
383 Voltage constant
Min.
0.0 mVmin
Setting
Max.
6500.0 mVmin
Fact. sett.
0.0 mVmin
If the guided commissioning (Setup) is not carried out, the auto-setup should be carried out via parameter SETUP selection 796 in order to improve the drive behavior, particularly for small speeds.
Select one of the settings 10 … 14 for SETUP selection 796.
During the guided commissioning (via keypad and VPlus) for Bonfiglioli motors the voltage constant is
pre-allocated.
For Non-Bonfiglioli motors the voltage constant should be entered if it is known. If the voltage constant is unknown, set Voltage constant 383 to 0 mV before the commissioning to ensure the automatic calculation and measurement.
The voltage constant should be optimized after the guided commissioning procedure: In no-load operation, set 50% of the rated speed. Change the voltage constant in small steps until parameter Rotor
flux 225 displays the value 101% (±0.5%).
In the case of motors with a very high number of pole pairs (e.g. higher than 20), it is
possible that the maximum setting range of the parameter is not sufficient. In this
case, divide the voltage constant by 10 and enter the value. The division by 10 is considered internally.
384 Stator inductance (synchronous motor)
In configuration 610 for the control of synchronous machines, the control behavior can be improved
for high dynamic requirements by setting the parameter Stator inductance 384.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
116
Machine data
Parameter descriptions
The value of parameter Stator inductance 384 refers to the quantity between two motor phases and
can typically be taken from the data sheet of the motor.
Parameters
No.
Description
384 Stator inductance
Min.
0.1 mH
Setting
Max.
500.0 mH
Fact. sett.
1.0 mH
1192 Peak current (synchronous motor)
The parameter Peak current 1192 is used during commissioning of the motor to set the limit for the
reference Isq value in the frequency inverter. This is to protect the connected synchronous motor.
The value can be taken from the motor rating plate or the motor data sheet. Exceeding the value
specified by the manufacturer may result in motor damage.
Parameters
No.
Description
Min.
1192 Peak current
0.01% IFIN
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
Setting
Max.
100000% oc⋅IFIN
Fact. sett.
100% IFIN
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter.
7.2.3
Device test
For easier troubleshooting in the device or in a plant, the internal and externally connected hardware
can be tested. Errors in the frequency inverter, external sensors, the load (motor) and electrical connections will be identified.
In order to be able to test individual components separately, the device test is split up in individual
tests which can be activated separately.
7.2.3.1
Earth fault and short circuit test (Test 1)
WARNING
Synchronous motors may move briefly while the test is performed. It must be checked if
there is a potential risk of personal injury or material damage. If necessary, access to
hazard areas must be safely prevented.
If a synchronous motor is connected: The test must not be started while the synchronous motor runs.
Test 1 checks if there is an earth fault or a short-circuit against DC-link potential in the load (motor)
or in the frequency inverter. This test can be carried out with or without load.
In this test, all six IGBTs (transistors) will be switched on briefly individually. No current may flow in
this process even if the load is connected.
+
P
U
V
W
-
N
Machine data
117
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
If, for example, there is a short-circuit between the positive DC-link potential (P or +) and branch U
(see illustration), the test would be stopped and error " T0104 earth /P-U fault " would be displayed.
This may either be a " hard " short-circuit or a " soft " short-circuit, i.e. a short-circuit with a relatively
high resistance. Short-circuits which don't trigger a hardware overcurrent circuit break, but cause a
current which is 10 % greater than the rated current peak value are signaled as earth faults.
If an error is signaled during a test with connected load, the test should be repeated without connected load, in order to find out if the device or the load is defective.
If an error is only signaled while the load is connected, it is an earth fault in the load or - if the DC-link
terminals are assigned - possibly a short-circuit between a load branch and a DC-link potential.
If an error is also signaled while the load terminals are not assigned, there is a short-circuit in the
device or an IGBT is defective. In the case of a defective IGBT or a short-circuit in the device, the
error will be signaled in several branches while the load is connected, as the current can also flow via
the load. In this case, only the messages generated while the load is not connected may be considered.
Non-switching IGBTs or non-functioning current measurements will not be detected by this test (but
by Test 2). In this case existing errors which would normally be identified by this test might not be
detected.
Message
T0001
T0002
T0003
T0010
T0101
T0102
T0103
T0104
T0105
T0106
T0114
T0115
T0116
Err.S41
7.2.3.2
Meaning
Stop. Test stopped by user.
Permanent error. Non-acknowledgeable error present. No (further) test possible.
Signals on digitals inputs STOA and STOB for enable missing. No enable.
At the beginning of the test an inadmissible current flows.
Earth /N-U fault. Short-circuit between branch U and the negative DC-link potential or
PE.
Earth /N-V fault. Short-circuit between branch V and the negative DC-link potential or
PE.
Earth /N-W fault. Short-circuit between branch W and the negative DC-link potential or
PE.
Earth /P-U fault. Short-circuit between branch U and the positive DC-link potential or
PE.
Earth /P-V fault. Short-circuit between branch V and the positive DC-link potential or
PE.
Earth /P-W fault. Short-circuit between branch W and the positive DC-link potential or
PE.
Soft earth /P-U fault. Short-circuit between branch U and the positive DC-link potential
or PE.
Soft earth /P-V fault. Short-circuit between branch V and the positive DC-link potential
or PE.
Soft earth /P-W fault. Short-circuit between branch W and the positive DC-link potential
or PE.
Internal error. Abort and restart the test.
Load test (Test 2)
WARNING
If a synchronous motor is connected: The test must not be started while the synchronous motor runs.
Synchronous motors may move briefly while the test is performed. It must be checked if
there is a potential risk of personal injury or material damage. If necessary, access to
hazard areas must be safely prevented.
Test 2 checks if a direct current can be impressed in the connected load (motor) in both directions.
Test 1 should be carried out before without any error messages.
For Test 2, a three-phase choke or a three-phase motor must be connected as the load. The load may
be star or delta connected. The star point must not be connected, if applicable.
Test 2 impresses a positive and a negative direct current in each branch one after the other. If no
current can be impressed in any direction, an error will be signaled. IGBTs, the load and the current
measurement are checked.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
118
Machine data
Parameter descriptions
If an error is signaled in a branch both for positive and negative current, the relevant load branch
circuit is open (e.g. broken wire) or the relevant current measurement is defective. If an error is signaled in a branch for one polarity only, an IGBT or driver is defective or a connection in the device is
interrupted.
The impressed direct current is 25% of the peak value of the rated current. The rated current must be
set with parameter Rated Current 371 in data set 1.
In order to prevent damage of the device and the load, the output voltage is limited. If the set current
(see above) cannot be reached with this voltage due to a high ohmic resistance of the load, an opencircuit error is identified in each branch. In this case, the current to be impressed must be reduced by
changing parameter Rated Current 371.
Message
T0001
T0002
T0003
T0010
T0201
T0202
T0203
T0204
T0205
T0206
T0211
T0212
T0213
T0214
T0215
T0216
T0221
T0222
T0223
T0224
T0225
T0226
T0231
T0232
T0233
T0234
T0235
T0236
T0260
Err.S41
Meaning
Stop. Test stopped by user.
Permanent error. Non-acknowledgeable error present. No (further) test possible.
Signals on digitals inputs STOA and STOB for enable missing. No enable.
At the beginning of the test an inadmissible current flows.
U open. It was not possible to impress a positive current in branch U.
V open. It was not possible to impress a positive current in branch V.
W open. It was not possible to impress a positive current in branch W.
-U open. It was not possible to impress a negative current in branch U.
-V open. It was not possible to impress a negative current in branch V.
-W open. It was not possible to impress a negative current in branch W.
U short-circuit. Short-circuit cutoff during impression of positive current in branch U.
V short-circuit. Short-circuit cutoff during impression of positive current in branch V.
W short-circuit. Short-circuit cutoff during impression of positive current in branch W.
-U short-circuit. Short-circuit cutoff during impression of negative current in branch U.
-V short-circuit. Short-circuit cutoff during impression of negative current in branch V.
-W short-circuit. Short-circuit cutoff during impression of negative current in branch W.
Earth fault Phase U. Earth fault cutoff during impression of positive current in branch U.
Earth fault Phase V. Earth fault cutoff during impression of positive current in branch V.
Earth fault Phase W. Earth fault cutoff during impression of pos. current in branch W.
-U earth fault. Earth fault cutoff during impression of negative current in branch U.
-V earth fault. Earth fault cutoff during impression of negative current in branch V.
-W earth fault. Earth fault cutoff during impression of negative current in branch W.
U Soft earth fault. The DC-link voltage has increased. Insulation problem in motor.
V Soft earth fault. The DC-link voltage has increased. Insulation problem in motor.
W Soft earth fault. The DC-link voltage has increased. Insulation problem in motor.
-U Soft earth fault Phase U. Insulation problem in motor.
-V Soft earth fault Phase V. Insulation problem in motor.
-W Soft earth fault Phase W. Insulation problem in motor.
Asymmetric phase voltages.
Internal error. Abort and restart the test.
If Test 2 signals an earth fault while Test 1 did not signal an earth fault, a current measurement will
probably be defective.
If Test 2 signals a short-circuit, there is either a short-circuit in the load or a current measurement is
defective.
Machine data
119
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.2.3.3
Start device test via operator panel
The device test can be started via the operator panel.
•
Switch on enable at inputs STOA and STOB.
•
Select menu item " Test " in " Local " menu.
•
Select Test 1 or Test 2. It is recommended that you start with Test 1.
•
Press " ENT " button to start Test 1.
If Test 1 is finished and no error was detected, " t1 good " will be displayed.
•
Confirm by pressing the " ENT " button. Menu item " Test 2 " will be displayed.
•
Press " ENT " button to start Test 2.
If Test 2 is finished and no error was detected, " t2 good " will be displayed.
Test 3: Refer to chapter
7.2.3.6 “Fan test”.
If an error was detected and a message was displayed, the relevant error must be repaired following
the instructions in chapters 7.2.3.1 " Earth fault and short circuit test (Test 1) " or 7.2.3.2 " Load test
(Test 2) " .
Parameter Status device test 1541 indicates the status of the device test and messages generated
during the test.
After a message, the test can be continued by pressing " ENT " .
Press " ESC " to stop the test. In this case, message “tESt” is displayed.
If " STO " is displayed if the device test is to be started, enable must be switched on at
inputs STOA and STOB.
7.2.3.4
Start device test via control software or bus system
1540 Start device test manual
The device test can be started via the control software VPlus or a connected bus system
Start device test manual 1540
0
1
2
11
12
-
Clear status
Continue
Cancel
Start Test 1
Start Test 2
13 - Start Test 1 and Test 2
Function
Deletes the messages generated during the test. Factory setting.
Continues the current test after a message.
Stops the current test.
Starts Test 1 (earth fault and short-circuit test).
Starts Test 2 (load test).
Starts Test 1 (earth fault and short-circuit test) and Test 2 (load
test).
Enable at inputs STOA and STOB must be switched on in order to be able to carry out
the test.
Parameter Status device test 1541 indicates the status of the device test and messages generated during the test.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
120
Machine data
Parameter descriptions
7.2.3.5
Automatic device test after error switch-off
1542 Start device test automatic
The device test can be started automatically after each error switch-off of the frequency inverter. The
device test will start once the frequency inverter is restarted after an error switch-off.
Function
No automatic device test after error switch-off. Factory setting.
Test 1 (earth fault and short-circuit test) will start automatically after an error switch-off of the frequency inverter followed by a start command.
Test 2 (load test) will start automatically after an error switchoff of the frequency inverter followed by a start command.
Test 1 (earth fault and short-circuit test) and Test 2 (load
test) will start automatically after an error switch-off of the
frequency inverter followed by a start command.
Start device test automatic 1542
0 - Off
1 - Start Test 1
2 - Start Test 2
3 - Start Test 1 and Test 2
NOTE
The automatic device test may result in a delayed start of the motor after a start command.
Parameter Status Device Test 1541 indicates the status of the device test and messages generated
during the test.
The device test will possibly start some time after the frequency inverter is switched on because the
test must not be carried out with the motor magnetized.
7.2.3.6
Fan test
The function of the interior fan and heat sink fan is tested. Dependent on the type of the frequency
inverter, fans are possibly not installed (refer to chapter 11.2 “Device data”).
The device test can be started via the operator panel.
•
Switch on enable at inputs STOA and STOB.
•
Select menu item " Test " in “Local” menu.
•
Select Test 3.
•
Press “ENT” button to start Test 3.
The interior fan and heat sink fan must rotate.
Press “ESC” button to finish the test.
ENT
ESC
ENT
ENT
If " STO " is displayed if the fan test is to be started, enable must be switched on at
inputs STOA and STOB.
Check for unusual operating noise and remove any soiling and dust if necessary.
If a fan does not rotate contact the service of BONFIGLIOLI.
Machine data
121
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.3
Operational Behavior
The operational behavior of the frequency inverter can be adjusted to the application by setting the
parameters appropriately. In particular the acceleration and deceleration behavior can be selected
according to the selected Configuration 30. Additionally, features such as Auto Start, and the synchronization and positioning functions facilitate the integration in the application.
7.3.1
Control
The frequency inverters are suitable for data communication and can be extended by communication
modules. In this way, they can be integrated in an automation and control system. Parameterization
and commissioning can be done via the operator panel or a communication interface.
Control can be done via contacts, keypad on the operator panel or communication interface.
412 Local/Remote
Parameter Local/Remote 412 defines the command sources for start, stop and direction of rotation
are to be issued. The parameter enables choosing from control via contacts, operator panel or communication interface.
Local/Remote 412
0 - Control via Contacts
1-
Control via Statemachine
2-
Control via RemoteContacts
3 - Control via Keypad
4-
Control via Keypad or
Cont.
5 - Control 3-Wire
Function
The commands start and stop as well as the definition of the direction
of rotation (parameters Start Clockwise 68, Start Anticlockwise 69)
are issued via digital inputs. Run, Stop and Reset commands from the
keypad keys are ignored.
The Start and Stop commands as well as the direction of rotation are
controlled via the Remote Statemachine of the communication interface. The control is done via the Controlword, which can be monitored
via 410 Controlword or which can be used to simulate it. With 411
Statusword the state of the drive can be monitored. The statusword is
typically sent to the overlying control (PLC). Run, Stop and Reset
commands from the keypad keys are ignored.
The Start and Stop commands as well as the direction of rotation are
controlled via logic signals through the communication protocol. Run,
Stop and Reset commands from the keypad keys are ignored.
The start and stop commands as well as the direction of rotation are
entered via the operator panel.
The start and stop commands as well as the direction of rotation are
entered via the operator panel or via digital inputs. Factory setting.
Control of direction of rotation (parameters Start Clockwise 68, Start
Anticlockwise 69) and signal Start 3-wire control 87 via digital inputs.
WARNING
If the operation mode is changed while the drive is running, the drive will not be
stopped if no stop command is present in the new operation mode.
In order to be able to control the drive, the output stage must be enabled by digital
inputs STOA and STOB.
Signals via physical contacts (IN1D…IN5D, MFI1, MFI2) are only evaluated if an operation mode with “Control via Contact” or “Control 3-Wire” (0, 4 or 5) is selected.
In all other operation modes (1, 2, 3) physical contacts are only evaluated, if the corresponding signals in the digital inputs with the suffix (Hardware) are selected. Please
comply with chapter 7.6.6 “Digital inputs”.
Signals not referring to a physical input are evaluated independent of the operation
mode Local/Remote 412.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
122
Operational Behavior
Parameter descriptions
Lock the Reference value facilities of the control panel
If the setting possibility of the reference frequency at the operator panel must be locked: For the following parameters the setting “5 - Keypad-Motorpot.” must not be selected.
− Reference Frequency Source 1 475, Reference Frequency Source 2 492
− Reference Percentage Source 1 476, Reference Percentage Source 2 494
Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of parameters. Refer to chapter 7.1.3 “Set
password”.
NOTE
The setting of parameter Set Password 27 only does not lock the control facilities of the
keypad. Start, Stop, Change direction of rotation, Poti F and Poti P are still available.
7.3.2
Starting behavior
The starting behavior of the machine can be configured. In Configuration 110 (V/f control of asynchronous motor) the starting behavior can be set via parameter Operation mode 620.
In the field-orientated control method of configurations 410 (asynchronous motor) and 610 (synchronous motor), the starting behavior can be set via the limits Maximum flux-formation time 780 and
Current during flux-formation 781.
Parameter of starting behavior in the configurations
U/f
Configuration 30
620
621
622
623
624
625
779
780
781
110
x
x
x
x
x
x
DMR
Asynchronous
motor
410
DMR
Synchronous
motor
610
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
620 Operation mode (starting behavior)
The parameter Operation mode 620 for the starting behavior is available if Configuration 30 =
" 110 - IM: sensorless control " (V/f control of asynchronous motor) is selected. Depending on the operation mode selected, the motor is magnetized first or a starting current is impressed. The voltage
drop across the stator resistance which reduces the torque in the lower frequency range can be compensated by the IxR compensation.
To ensure the correct function of the IxR compensation, the stator resistance is determined during the
guided commissioning (Setup). The IxR compensation is only activated when the stator resistance was
determined correctly.
Operation mode 620
0 - Off
Operational Behavior
Starting behavior
During startup, at an output frequency of 0 Hz, the voltage is set via
parameter Starting voltage 600. After this, the output voltage and the
output frequency are changed according to the control method.
The break-away torque and the current at the start are determined by
the adjusted starting voltage. It may be necessary to optimize the starting behavior via the parameter Starting voltage 600.
123
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Operation mode 620
1 - Magnetisation
2-
Magnetisation +
current impression
3-
Magnetisation +
IxR-compensation
Magnetisation +
current impression
4+ IxRcompensation
Magnetisation +
12 - current impression
with ramp stop
Magnetisation +
current impression
14 with ramp stop +
IxR-compensation
Starting behavior
In this operation mode, the Current during flux-formation 781 for magnetization is impressed into the motor after enable. The output frequency is kept at zero Hz not exceeding the Maximum flux-formation time
780. After this time has expired (at the latest), the output frequency
follows the adjusted V/f characteristic.
Operation mode 2 includes operation mode 1. After the Maximum fluxformation time 780 has elapsed (at the latest), the output frequency is
increased according to the set acceleration and the starting current is
impressed. If the output frequency reaches the value set with the parameter Frequency limit 624, the Starting current 623 is withdrawn.
There is a smooth transition to 1.4 times the frequency limit to the set
V/f characteristic. As from this operating point, the output current depends on the load. Factory setting.
Operation mode 3 includes operation mode 1. When the output frequency reaches the value set with parameter Frequency limit 624, the increase of the output voltage by the IxR compensation becomes effective. The V/f characteristic is displaced by the portion of voltage
which depends on the stator resistance.
In this operation mode, the current set with the parameter Current during flux-formation 781 is impressed into the motor for magnetization
after enable. The output frequency is kept at zero Hz not exceeding the
Maximum flux-formation time 780. After the time has elapsed (at the
latest), the output frequency is increased according to the set acceleration and the starting current is impressed. If the output frequency
reaches the value set with the parameter Frequency limit 624, the
Starting current 623 is withdrawn. There is a smooth transition to the
V/f characteristic, and a load-dependent output current is obtained. At
the same time, the increase of the output voltage by the IxR compensation becomes effective as from this output frequency. The V/f characteristic is displaced by the portion of voltage which depends on the stator
resistance.
Operation mode 12 contains an additional function to guarantee a starting behavior under difficult conditions. The magnetization and starting
current impression are done according to operation mode 2. The ramp
stop takes the current consumption of the motor at the corresponding
operating point into account and controls the frequency and voltage
change by stopping the ramp. The Controller status 275 signals the
intervention of the controller by displaying the message “RSTP“.
In this operation mode, the functions of operation mode 12 are extended by the compensation of the voltage drop across the stator resistance. When the output frequency reaches the value set with parameter Frequency limit 624, the increase of the output voltage by the IxR
compensation becomes effective. The V/f characteristic is displaced by
the portion of voltage which depends on the stator resistance.
621 Amplification
622 Integral time
In setting Configuration 30 = " 110 - IM: sensorless control " (V/f control of asynchronous motor), a
current controller is available for the starting behavior. The PI controller controls the current impression via parameter Starting current 623. The proportional and integrating part of the current controller can be set via parameters Amplification 621 and Integral time 622.
Parameters
No.
Description
621 Amplification
622 Integral time
Operating Instructions Agile
Min.
0.01
1 ms
06/2013
124
Setting
Max.
10.00
30000 ms
Fact. sett.
2.00
50 ms
Operational Behavior
Parameter descriptions
623 Starting current
The Starting current 623 ensures, particularly for high-torque start, a sufficient torque until the Frequency limit 624 is reached.
Applications in which high current is permanently needed at a low speed are to be realized using
forced-ventilated motors to prevent thermal overload.
Parameters
No.
Description
623 Starting current
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
Min.
0.0 A
Setting
Max.
oc⋅IFIN
Fact. sett.
IFIN
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter.
In the following settings, the starting current impression is used for the starting behavior:
− Configuration 30 = " 110 - IM: sensor-less control " (V/f control of asynchronous motor),
Operation mode 620 =2, 4, 12 or 14
− Configuration 30= " 410 - IM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) " , asynchronous motor
− Configuration 30= " 610 - PMSM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) " , synchronous motor
624 Frequency limit
The Starting current 623 is impressed until the Frequency limit 624 is reached. Permanent operating
points below the frequency limit are only permissible if forced-ventilated motors are used.
The transition to the control method of the selected Configuration 30 takes place above the frequency limit.
The Frequency limit 624 is set up automatically during the guided motor commissioning in field oriented control configurations 410 and 610. In V/f control configuration 110 the parameter Frequency
limit 624 is not changed by the guided motor commissioning.
Parameters
No.
Description
624 Frequency Limit
Min.
0.00 Hz
Setting
Max.
100.00 Hz
Fact. sett.
2.60 Hz
In the following settings, the starting current impression is used for the starting behavior:
− Configuration 30 = " 110 - IM: sensor-less control " (V/f characteristic of asynchronous motor),
Operation mode 620 =2, 3, 4, 12 or 14
− Configuration 30= " 410 - IM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) " , asynchronous motor
− Configuration 30= " 610 - PMSM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) " , synchronous motor
625 Brake release time
In order to protect the motor holding brake against damage, the motor may only start after the brake
has been released. Startup to reference speed is effected only after the Brake release time 625 has
elapsed. The time should be set such that it is at least as long as the time required for releasing the
holding brake. By using negative values for the parameter, release of the brake is delayed. This can
be done in order to prevent loads from falling down, for example.
Parameters
No.
Description
625 Brake release time
Operational Behavior
Min.
-5000 ms
125
Setting
Max.
5000 ms
06/2013
Fact. sett.
0 ms
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
779 Minimum flux-formation time
The time required for flux-formation changes depending on the rotor time constant of the motor. By
setting the parameters Maximum flux-formation time 780 and Minimum flux-formation time 779, a
constant flux-formation time can be reached. With the parameter Minimum flux-formation time 779,
the minimum time for current impression is set. In this way, the time between a start signal and the
start of the drive can be defined. For an appropriate setting of the parameters, the rotor time constant, the required starting torque and the parameter Current during flux-formation 781 must be
considered.
No.
Parameters
Description
Min.
1 ms
779 Minimum flux-formation time
Setting
Max.
10000 ms
Fact. sett.
10 ms 1)
50 ms 2)
1)
Configuration 30 = 410
Configuration 30 = 610
2)
Minimum flux-formation time 779 = 0
Flux-formation is stopped as soon
− as the reference flux value or the
− maximum flux-formation time were reached
Minimum flux-formation time 779 & gt; 0
Minimum flux-formation time 779
= Maximum flux-formation time 780
Minimum flux-formation time 779
& lt; Maximum flux-formation time 780
Current is impressed for flux-formation at least for this
time even if the reference flux value was reached.
Flux-formation is stopped after the set flux-formation time,
regardless of whether the reference flux value was
reached or not.
Flux-formation is stopped after the maximum fluxformation time.
780 Maximum flux-formation time
781 Current during flux-formation
The field-orientated control is based on separate control of the flux-forming and the torque-forming
current component. Upon startup, the machine is magnetized and a current is impressed first. With
the parameter Current during flux-formation 781 the magnetization current Isd is set, with the parameter Maximum flux-formation time 780 the maximum time for the current impression is set.
The current impression is done until the reference value of the rated magnetizing current is reached
or the Maximum flux-formation time 780 is exceeded.
Min.
Setting
Max.
780 Maximum flux-formation time
1 ms
10000 ms
781 Current during flux-formation
0.1⋅IFIN
oc⋅IFIN
No.
Parameters
Description
Fact. sett.
300 ms 1)
1000 ms 2)
50 ms 3)
IFIN
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
o c:
1)
Overload capacity of frequency inverter.
Configuration 30 = 110
2)
Configuration 30 = 410
3)
Configuration 30 = 610
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
126
Operational Behavior
Parameter descriptions
7.3.3
Stopping behavior
630 Operation mode (P68 & P69=1 | P68 & P69=0)
The
stopping behavior can be defined via parameter Operation mode (P68 & P69=1 |
P68 & P69=0) 630. The signal states of the digital inputs or logic signals for parameters Start clockwise 68 and Start anticlockwise 69 activate the stopping procedure. Digital inputs or logic signals can
be assigned to these parameters. In the factory settings, Start clockwise 68 is assigned " 71 - IN1D "
(terminal X11.4) and Start anticlockwise 69 is assigned " 72 - IN2D " (terminal X11.5). By combination
of the digital input states or logic signals, the stopping behaviors can be selected from the following
table.
Operation mode Stopping behavior
Start clockwise = 0 and Start anticlockwise = 0
Start clockwise = 1 and
Start anticlockwise = 1
Operation mode (P68 & P69=1 |
P68 & P69=0) 630
Stopping behavior 0
(Coast to Stop)
Stopping behavior 1
(Stop and switch off)
Stopping behavior 2
(Stop and hold)
Stopping behavior 4
(Emergency stop and switch off)
Stopping behavior 5
(Emergency stop and hold)
Stopping behavior 7
(DC brake)
Stopping behaviour (refer to table “Stopping behavior)
0
1
2
4
5
7
0
1
2
4
5
7
10
11
12
14
15
17
20
21
22
24
25
27
40
41
42
44
45
47
50
51
52
54
55
57
70
71
72
74
75
77
Operation mode 630 of the stopping behavior is to be parameterized according to the matrix. The
selection of the operation modes can vary according to the control method and the available control
inputs.
Example:
The motor is to stop according to stopping behavior 1 if the digital logic signals Start Clockwise 68 =
1 and Start Anticlockwise 69 = 1.
Additionally, the motor is to stop according to stopping behavior 2 if the digital logic signals Start
Clockwise 68 = 0 and Start Anticlockwise 69 = 0.
To achieve this, the value 12 (Stop, Off | Stop, Hold) must be set for parameter Operation mode
(P68 & P69=1 | P68 & P69=0) 630.
By selecting the stopping behavior you also select the control of a mechanical brake if operation mode
" 41-Open brake " is used for one digital output for controlling the brake.
Stopping behavior
Stopping behavior 0
Coast to Stop
The inverter is disabled immediately. The drive deenergized immediately and
coasts freely.
The drive is brought to a standstill at the set deceleration. As soon as the
drive is at a standstill, the inverter is disabled after a after a holding time. The
Stopping behavior 1
holding time can be set via the parameter Holding time stop function 638.
Depending on the setting of the parameter Operation mode 620 the Starting
Stop and Switch off
current 623 is impressed or the Starting voltage 600 is applied for the duration of the holding time.
Operational Behavior
127
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Stopping behavior 2
Stop and hold
Stopping behavior 4
Emergency stop and
Switch off
Stopping behavior 5
Emergency stop and
hold
Stopping behavior
The drive is brought to a standstill at the set deceleration and remains permanently supplied with current.
Depending on the setting of the parameter Operation mode 620 the Starting
current 623 is impressed or the Starting voltage 600 is applied as from
standstill.
The drive is brought to a standstill at the emergency stop deceleration. As
soon as the drive is at a standstill, the inverter is disabled after a after a holding time.
The holding time can be set via the parameter Holding time stop function
638. Depending on the setting of the parameter Operation mode 620, the
Starting current 623 is impressed or the Starting voltage 600 is applied as
from standstill.
The drive is brought to a standstill at the emergency stop deceleration and
remains permanently supplied with current.
Depending on the setting of the parameter Operation mode 620 the Starting
current 623 is impressed or the Starting voltage 600 is applied as from
standstill.
Direct current braking is activated immediately. In this process, the direct
Stopping behavior 7 current set with parameter Braking current 631 is impressed for the Braking
time 632.
DC brake
Comply with the notes in chapter 7.3.6 " Direct current brake " .
Only available in the configuration 110 (V/f control).
Comply with chapter 7.6.5.5 " Release brake " on addressing mechanical brakes.
When a synchronous motor is connected, BONFIGLIOLI recommends setting Operation mode 630 =
22.
637 Switch-Off Threshold Stop Function
The Switch-Off Threshold Stop Function 637 defines the frequency as from which a standstill of the
drive is recognized. This percentage parameter value is relative to the set Maximum frequency 419.
The switch-off threshold is to be adjusted according to the load behavior of the drive and the device
output, as the drive must be controlled to a speed below the switch-off threshold.
Parameters
No.
Description
637 Switch-Off Threshold Stop Function
Min.
0.0%
Setting
Max.
100.0%
Fact. sett.
1.0%
WARNING
If the motor builds up a stopping torque, it may be possible that the switch-off threshold stop function is not reached due to the slip frequency and the standstill of the drive
is not recognized. In this case, increase the value of the Switch-off threshold stop function 637.
638 Holding time stop function
The Holding time stop function 638 is considered in stopping behaviors 1 and 4. Controlling to speed
zero leads to a heating of the motor and should only be done for a short period in internally ventilated
motors.
Parameters
No.
Description
638 Holding time stop function
Operating Instructions Agile
Min.
0.0 s
06/2013
128
Setting
Max.
200.0 s
Fact. sett.
1.0 s
Operational Behavior
Parameter descriptions
7.3.4
Auto start
WARNING
Comply with VDE provision 0100 part 227 and provision 0113, in particular Sections
5.4, protection against automatic after main line voltage failure and voltage recovery,
and Section 5.5 " Undervoltage protection " .
Appropriate measures must be taken to exclude any risk for staff, machines and production goods.
In addition to that, all specific regulations relevant to the application as well all national
directives are to be complied with.
651 Operation mode (Auto start)
The auto start function is suitable for applications which permit a start at mains voltage by their function. By activation of the auto start function via parameter Operation mode 651, the frequency inverter accelerates the drive after application of the mains voltage. Control signals STOA and STOB for
enable and the start command are required as per the regulations. When the motor is switched on, it
is accelerated according to the parameterization and the reference value signal.
Operation mode 651
0 - Off
1 - Switched on
7.3.5
Function
No auto start. The drive is accelerated, after application of the mains
voltage, as soon as the enable and the start command are present
(edge-triggered). Factory setting.
The drive is accelerated by the frequency inverter as soon as the mains
voltage is applied (level-triggered).
Flying Start
645 Operation Mode Flying Start
The synchronization to a rotating drive is necessary in applications which drive the motor by their
behavior or in which the drive is still rotating after an error switch-off. Via Operation Mode Flying
Start 645, the motor speed is synchronized to the current motor speed without an " Overcurrent " fault
message. After this, the motor is accelerated to the reference speed at the set acceleration. This synchronization function determines the current rotary frequency of the drive via a search run.
The synchronization in operation modes 1 to 4 is accelerated by short test impulses. Rotary frequencies of up to 175 Hz are determined within 100 ms to 300 ms. For higher frequencies, a wrong frequency is determined and the synchronization fails. In operation modes 1 to 4, the Flying Start cannot
determine whether a synchronization attempt has failed.
For operation of a synchronous motor, the flux direction can be determined in order to prevent alignment of the motor shaft (jerking) during start-up. Determining the flux direction takes approx. 20 ms.
In this process, there are short torque pulses. This method is not suitable for very dynamic drives
since the torque pulses result in a rotation of the drive and consequently in wrong measurements.
Once the flux direction was determined, the flux is formed (Parameter Minimum flux-formation time
779, Maximum flux-formation time 780, Current during flux-formation 781) in order to improve the
starting behavior.
Operational Behavior
129
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Function
Operation Mode Flying Start 645
The synchronization to a rotating drive is deactivated. Factory setting.
An attempt is made to synchronize to the drive in positive direction (clockwise field of rotation) and in negative direction (anticlockwise field of rotation).
1 - On
During operation of a synchronous motor (Configuration 30 = 610), the
flux direction is determined additionally when the drive is at a standstill.
The search direction is defined by the sign of the reference value. If a positive reference value (clockwise field of rotation) is entered, the search is in
On, according to a positive direction (clockwise field of rotation), with a negative reference
2value, the search is in a negative direction (anticlockwise field of rotation).
reference
During operation of a synchronous motor (Configuration 30 = 610), the
flux direction is determined additionally when the drive is at a standstill.
Synchronization to the drive is only done in positive direction (clockwise
field of rotation).
On, clockwise
3During operation of a synchronous motor (Configuration 30 = 610), the
only
flux direction is determined additionally when the drive is at a standstill.
Synchronization to the drive is only done in negative direction (anticlockOn, anticlockwise wise field of rotation).
4During operation of a synchronous motor (Configuration 30 = 610), the
only
flux direction is determined additionally when the drive is at a standstill.
For a synchronous motor (Configuration 30 = 610), only the flux direction
Determine flux
20 is determined. The drive must be at a standstill. Synchronization to a turndirection only
ing drive is not possible. This method is faster than operation modes 1 ... 4.
For a synchronous motor (Configuration 30 = 610), only the Flying Start is
performed. The search is continued until a rotary frequency is detected
which is greater than the Frequency limit 624. If the stator frequency
drops below the frequency limit, the search run is continued. This operation
mode can be used for synchronous motors in torque-controlled drives. An
Operation above
30 example application is the operation in wind energy converters.
frequency limit
For an asynchronous motor (Configuration 30 = 410): Wait for speed.
Applicable for torque-controlled drives which have to supply only reaction
torque without active acceleration. If the drive is externally accelerated to
the speed which is sufficient for sensor-less field-orientated control, switchover to torque control is carried out.
0 - Off
Operation modes 2, 3 and 4 define a direction of rotation for the Flying Start and avoid a deviating
direction. The Flying Start can accelerate drives by checking the rotary frequency if the drives have a
low moment of inertia and/or a small load moment.
In operation modes 1 to 4, it cannot be ruled out that a wrong direction of rotation is determined. For
example, a frequency not equal to zero may be determined although the drive is at a standstill. If
there is no overcurrent, the drive is accelerated accordingly. The direction of rotation is defined in
operation modes 2, 3 and 4.
NOTE
The Flying Start function is designed for the operation of motors without brake. Brake
motors may not be operated optimum in individual cases (depending of parameterization and brake control) with the Flying start function.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
130
Operational Behavior
Parameter descriptions
7.3.6
Direct current brake
631 Braking Current
632 Braking Time
Stopping behavior 7 (Parameter Operation Mode 630) includes the direct current brake. Using the
direct current brake a motor can be decelerated faster than without direct current brake. By impressing a direct current part into the motor the losses inside the motor are artificially increased. The impression of the Braking Current 631 results in the motor heating up and should only be done for a
short period in the case of internally ventilated motors.
Parameters
No.
Description
631 Braking Current
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
Min.
0.00 A
Setting
Max.
√2⋅IFIN
Fact. sett.
√2⋅IFIN
For the application of the Direct current brake the parameter Configuration 30 must be set to “110 IM: sensor-less control” (control in accordance with V/f-characteristic).
The setting of the parameter Braking Time 632 defines the time-controlled stopping behavior. Contact-controlled operation of the direct current brake is activated by entering the value zero for the
Braking Time 632.
Time controlled:
The direct current is controlled by the status of the signals Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise.
The current set by the parameter Braking Current 631 flows until the time set by the parameter
Braking Time 632 has expired.
For the duration of the braking time, the combined control signals Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise must be logical 0 (Low) or 1 (High).
Contact-controlled:
If the parameter Braking time 632 is set to the value 0.0 s, the direct current brake is controlled by
the Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise signals. The time monitoring and limitation by Braking
Time 632 are deactivated. The braking current will be impressed until the controller enable control
signal (STOA and STOB) becomes logical 0 (low).
Parameters
No.
Description
632 Braking Time
Min.
0.0 s
Setting
Max.
200.0 s
Fact. sett.
10.0 s
633 Demagnetizing time
To avoid current surges, which can possibly lead to an error switch-off of the frequency inverter, a
direct current may only be impressed into the motor after the motor has been demagnetized. As the
demagnetization time depends on the motor used, it can be set with the parameter Demagnetizing
time 633.
The selected demagnetizing time should be approximately three times the Act. Rotor Time Con-
stant 227.
Parameters
No.
Description
633 Demagnetizing Time
Min.
0.1 s
Setting
Max.
30.0 s
Fact. sett.
5.0 s
634 Amplification
635 Integral Time
The selected stopping behavior is supplemented by a current controller to control the direct current
brake. The PI controller controls the current impression of the parameterized Braking Current 631.
The proportional and integrating part of the current controller can be set via parameters Amplification
634 and Integral Time 635. The control functions can be deactivated by setting the parameters to 0.
Operational Behavior
131
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Parameters
No.
Description
634 Amplification
635 Integral Time
7.3.7
Min.
0.00
0 ms
Setting
Max.
10.00
1000 ms
Fact. sett.
1.00
50 ms
Positioning
458 Operation Mode (Positioning)
Positioning is effected in operation mode " Reference positioning " via specification of the position distance.
Reference positioning uses a digital reference signal on digital input IN1D (terminal X11.4) for positioning the drive independent of the speed.
The function " Reference positioning " is available in configurations 110, 410 and 610 and is activated
by selecting operation mode 1 for parameter Operation Mode 458.
Operation mode 458
0 - Off
1 - Reference positioning
Function
Positioning switched off.
Reference positioning via definition of the positioning distance
(revolutions). The reference point is identified via digital input
IN1D (terminal X11.4).
459 Signal source
Reference positioning is started with the status change of the reference signal at digital input IN1D
(terminal X11.4). Logic evaluation can be selected via the parameter signal source.
Signal source 459
1 - IN1D, falling edge
11 - IN1D, rising edge
21 - IN1D, rising/falling edge
Function
The positioning starts with the change of the logic signal from
1 (High) to 0 (Low) at the reference point.
The positioning starts with the change of the logic signal from
1 (Low) to 0 (High) at the reference point.
Positioning is started with a signal change at the reference
point.
If the digital input IN1D is used for the reference signal, it must be checked if this input is linked to
another function. By default, digital input IN1D has the function " Start clockwise " (Parameter Start
clockwise 68).
Do not use digital input IN1D for positioning and a stopping behavior (parameter Operation mode
630) at the same time.
460 Positioning distance
The feedback of the current position is referred to the revolutions of the motors relative to the time of
the reference signal. The positioning accuracy depends on the current Actual Frequency 241, the
Deceleration (clockwise) 421, the No. of pole pairs 373, the selected Positioning distance 460 and
the configured control behavior.
The distance between the reference point and the required position is to be defined in motor revolutions. The calculation of the distance covered is done with the selected Positioning distance 460 according to the application.
The setting 0.000 U for the Positioning distance 460 causes an immediate stop of the drive according
to the selected stopping behavior for Operation mode 630.
Parameters
No.
Description
460 Positioning distance
U = Revolutions
Operating Instructions Agile
Setting
Max.
1000000.000 U
Min.
0.000 U
06/2013
132
Fact. sett.
0.000 U
Operational Behavior
Parameter descriptions
The actual value parameter Revolutions 470 facilitates the setting and optimization of the function.
The revolutions of the motor displayed should correspond to the Positioning distance 460 at the required position.
The minimum number of revolutions needed until the required position is reached depends on the
Actual frequency 241 and Deceleration (Clockwise) 421 (or Deceleration Anticlockwise 423) as well
as the No. of pole pairs 373 of the motor.
2
f
Uminimum =
2⋅a⋅p
Umin
f
a
p
=
=
=
=
min. number of rotations
Actual frequency 241
Deceleration 421 (or 423)
No. of pole pairs 373 of motor
Example: f = 20 Hz, a = 5 Hz/s, p = 2 ⇒ Umin = 20
With an actual frequency of 20 Hz and a delay of 5 Hz/s, at least 20 rotations are needed until standstill at the required position. This is the minimum value for the Positioning distance 460, a shorter
positioning distance is not possible. If the number of rotations until the required position is reached is
to be lower, the frequency must be reduced, the deceleration increased, or the reference point must
be shifted.
461 Signal correction
The registration of the reference position via a digital signal can be influenced by a variable dead time
while the control command is read and processed. The signal running time is compensated by a positive figure for the Signal correction 461. The setting of a negative signal correction decelerates the
processing of the digital signal.
Parameters
No.
Description
461 Signal correction
Min.
-327.68 ms
Setting
Max.
+327.67 ms
Fact. sett.
0.00 ms
462 Load correction
The influences on the positioning which depend on the operating point can be corrected empirically
via parameter Load correction 462. If the required position is not reached, the deceleration duration
is increased by a positive load correction value. The distance between the reference point and the
required position is extended. Negative values accelerate the braking process and reduce the positioning distance. The limit of the negative signal correction results from the application and the Positioning distance 460.
Parameters
No.
Description
462 Load correction
Operational Behavior
Setting
Max.
+32767
Min.
-32768
133
06/2013
Fact. sett.
0
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
463 Activity after positioning
The behavior of the positioning after the required position of the drive is reached can be defined via
parameter Activity after positioning 463.
Activity after positioning 463
0 - End positioning
1-
Waiting for positioning signal
2 - Reversal by new edge
3 - Positioning; off
4 - Start by time control
5 - Reversal by time control
Function
The drive is stopped with the stopping behavior of Operation
mode 630. In this setting only the second digit of Operation
mode 630 is evaluated. If the state “Hold” is selected, this state
is considered, all other states will result in state “Switch Off”.
The drive is stopped until the next signal edge; with a new edge
of the position signal, it is accelerated in the previous direction
of rotation.
The drive is held until the next signal edge; with a new edge of
the position signal, it is accelerated in the opposite direction of
rotation.
The drive is stopped and the power output stage of the inverter
is switched off.
The drive is stopped for the Waiting Time 464; after the waiting
time, it is accelerated in the previous direction of rotation.
The drive is stopped for the Waiting Time 464; after the waiting
time, it is accelerated in the opposite direction of rotation.
464 Waiting Time
The position reached can be maintained for the Waiting Time 464, then the drive is accelerated according to operation mode 4 or 5.
Parameters
No.
Description
464 Waiting Time
Setting
Max.
3600000 ms
Min.
0 ms
Fact. sett.
0 ms
Positioning, Operation Mode 458 = 1
The diagram shows how the positioning to the set positioning distance is effected. The positioning
distance remains constant at different frequency values. At the reference point, the position signal
SPosi is generated. Starting from frequency fmax, the positioning is effected at the set Deceleration
(clockwise) 421. At a lower frequency value f1, the frequency remains constant for some time before
the drive is stopped at the set deceleration.
If, during acceleration or deceleration of the machine, positioning is started by the signal SPosi, the
frequency at the time of the positioning signal is maintained.
f
fmax
f1
Deceleration (clockwise) 421
Umin
Sposi
U
Digital input IN1D
t
Examples of reference positioning as a function of the parameter settings selected:
− The reference point is identified by a signal at digital input IN1D (terminal X11.4).
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
134
Operational Behavior
Parameter descriptions
− The Positioning distance 460 with parameter value 0.000U (default) defines a direct stop of the
drive with the deceleration behavior selected in parameter Operation mode 630 and the selected
Deceleration (clockwise) 421. If a Positioning distance 460 is set, the positioning is effected at
the set deceleration.
− The Signal correction 461 of the signal run time from the measurement point to the frequency
inverter is not used if it is set to 0 ms.
− The Load correction 462 can compensate a faulty positioning by the load behavior. By default,
this function is deactivated, i.e. set to 0.
− The Activity after positioning 463 is defined by operation mode 0 - " End positioning " .
− The Waiting Time 464 is not considered because operation mode 0 is selected for the parameter
Action after positioning 463.
− Parameter Revolutions 470 shows the actual positioning distance and enables direct comparison
to the required Positioning distance 460. In the case of deviations, a Signal correction 461 or
Load correction 462 can be performed.
7.4
Error and warning behavior
Operation of the frequency inverter with the connected load is monitored continuously. The monitoring functions can be parameterized with the corresponding limit values specifically for the relevant
application. If the limits were set below the switch-off limit of the frequency inverter, an error switchoff can be prevented by suitable measures if a warning message is issued.
The warning message can be read via parameter Warnings 269 or output via one of the digital control outputs.
7.4.1
Overload Ixt
405 Warning limit short-term Ixt
406 Warning limit long-term Ixt
The permissible load behavior depends on the technical data of the frequency inverters and the ambient conditions.
The selected Switching frequency 400 defines the rated current and the available overload for one
second or sixty seconds. The Warning limit short-term Ixt 405 and Warning limit long-term Ixt 406
are to be parameterized accordingly.
Parameters
No.
Description
405 Warning limit short-term Ixt
406 Warning limit long-term Ixt
Min.
6%
6%
Setting
Max.
100%
100%
Fact. sett.
80%
80%
Output signals
Reaching of warning limits is reported via digital signals.
165 - Warning Ixt
7 - Ixt warning
1)
2)
The Warning Limit Short-Term Ixt 405 or Warning Limit Long-Term Ixt
406 has been reached.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
Error and warning behavior
135
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.4.2
Temperature
407 Warning limit heat sink temp.
408 Warning limit inside temp.
The ambient conditions and the energy dissipation at the current operating point result in the frequency inverter heating up. In order to avoid an error switch-off of the frequency inverter, the Warning limit heat sink temp. 407 for the heat sink temperature limit and the Warning limit inside temp.
408 as an internal temperature limit are to be parameterized. The temperature value at which a
warning message is output is calculated from the type-dependent temperature limit minus the adjusted warning limit.
The switch-off limit of the frequency inverter is dependent of the construction size.
Parameters
No.
Description
407 Warning limit heat sink temp.
408 Warning limit inside temp.
Min.
-25 °C
-25 °C
Setting
Max.
0 °C
0 °C
Fact. sett.
-5 °C
-5 °C
The exceeding of the maximum permissible internal temperature is signaled if the sensor for internal
temperature or the sensor for the electrolytic capacitor temperature measures the type-specific limit
value. For internal temperature and electrolytic capacitor temperature different limits are defined.
Output signals
Reaching of warning limits is reported via digital signals.
166
8
167
9
-
170 12 -
Heat sink temperature warning
Inside temperature
warning
1)
2)
1)
2)
1)
Warning overtemperature
The value " temperature limit minus Warning limit heat sink
temp. 407 " was reached.
The value " temperature limit minus Warning limit inside temp. 408 "
was reached.
The value
− " temperature limit minus Warning limit heat sink temp. 407 " or
2)
− " temperature limit minus Warning limit inside temp. 408 "
was reached.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
7.4.3
Controller status
409 Controller-Status Message
Intervention by a controller can be displayed via the operator panel. The selected control methods
and the matching monitoring functions prevent a switch-off of the frequency inverter. The intervention of the function changes the operating behavior of the application and can be displayed by the
status messages with parameter Controller status 275. The limit values and events which result in
the intervention by the corresponding controller are described in the corresponding chapters. The
behavior during the intervention of a controller is configured with the parameter Controller-Status
Message 409.
Controller-Status Message 409
0 - No Message
1 – Warning Status
Function
The intervention of a controller is not reported.
The controllers influencing the operating behavior are displayed in the Controller status 275 parameter.
The limitation by a controller is displayed as a warning by the
operator panel.
Chapter 7.6.5.8 " Warning mask " contains a list of controllers and describes further ways for evaluating
the controller states.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
136
Error and warning behavior
Parameter descriptions
7.4.4
Frequency switch-off limit
417 Frequency Switch-off Limit
The maximum permissible output frequency of the frequency inverter can be set to a low frequency
value via parameter Frequency Switch-off Limit 417. If this frequency limit is exceeded by the Stator
frequency 210 or the Actual frequency 241, the frequency inverter is switched off and error signal
" F1100 " is displayed.
Parameters
No.
Description
417 Frequency Switch-off Limit
Min.
0.00 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
999.99 Hz
Please comply with the descriptions of parameters Minimum frequency 418 and Maximum frequen-
cy 419 in chapter 7.5.1.1 “Limits”.
7.4.5
External error
535 Operation mode ext. error
Parameterization of an external error enables switching off or shutting down several frequency inverters at a time if a fault occurs in the plant or the drive. If an error occurs in a frequency inverter, the
error signal can be transmitted via a bus system and the required reaction can be triggered in another
frequency inverter. Parameter External error 183 can be assigned the logic signal or digital input
signal which is to trigger the external error.
Via parameter Operation mode ext. error 535, the response to an external error can be configured.
Operation mode 535
0 - Disabled
1 - Error-Switch-Off
2 - Shutdown, Error
3-
Emergency-Stop,
Error
Function
No response to external errors.
The drive is switched off and the error message “F1454 External Error” is
output if the logic signal or digital input signal for parameter External
Error 183 is present.
The drive is stopped at the current deceleration ramp and the error message „F1454 External Error“ is output if the logic signal or digital input
signal for parameter External error 183 is present.
The drive is stopped at the set emergency stop ramp and the error message „F1454 External Error“ is output if the logic signal or digital input
signal for parameter External error 183 is present.
For setting up external warnings parameters User Warning 1 1363 and User Warning 2 1364 can be
used. Check chapter 7.6.5.9 “Warning mask, application” for further details.
7.4.6
Motor temperature
570 Operation Mode Motor Temp.
Automatic shut-down of the frequency inverter or the output of a warning message offers protection
against overheating of the motor. For monitoring the motor temperature, a temperature sensor must
be connected to multifunction input 2. Parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp. 570 must be set
according to the connected temperature sensor.
The motor temperature is evaluated via one of the following temperature sensors:
− Thermal contact (bimetal temperature sensor)
− PTC resistor (motor PTC)
− KTY measuring resistor
− Resistor PT1000
Motor temperature measurement enables:
− monitoring of temperature limits via a thermal contact or PTC resistor or
− temperature measurement, temperature monitoring and temperature display via a KTY measuring
resistor or a resistor PT1000
Error and warning behavior
137
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Function
Operation Mode Motor
Temp. 570
0 - Off
1-
2-
3-
11 -
12 -
13 -
21 -
Motor temperature monitoring switched off.
Monitoring for temperature limit. A thermal overload is displayed via
the operator panel and parameter Warnings 269. For parameter
Thermal contact for P570 204, the digital input to which the therTherm.-Contact, P204:
mal contact is connected must be selected. In the factory setup,
Warning only
multifunction input 2 can be used for connection of a thermal contact (Thermal contact for P570 204 is set to MFI2D). The input
signal must be digital. The evaluation (NPN/PNP) of the input signal
can be set via parameter Operation mode MFI2 562.
Monitoring for temperature limit. The frequency inverter is switched
off immediately if the motor is thermally overloaded. The error
switch-off is displayed by message F0400. For parameter Thermal
contact for P570 204, the digital input to which the thermal contact
Therm.-Contact, P204:
is connected must be selected. In the factory setup, multifunction
Error Switch-Off
input 2 can be used for connection of a thermal contact (Thermal
contact for P570 204 is set to MFI2D). The input signal must be
digital. The evaluation (NPN/PNP) of the input signal can be set via
parameter Operation mode MFI2 562.
Monitoring for temperature limit. The frequency inverter is switched
off if the motor is thermally overloaded. The error switch-off is displayed by message F0400. The error switch-off is delayed by one
minute. For parameter Thermal contact for P570 204, the digital
Therm.-Contact, P204:
input to which the thermal contact is connected must be selected. In
Err.Switch-Off 1 min
the factory setup, multifunction input 2 can be used for connection
delayed
of a thermal contact (Thermal contact for P570 204 is set to
MFI2D). The input signal must be digital. The evaluation (NPN/PNP)
of the input signal can be set via parameter Operation mode MFI2
562.
Monitoring for temperature limit. A thermal overload is displayed via
the operator panel and parameter Warnings 269. Multifunction
MPTC, MFI2: Warning
input 2 can be used as input for monitoring of a temperature value
only
with motor PTC (PTC as per DIN 44081). The input signal must be
analog.
Monitoring for temperature limit. The frequency inverter is switched
off immediately if the motor is thermally overloaded. The error
MPTC, MFI2: Error
switch-off is displayed by message F0400. Multifunction input 2 can
Switch-Off
be used as input for monitoring of a temperature value with motor
PTC (PTC as per DIN 44081). The input signal must be analog.
Monitoring for temperature limit. The frequency inverter is switched
off if the motor is thermally overloaded. The error switch-off is disMPTC, MFI2: Err.Switch- played by message F0400. The error switch-off is delayed by one
Off 1 min delayed
minute. Multifunction input 2 can be used as input for monitoring of
a temperature value with motor PTC (PTC as per DIN 44081). The
input signal must be analog.
Temperature measurement. A thermal overload is displayed via the
operator panel and parameter Warnings 269. The warning is displayed as soon as the value of Max. Temp. Motor Winding 617 is
KTY, MFI2: Warning only reached. Multifunction input 2 can be reached as input for temperature measurement with a KTY measuring resistor (KTY84). The input signal must be analog. Parameter Winding temperature 226
shows the actual value.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
138
Error and warning behavior
Parameter descriptions
Function
Operation Mode Motor
Temp. 570
22 -
23 -
31 -
32 -
33 -
Temperature measurement. The frequency inverter is switched off
immediately as soon as the value of Max. Temp. Motor Winding
617 is reached. The error switch-off is displayed by message F0400.
KTY, MFI2: Error SwitchMultifunction input 2 can be reached as input for temperature
Off
measurement with a KTY measuring resistor (KTY84). The input
signal must be analog. Parameter Winding Temperature 226 shows
the actual value.
Temperature measurement. The frequency inverter is switched off
as soon as the value of Max. Temp. Motor Winding 617 is reached.
The error switch-off is displayed by message F0400. The error
KTY, MFI2: Err.Switchswitch-off is delayed by one minute. Multifunction input 2 can be
Off 1 min delayed
reached as input for temperature measurement with a KTY measuring resistor (KTY84). The input signal must be analog. Parameter
Winding Temperature 226 shows the actual value.
Temperature measurement. A thermal overload is displayed via the
operator panel and parameter Warnings 269. The warning is displayed as soon as the value of Max. Temp. Motor Winding 617 is
PT1000, MFI2: Warning
reached. Multifunction input 2 can be reached as input for temperaonly
ture measurement with a measuring resistor PT1000. The input
signal must be analog. Parameter Winding Temperature 226 shows
the actual value.
Temperature measurement. The frequency inverter is switched off
immediately as soon as the value of Max. Temp. Motor Winding
617 is reached. The error switch-off is displayed by message F0400.
PT1000, MFI2: Error
Multifunction input 2 can be reached as input for temperature
Switch-Off
measurement with a measuring resistor PT1000. The input signal
must be analog. Parameter Winding Temperature 226 shows the
actual value.
Temperature measurement. The frequency inverter is switched off
as soon as the value of Max. Temp. Motor Winding 617 is reached.
The error switch-off is displayed by message F0400. The error
PT1000, MFI2:
switch-off is delayed by one minute. Multifunction input 2 can be
Err.Switch-Off 1 min
reached as input for temperature measurement with a measuring
delayed
resistor PT1000. The input signal must be analog. Parameter Winding Temperature 226 shows the actual value.
Error Acknowledgment
− Thermal contact or MPTC: An error message can be acknowledged if the sensor does not signal
overtemperature anymore.
− KTY or PT1000: An error message can be acknowledged if the motor temperature has dropped
below the switch-off threshold by 5°C.
Possibilities of error acknowledgement:
− via operator panel or
− via parameter Error Acknowledgement 103 which is assigned a logic signal or a digital input
Evaluation of the motor temperature is independent of the controller enable.
If motor temperature monitoring with MPTC, KTY or PT1000 is selected via parameter
Operation Mode Motor Temp. 570, multifunction input 2 cannot be used for other
functions. In this case, parameters 560 … 567 of multifunction input 2 don't have any
function.
Error and warning behavior
139
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
If motor temperature monitoring with thermal contact is selected via parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp. 570, multifunction input 2 can only be set, via parameter
Operation mode MFI2 562 to " 3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V) " . In this case, multifunction input 2 cannot be used for controlling other
functions.
If another digital input is used for connection of the thermal contact, this input must
be selected for parameter Thermal contact for P570 204.
Multifunction input 2 can be used for other functions if the factory setting is changed
for parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 (i.e. if a digital input is selected, not
multifunction input 2).
617 Max. Temp. Motor Winding
Via parameter Max. Temp. Motor Winding 617, you can set the temperature value above which a
warning message is output or an error switch-off of the frequency inverter is effected.
The value of Max. Temp. Motor Winding 617 is evaluated if the analog signal of a temperature sensor is connected to multifunction input 2 and one of the following settings is selected for parameter
Operation Mode Motor Temp. 570:
− 21 … 23: KTY
− 31 … 33: PT1000
Parameters
No.
Description
617 Max. Temp. Motor Winding
Min.
0 °C
Setting
Max.
200 °C
Fact. sett.
150 °C
Output signals
Warnings are displayed in parameter Warnings 269 and output via digital signals.
168 -
1)
10 -
2)
17 -
3)
Motortemperature warning
The monitoring function – selected via Operation Mode Motor
Temp. 570 – signals a thermal overload or reaching of the value of
Max. Temp. Motor Winding 617.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
3)
For monitoring via parameter Create Warning Mask 536.
2)
7.4.6.1
Technical demands on measuring resistors
PTC resistor
Multifunction input 2 (terminal X12.4) is designed for connection of a PTC resistor with the following
specifications:
Rated response temperature:
90 °C to 160 °C in steps of 10 K
Temperature characteristic:
according to DIN 44081
KTY84 measuring resistor
Multifunction input 2 (terminal X12.4) is designed for connection of a KTY84 measuring resistor with
the following specifications:
Resistance:
1 kΩ at 100 °C ambient temperature
Measuring range:
-40 … 300 °C
Temperature coefficient:
0.61%/K
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
140
Error and warning behavior
Parameter descriptions
3
R
2
1
0
-100
0
100
200
Tamb
[°C]
300
KTY resistance R depending on ambient temperature Tamb
Measuring resistor PT1000
Multifunction input 2 is designed for connection of a PT 1000 measuring resistor with the following
specifications:
Resistance:
1 kΩ at 0 °C ambient temperature
Measuring range:
-40 … 550 °C
Connection
PTC
KTY
PT1000
X12
MFI2
Thermal contact
T
X11
T
GND
4
2
Operation mode motor temp. 570 =
1, 2 or 3
11, 12 or 13
21, 22 or 23
31, 32 or 33
Thermal contact for
P570 204,=
532 - MFI2D (Hardware)
7.4.7
Phase failure
576 Phase Supervision
If a failure of one of the three motor or mains phases is not noticed, the frequency inverter, the motor
and the mechanical drive components may be damaged. In order to prevent these components from
being damaged, the phases are monitored for failure. Via parameter Phase Supervision 576, the behavior in case of a phase failure can be set.
Error and warning behavior
141
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Function
In the case of a phase failure, the error switch-off takes place after
Mains: Error Switch10 5 minutes, fault F0703 is displayed. During this time, the warning mesOff
sage A0100 is displayed.
The phase monitor switches the frequency inverter off:
Phase Supervision 576
11 -
Mains & Motor: Error Switch-Off
20 - Mains: Shutdown
21 -
Mains & Motor:
Shutdown
7.4.8
− immediately with error message F0403 in the case of a motor phase
failure
− after 5 minutes with error message F0703 in the case of a mains
phase failure
In the case of a mains phase failure, the drive is stopped after 5
minutes, fault F0703 is displayed.
− The drive is switched off: immediately, in the case of a motor phase
failure
− The drive is stopped: after 5 minutes in the case of a mains phase
failure
Automatic Error Acknowledgment
578 Allowed No. of Auto-Acknowl.
579 Restart Delay
The automatic error acknowledgment enables acknowledgment of the faults Overcurrent F0507 and
Overvoltage F0700 without intervention by an overriding control system or the user. If one of the
aforementioned errors occurs, the frequency inverter switches the power semi-conductors off and
waits for the time stated with the parameter Restart Delay 579. If the error is acknowledged, the
speed of the machine is determined with the quick Search Run function and synchronized to the
rotating machine. The automatic error acknowledgment makes use of " Quick Synchronization " operation mode, regardless of the Flying Start Operation Mode 645. The information given on this function
in chapter 7.3.5 " Flying Start " must be observed.
With parameter Allowed No. of Auto-Acknowl. 578, you can define the number of automatic error
acknowledgements which are permitted within 10 minutes.
An acknowledgement repeated above the permissible number within 10 minutes will result in the frequency inverter being switched off.
The errors Overcurrent F0507 and Overvoltage F0700 have separate error acknowledgement counters.
Parameters
No.
Description
578 Allowed No. of Auto-Acknowl.
579 Restart Delay
Min.
0
0 ms
7.5
Fact. sett.
5
20 ms
Reference Values
7.5.1
Setting
Max.
20
1000 ms
Reference frequency channel
475 Reference Frequency Source 1
492 Reference Frequency Source 2
Via the reference frequency channel, you can define how the reference rotary frequency for the motor
is to be specified. For each of parameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and Reference Frequency Source 2 492, you can select a reference value specification option. The selected reference
values are added and output as rotary frequency reference value for the motor.
The settings of frequency limits (Parameter Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419)
and blocking frequencies (parameter 1st Blocking Frequency 447, 2nd Blocking Frequency 448) as
well as Frequency Hysteresis 449 are considered.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
142
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
If the same setting is selected for parameter Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and
Reference Frequency Source 2 492, the reference value is not doubled. In this case
the reference value is the single value of the selected reference value source.
Selection of source for reference value:
Function
Reference Frequency Source 1 475
Reference Frequency Source 2 492
0 - Zero
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
2 - Analog Value MFI2A
3 - Fixed Frequency
4 - Motorpot. via Digital Inputs
5 - Keypad-Motorpot.
10 - Repetition Frequency
20 - Fieldbus Reference Value
30 - Technology Controller
40 - electr. Gear
2501 - PLC Output Frequency 1
Reference Values
Reference value is zero.
Multifunction input 1 is the reference value source. Via
parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452, the input must be
set up as an analog input (voltage or current). By setting
the voltage or current value at multifunction input 1, you
can set the output frequency. Factory setting for Reference Frequency Source 1 475. See chapter 7.6.1
" Multifunction input MFI1 " .
Multifunction input 2 is the reference value source. Via
parameter Operation mode MFI2 562, the input must be
set up as an analog input (voltage or current). By setting
the voltage or current value at multifunction input 2, you
can set the output frequency. See chapter 7.6.2
" Multifunction input MFI2 " .
The selected fixed frequency is the reference value source.
The fixed frequency of the current data set is selected via
Fixed frequency changeover 1 66, Fixed frequency
changeover 2 67 and Fixed frequency changeover 3 131.
The fixed frequency values can be set in parameters 480 …
488. See chapter 7.5.1.3 " Fixed frequencies " .
Reference value source is the function Frequency motorpoti up 62 and Frequency motorpoti down 63. The output
frequency can be set by digital signals. See chapter 7.5.3
" Motor potentiometer " .
The operator panel is the reference value source, with
keys ▲ for increasing the frequency and ▼ for reducing
the frequency. Factory setting for Reference frequency
source 2 492. See chapter 7.5.3.4.1 " Control via reference
frequency channel " .
The frequency signal at digital input IN2D is the reference
value source. For parameter Operation mode IN2D 496 of
the repetition frequency input, " 20 - repetition frequency
single evaluation " or " 21 - repetition frequency double
evaluation " must be selected. See chapter 7.6.7.2
" Repetition frequency input " .
The reference value is transmitted via a bus system.
Profibus: The value of PZD2 is used as reference value.
CANopen: The value of object 0x6042 Target Velocity is
used as reference value.
The output of the PID controller is the reference value
source. If this source is selected for Reference frequency
source 1 475 or Reference frequency source 2 492, the
technology controller is switched on. See chapter 7.9.3
" PID controller (technology controller) "
The output of the electronic gear is the reference value
source. If this source is selected for Reference frequency
source 1 475 or Reference frequency source 2 492, the
electronic gear is switched on. See chapter 7.5.4
" Electronic gear " .
Frequency output 1 of a PLC function block is the reference value source. See application manual " PLC " .
143
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Function
Reference Frequency Source 1 475
Reference Frequency Source 2 492
2502 - PLC Output Frequency 2
Frequency output 2 of a PLC function block is the reference value source. See application manual " PLC " .
The reference frequency channel can be used in all configurations (parameter Configuration 30).
Block diagram
The block diagram shows the reference frequency specification options.
Lock the reference value facilities of the control panel
If the setting possibility of the reference frequency at the operator panel must be locked:
•
For parameter Reference Frequency Source 1 475 the setting “5 - Keypad-Motorpot.” must not be
selected and
•
for parameter Reference Frequency Source 2 492 the setting “5 - Keypad-Motorpot.” must not be
selected.
•
Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of parameters. Refer to chapter 7.1.3
“Set password”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
144
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
NOTE
The setting of Parameter Set Password 27 only does not lock the control facilities of the
keypad. Start, Stop, Change direction of rotation, Poti F and Poti P are still available.
7.5.1.1
Limits
418 Minimum Frequency
419 Maximum Frequency
The area of the output frequency of the frequency inverter and thus the speed setting range are defined by the parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419. The corresponding
control methods use the two limit values for scaling and calculating the frequency.
Parameters
No.
Description
418 Minimum Frequency
419 Maximum Frequency
Min.
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
3.50 Hz
50.00 Hz
The parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419 can only be changed while
the output stage is inhibited.
719 Slip Frequency
The torque-forming current component and thus the slip frequency of the 3-phase machine depend
on the required torque in the case of the field-orientated control methods. The field-orientated control
method also includes the parameter Slip Frequency 719 to limit the torque in the calculation of the
machine model. The rated slip calculated from the rated motor parameters is limited in accordance
with the Slip Frequency 719 which is parameterized as a percentage.
Parameters
No.
Description
719 Slip Frequency
7.5.1.2
Min.
0%
Setting
Max.
10000%
Fact. sett.
330%
Positive and negative reference frequencies
493 Operation Mode (reference frequency source)
Via parameter Operation Mode 493, you can define if the reference frequency value set via parameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and Reference Frequency Source 2 492 is to be either positive or negative only or if it can be both positive and negative. You can also output the reference frequency as an inverted value (compared to the selected reference value source).
Operation Mode 493
0 - Off
1 - +/- reference value
2 - Positive only
3 - Inverted
Reference Values
Function
The reference frequency channel is switched off. The reference
frequency is 0 Hz.
The reference frequency can be both positive and negative. The
values of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference frequency source 2 492 are added up. Factory setting.
The reference frequency can only be positive. The reference frequency is limited to the range from 0 Hz to the Maximum frequency 419. The values of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference frequency source 2 492 are added up, then the result is
limited to positive values.
The reference frequency is inverted (compared to the sign of the
selected reference value source). The values of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference frequency source 2 492 are added
up, then the result is inverted.
145
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.5.1.3
Fixed frequencies
480 Fixed frequency 1
481 Fixed frequency 2
482 Fixed frequency 3
483 Fixed frequency 4
485 Fixed frequency 5
486 Fixed frequency 6
487 Fixed frequency 7
488 Fixed frequency 8
Via digital logic signals or digital inputs fixed preset reference values can be selected.
The fixed frequencies are reference values for the rotary frequency of the motor. Eight fixed frequencies can be set. The fixed frequencies can be selected via Fixed Frequency Change-Over 1 66, Fixed
Frequency Change-Over 2 67 and Fixed Frequency Change-Over 3 131. Logic signals or digital inputs must be assigned to the parameters Fixed Frequency Change-Over 1 66, Fixed Frequency
Change-Over 2 67 and Fixed Frequency Change-Over 3 131.
Via the reference frequency channel (see chapter 7.5.1 " Reference frequency channel " ), the fixed
frequencies can be selected and linked to other reference value sources. Linking is effected via parameters Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and Reference Frequency Source 2 492.
No.
480
481
482
483
485
486
487
488
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Parameters
Description
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Frequency 3
Frequency 4
Frequency 5
Frequency 6
Frequency 7
Frequency 8
Min.
-999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
0.00 Hz
10.00 Hz
25.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
5.00 Hz
10.00 Hz
25.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
•
Set the required number of fixed frequencies (parameters 480 … 488).
•
For fixed frequency changeover (parameters 66, 67, 131), select digital inputs.
•
Select fixed frequencies with signals at digital inputs.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
146
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
66 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 1
67 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 2
131 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 3
By combining the logic states of the fixed frequency change-over inputs 1, 2 and 3, fixed frequencies
1 through 8 (parameters 480 to 488) can be selected.
Selection of fixed frequencies
Fixed Frequency Fixed Frequency Fixed Frequency
Change-Over 1
Change-Over 2
Change-Over 3
66
67
131
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0 = contact open
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Active fixed value
Fixed frequency 1 480
Fixed frequency 2 481
Fixed frequency 3 482
Fixed frequency 4 483
Fixed frequency 5 485
Fixed frequency 6 486
Fixed frequency 7 487
Fixed frequency 8 488
Factory
setting
0
10
25
50
5
10
25
50
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
1 = contact closed
Number of digital inputs
Number of fixed frequencies
per data set
1
2
3
2
4
8
Fixed frequency change-over factory settings:
No.
Parameters
Setting
66
Fixed frequency change-over 1
74 – IN4D
67
131
Fixed frequency change-over 2
Fixed frequency change-over 3
7 - Off
7 - Off
If the data set changeover function is used additionally via parameters Data Set Change-Over 1 70
and Data Set Change-Over 2 71, you can preset up to 32 fixed frequencies as reference values.
The fixed frequency changeover can also be controlled via digital signals (instead of digital inputs) by
functions of the frequency inverter.
Via parameter Operation Mode 493, you can change the direction of rotation of the motor. See chapter 7.5.1.2 " Positive and negative reference frequencies " . The direction of rotation can also be preset
with the digital signal sources assigned to the parameters Start Clockwise 68 and Start Anticlockwise 69.
Via the reference frequency channel (see chapter 7.5.1 " Reference frequency channel " ), the fixed
reference values can be selected and linked to other reference value sources.
7.5.1.4
Ramps
420 Acceleration (Clockwise)
421 Deceleration (Clockwise)
422 Acceleration Anticlockwise
423 Deceleration Anticlockwise
The ramps determine how quickly the frequency value is changed if the reference value changes or
after a start, stop or brake command. The maximum admissible ramp gradient can be selected according to the application and the current consumption of the motor.
Reference Values
147
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
For setting identical frequency ramps for both directions of rotation, the parameterization via the parameters Acceleration (Clockwise) 420 and Deceleration (Clockwise) 421 is sufficient. The values of
the frequency ramps are taken over for Acceleration Anticlockwise 422 and Deceleration Anticlockwise 423 if these have been parameterized to the factory setting of -0.01 Hz/s.
The parameter value of 0.00 Hz/s for the acceleration blocks the corresponding direction of rotation.
A set Ramp Rise Time 430 affects the ramps.
No.
420
421
422
423
1)
2)
Parameters
Description
Acceleration (Clockwise)
Deceleration (Clockwise)
Acceleration Anticlockwise
Deceleration Anticlockwise
Min.
0.00 Hz/s
-0.01 Hz/s 1)
-0.01 Hz/s 2)
-0.01 Hz/s 2)
Setting
Max.
9999.99 Hz/s
9999.99 Hz/s
9999.99 Hz/s
9999.99 Hz/s
Fact. sett.
5.00 Hz/s
5.00 Hz/s
-0.01 Hz/s 2)
-0.01 Hz/s 2)
Value -0.01 Hz/s means: Acceleration (Clockwise) 420 is applied.
Value -0.01 Hz/s means: The ramps of clockwise operation are applied.
The setting 0.00 Hz/s won’t accelerate or decelerate the drive due to the limitation of
the ramp.
424 Emergency Stop Clockwise
425 Emergency Stop Anticlockwise
The ramps for the Emergency Stop Clockwise 424 and Emergency Stop Anticlockwise 425 of the
drive to be activated via Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior must be selected according
to the application. The non-linear (S-shaped) curve of the ramps is not active in the case of an emergency stop of the drive.
Parameters
No.
Description
424 Emergency Stop Clockwise
425 Emergency Stop Anticlockwise
Min.
0.01 Hz/s
0.01 Hz/s
Setting
Max.
9999.99 Hz/s
9999.99 Hz/s
Fact. sett.
5.00 Hz/s
5.00 Hz/s
+fmax
Clockwise
rotating field
Acceleration
(Clockwise) 420
Deceleration (Clockwise) 421
or
Emergency Stop Clockwise 424
t
Acceleration Anticlockwise 422
Anticlockwise
rotating field
Deceleration Anticlockwise 423
or
Emergency Stop Anticlockwise 425
-fmax
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
148
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
426 Maximum Leading
The parameter Maximum Leading 426 limits the difference between the output of the ramp and the
current actual value of the drive. The set maximum deviation is a dead time for the control system
which should be kept as low as possible.
In case the drive is loaded heavily and high acceleration and deceleration values are selected it is
possible, that a set controller limit is reached while the drive is accelerated or decelerated. In this
case, the drive cannot follow the defined acceleration or deceleration ramps. With Maximum Leading
426, you can limit the maximum leading of the ramp.
Parameters
No.
Description
426 Maximum Leading
Min.
0.01 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
5.00 Hz
Example: Frequency at ramp output = 20 Hz, current actual value of drive = 15 Hz, selected Maxi-
mum Leading 426 = 5 Hz
The frequency at the ramp output is increased to 20 Hz only, it is not increased further. The difference (leading) between the frequency value at the ramp output and the current actual frequency of
the drive is limited to 5 Hz in this way.
430 Ramp Rise Time
The load occurring in a linear acceleration of the drive is reduced by the adjustable modification speed
(S-curve). Via the S-curve, the drive can be accelerated and decelerated more uniformly and load
peaks upon the start of the acceleration and deceleration can be avoided. The non-linear curve of the
frequency indicates states the time range in which the frequency is to be guided to the set ramp. Setting the ramp rise time increases the acceleration and deceleration times.
The value set for the Ramp Rise Time 430 is effective for:
− acceleration and deceleration
− clockwise and anticlockwise operation
If the ramp time is set to 0 ms, the S curve is deactivated.
Parameters
No.
Description
430 Ramp Rise Time
Reference Values
Min.
0 ms
149
Setting
Max.
10000 ms
06/2013
Fact. sett.
0 ms
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
If the data set is changed during acceleration or deceleration, it is ensured that the Scurve of the previous data set is finished first. Unintentional jumps between different
gradients of the S-curve are avoided.
7.5.1.5
Blocking frequencies
447 1st Blocking Frequency
448 2nd Blocking Frequency
449 Frequency Hysteresis
In certain applications, it is necessary to block out reference frequencies. In this way, resonance
points of the system as stationary operating points are avoided. The parameters 1st Blocking Frequency 447, 2nd Blocking Frequency 448 and Frequency Hysteresis 449 define two resonance
points.
A blocking frequency is active if the parameter values of the blocking frequency and the frequency
hysteresis are not equal to 0.00 Hz.
The area faded out as a stationary working point by the hysteresis is passed through as quickly as
possible according to the ramp set. If the output frequency is limited as a result of the selected control parameter settings, e.g. if the current limit is reached, the hysteresis is passed through with a
delay. The behavior of the reference value can be determined from its direction of movement according to the following diagram.
No.
447
448
449
Parameters
Description
1st Blocking Frequency
2nd Blocking Frequency
Frequency Hysteresis
Min.
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
100.00 Hz
Fact. sett.
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Reference value output
Hysteresis Hysteresis
fBlocking-Hysteresis
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
fBlocking
fBlocking+Hysteresis
150
Reference value
internal
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
7.5.1.6
JOG frequency
81 JOG Start
489 JOG Frequency
The drive rotates at a preset frequency when the JOG function is started. The rotary frequency can be
set via the parameter JOG Frequency 489.
The JOG function can be started:
− Via the button " RUN " on the operator panel. The " JOG " menu must be selected.
− Via parameter JOG Start 81. The parameter must be assigned a logic signal or a digital input.
Preconditions for start of JOG function:
− Enable via digital inputs STOA and STOB must be set.
− Signals for parameters Start Clockwise 68 and Start Anticlockwise 69 must not be set.
Parameters
No.
Description
489 JOG Frequency
Min.
-999.99 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
5.00 Hz
Positive values of JOG Frequency 489 effect clockwise rotation, negative values effect anticlockwise
rotation.
JOG Start 81
Selection of signal source
Function
The selected signal source starts the JOG function. The drive is
accelerated to the value of JOG Frequency 489.
Acceleration and deceleration
If enable is set and the JOG function is started, the drive is accelerated at the set frequency ramps to
the value of JOG Frequency 489.
If the signal JOG Start 81 is reset (or the button " RUN " is released), the drive is decelerated at the
set frequency ramps until it comes to a standstill.
Limit
The output frequency is limited to the value of Maximum Frequency 419. There is no limitation to the
value of Minimum Frequency 418. Blocking frequencies (parameters 447 to 449) are not considered.
Controls via JOG Start 81 and button " RUN " in " JOG " menu may be used at the same
time.
If a start command is issued during JOG operation (Parameter Start Clockwise 68 or
Start Anticlockwise 69), the frequency inverter returns to normal operation mode. If
the start command is reset, the frequency inverter returns to JOG operation again.
7.5.2
Reference percentage channel
476 Reference Percentage Source 1
494 Reference Percentage Source 2
The reference percentage channel combines various signal sources for definition of the reference figures. The percentage scaling facilitates integration into the application and processing of process parameters. Reference percentages may be used, for example, for setting reference values for the PID
controller (technology controller) of torques.
For each of parameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494,
you can select a reference value source. The selected reference values are added.
Percentage value limit settings (Parameter Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum Reference Percentage 519) are considered.
Reference Values
151
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
If the same setting is selected for parameter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and
Reference Percentage Source 2 494, the reference value is not doubled. In this case
the reference value is the single value of the selected reference value source.
Selection of source for reference value:
Function
Reference Percentage Source 1 476
Reference Percentage Source 2 494
0 - Zero
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
2 - Analog Value MFI2A
3 - Fixed Percentage
4 - Motorpot. via Digital Inputs
5 - Keypad-Motorpot.
10 - Repetition Percentage Value
20 - Fieldbus Percentage Value
95 - Obj 0x6071 Target Torque
2521 - PLC Output Percentage 1
2522 - PLC Output Percentage 2
Reference value is zero.
Multifunction input 1 is the reference value source (terminal X12.3). Via Operation mode MFI1 452, the input must
be set up as an analog input (voltage or current). Factory
setting for Reference percentage source 1 476.
See chapter 7.6.1 " Multifunction input MFI1 " .
Multifunction input 2 is the reference value source (terminal X12.4). Via Operation mode MFI2 562, the input must
be set up as an analog input (voltage or current).
See chapter 7.6.2 " Multifunction input MFI2 " .
The selected fixed percentage is the reference value
source. The fixed percentage of the current data set is
selected via Fixed percentage value changeover 1 75 and
Fixed percentage value changeover 2 76.
See chapter 7.5.2 " Fixed percentages " .
Reference value source is the function Percentage motorpoti up 72 and Percentage motorpoti down 73.
See chapter 7.5.3 " Motor potentiometer " .
The operator panel is the reference value source, with
keys ▲ for increasing the percentage and ▼ for reducing
the percentage. Factory setting for Reference percentage
source 2 494.
See chapter 7.5.3.4.2 " Control via reference percentage
channel " .
Digital input IN2D (terminal X11.5) which is set as PWM
input or the pulse train input are used as the reference
value source.
PWM input: For parameter Operation mode IN2D 496,
select setting " 10 - PWM input 0% – 100% " or " 11 - PWM
input -100% – 100% " .
Pulse train input: For parameter Operation mode IN2D
496, select setting " 30 - pulse train " .
See chapter 7.6.7 " Input PWM/repetition frequency/pulse
train " .
The reference value is transmitted via a bus system. The
field bus must write the value in format xxx.xx % into parameter 524, from which the value is then used.
The torque reference value for torque control is transmitted via CANopen bus system. The signal source contains
the value of CANopen object 0x6071. Refer to the communication manual CANopen.
Percentage output 1 of a PLC-function is the reference
value source. See application manual " PLC " .
Percentage output 2 of a PLC-function is the reference
value source. See application manual " PLC " .
The reference percentage channel can be used in all configurations (parameter Configuration 30).
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
152
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
Block diagram
The block diagram shows the reference percentage setting options.
Lock the control possibilities of the control panel
If the setting possibility of the reference percentage at the operator panel must be locked:
•
For parameter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 the setting “5 - Keypad-Motorpot.” must not
be selected and
•
for parameter Reference Percentage Source 2 494 the setting “5 - Keypad-Motorpot.” must not
be selected.
•
Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of parameters. Refer to chapter 7.1.3
“Set password”.
NOTE
The setting of Parameter Set Password 27 only does not lock the control facilities of the
keypad. Start, Stop, Change direction of rotation, Poti F and Poti P are still available.
Reference Values
153
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.5.2.1
Limits
518 Minimum Reference Percentage
519 Maximum Reference Percentage
The setting range of the percentages is defined by the parameters Minimum Reference Percentage
518 and Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The relevant control methods use the two limit values
for scaling and calculating the frequency.
Parameters
No.
Description
518 Minimum Reference Percentage
519 Maximum Reference Percentage
7.5.2.2
Min.
0.00%
0.00%
Setting
Max.
300.00%
300.00%
Fact. sett.
0.00%
100.00%
Positive and negative reference percentages
495 Operation Mode (reference percentage source)
Via parameter Operation Mode 495, you can define if the reference value set via parameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 is to be either positive or
negative only or if it can be both positive and negative. You can also output the reference percentage
as an inverted value (compared to the selected reference value source).
Operation mode 495
0 - Off
1 - +/- reference value
2 - Positive only
3 - Inverted
Function
Reference percentage channel is switched off. Reference percentage is 0%.
The reference percentage can be both positive and negative. The
values of Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 are added up. Factory setting.
The reference percentage can only be positive. The reference percentage is limited to the range from 0% to the Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The values of Reference Percentage Source
1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 are added up, then
the result is limited to positive values.
The reference percentage is inverted (compared to the sign of the
selected reference value source). The values of Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 are
added up, then the result is inverted.
The inversion of the reference percentage by means of signal start-anticlockwise or operator panel is
only possible if the reference percentage is used as torque reference. Use parameter n-/T-Control
Change-Over 164 for switching-on the torque control.
7.5.2.3
Fixed percentages
520 Fixed Percentage 1
521 Fixed Percentage 2
522 Fixed Percentage 3
523 Fixed Percentage 4
Via digital logic signals or digital inputs fixed preset reference values can be selected.
The fixed percentages define reference values. Four fixed percentages can be set. The fixed percentages can be selected via Fixed Percent Change-Over 1 75 and Fixed Percent Change-Over 2 76.
Logic signals or digital inputs must be assigned to the parameters Fixed Percent Change-Over 1 75
and Fixed Percent Change-Over 2 76.
Via the reference percentage channel (see chapter 7.5.2 " Reference percentage channel " ), the fixed
percentages can be selected and linked to other reference value sources. Linking is effected via parameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
154
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
No.
520
521
522
523
•
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Parameters
Description
Percentage 1
Percentage 2
Percentage 3
Percentage 4
Min.
-300.00%
-300.00%
-300.00%
-300.00%
Setting
Max.
300.00%
300.00%
300.00%
300.00%
Fact. sett.
0.00%
20.00%
50.00%
100.00%
Set the required number of fixed percentages (parameters 520 … 523).
•
For fixed percentage changeover (parameters 75, 76, 131), select digital inputs.
•
Select fixed percentages with signals at digital inputs.
75 Fixed Percent Change-Over 1
76 Fixed Percent Change-Over 2
By combining the logic states of the fixed percentage changeover modes 1 and 2, fixed percentages 1
through 4 can be selected:
Fixed percentage control
Fixed Percent
Fixed Percent
Change-Over 1 75 Change-Over 2 76
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0 = contact open
Active fixed value
Fixed Percentage 1 520
Fixed Percentage 2 521
Fixed Percentage 3 522
Fixed Percentage 4 523
1 = contact closed
Number of digital inputs
Number of fixed percentage values
per data set
1
2
2
4
If the data set changeover function is used additionally via parameters Data Set Change-Over 1 70
and Data Set Change-Over 2 71, you can preset up to 16 fixed percentages as reference values.
The fixed percentage changeover can also be controlled via digital signals, instead of digital inputs, by
functions of the frequency inverter.
Via parameter Operation Mode 495, you can change the direction of rotation of the motor. See chapter 7.5.2.2 " Positive and negative reference percentages " . The direction of rotation can also be preset
with the digital signal sources assigned to the parameters Start clockwise 68 and Start anticlockwise
69.
Via the reference percentage channel (see chapter 7.5.2 " Reference percentage channel " ), the fixed
reference values can be selected and linked to other reference value sources.
7.5.2.4
Ramps
477 Gradient Percentage Ramp
The percentage value ramps scale the change of the reference value (in percent) for the corresponding input function. The acceleration and deceleration of the drive are parameterized via the frequency
ramps.
The behavior Gradient Percentage Ramp 477 corresponds to a function which takes the time behavior of the drive system into account. If the parameter is set to 0 %/s, this function is deactivated and
a direct reference value modification for the following function is obtained.
Parameters
No.
Description
477 Gradient Percentage Ramp
Reference Values
Min.
0 %/s
155
Setting
Max.
60000 %/s
06/2013
Fact. sett.
10 %/s
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.5.3
Motor potentiometer
The reference speed (or the percentage reference value) of the drive can be set via digital control
signals or with the operator panel:
− Digital control signals: Function " Motorpoti via digital inputs "
− Operator panel: Function " Keypad motorpoti "
The functions " Motorpoti via digital inputs " and " Keypad motorpoti " can be selected via the following
parameters.
Via the reference frequency channel:
− Reference Frequency Source 1 475
− Reference Frequency Source 2 492
Via the reference percentage channel:
− Reference Percentage Source 1 476
− Reference Percentage Source 2 494
The functions " Motorpoti via digital inputs " and " Keypad motorpoti " (control via operator panel) can be selected at the same time. To that end, one of the functions must
be selected for Reference Frequency Source 1 475 and the other function for Reference Frequency Source 2 492. Then the reference value can be changed by both
keypad and digital inputs.
7.5.3.1
Operation modes of motor potentiometer
474 Operation Mode (motorpoti)
Operation Mode 474 of the functions " Motorpoti via digital inputs " and " Keypad motorpoti " defines
the behavior of the function at different operating points of the frequency inverter. When the drive
starts, it can accelerate to the last reference value set. Upon dataset changeover, the set reference
value can be taken over.
Function
The drive accelerates to the set minimum reference value upon
each start. Factory setting.
When started, the motor accelerates to the reference value selected before the switch-off. The reference value is also stored
when the device is switched off.
Use this operation mode for dataset changeover of the reference
value channel. The current reference value is used when the
motorpoti function is activated.
This operation mode combines the operation modes 1 and 2.
Operation Mode 474
0 - Not Latching
1 - Latching
2 - Taking Over
3 - Taking Over and Latching
7.5.3.2
Ramp of motor potentiometer
473 Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti
The speed of the modification of the reference value (ramp) can be set via parameter Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti 473. The ramp is used in the following controls with the reference frequency channel:
− Motorpoti via digital inputs
− Keypad motorpoti (control via operator panel)
Parameters
No.
Description
473 Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Min.
0.00 Hz/s
156
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz/s
Fact. sett.
2.00 Hz/s
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
As a maximum, the acceleration and deceleration of the motorpoti function can only reach the values
of the frequency ramps (Parameters 420 to 423), even if Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti 473 is set to a
higher value.
509 Ramp Percentage-Motorpoti
The speed of the modification of the reference value (ramp) can be set via parameter Ramp Percentage-Motorpoti 509. The ramp is used in the following controls with the reference percentage channel:
− Motorpoti via digital inputs
− Keypad motorpoti (control via operator panel)
Parameters
No.
Description
509 Ramp Percentage-Motorpoti
Min.
0.00 %/s
Setting
Max.
600.00 %/s
Fact. sett.
10.00 %/s
As a maximum, the speed of the reference value change reaches the value of Gradient Percentage
Ramp 477, even if Ramp Percentage-Motorpoti 509 is set to a higher value.
7.5.3.3
Motor potentiometer via digital inputs
For the parameterization of the control of the motor potentiometer via digital inputs, it has to be
checked if the motor potentiometer is used as frequency reference value or percentage reference
value.
7.5.3.3.1 Control via reference frequency channel
62 Frequency Motorpoti Up
63 Frequency Motorpoti Down
The reference frequency of the drive can be set via digital control signals.
Via digital control inputs, the function " Motorpoti up " or " Motorpoti down " is triggered. Logic signals or
digital inputs must be assigned to the parameters Frequency Motorpoti Up 62 or Frequency Motorpoti Down 63.
− Command " Frequency motorpoti up " : The reference frequency increases at the set value of Ramp
Frequency-Motorpoti 473.
− Command " Frequency motorpoti down " : The reference frequency decreases at the set value of
Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti 473.
Motor potentiometer via digital inputs Function
Frequency Motorpoti
Up 62
Frequency Motorpoti
Down 63
0
0
The reference frequency does not change.
1
0
The reference frequency increases at the set ramp.
0
1
The reference frequency decreases at the set ramp.
1
The reference frequency is reset to the value of
Minimum Frequency 418. If another reference frequency source is selected via parameter Reference
Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency
Source 2 492, the reference frequency is reset to
the value of this source.
1
0 = contact open
Reference Values
1 = contact closed
157
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
WARNING
If a negative reference value is set, the drive is decelerated with command " Frequency
motorpoti up " . The reference value is changed in positive direction.
Limit
The reference values are limited via the parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419.
Direction of rotation reversal
If parameter Minimum Frequency 418 is set to zero, the direction of rotation of the drive can be reversed via the motorpoti function.
“Motorpotentiometer via digital inputs” as reference value
The function “Motorpotentiometer via digital inputs” can be selected via the following parameters:
− Reference Frequency Source 1 475
− Reference Frequency Source 2 492
See chapter 7.5.1 " Reference frequency channel " .
Frequency setting using the motorpoti function can be used for adjustable varying speed or for speed
control. In the case of a torque control (Parameter n-/T-Control Change-Over 164), this function is
switched off and a percentage setting option via the motorpoti function is available.
Chapter 7.6.6.1 “List of control signals” contains a table summarizing the available signal sources for
parameters Frequency Motorpoti Up 62 and Frequency Motorpoti Down 63.
Addition of reference values
If the reference value of the motorpoti function is added to another reference value, (via Reference
Frequency Source 1 475 plus Reference Frequency Source 2 492):
− If the value of Maximum Frequency 419 is reached and the other reference value is increased, the
output value of the motorpoti function is reduced. It is reduced, so that the sum of both reference
values is equal to the maximum frequency.
− If the value of Minimum Frequency 418 is reached and the other reference value is reduced, the
output value of the motorpoti function is increased. It is increased, so that the sum of both reference values is equal to the minimum frequency.
− In the settings for Operation Mode 493 = " 1 - (+/-reference value) " or " 3 - inverted " , the point of
reversal of direction of rotation can be shifted by the output value of the motorpoti function. The
drive changes its direction of rotation if the total of the two reference values changes the sign.
7.5.3.3.2 Control via reference percentage channel
72 Percent Motorpoti Up
73 Percent Motorpoti Down
The reference percentage can be set via digital control signals.
Via digital control inputs, the function " Motorpoti up " or " Motorpoti down " is triggered. Parameters
Percent Motorpoti Up 72 or Percent Motorpoti Down 73 must be assigned logic signals or digital
inputs.
− Command " Up " : The reference percentage increases at the set value of Ramp PercentageMotorpoti 509.
− Command " Down " : The reference percentage decreases at the set value of Ramp PercentageMotorpoti 509.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
158
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
Motor potentiometer via digital inputs Function
Percent Motorpoti
Up 72
Percent Motorpoti
Down 73
0
0
The reference percentage does not change.
1
0
The reference percentage increases at the set ramp.
0
1
1
1
0 = contact open
The reference percentage decreases at the set
ramp.
The reference percentage is reset to the value of
Minimum Reference Percentage 518. If another
reference percentage source is selected via parameter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494, the reference frequency is reset to the value of this source.
1 = contact closed
WARNING
If a negative reference value is set, the drive is decelerated with command “Percentage
motorpoti up”. The reference value is changed in positive direction.
Limit
The reference values are limited via parameters Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum
Reference Percentage 519.
Direction of rotation reversal
If parameter Minimum Reference Percentage 518 is set to zero, the direction of rotation of the drive
can be reversed via the motorpoti function.
“Motorpotentiometer via digital inputs” as reference value
The function “Motorpotentiometer via digital inputs” can be selected via the following parameters:
− Reference Percentage Source 1 476
− Reference Percentage Source 2 494
See chapter 7.5.2 " Reference percentage channel " .
Chapter 7.6.6.1 “List of control signals” contains a table summarizing the available signal sources for
parameters Percent Motorpoti Up 72 and Percent Motorpoti Down 73.
Addition of reference values
If the reference value of the motorpoti function is added to another reference value, (via Reference
Percentage Source 1 476 plus Reference Percentage Source 2 494):
− If the value of Maximum Reference Percentage 519 is reached and the other reference value is
increased, the output value of the motorpoti function is reduced. It is reduced, so that the sum of
both reference values is equal to the maximum reference percentage value.
− If the value of Minimum Reference Percentage 518 is reached and the other reference value is
reduced, the output value of the motorpoti function is increased. It is increased, so that the sum of
both reference values is equal to the minimum reference percentage value.
− In the settings for Operation Mode 495 = " 1 - (+/-reference value) " or " 3 - inverted " , the point of
reversal of direction of rotation can be shifted by the output value of the motorpoti function. The
drive changes its direction of rotation if the total of the two reference values changes the sign.
Reference Values
159
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.5.3.4
Keypad motorpoti: Control via operator panel
For the parameterization of the control of the motor potentiometer via operator panel, it has to be
checked if the motor potentiometer is used as frequency reference value or percentage reference
value.
Depending on the parameter settings and how the function is used, it can happen that
the first actuation of the key doesn’t cause a visible reaction. In this case the first
actuation activates the function.
7.5.3.4.1 Control via reference frequency channel
The reference frequency of the drive can be set via the operator panel in menu " Local " / " Poti F " .
The reference frequency is increased or decreased via the arrow buttons.
− Button ▲: The reference frequency increases at the set value of Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti 473.
− Button ▼: The reference frequency decreases at the set value of Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti 473.
− Button ▲ pressed briefly: The reference frequency is increased by 0.1 Hz each time the button is
pressed.
− Button ▼ pressed briefly: The reference frequency is reduced by 0.1 Hz each time the button is
pressed.
Press the buttons briefly to fine-tune the reference frequency.
Addressing
Keypad motor
potentiometer
–
–
▲
–
–
Function
The reference frequency does not change.
▼
The reference frequency increases at the set ramp.
Pressed briefly: Reference frequency increases by 0.1 Hz.
The reference frequency decreases at the set ramp.
Pressed briefly: Reference frequency decreases by 0.1 Hz.
▲+▼
The reference frequency is reset to its initial value.
WARNING
If a negative reference value is set, the drive is accelerated by pressing the button ▼.
The reference value is increased in negative direction.
Limit
The reference values are limited via parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419.
Direction of rotation reversal
If parameter Minimum Frequency 418 is set to zero, the direction of rotation of the drive can be reversed via the motorpoti function.
NOTE
In order to be able to select menu " Poti F " on the operator panel, Reference Frequency
Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 must be set to " 5 - KeypadMotorpot. " . By default, Reference Frequency Source 2 492 is set to " 5 - KeypadMotorpot. " .
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
160
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
Keypad motorpoti as reference value
The function " Keypad motorpoti " can be selected via the following parameters:
− Reference Frequency Source 1 475
− Reference Frequency Source 2 492
See chapter 7.5.1 " Reference frequency channel " .
If you leave menu " Poti F " , the drive cannot be controlled via the operator panel and remains in the
previous status.
For starting, stopping and reversing the direction of rotation of the drive via the operator panel, parameter Local/Remote 412 must be set appropriately (Selection " 3 - Control via Keypad " or " 4 - Control via Keypad+Cont. " ). The factory settings enable control via the operator panel and via digital inputs. See chapter 7.3.1 " Control " .
Frequency setting using the motorpoti function can be used in speed actuated or speed controlled
control methods. In the case of a torque control, this function is switched off and a percentage setting
option via the motorpoti function is available.
Addition of reference values
If the reference value of the motorpoti function is added to another reference value, (via Reference
Frequency Source 1 475 plus Reference Frequency Source 2 492):
− If the value of Maximum Frequency 419 is reached and the other reference value is increased, the
output value of the motorpoti function is reduced. It is reduced, so that the sum of both reference
values is equal to the maximum frequency.
− If the value of Minimum Frequency 418 is reached and the other reference value is reduced, the
output value of the motorpoti function is increased. It is increased, so that the sum of both reference values is equal to the minimum frequency.
− In the settings for Operation Mode 493 = " 1 - (+/-reference) " or " 3 - inverted " , the point of reversal of direction of rotation can be shifted by the output value of the motorpoti function. The
drive changes its direction of rotation if the total of the two reference values changes the sign.
Lock the control possibilities of the control panel
If drive start and stop and the change of direction of rotation at the operator panel must be locked:
•
For parameter Local/Remote 412 select a value that is different from 3 or 4.
•
Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of the parameter. Refer to chapter 7.1.3
“Set password”.
7.5.3.4.2 Control via reference percentage channel
The reference percentage of the drive can be set via the operator panel in menu " Local " / " Poti P " .
The reference percentage is increased or decreased via the arrow buttons.
− Button ▲: The reference percentage increases at the set value of Ramp PercentageMotorpoti 509.
− Button ▼: The reference percentage decreases at the set value of Ramp PercentageMotorpoti 509.
− Button ▲ pressed briefly: The reference percentage is increased by 0.1% each time the button is
pressed.
− Button ▼ pressed briefly: The reference percentage is reduced by 0.1% each time the button is
pressed.
Press the buttons briefly to fine-tune the reference percentage.
Reference Values
161
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Addressing
Keypad motor
potentiometer
–
–
▲
–
–
▼
▲+▼
Function
The reference percentage does not change.
The reference percentage increases at the set ramp.
Pressed briefly: Reference percentage increases by 0.1%.
The reference percentage decreases at the set ramp.
Pressed briefly: Reference percentage decreases by 0.1%.
The reference percentage is reset to its initial value.
WARNING
If a negative reference value is set, the drive is accelerated by pressing the button ▼.
Limit
The reference values are limited via parameters Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum
Reference Percentage 519.
Direction of rotation reversal
If parameter Minimum Reference Percentage 518 is set to zero, the direction of rotation of the drive
can be reversed via the motorpoti function.
Note
In order to be able to select menu " Poti P " on the operator panel, Reference Percentage Source 1 476
or Reference Percentage Source 2 494 must be set to " 5 - Keypad-Motorpot. " . By default, Reference
Percentage Source 2 494 is set to " 5 - Keypad-Motorpot " .
Keypad motorpoti as reference value
The function " Keypad motorpoti " can be selected via the following parameters:
− Reference Percentage Source 1 476
− Reference Percentage Source 2 494
See chapter 7.5.2 " Reference percentage channel " .
If you leave menu " Poti P " , the drive cannot be controlled via the operator panel and remains in the
previous status.
For starting, stopping and reversing the direction of rotation of the drive via the operator panel, parameter Local/Remote 412 must be set appropriately (Selection " 3 - Control via Keypad " or " 4 - Control via Keypad+Cont. " ). The factory settings enable control via the operator panel and via digital inputs. See chapter 7.3.1 " Control " .
Addition of reference values
If the reference value of the motorpoti function is added to another reference value, (via Reference
Percentage Source 1 476 plus Reference Percentage Source 2 494):
− If the value of Maximum Reference Percentage 519 is reached and the other reference value is
increased, the output value of the motorpoti function is reduced. It is reduced, so that the sum of
both reference values is equal to the maximum reference percentage value.
− If the value of Minimum Reference Percentage 518 is reached and the other reference value is
reduced, the output value of the motorpoti function is increased. It is increased, so that the sum of
both reference values is equal to the minimum reference percentage value.
− In the settings for Operation Mode 495 = " 1 - (+/-reference) " or " 3 - inverted " , the point of reversal of direction of rotation can be shifted by the output value of the motorpoti function. The
drive changes its direction of rotation if the total of the two reference values changes the sign.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
162
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
Lock the control possibilities of the control panel
If drive start and stop and the change of direction of rotation at the operator panel must be locked:
•
For parameter Local/Remote 412 select a value that is different from 3 or 4.
•
Set parameter Set Password 27 to prevent the resetting of the parameter. Refer to chapter 7.1.3
“Set password”.
7.5.4
Electronic gear
Starting the electronic gear: Set one of the following parameters.
Parameters
Reference Frequency Source 1 475
Factory setting
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
40 - el. Gear
5 - Keypad-Motorpot.
Set
40 - el. Gear
or
Reference Frequency Source 2 492
The electronic gear enables the synchronization of drives without mechanical transmission elements
such as shafts or clutches. The reference value for the slave drive is the repetition frequency determined by the master drive. This value can be multiplied by a gear factor. The transmission from the
master drive to the slave drive is done via a repetition frequency signal or via system bus.
The gear factor can be set permanently or varied during operation via freely configurable digital and
analog signal sources through the percentage reference channel.
125 Source Master Reference
On the slave drive, the reference value for the electronic gear must be selected via parameter Source
Master Reference 125. For example, " 288 - Repetition Frequency Input " must be selected as the ref-
erence value source if the reference value is defined as a repetition frequency via digital input IN2D.
In this case, Operation Mode IN2D 496 must be set to " 20 - RF Single Evaluation " or " 21 - RF Double
Evaluation " (RF: Repetition Frequency).
If a system bus interface is used, the reference value can be defined via the system bus. Set parameter Source Master Reference 125 according to system bus PDO which receives the reference value.
7.5.4.1
Scope of function
− Electronic gear
− Reference value defined via repetition frequency input or system bus
− Gear factor, numerator and denominator can be set separately
− Gear factor can be scaled during the operation
− Offset frequencies can be added depending on digital signals
The system bus transmission of the repetition frequency value from the master drive
to the slave drive is effected via the system bus interface at terminals X12.5 and
X12.6 or via an optional communication module CM-CAN.
7.5.4.2
Operation modes of electronic gear
689 Operation Mode (electronic gear)
Via parameter Operation Mode 689 for the electronic gear, you can determine if the gear factor is to
be set permanently or to be scaled via a signal source, e.g. an analog input signal at the slave drive.
The repetition frequency of the master drive is multiplied by the gear factor.
Via parameter Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492, the output
value of the electronic gear must be selected as the source in the reference frequency channel.
Reference Values
163
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Function
- Off
The electronic gear is deactivated. Factory setting.
The repetition frequency value specified via the repetition frequency input
is multiplied by the gear factor. This is the reference frequency for the
P. 685 Numera- tor/P. 686 Denom- slave drive.
The gear factor is calculated from the values of parameters Gear Factor
inator
Numerator 685 and Gear Factor Denominator 686.
The repetition frequency value specified via the repetition frequency input
is multiplied by the gear factor. This is the reference frequency for the
Analog Numeraslave drive.
- tor/P. 686 DenomThe numerator of the gear factor is scaled using the Reference Percentage
inator
Source 1 476. The denominator of the gear factor is the value set in parameter Gear Factor Denominator 686.
The repetition frequency value specified via the repetition frequency input
is multiplied by the gear factor. This is the reference frequency for the
P. 685 Numeraslave drive.
- tor/Analog DeThe numerator of the gear factor is the value set in parameter Gear Facnominator
tor Numerator 685. The denominator of the gear factor is scaled using the
Reference Percentage Source 1 476.
Operation Mode 689
0
1
2
3
Block diagram of electronic gear:
0
Ramp output
Fixed Frequency 1
Repetition Frequency Input
PLC-Output Frequency 4
1
288
x
2504
Actual value
Source Master Reference 125
Operation Mode 689
0
Reference Ramp
Frequency 283
0
1
2
3
Gear Factor Numerator 685
Gear Factor Denominator 686
Analog factor at 100% 687
Analog factor at 0% 688
0%
100%
Reference percentage value
Reference percentage value
300%
Reference Percentage Source 1 476
Reference Percentage Source 2 494
-300%
Actual value
Reference Percentage Value 229
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
164
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
Setting of the reference percentage via parameters Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 is described in chapter 7.5.2 " Reference percentage channel " .
7.5.4.3
Gear factor
The gear factor can be set permanently or scaled via the Reference Percentage Source 476 during
operation. Scaling during operation can be effected via an analog voltage signal at a multifunction
input. The multifunction input must be set up as an analog input (multifunction input at terminal
X12.3: parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452, multifunction input at terminal X12.4: parameter Operation Mode MFI2 562).
Setting of the gear factor enables the realization of applications which require an adjustment of the
transmission ratio during operations, e.g. winding machines.
7.5.4.3.1 Setting a fixed gear factor
685 Gear Factor Numerator
686 Gear Factor Denominator
Via parameters Gear Factor Numerator 685 and Gear Factor Denominator 686, the gear factor is
set permanently at the frequency inverter of the slave drive.
Gear factor =
No.
685
686
Gear Factor Numerator 685
Gear Factor Denominator 686
Parameters
Description
Gear Factor Numerator
Gear Factor Denominator
Min.
-300.00
0.01
Max.
300.00
300.00
Setting
Fact. sett.
1.00
1.00
7.5.4.3.2 Setting a variable gear factor
687 Analog factor at 100%
688 Analog factor at 0%
With parameters Analog factor at 100% 687 and Analog factor at 0% 688, the range of the gear
factor is scaled. For parameter Operation Mode 689, setting " 2 - (Analog Numerator/P. 686 Denominator) " or " 3 - (P. 685 Numerator/Analog Denominator) " must be selected. The scaling is done via the
Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494 via which the signal
sources for determining the reference value are selected. With the signal source selected, e.g. an
analog signal at a multifunction input, the gear factor can be changed during operation.
No.
687
688
Parameters
Description
Analog factor at 100%
Analog factor at 0%
Min.
0.00
0.00
Max.
100.00
100.00
Setting
Fact. sett.
1.20
0.80
For a block diagram of the electronic gear, refer to chapter 7.5.4.2 " Operation modes of electronic
gear " .
Example:
In an application, a slave drive is to follow a master drive, with the speed of the slave having to be
increased continuously without changing the speed specified by the master. The gear factor control is
to be done using an analog voltage signal (0...10 V).
Reference Values
165
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Configuration example:
•
Via parameter Operation Mode 689, set operation mode " 2 – (Analog Numerator/P. 686 Denominator) " for the electronic gear for a change of the gear factor by the numerator.
•
Set the minimum and maximum limit for the numerator value via parameters Analog factor at
100% 687 and Analog factor at 0% 688.
•
Set the Gear Factor Denominator 686 to the required value.
•
Set multifunction input MFI1 as an analog voltage input by adjusting Operation Mode MFI1 452
to " 1 – Voltage 0…10 V " .
•
For the Reference Percentage Source 1 476, select operation mode " 1 - Analog Value MFI1A " .
In this example, the default settings for Analog factor at 100% 687 and Analog factor at 0% 688, an
adjusted gear factor denominator of 2 and a reference percentage of 75% will result in a gear factor
numerator of 1.1 and a reference frequency for the Slave of 10 Hz * 1,1 / 2 = 5.5 Hz.
Analog Factor at 100% 687 = 1.2
1.1
Analog Factor at 0% 688 = 0.8
0%
Actual value:
75% 100%
Reference Percentage Value 229
7.5.4.4
Offset
Via the parameters Reference Frequency Source 2 492, you can select frequencies as an offset which
are added to the reference frequency.
Adding a fixed frequency to the reference frequency:
•
Set parameter Reference Frequency Source 2 492 to " 3 - Fixed Frequency " .
•
In one of parameters 480 … 488 (fixed frequencies) set a frequency value.
Select the fixed frequency of the set parameter via parameters 66, 67 and 131 (fixed frequency
changeover).
See chapter 7.5.1.3 " Fixed frequencies " .
•
The frequency for the offset can be set via the operator panel if Reference Frequency Source 2 492 is
set to " 5 - Keypad-Motorpot. " .
Parameter Reference Frequency Source 2 492 offers further options to define the frequency for the
offset. See chapter 7.5.1 " Reference frequency channel " .
7.5.4.5
Actual values
Via parameter Repetition Frequency Input 252, the reference frequency can be displayed at the repetition frequency input.
Via parameter Reference Ramp Frequency 283, the actual value of the frequency after multiplication
by the gear factor and addition of the optionally selectable repetition frequencies can be displayed.
7.5.4.6
Adjustment Options
The following instructions describe options for setting the electronic gear. The settings must be adjusted to the application.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
166
Reference Values
Parameter descriptions
WARNING
The control functions listed in the following table may affect the synchronous operation
of the drives. It should be checked if these additional control functions are switched on
and if they are required.
573
610
660
670
164
475
492
Parameters
Operation mode
Operation mode
Operation mode
Operation mode
n/T Control change over
Reference Frequency Source 1
Reference Frequency Source 2
Function
Intelligent current limits
Current limit value controller
Slip compensation
Voltage controller
Switch over Torque control
Added reference frequency value
Via parameter Controller Status 275, you can display if a controller is active.
The function of the electronic gear is realized by configuring digital inputs of the slave frequency inverter as a reference frequency input. If the master drive is a frequency inverter, the repetition frequency output of the master frequency inverter is used.
7.5.4.6.1 Frequency inverter as master drive
If the master drive of the electronic gear is a frequency inverter, the following parameters (for example) can be set for the transmission of the repetition frequency.
•
Select operation mode " 20 – Repetition Frequency MFO1F " for parameter Operation Mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550. As a result, the multifunction output is used as a repetition frequency output.
•
Via parameter RF/PT: Output Value MFO1F 555, select an operation mode for multifunction
output 1.
•
Set the value entered for parameter RF: Division Marks 556 according to the frequency required
at the repetition frequency output. This is the number of pulses per motor revolution for the repetition frequency. The pulse duration depends on the motor speed. By default, this parameter is set
to 1024. When making the settings, take the frequency limit of the frequency output of 150 kHz
into account. The maximum value Smax which can be set for parameter RF: Division Marks 556
is:
S max =
150 000 Hz
Frequency value
7.5.4.6.2 Frequency inverter as slave drive
For the function of the electronic gear via the repetition frequency, the following parameters (for example) can be set at the frequency inverter of the Slave drive.
•
For parameter Operation Mode IN2D 496 select: " 20 - RF Single Evaluation " or " 21 - RF Double
Evaluation " (RF: Repetition Frequency). Digital input IN2D is the repetition frequency input. See
chapter 7.6.7.2 " Repetition frequency input " .
•
Since the rated speed decreases when the number of pole pairs is higher (n~1/p), different
speeds may result if the master drive and slave drive have the same reference frequencies. Adjust
the values for parameters Divider 497 of the repetition frequency input of the slave drive and
RF: Division marks 556 of the repetition frequency output of the master according to the number of pole pairs of the motors in order to obtain the same speeds for the master drive and the
slave drive. Different speeds can be realized by setting the gear factor.
Different values for parameters Rep. Freq: Divider 497 of the repetition frequency input of the slave
drive and RF: Division Marks 556 of the repetition frequency output of the master result in different
speeds of the master drive and the slave drive if the number of pole pairs of the motors is the same.
Reference Values
167
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
•
Set parameters Acceleration (Clockwise) 420 and Deceleration (Clockwise) 421 or Acceleration
Anticlockwise 422 and Deceleration Anticlockwise 423 to the required values. For synchronous
acceleration and deceleration of the drives, set the values of the slave drive slightly higher (in example 10 %) than the values of the master drive. These increased values are to ensure that the
slave drive can follow the master drive in dynamic operation cases.
•
For a synchronous start of the master drive and the slave drive, set the Minimum Frequency 418
of the slave drive to 0 in order to prevent an early start of the slave drive if the controller enable
signal is present.
•
Select an Operation Mode 689. Via parameters Gear Factor Numerator 685 and Gear Factor
Denominator 686, set the required transmission ratio.
WARNING
In order to avoid time delays during the processing of the repetition frequency, the
slave frequency inverter should be enabled before the master frequency inverter.
WARNING
The reference frequency is transmitted, but not the direction of rotation. In this case,
the direction of rotation must be defined via the digital inputs IN1D and IN2D at the
slave drive.
7.6
Control inputs and outputs
The control inputs and outputs can be parameterized freely. All hardware inputs and outputs are preset to frequently used functions by default for simple commissioning.
7.6.1
Multifunction input MFI1
452 Operation Mode MFI1 (Multifunction input 1)
Multifunction input MFI1 can be configured as a voltage, current or a digital input. In the configuration
as a digital input, the evaluation can be selected as PNP (high-switching) or NPN (low-switching).
Depending on the selected Operation Mode MFI1 452, various functions of the frequency inverter
can be controlled.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
168
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Operation Mode MFI1 452
1 - Voltage 0…10V
2 - Current 0…20 mA
3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
5 - Current 4…20 mA
6 - Voltage, characteristic
7 - Current, characteristic
Function
Voltage signal (MFI1A), 0 V ... 10 V. Fixed characteristic. Factory setting.
Current signal (MFI1A), 0 mA ...20 mA. Fixed characteristic.
Digital signal (MFI1D) 0 V ... 24 V. Low-switching (with negative
signal).
Digital signal (MFI1D) 0 V ... 24 V. High-switching (with positive
signal).
Current signal (MFI1A), 4 mA ...20 mA. Fixed characteristic.
Voltage signal (MFI1A), 0 V ... 10 V. The output signal is influenced by the set characteristic. The characteristic can be set via
parameters 454 … 457.
Current signal (MFI1A) 0 mA … 20 mA. The output signal is influenced by the set characteristic. The characteristic can be set
via parameters 454 … 457.
Multifunction input MFI1 is configured by default for an analog reference value source with a voltage
signal of 0 V to 10 V.
Alternatively, you can select the operation mode for an analog current signal of 0 … 20 mA or 4 …
20 mA. The current signal is continuously monitored and the fault message " F1407 " displayed if the
maximum figure is exceeded.
7.6.1.1
Multifunction input set as analog input MFI1A
The Multifunction input can be evaluated either as analogue or digital signal. In the following the
evaluation for analogue signals is described.
7.6.1.1.1 Voltage input and current input
For parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452, " 1 - Voltage 0…10V " , " 2 - Current 0…20 mA " or " 5 - Current 4…20 mA " must be selected.
Operation Mode MFI1 452
1 - Voltage 0…10 V
2 - Current 0…20 mA
4 - Current 4…20 mA
Function
Voltage signal (MFI1A), 0 V ... 10 V. Fixed characteristic.
Factory setting.
Current signal (MFI1A), 0 mA ...20 mA. Fixed characteristic.
Current signal (MFI1A), 4 mA ...20 mA. Fixed characteristic.
The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage.
Voltage 0…10 V
Parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452 is set to " 1 - Voltage 0…10 V " . The coordinates of the points
relate, as a percentage, to the analog signal with 9.8 V and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or
parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The zero-crossing of the frequency or the percentage value lies at 0.2 V. The deviations from 10 V and 0 V allow the operation even with voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values.
9.8 𝑉 − 0.2 𝑉
9.6 𝑉
9.6 𝑉
=
�
=
�
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 419
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐. 519
Incliniation:
Current 0…20 mA
Current 0…20 mA
Parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452 must be set to " 2 - Current 0…20 mA " . The coordinates of the
points relate, as a percentage, to the analog signal with 19.6 mA and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The zero-crossing of the frequency or the
percentage value lies at 0.4 mA. The deviations from 20 mA and 0 mA allow the operation even with
voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values.
Control inputs and outputs
169
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
19.6 𝑚𝐴 − 0.4 𝑚𝐴
19.2 𝑚𝐴
19.2 𝑚𝐴
=
�
=
�
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 419
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐. 519
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
Incliniation:
Current 4…20 mA
Parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452 must be set to " 5 - Current 4…20 mA " . The coordinates of the
points relate, as a percentage, to the analog signal with 19.6 mA and parameter Maximum Frequency
419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The zero-crossing of the frequency or the
percentage value lies at 4.4 mA. The deviations from 20 mA and 4 mA allow the operation even with
voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values.
19.6 𝑚𝐴 − 4.4 𝑚𝐴
15.2 𝑚𝐴
15.2 𝑚𝐴
=
�
=
�
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐. 519
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 419
Incliniation:
f [Hz]
50 Hz
9.8 V
0 V 0.2 V
P452=1
(P452=2) (0 mA)
(P452=5) (4 mA)
+10 V U [V]
(+20 mA)
(+20 mA)
7.6.1.1.2 Voltage input characteristic and current input characteristic
For parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452, " 6 - Voltage, characteristic " or " 7 - Current, characteristic "
must be selected.
Function
Voltage signal (MFI1A), 0 V ... 10 V. The output signal is influenced by the set characteristic. The characteristic can be set via
parameters 454 … 457.
Current signal (MFI1A) 0 mA … 20 mA. The output signal is influenced by the set characteristic. The characteristic can be set
via parameters 454 … 457.
Operation Mode MFI1 452
6 - Voltage, characteristic
7 - Current, characteristic
454 Characteristic Curve Point X1
455 Characteristic Curve Point Y1
456 Characteristic Curve Point X2
457 Characteristic Curve Point Y2
The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage. Parameterization can be
done via two points of the linear characteristic of the reference value channel.
Point 1 with coordinates X1 and Y1 and point 2 with coordinates X2 and Y2 can be set in four data
sets.
No.
454
455
456
457
Parameters
Description
Characteristic Curve Point
Characteristic Curve Point
Characteristic Curve Point
Characteristic Curve Point
Operating Instructions Agile
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
06/2013
Min.
0.00%
-100.00%
0.00%
-100.00%
170
Setting
Max.
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
Fact. sett.
2.00%
0.00%
98.00%
100.00%
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
The coordinates of the points relate, as a percentage, to the analog signal with 10 V or 20 mA and
parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The direction of rotation can be changed via the digital inputs and/or by selection of the points.
WARNING
Attention!
The monitoring of the analog input signal via the parameter Error/Warning Behaviour
453 demands the check of parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 454.
In the settings
− " 6 - Voltage, characteristic " or
− " 7 - Current, characteristic "
of parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452, the following characteristic is effective:
Y
50 Hz
(X2=98%/Y2=100%)
Pos. maximum value
Point 1:
X1 = 2.00% ⋅ 10 V = 0.20 V
Y1 = 0.00% ⋅ 50.00 Hz = 0.00 Hz
(X1=2%/Y1=0%)
Point 2:
X2 = 98.00% ⋅ 10 V = 9.80 V
Y2 = 100.00% ⋅ 50.00 Hz = 50.00 Hz
9.8 V
0V
(0 mA)
+10 V X
(+20 mA)
0.2 V
Neg. maximum value
The characteristic can be adjusted via parameters 454 … 457 of the application.
The freely configurable characteristic enables setting a tolerance at the ends as well as a reversal of
the direction of rotation.
The following example shows the inverse reference value specification with additional reversal of the
direction of rotation. This is often used in pressure control systems.
Y
50 Hz
Pos. maximum value
Point 1:
(X1=2%/Y1=100%)
X1 = 2.00% ⋅ 10 V = 0.20 V
Y1 = 100.00% ⋅ 50.00 Hz = 50.00 Hz
+10 V
(+20 mA)
0V
(0 mA)
0.2 V
5.5 V
9.8 V
X
Point 2:
X2 = 98.00% ⋅ 10 V = 9.80 V
Y2 = −80.00% ⋅ 50.00 Hz = −40.00 Hz
The change of direction of rotation is done in this example at an analog input signal of 5.5 V. pos./neg. maximum figure.
-40 Hz
(X2=98%/Y2=-80%)
The definition of the analog input characteristic can be calculated via the two-point form of the line
equation. The speed Y of the drive is controlled according to the analog control signal X.
Y=
Control inputs and outputs
Y2 - Y1
⋅ (X − X1) + Y1
X2 - X1
171
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Scaling
The analog input signal is mapped to the freely configurable characteristic. The maximum admissible
setting range of the drive can be set via the frequency limits or percentage limits. In the case of the
parameterization of a bipolar characteristic, the set minimum and maximum limits for both directions
of rotation are effective. The percentage values of the characteristic points are relative to the limits
selected.
No.
Parameters
Description
Min.
Setting
Max.
Fact. sett.
418 Minimum Frequency
0.00 Hz
999.99 Hz
3.50 Hz
419 Maximum Frequency
0.00 Hz
999.99 Hz
50.00 Hz
The control system uses the maximum value of the output frequency, which is calculated from the
Maximum Frequency 419 and the compensated slip of the drive mechanism. The frequency limits
define the speed range of the drive, and the percentage values supplement the scaling of the analog
input characteristic in accordance with the functions configured.
Parameters
No.
Description
518 Minimum Reference Percentage
519 Maximum Reference Percentage
Min.
0.00%
0.00%
Setting
Max.
300.00%
300.00%
Fact. sett.
0.00%
100.00%
450 Tolerance Band
The analog input characteristic with change of sign of the reference value can be adapted by the parameter Tolerance Band 450 of the application. The adjustable tolerance band extends the zero passage of the speed relative to the analog control signal. The parameter value (percent) is relative to
the maximum current or voltage signal.
Parameters
No.
Description
450 Tolerance Band
Pos. maximum value
Min.
0.00%
(X2/Y2)
0V
(0 mA)
Setting
Max.
25.00%
Pos. maximum value
+10 V
(+20 mA)
0V
(0 mA)
Fact. sett.
2.00%
(X2/Y2)
+10 V
(+20 mA)
zero point
tolerance band
(X1/Y1)
(X1/Y1)
Neg. maximum value
Neg. maximum value
Without tolerance band
With tolerance band
Hysteresis
The default Minimum Frequency 418 or Minimum Reference Percentage 518 extends the parameterized tolerance band to the hysteresis.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
172
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
(X2/Y2)
pos. maximum value
pos. minimum value
+10 V
(+20 mA)
neg. minimum value
zero point
tolerance band
(X1/Y1)
neg. maximum value
Tolerance band with set maximum frequency
For example, the output variable coming from positive input signals is kept on the positive minimum
value until the input signal becomes lower than the value for the tolerance band in the negative direction. Then, the output variable follows the set characteristic.
7.6.1.1.3 Monitoring of analog input signal
451 Filter time constant
The time constant of the filter for the analog reference value can be set via the parameter Filter time
constant 451. The time constant indicates the time during which the input signal is averaged by
means of a low pass filter, in example in order to eliminate fault effects.
The setting range is between 0 ms and 5000 ms in 15 steps.
Filter time constant 451
0 - Time constant 0 ms
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
-
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms
64 ms
128 ms
256 ms
512 ms
1000 ms
2000 ms
3000 ms
4000 ms
5000 ms
Control inputs and outputs
Function
Filter deactivated – The analog reference value is forwarded
unfiltered.
Filter activated – averaging of the input signal via the set value
of the filter time constants.
173
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
453 Error/Warning Behaviour
For monitoring the analog input signal, an operation mode can be selected via parameter Error/Warning Behaviour 453.
Error/Warning Behaviour 453
0 - Off
1 - Warning & lt; 1V/2 mA
2 - Shutdown & lt; 1V/2 mA
3-
Error-Switch-Off
& lt; 1V/2 mA
Function
The input signal is not monitored. Factory setting.
If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, a warning message
is issued.
If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, a warning and fault
message is issued. The drive is decelerated according to stopping behavior 2.
If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, a warning and fault
message is issued and the drive coasts to a standstill (stopping
behavior 0).
Monitoring of the analog input signal is active regardless of the enable of the frequency inverter.
Operation mode 2 defines the shut-down and stopping of the drive, regardless of the setting of parameter Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior. The drive is stopped according to stopping
behavior 2. If the set holding time has expired, an error message is issued. The drive can be started
again by switching the start signal on and off.
Operation mode 3 defines the free coasting of the drive (as described in stopping behavior 0), regardless of the setting of parameter Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior.
WARNING
Attention!
The monitoring of the analog input signal via the parameter Error/Warning Behaviour
453 demands the check of parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 454.
Example: Error/Warning Behaviour 453 = " 2 - Shutdown & lt; 1V/2mA " or " 3 - Error Switch-Off & lt;
1V/2mA " . In the factory settings of the parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 454 shutting down
or error switch-off are affected at an output frequency ≠ 0 Hz. If shutting down or error switch-off are
to be effected at an output frequency of 0 Hz, the Point X1 must be adjusted (e.g. X1=10% /1 V).
Y
50 Hz
(X1=2%/Y1=0%)
0 Hz
7.6.1.2
0.2 V
9.8 V
1V
X
Multifunction input set as digital input MFI1D
Multifunction input MFI1 (terminal X12.3) can be configured as a digital input. Via parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452, the evaluation can be selected as PNP (high-switching) or NPN (low-switching).
The multifunction input set as digital input can be linked to the functions of the frequency inverter.
Signal " 76 - MFI1D " must be assigned a function.
Operation Mode MFI1 452
3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
Operating Instructions Agile
Function
Digital signal (MFI1D) 0 V ... 24 V. Low-switching (with negative
signal).
Digital signal (MFI1D) 0 V ... 24 V. High-switching (with positive
signal).
06/2013
174
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Signal source
76 - MFI1D
7.6.2
Function
Assign to a function, e.g. select signal source for parameter.
Multifunction input MFI2
562 Operation Mode MFI2 (Multifunction input 2)
Multifunction input MFI2 can be configured as a voltage, current or a digital input. In the configuration
as a digital input, the evaluation can be selected as PNP (high-switching) or NPN (low-switching).
Depending on the selected Operation Mode MFI2 562, various functions of the frequency inverter
can be controlled.
Operation Mode MFI2 562
1 - Voltage 0…10 V
2 - Current 0…20 mA
3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
5 - Current 4…20 mA
6 - Voltage, characteristic
7 - Current, characteristic
Function
Voltage signal (MFI2A), 0 V … 10 V. Fixed characteristic.
Current signal (MFI2A), 0 mA … 20 mA. Fixed characteristic.
Digital signal (MFI2D) 0 V … 24 V. Low-switching (with negative
signal). Factory setting.
Digital signal (MFI2D) 0 V … 24 V. High-switching (with positive
signal).
Current signal (MFI2A), 4 mA … 20 mA. Fixed characteristic
Voltage signal (MFI2A), 0 V … 10 V. The output signal is influenced by the set characteristic. The characteristic can be set via
parameters 564 … 567.
Current signal (MFI2A) 0 mA … 20 mA. The output signal is influenced by the set characteristic. The characteristic can be set
via parameters 564 … 567.
By default, multifunction input MFI2 is set as a digital input for connection of a motor thermal contact.
Alternatively, you can select the operation mode for an analog voltage or current signal. The current
signal is continuously monitored and the fault message " F1407 " displayed if the maximum figure is
exceeded.
7.6.2.1
Multifunction input set as analog input MFI2A
The Multifunction input can be evaluated either as analogue or digital signal. In the following the
evaluation for analogue signals is described.
7.6.2.1.1 Voltage input and current input
For parameter Operation Mode MFI2 562, " 1 - Voltage 0…10 V " , " 2 - Current 0…20 mA " or “5 - Current 4…20 mA” must be selected.
Operation Mode MFI2 562
1 - Voltage 0…10 V
2 - Current 0…20 mA
5 - Current 4…20 mA
Control inputs and outputs
Function
Voltage signal (MFI2A), 0 V … 10 V. Fixed characteristic.
Current signal (MFI2A), 0 mA … 20 mA. Fixed characteristic.
Current signal (MFI2A), 4 mA … 20 mA. Fixed characteristic
175
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage.
The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage.
Voltage 0…10 V
Parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452 is set to " 1 - Voltage 0…10 V " . The coordinates of the points
relate, as a percentage, to the analog signal with 9.8 V and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or
parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The zero-crossing of the frequency or the percentage value lies at 0.2 V. The deviations from 10 V and 0 V allow the operation even with voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values.
9.8 𝑉 − 0.2 𝑉
9.6 𝑉
9.6 𝑉
=
�
=
�
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 419
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐. 519
Incliniation:
Current 0…20 mA
Current 0…20 mA
Parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452 must be set to " 2 - Current 0…20 mA " . The coordinates of the
points relate, as a percentage, to the analog signal with 19.6 mA and parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The zero-crossing of the frequency or the
percentage value lies at 0.4 mA. The deviations from 20 mA and 0 mA allow the operation even with
voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values.
19.2 𝑚𝐴
19.2 𝑚𝐴
19.6 𝑚𝐴 − 0.4 𝑚𝐴
=
�
=
�
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 419
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐. 519
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
Incliniation:
Current 4…20 mA
Parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452 must be set to " 5 - Current 4…20 mA " . The coordinates of the
points relate, as a percentage, to the analog signal with 19.6 mA and parameter Maximum Frequency
419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The zero-crossing of the frequency or the
percentage value lies at 4.4 mA. The deviations from 20 mA and 4 mA allow the operation even with
voltage supplies that have small deviations from the nominal values.
19.6 𝑚𝐴 − 4.4 𝑚𝐴
15.2 𝑚𝐴
15.2 𝑚𝐴
=
�
=
�
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 419
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐. 519
Incliniation:
f [Hz]
50 Hz
9.8 V
0 V 0.2 V
P562=1
(P562=2) (0 mA)
(P562=5) (20 mA)
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
+10 V U [V]
(+20 mA)
(+20 mA)
176
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
7.6.2.1.2 Voltage input characteristic and current input characteristic
For parameter Operation Mode MFI2 562, " 6 - Voltage, characteristic " or " 7 - Current, characteristic "
must be selected.
Function
Voltage signal (MFI2A), 0 V ... 10 V. The output signal is influenced by the set characteristic. The characteristic can be set via
parameters 564 … 567.
Current signal (MFI2A) 0 mA … 20 mA. The output signal is influenced by the set characteristic. The characteristic can be set
via parameters 564 … 567.
Operation Mode MFI2 562
6 - Voltage, characteristic
7 - Current, characteristic
564 Characteristic Curve Point X1
565 Characteristic Curve Point Y1
566 Characteristic Curve Point X2
567 Characteristic Curve Point Y2
The analog input signal is mapped to a reference frequency or percentage. Parameterization can be
done via two points of the linear characteristic of the reference value channel.
Point 1 with coordinates X1 and Y1 and point 2 with coordinates X2 and Y2 can be set in four data
sets.
No.
564
565
566
567
Parameters
Description
Characteristic Curve Point
Characteristic Curve Point
Characteristic Curve Point
Characteristic Curve Point
Min.
0.00%
-100.00%
0.00%
-100.00%
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
Setting
Max.
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
100.00%
Fact. sett.
2.00%
0.00%
98.00%
100.00%
The coordinates of the points relate, as a percentage, to the analog signal with 10 V or 20 mA and
parameter Maximum Frequency 419 or parameter Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The direction of rotation can be changed via the digital inputs and/or by selection of the points.
WARNING
The monitoring of the analog input signal via the parameter Error/Warning Behaviour
563 demands the check of parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 564.
In the settings
− " 6 - Voltage, characteristic " or
− " 7 - Current, characteristic "
of parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452, the following characteristic is effective:
Y
50 Hz
(X2=98%/Y2=100%)
Pos. maximum value
Point 1:
X1 = 2.00% ⋅ 10 V = 0.20 V
Y1 = 0.00% ⋅ 50.00 Hz = 0.00 Hz
(X1=2%/Y1=0%)
Point 2:
9.8 V
0V
(0 mA)
0.2 V
X2 = 98.00% ⋅ 10 V = 9.80 V
Y2 = 100.00% ⋅ 50.00 Hz = 50.00 Hz
+10 V X
(+20 mA)
Neg. maximum value
Control inputs and outputs
177
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
The characteristic can be adjusted via parameters 564 … 567 of the application.
The freely configurable characteristic enables setting a tolerance at the ends as well as a reversal of
the direction of rotation.
The following example shows the inverse reference value specification with additional reversal of the
direction of rotation. This is often used in pressure control systems.
Y
50 Hz
Pos. maximum value
Point 1:
(X1=2%/Y1=100%)
X1 = 2.00% ⋅ 10 V = 0.20 V
Y1 = 100.00% ⋅ 50.00 Hz = 50.00 Hz
+10 V
(+20 mA)
0V
(0 mA)
0.2 V
5.5 V
9.8 V
X
Point 2:
X2 = 98.00% ⋅ 10 V = 9.80 V
Y2 = −80.00% ⋅ 50.00 Hz = −40.00 Hz
The change of direction of rotation is done in this example at an analog input signal of 5.5 V. pos./neg. maximum figure
-40 Hz
(X2=98%/Y2=-80%)
The definition of the analog input characteristic can be calculated via the two-point form of the line
equation. The speed Y of the drive is controlled according to the analog control signal X.
Y=
Y2 - Y1
⋅ (X − X1) + Y1
X2 - X1
Scaling
The analog input signal is mapped to the freely configurable characteristic. The maximum admissible
setting range of the drive can be set via the frequency limits or percentage limits. In the case of the
parameterization of a bipolar characteristic, the set minimum and maximum limits for both directions
of rotation are effective. The percentage values of the characteristic points are relative to the limits
selected.
No.
Parameters
Description
Min.
Setting
Max.
Fact. sett.
418 Minimum Frequency
0.00 Hz
999.99 Hz
3.50 Hz
419 Maximum Frequency
0.00 Hz
999.99 Hz
50.00 Hz
The control system uses the maximum value of the output frequency, which is calculated from the
Maximum Frequency 419 and the compensated slip of the drive mechanism. The frequency limits
define the speed range of the drive. The percentage limits complement the scaling of the analog input
characteristic according to the configured functions.
Parameters
No.
Description
518 Minimum Reference Percentage
519 Maximum Reference Percentage
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Min.
0.00%
0.00%
178
Setting
Max.
300.00%
300.00%
Fact. sett.
0.00%
100.00%
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
560 Tolerance Band
The analog input characteristic with change of sign of the reference value can be adapted by the parameter Tolerance Band 560 of the application. The adjustable tolerance band extends the zero passage of the speed relative to the analog control signal. The parameter value (percent) is relative to
the maximum current or voltage signal.
Parameters
No.
Description
560 Tolerance Band
Pos. maximum value
(X2/Y2)
0V
(0 mA)
Setting
Max.
25.00%
Min.
0.00%
Pos. maximum value
+10 V
(+20 mA)
0V
(0 mA)
Fact. sett.
2.00%
(X2/Y2)
zero point
tolerance band
(X1/Y1)
+10 V
(+20 mA)
(X1/Y1)
Neg. maximum value
Neg. maximum value
Without tolerance band
With tolerance band
The default Minimum Frequency 418 or Minimum Reference Percentage 518 extends the parameterized tolerance band to the hysteresis.
(X2/Y2)
pos. maximum value
pos. minimum value
+10 V
(+20 mA)
neg. minimum value
zero point
tolerance band
(X1/Y1)
neg. maximum value
Tolerance band with set maximum frequency
For example, the output variable coming from positive input signals is kept on the positive minimum
value until the input signal becomes lower than the value for the tolerance band in the negative direction. Then, the output variable follows the set characteristic.
Control inputs and outputs
179
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.6.2.1.3 Monitoring of analog input signal
561 Filter time constant
The time constant of the filter for the analog reference value can be set via the parameter Filter time
constant 561. The time constant indicates the time during which the input signal is averaged by
means of a low pass filter, e.g. in order to eliminate fault effects.
The setting range is between 0 ms and 5000 ms in 15 steps.
Function
Filter deactivated – The analog reference value is forwarded
unfiltered.
Filter activated – averaging of the input signal via the set value
of the filter time constants.
Filter time constant 561
0 - Time constant 0 ms
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
-
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
constant
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
32 ms
64 ms
128 ms
256 ms
512 ms
1000 ms
2000 ms
3000 ms
4000 ms
5000 ms
563 Error/Warning Behaviour
For monitoring the analog input signal, an operation mode can be selected via parameter Error/Warning Behaviour 563.
Error/Warning Behaviuor 563
0 - Off
1 - Warning & lt; 1V/2 mA
2 - Shutdown & lt; 1V/2 mA
3-
Error-Switch-Off
& lt; 1V/2 mA
Function
The input signal is not monitored. Factory setting.
If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, a warning message
is issued.
If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, a warning and fault
message is issued. The drive is decelerated according to stopping behavior 2.
If the input signal is lower than 1 V or 2 mA, a warning and fault
message is issued and the drive coasts to a standstill (stopping
behavior 0).
Monitoring of the analog input signal is active regardless of the enable of the frequency inverter.
Operation mode 2 defines the shut-down and stopping of the drive, regardless of the setting of parameter Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior. The drive is stopped according to stopping
behavior 2. If the set holding time has expired, an error message is issued. The drive can be started
again by switching the start signal on and off.
Operation mode 3 defines the free coasting of the drive (as described in stopping behavior 0), regardless of the setting of parameter Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
180
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
WARNING
The monitoring of the analog input signal via the parameter Error/Warning Behaviour
563 demands the check of parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 564.
Example: Error/warning behavior 563 = " 2 - Shutdown & lt; 1V/2mA " or " 3 - Error-Switch-Off & lt;
1V/2mA " . In the factory settings of the parameter Characteristic Curve Point X1 564 shutting down
or error switch-off are effected at an output frequency ≠ 0 Hz. If shutting down or error switch-off are
to be effected at an output frequency of 0 Hz, the Point X1 must be adjusted (e.g. X1=10% /1 V).
Y
50 Hz
(X1=2%/Y1=0%)
0 Hz
7.6.2.2
0.2 V
9.8 V
1V
X
Multifunction input set as digital input MFI2D
Multifunction input MFI2 (terminal X12.4) can be configured as a digital input. Via parameter Operation Mode MFI2 562, the evaluation can be selected as PNP (high-switching) or NPN (low-switching).
The multifunction input set as digital input can be linked to the functions of the frequency inverter.
Signal " 77 - MFI2D " must be assigned a function.
In the factory settings, signal " 532 - MFI2D (Hardware) " is assigned to parameter Thermal contact for
P570 204.
Operation Mode MFI2 562
3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
Signal source
MFI2D
532 (Hardware)
77 - MFI2D
Function
Digital signal (MFI2D) 0 V ... 24 V. Low-switching (with negative
signal). Factory setting.
Digital signal (MFI2D) 0 V ... 24 V. High-switching (with positive
signal).
Function
Assign to a function, e.g. select signal source for parameter. Factory setting:
Thermal contact for P570 204= " 532 - MFI2D (Hardware) " .
Assign to a function, e.g. select signal source for parameter.
Control inputs and outputs
181
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.6.3
Multifunction output MFO1
550 Operation Mode MFO1 (X13.6) (multifunction output)
Multifunction output MFO1 (terminal X13.6) can either be configured as a digital, analog, repetition
frequency or pulse train output. Depending on the selected Operation Mode MFO1 (X13.6) 550, a
connection with various functions of the software is possible. The operation modes not used are deactivated internally.
Function
Operation mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550
0 - Off
1 - Digital MFO1D
Analog (PWM)
10 MFO1A
11 -
Analog (PWM)
MFO1A
Repetition frequency (RF) MFO1F
Pulse train (PT)
30 MFO1F
20 -
1)
Multifunction output has logic signal LOW.
Multifunction output is configured as digital output (0 ... 24 V1)).
Multifunction output is configured as analog output (0 ... 24 V). Factory
setting. PWM frequency = 126 Hz.
Multifunction output is configured as analog output (0 ... 24 V). Factory
setting. PWM frequency = 32 kHz.
Function available in devices marked integrated Functional Safety.
Multifunction output is configured as repetition frequency output (0 ...
24 V, fmax = 150 kHz).
Multifunction output is configured as pulse train output.
Dependent on the voltage supply of the control unit. The maximum guaranteed values is 15 V.
Output characteristic (analog mode)
If the multifunction output is set as an analog output, an output characteristic can be set. Parameter
Operation Mode MFO1 (X13.6) 550 must be set to " 10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A " (factory setting).
551 Analog: Voltage 100%
552 Analog: Voltage 0%
The voltage range of the output signal at the multifunction output can be adjusted. The value range
of the actual value selected via parameter Analog: Source MFO1A 553 is assigned to the value range
of the output signal which is adjusted via the parameters Analog: Voltage 100% 551 and Analog:
Voltage 0% 552.
Parameters
No.
Description
551 Analog: Voltage 100%
552 Analog: Voltage 0%
Analog: Source MFO1A 553 with actual absolute value:
Operating Instructions Agile
Setting
Max.
22.0 V
22.0 V
Min.
0.0 V
0.0 V
06/2013
Fact. sett.
10.0 V
0.0 V
Analog: Source MFO1A 553 with sign:
182
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
With the parameters Analog: Voltage 100% 551 and Analog: Voltage 0%552, the voltage range at
100% and 0% of the output parameter is set. If the output value exceeds the reference value, the
output voltage also exceeds the value of the parameter Analog: Voltage 100%551 up to the maximum value of 22 V (or the maximum value of an external voltage supply).
NOTE
If Operation Mode MFO1 (X13.6) 550 = Analog (PWM) MFO1A and parameter s Analog: Voltage 100% 551 & lt; Analog: Voltage 0% 552, then the smaller voltage value of
Analog: Voltage 100% 551 is put out.
553 Analog: Source MFO1A
If the multifunction output is to be used as analog output, parameter Operation Mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550 must be set to " 10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A " .
For parameter Analog: Source MFO1A 553, the analog actual value to be output at the multifunction
output can be selected.
Parameters
Operation mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550
Analog: Source MFO1A 553
Analog: Source MFO1A 553
0 - Off
1 - Abs. Fs
2 - Abs. Fs betw. fmin/fmax
7 - Abs. Actual Frequency
10 - Abs. Reference Percentage
11 -
Abs. Ref. Percentage betw.
%min/%max
20 - Abs. Iactive
21 - Abs. Isd
22 - Abs. Isq
30 - Abs. Pactive
31 - Abs.
32 - Abs.
Abs.
33 ture
34 - Abs.
40 - Abs.
41 - Abs.
T
Inside Temperature
Heat Sink TemperaCapacitor temperature
Analog Input MFI1A
Analog Input MFI2A
50 - Abs. I
51 - DC-Link Voltage
52 - V
Control inputs and outputs
Factory setting
10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A
Set
10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A
7 - Abs. Actual Frequency
Select an analog signal source.
Function
Analog mode at the multifunction output is switched off.
Abs. value of the stator frequency. 0.00 Hz ... Maximum Frequency 419.
Abs. value of the stator frequency. Minimum Frequency 418...
Maximum Frequency 419.
Abs. value of act. frequency. 0.00 Hz ... Maximum Frequency
419. Factory setting.
Absolute value of reference value from reference percentage
channel. Total of Reference Percentage Source 1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494.
Absolute value of reference value from reference percentage
channel. Minimum Reference Percentage 518 … Maximum Reference Percentage 519. Total of Reference Percentage Source
1 476 and Reference Percentage Source 2 494.
Abs. value of current effective current IActive. 0.0 A ... Nominal
frequency inverter current.
Abs. value of flux-forming current component. 0.0 A ... Nominal
frequency inverter current.
Abs. value of torque-forming current component. 0.0 A ... Nominal frequency inverter current.
Abs. value of current effective power PActive. 0.0 kW ... Rated
Mech. Power 376.
Abs. value of calculated torque M, 0.0 Nm ... rated torque.
Abs. value of measured inside temperature. -20 °C ... 100 °C.
Abs. value of measured heat sink temperature. -20 °C ... 100 °C.
Abs. value of measured capacitor temperature. -20 °C ... 100 °C.
Abs. signal value at analog input MFI1A. DC 0.0 V ... 10.0 V.
Abs. signal value at analog input MFI2A. DC 0.0 V ... 10.0 V.
Abs. current value of measured output currents. 0.0 A ... Nominal
frequency inverter current.
DC-link voltage Ud. DC 0.0 V ... 1000.0 V.
Output voltage. 3xAC 0.0 V ... 1000.0 V.
183
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Analog: Source MFO1A 553
61 -
Abs. Val. PLC-Output Percentage 1
62 -
Abs. Val. PLC-Output Percentage 2
101 to 162
Function
Output value " 2521 – PLC Output Percentage 1 " of a PLCfunction is output via the multifunction output. Refer to application manual " PLC " .
Output value " 2522 – PLC Output Percentage 2 " of a PLCfunction is output via the multifunction output. Refer to application manual " PLC " .
Operation modes in analog operation with signs.
By default, the multifunction output is configured for the output of a pulse width modulated output
signal with a reference voltage value of DC 10 V.
554 Digital: Source MFO1D
If the multifunction output is to be used as a digital output, parameter Operation Mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550 must be set to " 1 - Digital MFO1D " .
For parameter Digital: Source MFO1D 554, the signal to be output at the multifunction output can
be selected.
Parameters
Factory setting
10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A
Set
1 - Digital MFO1D
4 - Setting frequency
(Refer to 7.6.5.2 " Setting
frequency " .)
Operation mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550
Digital: Source MFO1D 554
Select a digital signal source.
(Refer to 7.6.5 “Digital outputs”,
table “Operation modes for digital
outputs”.)
555 RF/PT: Output Value MFO1F(repetition frequency/pulse train)
Multifunction output MFO1 can be used as a frequency output. Parameter Operation Mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550 must be set to " 20 - Repetition Frequency (RF) MFO1F " . The output signal can be selected via parameter RF/PT: Output Value MFO1F 555.
Parameters
Operation mode
MFO1 (X13.6) 550
Factory setting
10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A
RF/PT: Output Value MFO1F 555
0 - Off
1 - Actual Frequency
2 - Stator Frequency
5 - Repetition Frequency Input
Set
20 - Repetition Frequency (RF) MFO1F
Function
Repetition frequency mode switched off.
Abs. value of the Actual frequency 241.
Factory setting.
Abs. value of the Stator frequency 210.
Abs. value of the Repetition frequency input 252.
The maximum frequency value output is:
foutp. max = 2 × ( Maximum Frequency 419) × ( RF : Division marks 556)
Scaling
If the multifunction output is set as a frequency output, the output frequency can be scaled. Parameter Operation Mode MFO1 (X13.6) 550 must be set to " 20 - Repetition frequency (RF) MFO1F " .
556 RF: Division marks (repetition frequency mode)
The repetition frequency mode for the multifunction output corresponds to the emulation of an incremental sensor. The parameter RF: Division marks 556 must be parameterized according to the frequency to be output.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
184
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Parameters
No.
Description
556 RF: Division marks
Min.
30
Setting
Max.
8192
Fact. sett.
1024
The frequency limit of fmax = 150 kHz may not be exceeded in the calculation of the parameter RF:
Division marks 556.
S max =
150000 Hz
Reference frequency value
Pulse train output
A pulse train signal (pulse sequence) can be output as a master frequency.
If the multifunction output is to be used as a pulse train output, parameter Operation Mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550 must be set to " 30 - Pulse Train (PT) MFO1F " .
Parameters
Operation mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550
Factory setting
10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A
Set
30 - Pulse Train (PT) MFO1F
557 PT: Scaling Frequency (pulse train)
Parameter PT: Scaling Frequency 557 indicates which frequency the multifunction output outputs at
100% maximum frequency. Thus, the scaling also depends on the setting of parameter Maximum
frequency 419.
Parameters
No.
Description
557 PT: Scaling Frequency
Min.
0
Setting
Max.
32000
Fact. sett.
25000
If parameter PT: Scaling Frequency 557 is set to zero, the frequency value at the multifunction output will not be scaled.
The output value is limited to the value 2 x Maximum Frequency 419.
Example: Reference value 50 Hz, Maximum Frequency 419 = 100 Hz
PT: Scaling Frequency 557
0
1
10
100
1000
Output frequency [Hz]
50
0.5
5
50
500
Example: Reference value 25 Hz, Maximum Frequency 419 = 50 Hz
PT: Scaling Frequency 557
0
1000
Control inputs and outputs
Output frequency [Hz]
25
500
185
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Digital input/output IN3D/OUT3D
IN3D/OUT3D
7.6.4
X11
X13
X12
X11
1 2 3 4 5 6
558 Operation mode terminal X11.6 (digital input/output)
Terminal X11.6 can be set as a digital input or digital output. In the factory setting, terminal X11.6
can be used as input for dataset changeover.
Function
Operation mode terminal
X11.6 558
The digital input/output is set as digital input. Factory setting.
The digital input/output is set as digital output.
0 - Input IN3D
1 - Output OUT3D
559 Digital inputs PNP/NPN
If the digital input output (terminal X11.6) is set as digital input, the evaluation can be selected as
PNP (high-switching) or NPN (low-switching) via parameter Digital inputs PNP/NPN 559. Parameter
Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558 must be set to " 0 - Input IN3D " .
Digital inputs
PNP/NPN 559
Function
0 - NPN (active: 0 V)
1 - PNP (active: 24 V)
Digital input NPN. Low-switching (with negative signal).
Digital input PNP. High-switching (with positive signal). Factory setting.
The parameter also effect the NPN/PNP evaluation change-over of IN1D, IN2D, IN4D
and IN5D.
The digital input IN3D can control functions of the frequency inverter via signal " 73 - IN3D " . In the
factory setting, digital input IN3D has the function " Dataset changeover 1 " if Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558 is set to " 0 - input IN3D " .
Parameters
Data Set Change-Over 1 70
Factory setting
73 - IN3D (input signal at digital input IN3D)
The signal selected via parameter Operation Mode OUT3D (X11.6) 533, is output at the digital input/output (terminal X11.6). Parameter Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558 must be set to " 1 Output OUT3D " .
Parameter
Operation Mode OUT3D (X11.6) 533
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Factory setting
103 - Inv. Error Signal
186
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
7.6.5
Digital outputs
531 Operation Mode OUT1D (X13.5) (Digital output)
532 Operation Mode OUT2D (X10/relay)
533 Operation Mode OUT3D (X11.6) (Digital input/output)
554 Digital: Source MFO1D (Multifunction output)
The digital signals listed in table " Operation modes for digital outputs " can be output via:
− Digital output
− Multifunction output (set as digital output)
− Digital input/output (set as digital output)
− Relay output
If the multifunction output or digital input/output is to output a digital value, the relevant output must
be set up as a digital output:
Output
Terminal
Parameters
Multifunction
output
X13.6
Operation Mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550
Digital input/output
X11.6
Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558
Factory setting
Analog
10 - (PWM)
MFO1A
0-
Input IN3D
Set
1-
Digital
MFO1D
1-
Output
OUT3D
Factory settings of digital outputs
Output
Digital output
Multifunction output
Digital input/output
Relay output
Terminal
Parameters
Factory setting
X13.5
Operation Mode OUT1D (X13.5) 531
2-
Run signal
X13.6
Digital: Source MFO1D 554
4-
Setting frequency
X11.6
Operation Mode OUT3D (X11.6) 533
103 -
Inv. error signal
X10
Operation Mode OUT2D (X10/relay) 532
103 -
Inv. error signal
NOTE
The relay output at terminal X10 is switched off if the communication between control
and power circuitry of the frequency inverter is faulty. This avoids dangerous conditions
for example in the brake control of hoist applications.
Operation modes for digital outputs
Operation mode 531, 532, 533, 554
Function
0 - Off
Digital output is switched off
Frequency inverter is initialized and on stand-by or in
1 - Ready or Standby Signal
operation
Enable signals STOA and STOB and a start command
2 - Run Signal
are present, output frequency available.
The message is displayed via parameter Actual error
3 - Error Signal
259.
The Stator frequency 210 is higher than the parameter4 - Setting Frequency
ized Setting frequency 510. See chapter 7.6.5.2
" Setting frequency " .
The Actual frequency 241 of the drive has reached the
5 - Reference Frequency reached
Internal reference frequency 228. See chapter 7.6.5.3
" Reference value reached " .
The Actual percentage 230 has reached the Reference
6 - Reference Percentage reached
percentage 229. See chapter 7.6.5.3 " Reference value
reached " .
Control inputs and outputs
187
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Operation mode 531, 532, 533, 554
78910 11 12 -
13 14 15 16 17 18 -
19 22 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 -
41 -
43 50 -
Function
The Warning limit short-term Ixt 405 or Warning Limit
Ixt warning
Long-Term Ixt 406 is reached.
Max. heat sink temperature TK minus the Warning limit
Warning Heat Sink Temperature
heat sink temp. 407 reached.
Maximum inside temperature TK minus the Warning
Warning Inside Temperature
limit inside temp. 408 reached.
Warning according to configured Operation mode motor
Warning Motor Temperature
temp. 570 and Max. motor winding temp. 617.
The message is displayed via parameter Warnings 269.
Warning, General
The selected limit values Warning limit heat sink temp.
Warning Overtemperature
407, Warning limit inside temp. 408 or the maximum
motor temperature have been exceeded.
Failure of the mains voltage and power regulation active according to Operation Mode 670 for the voltage
Mains Failure
controller.
Parameterized Operation Mode 571 for the motor cirWarning Motor Protect. Switch
cuit breaker triggered.
A controller or the Operation Mode 573 of the intelliWarning Current Limitation
gent current limits limit the output current. See chapter
7.6.5.6 " Current limitation " .
The overload reserve for 60 s has been used up and
Conroller Current Limit. Long Term
the output current is being limited. See chapter 7.6.5.6
Ixt
" Current limitation " .
The overload reserve for 1 s has been used up and the
Conroller Current Limit. Short Term
output current is being limited. See chapter 7.6.5.6
Ixt
" Current limitation " .
Max. heat sink temperature TK reached, intelligent current limits of Operation Mode 573 active. See chapter
Controller Current Limit. Tc
7.6.5.6 " Current limitation " .
Maximum motor temperature reached, intelligent curController Current Limit. Motor Temp. rent limits of Operation Mode 573 active. See chapter
7.6.5.6 " Current limitation " .
Warning of Operation mode 581 of V-belt monitoring
Warning V-Belt
Message of the configurable parameter Create warning
Warning Mask
mask 536. See chapter 7.6.5.8 " Warning mask " .
A warning application is signaled. Display of the actual
value is effected via parameter Application Warnings
Warning, Application
273. See chapter 7.6.5.9 " Warning mask, application " .
Message of the configurable parameter Create warning
Warning Mask, Application
mask application 626.
Warning, gen + Warning, Application A warning or warning application is signaled.
Message of configurable parameters Create warning
Warn. Mask, gen + Warn. Mask,
Appl.
mask 536 and Create Warning Mask Application 626.
Magnetic field has been impressed. See chapter 7.6.5.4
Flux-Forming finished
" Flux forming finished " .
Signal of the traverse function. See chapter 7.10.8
Handshake Traverse Function
“Traverse function”
Activation of a brake unit depending on the Operation
Mode 620 for the starting behavior, Operation Mode
Brake release
630 for the stopping behavior or the configured brake
control system. See chapter 7.6.5.5 " Release brake " .
The Switch-on temperature 39 has been reached. An
External fan
external fan can be switched on by the signal. See
chapter 7.6.5.7 " External fan " .
The time remaining until service has expired. See chapWarning service fan
ter 10.3.2 “Fan”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
188
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Operation mode 531, 532, 533, 554
51 - Warning service DC-link
80 - PLC-Output Buffer 1
81 - PLC-Output Buffer 2
1
82 - PLC-Output Buffer 3
83 - PLC-Output Buffer 4
90
Obj 0x3003 DigOut 1 to
to
Obj 0x3003 DigOut 5
94
100 to 194
7.6.5.1
2
Function
The time remaining until service has expired. See chapter 10.3.1 “DC-link”.
Output signal of a PLC function. Signal source " 2401 PLC output buffer 1 " is the output signal. The assignment is performed via parameter PLC-target output 1
1350 or PLC-target output 2 1351.
Output signal of a PLC function. Signal source " 2402 PLC output buffer 2 " is the output signal. In a table
function the assignment is performed via parameter
PLC-target output 1 1350 or PLC-target output 2
1351.
Output signal of a PLC function. Signal source " 2403 PLC output buffer 3 " is the output signal. In a table
function the assignment is performed via parameter
PLC-target output 1 1350 or PLC-target output 2
1351.
Output signal of a PLC function. Signal source " 2404 PLC output buffer 4 " is the output signal. In a table
function the assignment is performed via parameter
PLC-target output 1 1350 or PLC-target output 2
1351.
Sources of CAN objects.
Operation modes inverted (LOW active).
Digital message
Signals output via a digital output can be linked to a function of the frequency inverter. The signals
selected for the following parameters can be linked to functions:
− Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) 531(digital output)
− Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay) 532
− Operation mode OUT3D (X11.6 )533 (digital input/output)
− Digital: Source MFO1D 554 (multifunction output)
Signal at digital output OUT1D
Digital message
Signal selected via Operation Mode OUT1D (X13.5) 531.
175 OUT1D
Signal at digital output OUT2D (relay output)
Digital message
Signal selected via Operation Mode OUT2D (X10/relay) 532.
176 OUT2D relay
Signal at digital input/output (terminal X11.6)
Signal selected via Operation Mode OUT3D (X11.6) 533. Set: Operation
Digital message
177 OUT3D
Mode Terminal X11.6 558 = „1 - Output OUT3D“.
Signal at multifunction output
Signal selected via Digital: Source MFO1D 554. Set: Operation Mode
Digital message
181 MFO1D
MFO1 (X13.6) 550 = " 1 - Digital MFO1D " .
1
2
Refer to application manual " PLC " .
Comply with instructions on CANopen.
Control inputs and outputs
189
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.6.5.2
Setting frequency
510 Setting Frequency
517 Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta
If operation mode 4 - " Setting frequency " is selected for a digital output, the corresponding output will
be active if the actual value Stator frequency 210 is greater than the value of Setting Frequency 510.
The relevant output is switched over again once the Stator frequency 210 drops below the value " Setting frequency 510 minus Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta 517 " .
Signal source 164 - " Setting frequency " can be linked to the functions of the frequency inverter.
Parameters
No.
Description
510 Setting Frequency
517 Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta
Min.
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
3.00 Hz
2.00 Hz
If Setting Frequency Switch Off Delta 517 & gt; Setting Frequency 510 the output is
never reset after the first switching on. Set up fitting values during commissioning.
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) 531(digital output)
Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay) 532
Operation mode OUT3D (X11.6) 533 (digital input/output)
Digital: Source MFO1D 554 (multifunction output)
Setting frequency 510
or
or
or
4 - Setting frequency
Set the value [Hz].
For linking to functions
7.6.5.3
164 - Setting frequency
Reference value reached
549 Reference Value Reached: Tolerance Band
In operation mode 5 - " Reference frequency reached " for a digital output, a message is generated via
the corresponding output when the actual frequency has reached the reference value.
In operation mode 6 - " Reference percentage reached " for a digital output, a message is generated
via the corresponding output when the actual percentage has reached the reference value.
Signal source 163 - " Reference frequency reached " or 178 - " Reference percentage reached " can be
linked to the functions of the frequency inverter.
The hysteresis can be defined as a percentage of the adjustable range (Max - Min) via parameter
Reference Value Reached: Tolerance Band 549.
Parameters
No.
Description
Reference Value Reached: Toler549
ance Band
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Setting
Min.
Max.
Fact. sett.
0.01%
20.00%
5.00%
190
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Operation mode OUT1D (X13.5) 531 (digital output)
Operation mode OUT2D (X10/relay) 532
Operation mode OUT3D (X11.6) 533 (digital input/output)
Digital: Source MFO1D 554 (multifunction output)
or
or
or
5 - Reference frequency reached
or
6 - Reference percentage
reached
Reference Value Reached: Tolerance Band 549
Set the value [%].
For linking to functions
163 - Reference frequency
reached
or
178 - Reference percentage
reached
Example:
Maximum control deviation [Hz] = ∆f × Reference Value Reached : Hysteresis 549 [%]
= ( Maximum Frequency 419 − Minimum Frequency 418) × Reference Value Reached : Hysteresis 549 [%]
= (50 Hz − 3.5 Hz) × 5% = 2.325 Hz
7.6.5.4
Flux forming finished
If operation mode " 30 - flux forming finished " is selected for a digital output, the corresponding output becomes active when the flux-formation is finished. The time for the flux-formation results from
the operating state of the machine and the set parameters for magnetizing the machine. The magnetizing can be defined via the starting behavior and is influenced by the amount of the set starting current. See chapter 7.3.2 " Starting behavior " .
Control inputs and outputs
191
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.6.5.5
Release brake
The Open brake function in operation mode 41 enables the activation of a corresponding unit via the
digital control output. The function uses both the control commands via the contact inputs and the set
starting and stopping behavior for controlling the digital output.
According to the configured starting behavior, the output is switched on when the magnetizing of the
motor is finished. When the Brake release time 625 has elapsed, the drive is accelerated. See chapter
7.3.2 " Starting behavior " .
The stopping behavior of the drive depends on the configuration of the parameters Operation mode
630. See chapter 7.3.3 " Stopping behavior " .
If stopping behavior 2 or 5 with stop function is selected, the drive is controlled to zero speed and the
digital output is not switched off. In the other operation modes of the stop behavior, the control of the
brake is possible. At the start of a free coasting of the drive, the digital output is switched off.
This is similar to the behavior in the case of stopping behavior with shutdown. The drive is
decelerated and supplied with current for the set holding time. Within the set holding time, the control output is switched off and thus the brake activated.
Control of Brake
Stopping behavior
0
Stopping behavior
1, 4
Stopping behavior
2, 5
Stopping behavior
7
7.6.5.6
Operation mode " 41 - Open brake " switches off the digital output assigned to the function immediately. The mechanical brake is activated.
Operation mode " 41 - Open brake " switches off the digital output assigned to the function when the Switch-off threshold stop function 637
is reached. The mechanical brake is activated.
Operation mode " 41 - Open brake " leaves the digital output assigned to
the function switched on. The mechanical brake remains open.
Operation mode " 41 - Open brake " switches off the digital output assigned to the function when the Braking time 632 has elapsed. The
mechanical brake is activated.
Current limitation
Operation modes 15 to 19 link the digital outputs and the relay output to the functions of the intelligent current limits. The reduction of power by the set figure in percent of the rated current depends
on the selected operation mode. Accordingly, the event for intervention of the current limitation can
be output via the operation modes of the digital outputs. If the function of the intelligent current
limits is deactivated within the sensorless control, operation modes 16 to 19 are switched off in the
same way.
7.6.5.7
External fan
Operation mode " 43 - external fan " enables the control of an external fan. Via the digital output, the
fan is switched on as soon as the Switch-on temperature 39 for the internal fans was reached. See
chapter 7.10.2 " Fan " .
7.6.5.8
Warning mask
536 Create warning mask
The Warning mask signals via a digital signal if an afore configured warning applies. The configuration
of the Warning mask is carried out via Create warning mask 536. Warnings and controller status
messages can be combined. This enables internal or external control using a common output signal.
The display of Warning 269 and Controller Status 275 is not affected by the Warning mask.
Select a setting 1 … 43 for message activation.
Select a setting 101 … 143 for deactivation of a message.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
192
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Create warning mask 536
0 - No change
1 - Activate everything
2 - Activate all Warnings
3 - Activate all controller states
10 - Activate Warning
Activate Warning
11 Ixt
Activate Warning
12 Ixt
Activate Warning
13 temperature
Activate Warning
14 perature
Ixt
short-term
long-term
heat sink
inside tem-
15 - Activate Warning limit
16 - Activate Warning
Activate Warning
17 Temperature
Activate Warning
18 ure
Activate Warning
19 tective Switch
Init
Motor
Mains FailMotor Pro-
20 - Activate Warning Fmax
21 -
Activate Warning analog
input MFI1A
22 -
Activate Warning analog
input MFI2A
23 -
Activate Warnings system
bus
24 - Activate Warning Udc
25 - Activate Application Warning
Activate Warning Controller
30 Udc Dynamic Operation
Activate Warning Controller
31 Shutdown
Activate Warning Controller
32 Mains Failure
Activate Warning Controller
33 Udc Limitation
Activate Warning Controller
34 Voltage Pre-Control
Activate Warning Controller I
35 abs.
Activate Warning Controller
36 Torque Limitation
Activate Warning Controller
37 Torque Control
38 - Activate Warning Ramp Stop
Control inputs and outputs
Function
Configured warning mask is not modified.
The warnings and controller status messages stated are linked
in the warning mask.
The warnings reports stated are linked in the warning mask.
The controller status reports stated are linked in the warning
mask.
The frequency inverter is overloaded
Overload reserve for 1 s minus the Warning limit short-term
Ixt 405 has been reached.
Overload reserve for 60 s minus the Warning limit long-term
Ixt 406 has been reached.
Max. heat sink temperature TK minus the Warning limit heat
sink temp. 407 reached.
Max. inside temperature TK minus the Warning limit inside
temp. 408 reached.
The controller stated in Controller Status 275 limits the reference value.
Frequency inverter is being initialized
Warning behavior according to parameterized Operation
Mode Motor Temp. 570 at maximum motor temperature TPTC.
Phase Supervision 576 reports a phase failure.
Operation Mode 571 for motor circuit breaker triggered.
The Maximum Frequency 419 was exceeded. The frequency
limitation is active
The input signal at analog input MFI1A is less than 1 V/2 mA
in accordance with operation mode
Error/Warning Behaviour 453.
The input signal at analog input MFI2A is less than 1 V/2 mA
in accordance with operation mode
Error/Warning Behaviour 563.
A slave on the system bus signals an error.
The DC link voltage has reached the type-dependent minimum value.
A warning application is signaled.
Controller is active according to Operation Mode 670.
The output frequency in the case of a power failure is below
the Shutdown Threshold 675.
Failure of the mains voltage and power regulation active according to Operation Mode 670 for the voltage controller.
The DC link voltage has exceeded the Reference DC-Link
Limitation 680.
The Dyn. Voltage Pre-Control 605 accelerates the control
characteristics.
The output current is limited.
The output power or the torque is limited by the speed controller.
Switch-over of field-orientated control between speed and
torque-controlled control method.
The Operation Mode 620 selected in starting behavior limits
the output current.
193
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Function
Overload limit of the long-term Ixt (60 s) reached, intelligent
current limits active.
Overload limit of the short-term Ixt (1 s) reached, intelligent
current limits active.
Max. heat sink temperature TK reached, Operation Mode 573
for intelligent current limits active.
Max. motor temperature TPTC reached, Operation Mode 573
for intelligent current limits active.
Reference frequency reached the Maximum Frequency 419.
The frequency limitation is active.
Deactivation of the operation mode within the warning mask.
Create warning mask 536
39 40 41 42 43 101 to
Activate Warning Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. LT-Ixt
Activate Warning Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. ST-Ixt
Activate Warning Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. Tc
Activate Warning Contr. Intel. Curr. Lim. Motor Temp.
Activate Warning Controller
Freq. Limitation
143
The selected warning mask can be read out via parameter Actual Warning Mask 537. The above
operation modes of parameter Create Warning Mask 536 are encoded in the Actual Warning Mask
537. The code is calculated by hexadecimal addition of the individual operation modes and the corresponding abbreviation.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Warning code
FFFF FFFF
0000 FFFF
FFFF 0000
0000 0001
Ixt
0000 0002
IxtSt
0000 0004
IxtLt
0000 0008
Tc
0000 0010
Ti
0000 0020
Lim
0000 0040
INIT
0000 0080
MTemp
0000 0100
Mains
0000 0200
PMS
0000 0400
Flim
0000 0800
A1
0000 1000
A2
0000 2000
Sysbus
0000 4000
UDC
0000 8000
WARN2
0001 0000
UDdyn
0002 0000
UDstop
0004 0000
UDctr
0008 0000
UDlim
0010 0000
Boost
0020 0000
Ilim
0040 0000
Tlim
0080 0000
Tctr
0100 0000
Rstp
0200 0000
IxtLtlim
0400 0000
IxtStlim
0800 0000
Tclim
1000 0000
MtempLim
2000 0000
Flim
Operating Instructions Agile
1
2
3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
-
Create Warning Mask 536
Activate everything
Activate all warnings
Activate all controller states
Warning Ixt
Warning short-term Ixt
Warning long-term Ixt
Warning heat sink temperature
Warning inside temperature
Warning limit
Warning Init
Motor temperature warning
Warning mains failure
Warning motor circuit breaker
Warning Fmax
Warning analog input MFI1A
Warning analog input MFI2A
Warning system bus
Warning Udc
Warning, application
Controller Udc dynamic operation
Controller shutdown
Controller mains failure
Controller Udc limitation
Controller voltage pre-control
Controller I abs
Controller torque limitation
Controller torque control
Ramp stop
Contr. intel. curr. lim. LT-Ixt
Contr. intel. curr. lim. ST-Ixt
Contr. intel. curr. lim. Tc
Contr. intel. curr. lim. motor temp.
Controller Freq. Limitation
06/2013
194
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Output signals
The output of a warning is signaled.
1)
157 - Warning
25 - mask
2)
Output of warning activated in Create Warning Mask 536.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
Parameter Warning 269 and Warning 356 (error environment) show the warnings
independent from the created Warning mask.
Parameter Controller Status 275 and Controller Status 355 (error environment)
show the Controller Status independent from the created Warning mask.
7.6.5.9
Warning mask, application
626 Create Warning Mask Application
The Warning mask Application signals via a digital signal if an afore configured warning applies. The
configuration of the Warning mask Application is carried out via Create Appl. Warning Mask 626.
Depending on the application, any number of warnings can be configured. This enables internal
and/or external control using a common output signal. The display of Warning Application 273 is not
affected by the Warning mask.
Create Appl. Warning Mask 626
0 - No change
2 - Activate all warnings
10 - Warning V-belt
16 - Warning Service
17 - Warning User 1
18 - Warning User 2
102
110
116
117
118
-
Deactivate
Deactivate
Deactivate
Deactivate
Deactivate
all warnings
warning V-belt
warning service
warning User 1
warning User 2
Function
The configured warning mask is not changed.
The warnings reports stated are linked in the warning
mask.
Operation Mode 581 for V-belt monitoring signals noload operation of the application.
The time remaining until service of DC-link or fan has
expired.
The signal set on digital input User Warning 1 1363 is
active.
The signal set on digital input User Warning 2 1364 is
active.
All warnings are deactivated.
Warning 10 is deactivated.
Warning 16 is deactivated.
Warning 17 is deactivated.
Warning 18 is deactivated.
The selected warning mask application can be read out via parameter Actual Appl. Warning Mask
627. The above operation modes of parameter Create Appl. Warning Mask 626 are encoded in the
Actual Appl. Warning Mask 627. The code is calculated by hexadecimal addition of the individual
operation modes and the corresponding abbreviation.
A
A
A
A
A
Warning code
01C1 0001 BELT
0040 SERVICE
0080 User 1
0100 User 2
Control inputs and outputs
Create Appl. Warning Mask 626
2
10
16
17
18
-
Activate all warnings
Warning V-belt
Warning Service
Warning User 1
Warning User 2
195
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Output signals
The output of a warning is signaled.
215 - Warning
mask, appli27 cation
1)
2)
Output of warning activated in Create Appl. Warning Mask 626.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
Parameter Warning Application 273 shows the Application Warnings independent
from the created Warning mask.
7.6.6
Digital inputs
The assignment of the control signals to the available software functions can be adapted to the application in question. In addition to the available digital control inputs, further internal logic signals are
available as sources.
Each of the individual software functions is assigned to the various signal sources via parameterizable
inputs. This enables a flexible use of the digital control signals.
559 Digital inputs PNP/NPN
Via parameter Digital inputs PNP/NPN 559, the evaluation at the digital inputs can be selected as
PNP (high-switching) or NPN (low-switching).
Terminal Digital inputs PNP/NPN 559
Function
X11.4
Digital input NPN. Low-switching (with negative sig0 - NPN (active: 0 V)
X11.5
nal).
X11.6
Digital input PNP. High-switching (with positive sigX12.1
1 - PNP (active: 24 V)
nal). Factory setting.
X12.2
In order to use multifunction input MFI1 as a digital input, setting 3 or 4 must be selected for parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452.
Terminal
Operation Mode MFI1 452
X12.3
3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
Function
Low-switching (with negative signal).
High-switching (with positive signal).
In order to use multifunction input MFI2 as a digital input, setting 3 or 4 must be selected for parameter Operation Mode MFI2 562.
Terminal
X12.4
Operation Mode MFI2 562
3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
Function
Low-switching (with negative signal). Factory
setting.
High-switching (with positive signal).
In order to use the digital input/output (terminal X11.6) as a digital input, setting " 0 - Input IN3D "
must be selected for parameter Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558.
Terminal
Function
The digital input/output is set as digital inX11.6
0 - Input IN3D
put. Factory setting.
For setting of X11.6 as digital output, refer to chapter 7.6.4 “Digital input/output IN3D/OUT3D”.
Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
196
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
7.6.6.1
List of control signals
•
Select the function that is to be controlled. For example Start drive in anticlockwise operation.
•
Select the control signal for the parameter of the function. For example select “74 - IN4D” for
parameter Start Anticlockwise 69. In this case the drive starts anticlockwise operation if a signal
applies on digital input IN4D (enable signal must also be set).
Control signals
Selection for parameter
6 - On
7 - Off
70 - Inverter Release
71 - IN1D
72 - IN2D
73 - IN3D
74 - IN4D
75 - IN5D
76 - MFI1D
77 - MFI2D
157 - Warning Mask
160 - Ready Signal
161 - Run Signal
162 - Error Signal
Reference Frequency
163 reached
164 - Setting Frequency
165 - Warning Ixt
Warning Heat Sink Temperature
Warning Inside Tempera167 ture
Warning Motor Tempera168 ture
166 -
169 - General Warning
Control inputs and outputs
Function
Signal input is switched on.
Signal input is switched off.
Enable signal of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA
(X11.3) and STOB (X13.3). Or enable signal in remote mode via
communication interface.
Signal at digital input IN1D (X11.4). Or signal in remote mode
via communication interface.
Signal at digital input IN2D (X11.5). Or signal in remote mode
via communication interface.
Signal at digital input IN3D (digital input/output, X11.6) in Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558 = " 0 - input IN3D " . Or signal
in remote mode via communication interface.
Signal at digital input IN4D (X12.1). Or signal in remote mode
via communication interface.
Signal at digital input IN5D (X12.2). Or signal in remote mode
via communication interface.
Signal at multifunction input MFI1 (X12.3) in Operation mode
MFI1 452 " 3 - digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - digital PNP (active: 24 V) " . Or signal in remote mode via communication interface.
Signal at multifunction input MFI2 (X12.) in Operation Mode
MFI2 562 " 3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - Digital PNP
(active: 24 V) " . Or signal in remote mode via communication
interface.
The defined warning mask of parameter Create Warning Mask
536 signals a critical operating point.
Frequency inverter is initialized and ready for operation.
Enable signals (STOA and STOB) and a start command (Start
Clockwise 68 or Start Anticlockwise 69) are applied, output
frequency present.
Monitoring function signals an operational fault.
Signal when the Actual Frequency 241 has reached the reference frequency
The actual Stator Frequency 210 is higher than the value of
Setting Frequency 510.
The monitoring functions report an overload of the frequency
inverter
Maximum heat sink temperature TK minus the Warning Limit
Heat Sink Temp. 407 reached.
Maximum inside temperature Ti minus the Warning Limit Inside
Temp. 408 reached.
Warning behavior according to parameterized Operation Mode
Motor Temp. 570 at maximum motor temperature TPTC.
Signal when Warnings 269 are displayed with a critical operating point
197
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Control signals
Selection for parameter
Function
The value
170 - Warning Overtemperature
175 - Digital Signal OUT1D
176 - Digital Signal OUT2D Relay
177 - Digital Signal OUT3D
Reference Percentage
178 reached
179 - Mains Failure
Warning Motor Protection
Switch
181 - Digital Signal MFO1D
180 -
215 - Warning Mask, Application
216 - Application Warning
219 -
Technology Controller
within Backlash
264 - Warning service DC-link
265 - Warning service fan
270 to 277
284
285
292
293
-
STOA inverted
STOB inverted
STOA
STOB
323 - Power is on
471 -
Energy saving function is
active
Operating Instructions Agile
− (Maximum heat sink temperature TK) minus (Warning Limit
Heat Sink Temp. 407) or
− (Maximum inside temperature Ti) minus (Warning Limit Inside Temp. 408)
was reached.
Signal selected via Op. Mode OUT1D (X13.5) 531.
Signal selected via Op. Mode OUT2D (X10/Relay) 532.
Signal selected via Op. Mode OUT3D (X11.6) 533.
Signal when the Actual Percentage Value 230 has reached the
Reference Percentage Value 229.
Failure of the mains voltage and power regulation active according to Operation Mode 670 for the voltage controller.
Parameterized Operation Mode 571 of the motor circuit breaker
triggered.
Signal selected via Digital: Source MFO1D 554.
The defined warning mask of parameter Create Appl. Warning
Mask 626 signals a critical operating point.
All Application Warnings are deactivated. Display is effected via
parameter Application Warnings 273.
The control deviation lies within the range defined by Backlash 618.
Signal if the time remaining until service has expired. Parameter
Operation Mode Service Interval DC-link 1534 must be set to
“2 - Alarm Message”. Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 displays a message.
Signal if the time remaining until service has expired. Parameter
Operation Mode Service Interval Fan 1535 must be set to “2 Alarm Message”. Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 displays a
message.
Operation modes 70 to 77 of the digital inputs inverted (LOW
active).
Inverted signal status on digital input STOA for enable.
Inverted signal status on digital input STOB for enable.
Signal status on digital input STOA for enable.
Signal status on digital input STOB for enable.
Signal if mains voltage is switched on and pre-charging is finished.
Parameter Operation mode energy saving function 1550 is set
to “1 - manual” or “2 - automatic”. The digital input or logic signal selected for parameter Energy saving function on 1552 has
switched on the energy saving function.
06/2013
198
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Control signals
Selection for parameter
Inverter Re525 lease(Hardware)
526 - IN1D (Hardware)
527 - IN2D (Hardware)
Function
1
Enable signal of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA
(X11.3) and STOB (X13.3).
Signal at digital input IN1D (X11.4).
Signal at digital input IN2D (X11.5).
Signal at digital input IN3D (digital input/output, X11.6) in Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558 = " 0 - Input IN3D " .
Signal at digital input IN4D (X12.1).
Signal at digital input IN5D (X12.2).
Signal at multifunction input MFI1 (X12.3) in Operation Mode
MFI1 452 " 3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - Digital PNP
(active: 24 V) " .
Signal at multifunction input MFI2 (X12.) in Operation Mode
MFI2 562 " 3 - Digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - Digital PNP
(active: 24 V) " .
Operation modes 525 to 532 of the digital inputs inverted (LOW
active).
2
Process data for Profibus communication. Optional communication module CM-PDP-V1 with Profibus interface is required.
3
Process data object for system bus communication.
Process data object for system bus communication.
Process data object for system bus communication.
Process data object for system bus communication.
Operation modes 700 to 703 for RxPDO2.
Operation modes 700 to 703 for RxPDO3.
Signal of system bus communication.
528 - IN3D (Hardware)
529 - IN4D (Hardware)
530 - IN5D (Hardware)
531 - MFI1D (Hardware)
532 - MFI2D (Hardware)
537 to 544
640
to
655
700 701 702 703 710 to
720 to
730 810
to
814
832
to
847
910
to
925
2401
to
2416
1
2
3
4
5
6
Out-PZD3 Boolean
to
Out-PZD18 Boolean
RxPDO1 Boolean1
RxPDO1 Boolean2
RxPDO1 Boolean3
RxPDO1 Boolean4
713
723
Sysbus emergency
Obj 0x3003 DigOut 1 to
Obj 0x3003 DigOut 5
Obj 0x3005 Demux
Out 1 to Obj 0x3005
Demux Out 16
Output DeMux bit 0
to
Output DeMux bit 15
PLC-Output Buffer 1
to
PLC-Output buffer 16
Sources of CAN objects for CANopen® communication.
4
Sources at output of demultiplexer for CANopen® communication.
5
Bit 0 to Bit 15 on output of de-multiplexer; de-multiplexed process data signal via system bus or Profibus on input of multiplexers (parameter DeMux Input 1253).
6
Output signals of PLC-functions.
The digital signal is independent from the configuration of the parameter Local/Remote 412.
Refer to instructions on Profibus.
Refer to instructions on system bus.
Refer to instructions on CANopen.
Refer to instructions on system bus or Profibus.
Refer to application manual PLC.
Control inputs and outputs
199
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Signals via physical contacts (IN1D…IN5D, MFI1, MFI2) are only evaluated if an operation mode Local/Remote 412 with “Control via Contact” or “Control 3-Wire” (0, 4 or
5) is selected.
In all other operation modes Local/Remote 412 (1, 2, 3) physical contacts are only
evaluated, if the corresponding signals in the digital inputs with the suffix (Hardware)
are selected.
Signals not referring to a physical input are evaluated independent of the operation
mode Local/Remote 412.
7.6.6.2
Start command
68 Start Clockwise
69 Start Anticlockwise
The parameters Start Clockwise 68 and Start Anticlockwise 69 can be linked to the available digital
control inputs or the internal logic signals. The drive is only accelerated according to the control
method after a start command.
The logic functions are used for the specification of the direction of rotation, but also for using the
parameterized Operation Mode 620 for the starting behavior and Operation Mode 630 for the stopping behavior.
Parameter
Factory setting
71 – IN1D
72 – IN2D
Start Clockwise 68
Start Anticlockwise 69
7.6.6.3
3-Wire Control
87 Start 3-Wire Ctrl
In the case of 3-wire control, the drive is controlled using digital pulses. The drive is prepared for
starting via the logic state of the signal Start 3-Wire Ctrl 87 and started by a Start clockwise pulse
(Parameter Start Clockwise 68) or a start anticlockwise pulse (parameter Start Anticlockwise 69). By
switching off the signal Start 3-Wire Ctrl 87, the drive is stopped.
The control signals for Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise are pulses. The functions Start clockwise and Start anticlockwise for the drive are latching-type functions when signal Start 3-Wire Ctrl 87
is switched on. Latching is cancelled when the latching signal is switched off.
Drive
C
C
A
1
2
Start Clockwise
Start Anticlockwise
Start 3-WireCtrl
(C)
(A)
t
Clockwise
Anticlockwise
(1)
(2)
Signals are ignored
Time t & lt; 32 ms
The drive is started according to the configured starting behavior if the signal Start 3-Wire Ctrl 87 is
switched on and a positive signal edge for Start clockwise or Start anticlockwise is detected.
Once the drive has started, new edges (1) on the start signals will be ignored.
If the start signal is shorter than 32 ms (2) or if both start signals were switched on within 32 ms (2),
the drive will be switched off according to the configured stopping behavior.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
200
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
3-wire control is activated with parameter Local/Remote 412:
Function
Control of direction of rotation (parameter Start Clockwise 68, Start
Anticlockwise 69) and signal Start 3-Wire Ctrl 87 via digital inputs.
Local/Remote 412
5 - Control 3-wire
See chapter 7.3.1 " Control " for further operation modes of parameter Local/Remote 412.
Parameter
Start 3-Wire Ctrl 87
7.6.6.4
Factory setting
7 - Off
Motor potentiometer
62 Frequency Motorpoti Up
63 Frequency Motorpoti Down
The reference frequency of the drive can be set via digital control signals. See chapter 7.5.3.3.1
" Control via reference frequency channel " .
Parameter
Frequency Motorpoti Up 62
Frequency Motorpoti Down 63
Factory setting
7 - Off
7 - Off
72 Percent Motorpoti Up
73 Percent Motorpoti Down
The reference percentage can be set via digital control signals. See chapter 7.5.3.3.2 " Control via
reference percentage channel " .
Paramete
Percent Motorpoti Up 62
Percent Motorpoti Down 63
7.6.6.5
Factory setting
7 - Off
7 - Off
Fixed frequency changeover
66 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 1
67 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 2
131 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 3
By combining the logic states of the fixed frequency changeover modes 1, 2 and 3, the fixed frequencies 1 to 8 (parameters 480 to 488) can be selected. See chapter 7.5.1.3 " Fixed frequencies " .
Parameter
Fixed Frequency Change-Over 1 66
Fixed Frequency Change-Over 2 67
Fixed Frequency Change-Over 3 131
7.6.6.6
Factory setting
74 - IN4D
7 - Off
7 - Off
Fixed percentage changeover
75 Fixed Percent Change-Over 1
76 Fixed Percent Change-Over 2
By combining the logic states of Fixed Percent Change-Over 1 75and Fixed Percent Change-Over 2
76, the fixed percentages 1 to 4 (Parameters 520 to 523) can be selected. See chapter 7.5.2.3 " Fixed
percentages " .
Parameter
Fixed Percent Change-Over 1 75
Fixed Percent Change-Over 2 76
Control inputs and outputs
Factory setting
7 - Off
7 - Off
201
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.6.6.7
Jog Start
81 JOG Start
The selected signal source starts the JOG-function. The drive accelerates to the rotary frequency set
via parameter JOG Frequency 489.
Parameter
JOG Start 81
7.6.6.8
Factory setting
7 - Off
Error Acknowledgment
103 Error Acknowledgement
The frequency inverters feature various monitoring functions which can be adapted via the error and
warning behavior. Switching the frequency inverter off at the various operating points should be
avoided by an application-related parameterization. If there is a fault switch-off, this report can be
given via the parameter Program(ming) 34 or the logic signal can be acknowledged with parameter
Error Acknowledgment 103.
Parameter
Factory setting
75 - IN5D
Error Acknowledgment 103
Possibilities of error acknowledgement:
− Via the Stop key of the operator panel
A reset via the STOP key can only be executed, if Parameter Local/Remote 412 allows the control
via keypad
− via parameter Program(ming) 34
− via parameter Error Acknowledgement 103 which is assigned a logic signal or a digital input
A reset via a digital input can only be executed, if Parameter Local/Remote 412 allows that control
or if a physical input with the suffix (Hardware) is selected.
− When using a Fieldbus and control via Statemachine: Setting the reset bit in the Controlword. Refer to the Communication manuals for details.
7.6.6.9
Thermal contact
204 Thermal contact for P570
The monitoring of the motor temperature is a part of the error and warning behavior which can be
configured as required. Parameter Thermal contact for P570 204 links the digital input signal to the
Operation Mode Motor Temp. 570. See chapter 7.4.6 „Motor temperature“. By default, multifunction
input 2 is used for connection of a thermal contact.
Parameter
Thermal contact for P570 204
Operation Mode Motor Temp. 570
Factory setting
532 - MFI2D (Hardware), multifunction input 2 (terminal
X12.4)
0 - Off
•
For parameter Thermal contact for P570 204, the digital input to which the thermal contact is
connected must be selected.
•
For parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp. 570, select an evaluation (warning or error switchoff).
If a multifunction input is selected for parameter Thermal contact for P570 204, the multifunction
input must be configured as a digital input:
Multifunction input 1
Operation Mode MFI1 452
Multifunction input 2
Operation Mode MFI2 562
3434-
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
202
Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
Digital NPN (active: 0 V)
Factory setting
Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Select NPN or PNP according to the required evaluation of the thermal contact.
If a thermal contact is connected to multifunction input 2, no change of Thermal contact for P570
204 and Operation Mode MFI2 562 is required in the factory setting. You only have to set up the
required evaluation via parameter Operation Mode Motor Temp. 570.
7.6.6.10
n-/T-control changeover
164 n-/T-Control Change-Over
The field-orientated control procedures in configurations 410 and 610 contain the functions for speed
or torque-dependent control of the drive. The changeover can be done in ongoing operation, as an
additional functionality monitors the transition between the two control systems. The speed controller
or the torque controller is active, depending on the n-/T-Control Change-Over 164.
For information on how to set up the speed controller, refer to chapter 7.9.5.3 " Speed controller " .
For information on how to set up the torque controller, refer to chapter 7.9.5.2 " Torque controller " .
Parameter
Factory setting
7 - Off
n-/T-Control Change-Over 164
7.6.6.11
Dataset changeover
70 Data Set Change-Over 1
71 Data Set Change-Over 2
Parameter values can be stored in four different data sets. This enables the use of various parameter
values depending on the current operation point of the frequency inverter. The changeover between
the four data sets is done via the logic signals assigned to the parameters Data Set Change-Over 1
70 and Data Set Change-Over 2 71.
Addressing
Data Set Change- Data Set ChangeActive data set
Over 1 70
Over 2 71
0
1
1
0
0 = contact open
0
0
1
1
Data
Data
Data
Data
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
(DS1)
(DS2)
(DS3)
(DS4)
1 = contact closed
Parameter
Data Set Change-Over 1 70
Data Set Change-Over 2 71
Factory setting
73 - IN3D
7 - Off
Terminal
X11.6
-
The actual value parameter Active Data Set 249 shows the selected data set.
Save in a data set: parameter values that are measured during Setup
•
Select " Setup " manually in menu of operator panel.
The data set selection is displayed.
− Select data set 0 if all data sets are to contain the same parameter values.
− Select one of the data sets 1 ... 4 for commissioning of several motors or for different operating
points.
Example: For auto set-up (auto-tuning) and motor data, select data set 1.
.
.
.
Control inputs and outputs
ENT
ENT
Data set
203
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
If " Setup " is performed, the entered and measured motor data is saved in the selected data set.
Set a parameter value in a data set
Example: Set nominal motor voltage P370 in data set 2.
When the frequency inverter is switched on for the first time, the data set selection is not displayed.
In this case, all entered and measured motor data will be saved in all four data sets.
7.6.6.12
Handshake Traverse
49 Handshake Traverse Function
Via parameter Handshake Traverse Function 49, the signal source is selected for specification of the
direction of rotation of the slave drive of the traverse function. The traverse function is switched on
via parameter Operation Mode 435. See chapter 7.10.8 " Traverse function " .
Parameter
Handshake Traverse Function 49
7.6.6.13
Factory setting
7 - Off
Brake chopper release
95 Brake Chopper Release
Via the signal assigned to parameter Brake Chopper Release 95, the brake chopper can be released
or disabled. In the factory settings, the brake chopper is released if the frequency inverter release is
switched on.
Parameter
Brake Chopper Release 95
Factory setting
70 - Inverter Release
Terminals
X11.3 and X13.3
Example:
Brake Chopper Release 95 = " 6- On " : The brake chopper is released.
Brake Chopper Release 95 = " 7- Off " : The brake chopper is disabled.
For information on how to set up the brake chopper, refer to chapter 7.10.4 " Brake chopper and
brake resist " .
NOTE
A connected brake resistor is only used if the brake chopper release is present. At brake
operations or other generator states an overvoltage switch off can happen if the electrical energy is not dissipated.
7.6.6.14
User warning
1363 User Warning 1
1364 User Warning 2
Parameterization of an user warning enables triggering a warning in the device via a digital signal if a
critical state in the plant occurs. The warning is displayed in Warnings Application 273 and can be
transmitted to a higher-level control like a PLC. Please check parameter Create warning mask application 626 and chapter 7.6.5.9 “Warning mask, application” for further explanations.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
204
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
7.6.6.15
External error
183 External Error
Parameterization of an external error enables switching off or shutting down several frequency inverters at a time if a fault occurs in the plant or the drive. If an error occurs in a frequency inverter, the
error signal can be transmitted via a bus system and the required reaction can be triggered in another
frequency inverter. The logic signal or digital input signal which is to trigger the external error can be
assigned to parameter External Error 183.
Via parameter Op. Mode ext. Error 535, the response to an external error can be configured. See
chapter 7.4.5 " External error " .
Operation Mode 535
0 - Disabled
1 - Error-Switch-Off
2 - Shutdown, Error
3-
Emergency-Stop,
Error
Parameter
External Error 183
Function
No response to external errors. Factory setting.
The drive is switched off and the error message „F1454 External Error“ is
output if the logic signal or digital input signal for parameter External
Error 183 is present.
The drive is stopped at the current deceleration ramp and the error message „F1454 External Error“ is output if the logic signal or digital input
signal for parameter External Error 183 is present.
The drive is stopped at the set emergency stop ramp and the error message „F1454 External Error“ is output if the logic signal or digital input
signal for parameter External Error 183 is present.
Factory setting
7 - Off
For setting up external warnings parameters User Warning 1 1363 and User Warning 2 1364 can be
used. Check chapter 7.6.5.9 “Warning mask, application” for further details.
7.6.6.16
PLC
Logic functions and analog functions with functional block programming
With the PLC-functions (table of functions and graphic functional block programming), external analog
or digital signals and internal logic signals of the frequency inverter can be linked to one another.
Apart from standard AND, OR and XOR combinations, various complex logic functions and analog
functions are available. The corresponding output value can be used for other logic instructions and
digital outputs. Logic instructions can be combined to one another so that complex links can be realized. Analog values can be processed and output via analog outputs.
The instructions enable flexible adjustment for linking different input signals.
Analog functions include, for example, comparisons of analog input values, mathematical functions,
PID control functions, filters, limitations, switches and counters.
Example:
A drive is to start if
− enable is given AND IN4D is set
OR
− enable is given AND IN5D and MFI1D are set.
Refer to application manual " PLC " .
7.6.6.17
Multiplexer/demultiplexer
The multiplexer/demultiplexer enables the transfer of various digital signals between an overriding
controller and frequency inverters via field bus or between frequency inverters via the system bus.
Multiplexer:
1252 Mux Inputs
The multiplexer features 16 inputs for logic signals or digital input signals.
Control inputs and outputs
205
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
On the output, the logic signal 927 - " Output MUX " for the inputs of the TxPDO process data of the
system bus or for PZDx-IN process data of the Profibus can be used.
Parameter
1252 Mux Inputs
Factory setting
7 - Off
1250 Mux Input Index (write)
1251 Mux Input index (read)
The parameters Mux Input Index (write) 1250 and Mux Input Index (read) 1251 for the input signals
of the multiplexer enable parameterization via the operator panel or the application VTable in VPlus.
Parameters
No.
Description
1250 Mux Input Index (write) 1)
1251 Mux Input Index (read)
1)
non-volatile (fixed parameterization):
0:
All indices in EEPROM
1…16: One index in EEPROM
Min.
0
0
Setting
Max.
33
33
Fact. sett.
1
1
Volatile:
17:
All indices in RAM
18…33: One index 1…16 in RAM
NOTE
Setting " 0 " for Mux Input Index (write) 1250 changes all data in EEPROM and RAM.
In the case of non-volatile storage (0...16), the changed values are still available when
power supply is switched on again.
In the case of volatile storage (17…33), the data is only stored in RAM. If the unit is
switched off, this data is lost and the data required are loaded from EEPROM.
Demultiplexer:
1253 DeMux Input
The demultiplexer features an input DeMux Input 1253 whose signal can be for the process data
RxPDO of the system bus or OUT-PZDx of Profibus.
On the output of the demultiplexer, the logic signals “910 - Output DeMux Bit 0” to “925 - Output
DeMux Bit15” are available, e.g. for control of PLC-functions.
Operation modes for DeMux input 1253
9
704 … 727
740, 741
754 … 757
900
927
-
Zero
RxPDO Word
Remote control word , remote state word
OUT-PZD word
Controller status
Output MUX
Demultiplexer outputs
910 … 925 - Output DeMux Bit 0 ... output DeMux Bit 15
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
206
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Example: Transfer of a user-defined status word from a slave to a master via system bus or Profibus,
parameterization of multiplexer and demultiplexer using PC application VTable in VPlus
Settings on transmitter:
•
In VPlus, start application VTable via the button bar.
•
In VTable assign the required signal sources for sending to parameter Mux. Inputs 1252 index 1
to index 16. A setting for index 0 results in this setting being taken over for all other indices.
•
Assign signal source “927 – Output MUX” to a TxPDO process data parameter of the system bus
or a PZDx-IN process data parameter of Profibus.
Settings on receiver:
•
Assign the corresponding RxPDO signal sources of the system bus or OUT-PZD signal sources of
Profibus to parameter DeMux Input 1253.
The transmitted signals are available at the receiver as signal sources 910 to 925.
7.6.7
Input PWM/repetition frequency/pulse train
496 Operation Mode IN2D (PWM/repetition frequency/pulse train)
A PWM signal (pulse-width modulated signal), frequency signal or a pulse train (pulse sequence) signal can be used for definition of a reference value. The signal at digital input IN2D (at terminal X11.5)
is evaluated according to the selected Operation Mode IN2D 496.
Operation Mode IN2D 496
0 - Off
10 - PWM, 0% – 100%
11 - PWM, -100% – 100%
20 - RF Single Evaluation
Control inputs and outputs
Function
The PWM signal or repetition frequency is zero.
Factory setting.
PWM signal detection at digital input IN2D (at terminal X11.5).
0 … 100% of Maximum Reference Percentage 519 or 0 … 100%
of Maximum Frequency 419. See 7.6.7.1 “PWM input”.
PWM signal detection at digital input IN2D (at terminal X11.5).
-100 … 100% of Maximum Reference Percentage 519 or
-100 … 100% of Maximum Frequency 419. See 7.6.7.1 “PWM
input”.
Repetition frequency input at digital input IN2D (at terminal
X11.5). One edge of the frequency signal is evaluated. The signal
can also be evaluated as a percentage. See 7.6.7.2 “Repetition
frequency input”.
207
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Operation Mode IN2D 496
21 - RF Double Evaluation
30 - Pulse Train
Function
Repetition frequency input at digital input IN2D (at terminal
X11.5). Both edges of the frequency signal are evaluated. The
signal can also be evaluated as a percentage. See 7.6.7.2
“Repetition frequency input”.
Pulse train (pulse sequence) signal at digital input IN2D (at terminal X11.5) as reference frequency. Via parameter Pulse Train
Scaling Frequency 654, you can set which input frequency corresponds to the value of Maximum Frequency 419. See 7.6.7.3
“Pulse train”.
Percentage: Via parameter Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654,
you can set which percentage corresponds to the value of Maximum Reference Percentage 519. The signal can also be evaluated as a percentage.
Digital input IN2D is intended for use as PWM input, repetition frequency input or
pulse train input. Digital input IN2D cannot be used for other functions if the function
PWM input, repetition frequency or pulse train is selected for Operation Mode
IN2D 496.
In the factory settings, IN2D is linked to parameter Start Anticlockwise 69. If the
PWM, repetition frequency or pulse train input and the function " Start anticlockwise "
are to be used parameter Start Anticlockwise 69 must be assigned another digital
input.
7.6.7.1
PWM input
Digital input IN2D (terminal X11.5) can be used as PWM input. For parameter Operation Mode
IN2D 496, select setting " 10 - PWM, 0% –100% " or " 11 – PWM, -100% – 100% " .
For definition of reference values, the following settings can be selected:
− Reference Percentage Source 1 476 = " 10 - Repetition Percentage Value " .
− Reference Percentage Source 2 494 = " 10 - Repetition Percentage Value " .
The percentage is referred to Maximum Reference Percentage 519.
652 PWM-Offset
653 PWM-Amplification
Via parameters PWM-Offset 652 and PWM-Amplification 653, the PWM input signal can be adjusted
for the application.
Parameters
No.
Description
652 PWM-Offset
653 PWM-Amplification
PWM signal
Min.
-100.00%
5.0%
Setting
Max.
100.00%
1000.0%
Fact. sett.
0.00%
100.0%
TON
T
t
Ton
[%] × PWM - Amplification 653
PWM value = PWM - Offset 652 +
T
PWM-Input 258 shows the actual value of the PWM input.
PWM frequencies in the range between 50 Hz and 15 kHz can be evaluated.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
208
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
Output as frequency value
The input percentage value can be selected as frequency value for the reference frequency channel.
Parameter Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency Source 2 492 enables the
selection:
10 - PWM, 0% – 100%
11 - PWM, -100% – 100%
The range 0% … 100% or -100 % … 100 % on the PWM-input corresponds to the frequency range
0… Maximum Frequency 419.
f =
Input value
∗ Maximum Frequency 419
100%
7.6.7.2
Repetition frequency input
Digital input IN2D (terminal X11.5) can be used as repetition frequency input. For parameter Operation Mode IN2D 496, " 20 - RF Single Evaluation " or " 21 - RF Double Evaluation " must be selected.
For definition of reference values, the following settings can be selected:
− Reference frequency source 1 475 = “10 - Repetition Frequency”.
− Reference frequency source 2 492 = “10 - Repetition Frequency”.
The percentage is referred to Maximum Frequency 419.
497 Rep.Freq: Divider
The signal frequency at the selected repetition frequency input can be scaled via parameter Rep.Freq:
Divider 497. The parameter value is comparable to the number of division marks of an encoder per
revolution of the drive. The frequency limit of digital input IN2D is to be taken into account for the
frequency of the input signal.
Parameters
No.
Description
497 Rep.Freq: Divider
Min.
1
Setting
Max.
8192
Fact. sett.
1024
An inverted evaluation can be set via the reference frequency channel in parameter Operation Mode
493. See chapter 7.5.1.2 “Positive and negative reference frequencies”.
Parameter Repetition Frequency/Pulse Train 252 shows the actual value of the repetition frequency
input.
Output as percentage
In the case of a parameterization as repetition frequency, the read frequency value is also available as
a percentage for the reference percentage channel. 0 … 100% correspond to the signal frequency
range 0 … Maximum Frequency 419 at the repetition frequency input. The conversion is done using
the following formula:
Percentage value =
7.6.7.3
Frequency value
Maximum Frequency 419
× 100%
Pulse train
At digital input IN2D (terminal X11.5), a pulse train (pulse sequence) signal can be defined as reference value. Parameter Operation Mode IN2D 496 must be set to " 30 - Pulse Train " .
For setting of the reference values, the following settings can be selected:
− Reference Frequency Source 1 475 = " 10 - Repetition Frequency " .
− Reference Frequency Source 2 492 = " 10 - Repetition Frequency " .
Control inputs and outputs
209
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
654 Pulse Train Scaling Frequency
The pulse train (pulse sequence) signal at digital input IN2D (terminal X11.5) is scaled. Via parameter
Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654, you can set which input frequency corresponds to the value of
Maximum Frequency 419. A read frequency of Maximum Frequency 419 means that at the pulse
train input, a frequency with the value of the scaling factor is applied.
Parameters
No.
Description
654 Pulse Train Scaling Frequency
Min.
0
Setting
Max.
32000
Fact. sett.
25000
If parameter Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654 is set to zero, the frequency value at the digital
input will not be scaled.
Parameter Repetition Frequency/Pulse Train 252 shows the actual value of pulse train input.
Pulse train signal on IN2D as reference value:
Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or
Reference Frequency Source 2 492
Operation mode IN2D 496
Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654
IN2D
10 - Repetition Frequency
30 - Pulse Train
The scaled pulse train signal is the reference frequency
value.
freference
X11.5 P496 30-Pulse Train
Hz
P654
Reference frequency value:
freference = fIN2D ×
Maximum Frequency 419
Pulse Train Scaling Frequency 654 [Hz]
Factory setting
fReference [Hz]
P654=25000
(Maximum Frequency 419) 50
10
5000
Example
25000 fIN2D [Hz]
(Pulse train scaling frequency 654)
Example:
Input frequency at IN2D: fIN2D = 5000 Hz
Reference frequency value:
=0
Pulse Train
freference = fIN2D (5000 Hz), limited to 50 Hz (Maximum Frequency 419)
Scaling Fre= 25000 freference = 10 Hz
quency 654
Output as percentage
In the case of a parameterization as a pulse train, the read frequency value is also available as a percentage for the reference percentage channel. 0 … 100% correspond to the signal frequency range 0
… Maximum Frequency 419 at the pulse train input. The conversion is done using the following formula:
Percentage value =
Frequency value
Maximum Frequency 419
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
× 100%
210
Control inputs and outputs
Parameter descriptions
7.6.7.4
Further setting options
An offset can be set via the reference frequency channel or via the function of the electronic gear. For
example, you can set in the reference frequency channel: Reference Frequency
Source 1 475 = " 10 - Repetition Frequency " and Reference Frequency Source 2 492 = " 3 - Fixed
Frequency " . Via the fixed frequencies (parameters 480 … 488), you can set the required offset.
A filter can be set via PLC-function (see application manual " PLC " ).
7.7
V/f characteristic
606 Type V/f characteristic
Via parameter Type V/f Characteristic 606, you can set the characteristic to linear or quadratic.
Type
1 - Linear
2 - Quadratic
7.8
Function
Linear V/f characteristic: |U|~ f. Factory setting.
Quadratic V/f characteristic: |U| ~ f2. For applications where the torque increases quadratically to the speed. Suitable for energy saving.
See chapter 8.2 “Quadratic V/f characteristic”.
Too small set values of the V/f characteristic affect the dynamic behavior of
the drive.
Linear V/f characteristic
600 Starting Voltage
601 Voltage Rise
602 Rise Frequency
603 Cut-Off Voltage
604 Cut-Off Frequency
The sensorless control in configuration 110 (parameter Configuration 30) is based on the proportional change of output voltage compared to the output frequency according to the configured characteristic.
By setting the V/f-characteristic, the voltage of the connected 3-phase motor is controlled according to
the frequency. The torque to be applied by the motor at the corresponding operating point demands
the control of the output voltage proportional to the frequency. At a constant output voltage/output
frequency ratio of the frequency inverter, the magnetization is constant in the nominal operating
range of the 3-phase motor. The rating point of the motor or end point of the V/f-characteristic is set
via the guided commissioning with the parameter Cut-Off Voltage 603 and the parameter Cut-Off
Frequency 604.
The lower frequency range, where an increased voltage is necessary for the start of the drive, is critical. The voltage at an output frequency of zero is set with parameter Starting Voltage 600. A voltage
increase deviating from the linear course of the V/f-characteristic can be defined by parameters Voltage Rise 601 and Rise Frequency 602. The parameter value percentage is calculated from the linear
V/f-characteristic. Via the parameters Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419, the
working range of the motor or the V/f-characteristic is defined.
V/f characteristic
211
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Linear characteristic in setting " 1 - Linear " for Type V/f Characteristic 606.
(FMIN): Minimum Frequency 418, (FMAX): Maximum Frequency 419,
(US): Starting Voltage 600,
(UK): Voltage Rise 601, (FK): Rise Frequency 602
(UC): Cut-Off Voltage 603, (FC): Cut-Off Frequency 604
No.
600
601
602
Parameters
Description
Starting Voltage
Voltage Rise
Rise frequency
603 Cut-Off Voltage
AGL202
AGL402
604 Cut-Off Frequency
Min.
0.0 V
-100%
0%
30.0 V
60.0 V
0.00 Hz
Setting
Max.
100.0 V
200%
100%
280.0 V
560.0 V
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
5.0 V
10%
20%
230.0 V
400.0 V
50.00 Hz
The guided commissioning takes the parameterized rated motor values and reference
data of the frequency inverter into account when it comes to pre-setting the V/fcharacteristic. In the case of asynchronous machines, the speed can be increased at a
constant torque if the motor winding can be switched over from star to delta connection. If the data for delta connection indicated on the rating plate of the asynchronous motor were entered, the cut-off frequency is increased automatically by the
square root of three.
The Cut-Off Voltage 603 (UC) and Cut-Off Frequency 604 (FC) set in the factory are derived from
the motor data Rated Voltage 370 and Rated Frequency 375. With the parameterized Starting Voltage 600 (US), the linear equation of the V/f-characteristic results.
UC − US
400.0 V - 5.0 V
U=
⋅ f + US =
⋅ f + 5.0 V
FC − 0
50.00 Hz − 0.00 Hz
The Rise Frequency 602 (FK) is entered as a percentage of the Cut-Off Frequency 604 (FC), the
default value is f = 10 Hz. The output voltage for the default Voltage Rise 601 is calculated as
U = 92.4 V.
UC − US
U =
⋅ (FK ⋅ FC ) + US ⋅ (1 + UK ) =
FC − 0
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
400 V - 5 V
⋅ (0.2 ⋅ 50 Hz ) + 5 V ⋅ 1.1 = 92.4 V
50 Hz − 0 Hz
212
Linear V/f characteristic
Parameter descriptions
7.8.1
Dynamic voltage pre-control
605 Dyn. Voltage Pre-Control
The Dyn. Voltage Pre-Control 605 accelerates the control behavior of the current limit controller
(parameter Operation Mode 610) and of the voltage controller (parameter Operation Mode 670).
The output voltage value resulting from the V/F characteristic is changed by addition of the calculated
voltage pre-control.
Parameters
No.
Description
605 Dyn. Voltage Pre-Control
7.9
Min.
0%
Setting
Max.
200%
Fact. sett.
100%
Control functions
With the control function the control reactions can be set up fitting to the application.
7.9.1
Intelligent current limits
573 Operation Mode (intelligent current limits)
The current limits to be set according to the application avoid inadmissible loading of the connected
load and prevent a fault switch-off of the frequency inverter. The function extends the current controller available in the control system. The overload reserve of the frequency inverter can be used optimally by means of the intelligent current limits, in particular in applications with dynamic load
alternations. Parameter Operation Mode 573 defines the threshold to the activation of the intelligent
current limit. The parameterized rated motor current or the reference current of the frequency inverter is synchronized as the limit value of the intelligent current limits.
In the control method according to V/f-characteristic (setting 110 of Configuration 30) the intelligent
current limits take effect to the current limit controller. The intelligent current limits are active only in
the case of an active current limit controller.
In the field-orientated control (setting 410 or 610 of Configuration 30) the maximum torque-forming
current is limited by the intelligent current limits.
Operation Mode 573
0
1
10
11
20
21
30
-
Off
Ixt
Tc
Ixt + Tc
Motor Temp.
Motor Temp.+ Ixt
Tc + Motor Temp.
31 - Tc + Motor Temp. + Ixt
Function
The function is switched off.
Limitation to the overload of the frequency inverter (Ixt).
Limitation to the maximum heat sink temperature (TC).
Operation mode 1 and 10 (Ixt + TC).
Limitation to the motor temperature (TMotor).
Operation mode 20 and 1 (TMotor + Ixt).
Operation mode 10 and 20 (TC + TMotor).
Operation mode 10 and 20 (TC + TMotor + Ixt).
Factory setting.
In the operation modes with overload reserve (Ixt) there is a reduction of the output current when the
threshold value is exceeded, with a distinction being made between long and short-term overload
reserve. After the short-term overload (1 s) has been used up, the output current is reduced to the
long-term overload current matching the present switching frequency. After the long-term overload
current has been used up (60 s), the output current is reduced to the rated current which also depends on the switching frequency.
If the output current has already been reduced due to the fact that the long-term overload has used
up, the short-term overload is no longer available even if it has not been used up beforehand. The
defined overload reserve (Ixt) of the frequency inverter is available again after a power reduction
lasting 10 minutes.
Control functions
213
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
574 Power Limit
575 Limitation Time
The threshold selected via parameter Operation Mode 573 is monitored. If parameter Operation
Mode 573 is selected to motor or heat sink temperature monitoring, the power is reduced to the value of Power Limit 574 once the limit value is reached. The power is reduced until the temperature
has dropped sufficiently. You can set an additional time Limitation Time 575 for which the limitation
after falling below the limit value should be maintained. In motor operation, the output current and
the speed will be reduced. The load behavior of the motor must depend on the speed.
The power limit should be selected as small as possible in order to give the drive sufficient time to
cool down. The reference value is the rated output of the frequency inverter or the set rated power of
the motor.
Parameters
No.
Description
574 Power Limit
575 Limitation Time
Min.
40.00%
5 min
Setting
Max.
95.00%
300 min
Fact. sett.
80.00%
15 min
Output signals
Reaching of a limit – selected in Operation Mode 573 – can be signaled via digital outputs.
15 - Warning Current Limitation
Controller Current Limit.
16 Long Term Ixt
Controller Current Limit.
17 Short Term Ixt
18 - Controller Current Limit. Tc
19 -
Controller Current Limit.
Motor Temp.
Operating Instructions Agile
The intelligent current limits limit the output current.
The overload reserve for 60 s has been used up and the output current is being limited.
The overload reserve for 1 s has been used up and the output
current is being limited.
Max. heat sink temperature TK reached. The intelligent current
limits are active.
Max. motor temperature reached. The intelligent current limits
are active.
06/2013
214
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
7.9.2
Voltage controller
670 Operation Mode (voltage controller)
The voltage controller contains the functions necessary for monitoring the DC link voltage.
− The DC link voltage which rises in generator operation (in example during the braking process) of
the motor is controlled to the set limit value by the voltage controller.
− The power failure regulation uses the rotation energy of the drive to bridge short-term power
failures.
The voltage controller is set with parameter Operation Mode 670.
Operation mode 670
0 - Off
1 - Udc-Limitation active
2 - Mains Support active
312 -
Udc-Limit. & Mains
Supp. active
Mains Support active,
Chopper not active
Udc-Limit. & Mains
13 - Supp. active, Chopper
not active
Function
The function is switched off. Brake and Motor chopper are active and
switch with the parameterized thresholds of P506 and P507.
DC link limitation active. Overvoltage controller switched on, the
Brake and Motor chopper are active and switch with the parameterized thresholds of P506 and P507. Factory setting.
Power failure regulation switched on. Brake and Motor chopper are
active and switch with the parameterized thresholds of P506 and
P507. Suitable for quick shutdown.
Overvoltage controller and power failure regulation switched on, with
motor chopper.
Power failure regulation switched on. During the Mains Support, motor and brake chopper are deactivated. In all other cases motor and
brake chopper are active and switch with the parameterized thresholds of P506 and P507.
Overvoltage controller and power failure regulation switched on.
During the Mains Support, motor and brake chopper are deactivated.
In all other cases motor and brake chopper are active and switch
with the parameterized thresholds of P506 and P507.
The function motor chopper is available only in the field-orientated control methods in configuration
410 (parameter Configuration 30).
When an operation mode with motor chopper is selected, set the Trigger Threshold 507 & lt; (Reference DC-Link Limitation 680 - 10 V). See chapter 7.10.5 " Motor chopper " .
For synchronous motors (Configuration 30 = 610), the motor chopper function is
deactivated to prevent damages to the motor. The other functions of the voltage controller are not affected by this.
For asynchronous motors in V/f control (Configuration 30 = 110), the motor chopper
function is not operative. The other functions of the voltage controller are not affected
by this.
The brake chopper is active dependent of the setting of Reference DC-Link Limitation
680. See chapter 7.10.4 “Brake chopper and brake resistor” for parameterizing the
switching threshold.
Control functions
215
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Operation mode overvoltage control,
Voltage controller: Parameter Operation Mode 670 = 1
680 Reference DC-Link Limitation
681 Max. Frequency Rise
The overvoltage controller prevents a switch-off of the frequency inverter in generator operation. The
reduction of the drive speed by a ramp gradient selected via parameter Deceleration Clockwise 421,
or Deceleration Anticlockwise 423 can lead to an overvoltage in the DC link. If the voltage exceeds
the figure set by the parameter Reference DC-Link Limitation 680, the deceleration is reduced in
such a way that the DC link voltage is regulated to the set value. If the DC link voltage cannot be
regulated to the set reference value by the reduction of the deceleration, the deceleration is stopped
and the output frequency raised. The output frequency is calculated by addition of the parameter
value Max. Frequency Rise 681 to the frequency at the operating point of the controller intervention.
No.
Parameters
Description
AGL202
680 Reference DC-Link Limitation
AGL402
681 Max. Frequency Rise
Min.
225.0 V
325.0 V
0.00 Hz
Setting
Max.
Fact. sett.
387.5 V
380.0 V
775.0 V
760.0 V
999.99 Hz
10.00 Hz
For a reliable operation of the overvoltage controller, Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends to set the motor-chopper Trigger Threshold 507 & lt; (Reference DC-Link Limitation 680 - 10 V). See chapter
7.10.5 “Motor chopper”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
216
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
Operation mode power failure regulation.
Voltage controller: Parameter Operation mode 670 = 2
without Mains resumption
671 Mains Failure Threshold
672 Reference Mains Support Value
With the power failure regulation, short-term power failures can be bridged. Mains failure is detected
when the DC link voltage has dropped below the set value of parameter Mains Failure Threshold
671. If a mains failure is detected, the controller tries to regulate the DC link voltage to the value set
with parameter Reference Mains Support Value 672. To that end, the output frequency is continuously reduced and the motor with its rotating masses is switched over to generator operation. Using field
oriented Control (FOC, SERVO) the reduction of the output frequency is done according to the configuration with a maximum of the current set by the parameter Gen. Ref. Current Limit 683.
Gen. Ref. Current Limit 683 is active in configurations 410 and 610
(FOC and SERVO).
The threshold values of the voltage controller are calculated starting with the current DC link voltage
with the parameters Mains Failure Threshold 671 and Reference Mains Support Value 672.
If the mains voltage is restored before a switch-off is effected by the mains undervoltage detection
system, the drive is accelerated to its reference frequency at the set acceleration or according to the
parameter Acceleration on Mains Resumption 674. If the value of parameter Acceleration on Mains
Resumption 674 is set to the default value of 0.00 Hz/s, the drive is accelerated at the values set for
the ramp parameters Acceleration (Clockwise) 420 or Acceleration Anticlockwise 422.
Parameters
No.
Description
671 Mains Failure Threshold
672 Reference mains support value
Control functions
Min.
-200.0 V
-200.0 V
217
Setting
Max.
-50.0 V
-10.0 V
06/2013
Fact. sett.
-100.0 V
-40.0 V
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
The frequency inverter reacts to the signals at the control inputs both when the power
failure regulation is switched on and in normal operation. A control via externally supplied control signals is only possible in the case of a no-break supply. As an alternative, supply of the control signals through the frequency inverter is to be used.
Output signals
Mains failure and mains support are signaled via digital signals.
179 - Mains failure
13 - Mains failure
1)
2)
Failure of mains voltage and mains support– selected via Operation Mode
670 of the voltage controller.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
Operation mode power failure regulation
Voltage controller: Parameter Operation mode 670 = 2
with Mains resumption
675 Shutdown Threshold
676 Reference Shutdown Value
The DC link voltage which is available in the case of a power failure is supplied by the motor. The
output frequency is continuously reduced and the motor with its rotating masses is switched over to
generator operation. The reduction of the output frequency is done with a maximum of the current
set by the parameter Gen. Ref. Current Limit 683 or the ramp Mains Support Deceleration 673.
Mains Support Deceleration 673 is only active if the Actual frequency is smaller than Shutdown
Threshold 675.
The time required until the motor has come to a standstill results from the regenerative energy of the
system which results in an increase in the DC link voltage. The DC link voltage set with the parameter
Reference Shutdown Value 676 is used by the voltage controller as a control figure and kept constant. The voltage rise enables optimization of the braking behavior and the time until the drive has
come to a standstill. The behavior of the controller can be compared to stopping behavior 2 (Shutdown and Stop), as the voltage controller brings the drive to a standstill at the maximum deceleration
ramp and supplies it with the remaining DC link voltage.
If the DC-link voltage is restored before the shutdown of the drive, but after falling below Shutdown
Threshold 675, the drive is still decelerated to standstill.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
218
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
If the mains voltage is restored after the shutdown of the drive but before the undervoltage switch-off
has been reached, the frequency inverter signals a fault. The operator panel displays the fault message " F0702 " .
If the mains failure without shutdown (Shutdown Threshold 675 = 0 Hz) takes so long that the frequency has been reduced to 0 Hz, the drive is accelerated to the reference frequency when the mains
supply is restored.
If the mains failure with or without shutdown takes so long that the frequency inverter shuts off completely, the frequency inverter will be in the " Standby " state when the mains supply is restored. If the
inverter is enabled again, the drive will start. If the drive is to start automatically after restoration of
the mains supply if the inverter is enabled permanently, Operation Mode 651 of auto start must be
switched on.
Parameters
No.
Description
675 Shutdown Threshold
676 Reference Shutdown Value
AGL202
AGL402
Min.
0.00 Hz
225.0 V
425.0 V
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
375.5 V
775.0 V
Fact. sett.
0.00 Hz
365.0 V
730.0 V
Reference Shutdown Value 676 becomes effective below the frequency value Shutdown Threshold 675.
673 Mains Support Deceleration
674 Acceleration on Mains Resumption
683 Gen. Ref. Current Limit
The voltage controller uses the limit values of the DC link voltage. If the default value is changed, the
Acceleration on Mains Resumption 674 replaces the set ramp parameter values Acceleration
(Clockwise) 420 or Acceleration Anticlockwise 422. The voltage control in a mains failure changes
from the frequency limit Shutdown Threshold 675 from Reference Mains Support Value 672 to the
Reference Shutdown Value 676. The value of Gen. Ref. Current Limit 683 or the ramp Mains Support Deceleration 673 defines the maximum deceleration of the drive required in order to reach the
voltage value Reference Shutdown Value 676. Mains Support Deceleration 673 is only active if the
Actual frequency is smaller than Shutdown Threshold 675.
Parameters
No.
Description
Min.
683 Gen. Ref. Current Limit
0.0 A
673 Mains Support Deceleration
0.01 Hz/s
674 Acceleration on Mains Resumption
0.00 Hz/s
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter
Setting
Max.
oc⋅IFIN
9999.99 Hz/s
9999.99 Hz/s
Fact. sett.
IFIN
50.00 Hz/s
0.00 Hz/s
Mains Support Deceleration 673 is active in configuration 110 (V/f).
Gen. Ref. Current Limit 683 is active in configurations 410 and 610
(FOC and SERVO).
Control functions
219
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
677 Amplification
678 Integral Time
The proportional and integrating part of the voltage controller can be set via parameters Amplification
677 and Integral Time 678. The control functions are deactivated by setting the parameters to 0.
The controllers are P and I controllers in the corresponding settings.
Min.
Setting
Max.
677 Amplification
0.00
30.00
678 Integral Time
0 ms
10000 ms
No.
Parameters
Description
Fact. sett.
1 1)
2 2)
8 ms 1)
23 ms 2)
The factory settings depend on the selected configuration and control procedure.
1)
Configuration 30 = 110
Configuration 30 = 410, 610
2)
7.9.3
PID controller (technology controller)
The PID controller can be used for process control. The connection of PID desired set value and PID
real value of the application with the functions of the frequency inverter enables process control without further components. In this way, applications such as pressure, volume flow or speed control can
be implemented easily.
Starting the PID controller: Set one of the following parameters.
Parameters
Reference Frequency Source 1 475
Factory setting
1 - Analog Value MFI1A
Set
30 - Technology Controller
5 - Keypad-Motorpot.
30 - Technology Controller
or
Reference Frequency Source 2 492
Desired set value for PID controller: Set one of the following parameters.
Parameters
Reference Percentage Source 1 476
Factory setting
1 - Analog Value MFI1A 1
or
Reference Percentage Source 2 494
5 - Keypad-Motorpot.
Set
Select analog input or percentage. For example " 2 - Analog
Value MFI2A“ 2 or " 3 - Fixed
Percentage " .
For example: analog desired set value at MFI2A.
(Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494 = " 2 - Analog Value
MFI2A " )
Set terminal X12.4 as analog input.
Parameters
Operation Mode MFI2 562
1
2
Factory setting
4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V)
Set
Voltage input or current input.
See chapter 7.6.2 " Multifunction
input MFI2 " .
MFI1A: Multifunction input at terminal X12.3.
MFI2A: Multifunction input at terminal X12.4.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
220
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
For example: The desired set value is a fixed percentage.
Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494 = " 3 - Fixed Percentage " )
Set and select fixed percentage.
Parameters
Parameters 520, 521, 522, 523
(fixed percentages)
Factory setting
0%, 20%, 50%, 100%
Fixed Percent Change-Over 1 7 - Off
75 and Fixed Percent ChangeOver 2 76
Set
Enter a value.
See chapter 7.5.2.3 " Fixed percentages " .
Select digital inputs or logic signals.
See chapter 7.6.6.6 " Fixed percentage changeover " .
Real value for PID controller
Parameters
Actual Percentage Source 478
Factory setting
1 - Analog Input MFI1A
Set
Select input where PID real value is applied.
For example: analog PID real value at MFI1A. Set terminal X12.3 as analog input.
Parameters
Operation Mode MFI1 452
Factory setting
1 - Voltage 0…10 V
Set
Voltage input or current input.
See chapter 7.6.1 " Multifunction
input MFI1 " .
For the adjustment to the application, setting the minimum and maximum frequency may be required:
Parameters
Minimum Frequency 418
Maximum Frequency 419
Factory setting
3.50 Hz
50.00 Hz
The values of the set ramps (parameters 420 to 426 and 430) are considered if the PID controller is
used.
The technology controller can be started via the signals of parameters Start Clockwise 68 or Start
Anticlockwise 69.
The control deviation (difference between reference percentage and actual percentage is signaled to
the PID controller. The PID controller adjusts the output frequency of the frequency inverter such that
the control deviation is minimized.
P controller: The output of the P controller is the product of the control deviation and the amplification
and follows the control deviation linearly and without delay. A control deviation will be maintained.
I controller: The output of the I controller is the integral of the control deviation. The task of the I
controller is to eliminate the control deviation. The integral time defines how fast the control deviation
is compensated. If the I controller is set too dynamically (fast compensation of deviations), the system
may become unstable and vibrate. If the I controller is set too passively (slow compensation of deviations), the stationary error is not compensated sufficiently. For this reason, the integral portion must
be adjusted plant-specifically.
D controller: The D controller assesses the change of the control deviation and calculates it change
rate. This value is multiplied by the derivative time. The D controller responds to announced changes
and causes a fast control behavior. The D controller can stabilize the control circuit and reduce vibration. On the other hand, errors (e.g. interference voltages) are amplified.
In order to use the output value of the PID controller as the reference frequency, setting " 30 - Technology Controller " must be selected for Reference Frequency Source 1 475 or Reference Frequency
Source 2 492. If the technology controller is selected as the reference frequency source, the settings
of the PID controller are activated.
Control functions
221
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
The behavior of the PID controller is set with:
− Proportional part Amplification 444
− Integral part Integral Time 445
− Differential part Derivative Time 446
441
Reference percentage channel is shown (simplified). See chapter 7.5.2 " Reference percentage channel " .
Application examples
Application
Pressure control
Flow rate control
Temperature control
Function
The pressure in a process is kept at a constant level by means of a pressure sensor.
The flow rate in a process is kept at a constant level by means of a flow
sensor.
The temperature is kept at a constant level by controlling a fan by means
of a thermostat.
Via dataset changeover via control contacts, the PID controller can be adjusted to different operating
points.
476,494 Reference percentage source, PID desired set value input
The desired set value source of the control can be selected via parameter Reference Percentage
Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494. The values of both parameters are added. See
chapter 7.5.2 " Reference percentage channel " .
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
222
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
478 Actual Percentage Source, PID real value input
The analog input or the repetition frequency input to which the PID real value is applied can be selected via parameter Actual Percentage Source 478. The actual value can also be transmitted via a
bus system.
Function
Analog signal at multifunction input 1 (terminal X12.3). Factory
setting. Via parameter Operation mode MFI1 452, the input
Analog Input MFI1A
must be set up as an analog input (voltage or current). See
chapter 7.6.1 " Multifunction input MFI1 " .
Analog signal at multifunction input 2 (terminal X12.4). Via parameter Operation mode MFI2 562, the input must be set up
Analog Input MFI2A
as an analog input (voltage or current). See chapter 7.6.2
" Multifunction input MFI2 " .
Percentage signal at digital input IN2D. Evaluation can be selected via parameter Operation mode IN2D 496. See chapter
Rep. Percentage Input
7.6.7.2 " Repetition frequency input " .
Value of parameter Actual Percentage RAM 529. Actual PerActual Percentage RAM
centage RAM 529 can be set via Fieldbus, but is not visible in
VPlus or the keypad.
RxPDO1 Word 1
Process data from system bus. Refer to system bus instructions.
RxPDO1 Word 2
Process data from system bus. Refer to system bus instructions.
Output value of a PLC-function. Percentage output 1 of the
PLC-Output Percentage 1 table function is the PID real value source. See application
manual " PLC " .
Output value of a PLC-function. Percentage output 2 of the
PLC-Output Percentage 2 table function is the PID real value source. See application
manual " PLC " .
Actual Percentage Source 478
1-
2-
32 -
40 704 705 2521 2522 -
Control functions
223
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Inputs for reference percentage source
440 Operation Mode Actual Value Failure
Via parameter Operation Mode Actual Value Failure 440, you can set how the frequency inverter will
respond to a missing PID real value ( & lt; 0.5%). In this way, the drive can be prevented from starting if
a PID real value is missing. The function enables, for example, monitoring of a sensor cable for broken wires. The function should be switched on in order to avoid critical operating behavior, e.g. acceleration to maximum frequency if the actual value signal fails.
Operation mode 440
0 - Off
1 - Active, Fixed Frequency 1
10 - Active, Stop + Error
20 - Active, Error
Operating Instructions Agile
Function
No response if PID real value is missing. Missing PID real values
( & lt; 0.5%) will be evaluated as PID real values.
If the PID real value is missing, the output frequency is guided to
the value of Fixed Frequency 1 480. Factory setting.
If the PID real value is missing, the drive will be shut down and
error F1409 " actual value is missing " will be signaled.
If the PID real value is missing,
error F1409 " actual value is missing " will be signaled.
06/2013
224
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
480 Fixed Frequency 1 (in case of missing PID real value)
If the PID real value is missing ( & lt; 0.5%), the output frequency is guided to the value of Fixed Frequency 1 480. The minimum value monitoring prevents an acceleration of the drive if the PID real
value is missing. If the PID real value is available again, the controller continues operation automatically.
Parameters
No.
Description
480 Fixed Frequency 1
Min.
-999.99 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
0.00 Hz
The Fixed Frequency 1 480 must be in the range between Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum
Frequency 419. If the Fixed Frequency 1 480 is set to a value smaller than the Minimum Frequency 418, the output frequency is guided to Minimum Frequency 418. The frequency will not drop
below Minimum Frequency 418.
444 Amplification (P)
Parameter Amplification 444 defines the amplification factor by which the control deviation is multiplied. The control deviation can be reduced by large amplification values, but very high values may
cause the control circuit to become unstable (vibrations). If the value is set too low, large control deviations are possible.
Parameters
No.
Description
444 Amplification
Min.
-15.00
Setting
Max.
+15.00
Fact. sett.
1.00
The sign of the amplification defines the control direction, i.e. if the PID real value increases and the
sign of the amplification is positive, the output frequency is reduces (e.g. pressure control). With a
rising PID real value and negative sign of the amplification, the output frequency is increased (e.g. in
temperature control systems, refrigerating machines, condensers).
445 Integral Time (I)
Parameter Integral Time 445 defines the time constant for calculation of the integral of the PID input
signal. The I controller totals the control deviation over time and divides the result by the value of
Integral Time 445. If the Integral Time 445 is set to small values, the control deviation is compensated quickly. Very low values for the Integral Time 445 may cause the control circuit to become
unstable (vibrations).
Parameters
No.
Description
445 Integral Time
Min.
0 ms
Setting
Max.
32767 ms
Fact. sett.
200 ms
If parameter Integral Time 445 is set to zero, the I controller is deactivated.
The amplification (P) is included in the calculation of the integral time (I), see figure PID controller.
BONFIGLIOLI recommends setting the Integral Time 445 to a value greater than the sampling time,
which is 2 ms in the case of the Agile device.
441 Max. I-Component
Parameter Max. I-Component 441 defines the maximum output signal of the I-controller. In applications with quickly changing load torques, vibrations of the control circuit are possible. In order to
avoid vibration, parameter Max. I-Component 441 can limit the output signal of the I-controller.
Parameters
No.
Description
441 Max. I-Component
Control functions
Min.
0.00 Hz
225
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
06/2013
Fact. sett.
50.00 Hz
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
446 Derivative time (D)
If the control behavior of the PI controller (or P controller) is too slow, a faster control can be
achieved by activating and adjusting the differential part (Derivative time 446). However, if the differential part is activated, the control circuit has a higher tendency toward vibration. For this reason,
the differential part should be activated and changed carefully.
By default, the differential part is set to Derivative time 446 = 0 ms, i.e. it is deactivated. High values
for Derivative time 446 cause fast control, but amplify interferences.
The amplification (P) is included in the calculation of the derivative time (D), see figure PID controller.
Parameters
No.
Description
446 Derivative time
Min.
0 ms
Setting
Max.
1000 ms
Fact. sett.
0 ms
442 Maximum Frequency
443 Minimum Frequency
Parameters Maximum Frequency 442 and Minimum Frequency 443 define the working range of the
controller. In this way, you can also define if the PID controller is to operate the drive in one direction
only or if both directions of rotations are to be possible.
Parameters
No.
Description
442 Maximum Frequency
443 Minimum Frequency
Min.
0 Hz
-999.99 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
0 Hz
Fact. sett.
50.00 Hz
-50.00 Hz
If the PID controller is to operate the drive in both directions, (Minimum Frequency 443 & lt; 0 Hz), Parameter Minimum Frequency 418 should be set to 0 Hz.
If Maximum Frequency 442 and Minimum Frequency 443 are set asymmetric (in
example Maximum Frequency 442 = 30.00 Hz and Minimum Frequency 443 = 20.00 Hz with positive Amplification 444), setting the Start-Right-Control will result in
using Maximum Frequency 442 for Clockwise rotation (positive control deviation) and
Minimum Frequency 443 for Anticlockwise rotation (negative control deviation).
Setting the Start-Left-Control will result in using Minimum Frequency 443 for Clockwise rotation (positive control deviation) and Maximum Frequency 442 for Anticlockwise rotation (negative control deviation).
618 Backlash
With parameter Backlash 618, you can set a range in which a control deviation is not processed. In
this way, frequent post-controlling and jerking of the drive can be avoided.
Requirement: Stator Frequency 210 & lt; Switch-Off Threshold Stop Function 637.
Parameters
No.
Description
618 Backlash
Min.
0%
Setting
Max.
30.00%
Fact. sett.
0%
616 Backlash Motor Power off
In different applications it could be requested to switch off the power stage with a small control deviation and low output frequency. With parameter Backlash Motor Power off 616 this behavior can be
set up.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
226
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
Function
Backlash
Motor Power off 440
0 - Off
1 - Active, Fixed Frequency 1
The switch off of the power stage is not influenced.
Factory setting.
If the control deviation & lt; Backlash 618 and at the same time the
Actual Frequency & lt; Switch-Off Threshold Stop Function 637 the
power stage is switched off.
The Switch off behavior, which is set up by the Stopping behavior (Operation
mode 630) is not changed by Backlash Motor Power off 616. While this function is
switched on, the power stage is additionally switched off if the control deviation & lt;
Backlash 618 and Actual Frequency & lt; Switch-Off Threshold Stop Function 637. The
motor is switched on again as soon as the control deviation is larger again than the
set up threshold of Backlash 618.
7.9.4
Functions of sensorless control
The configurations of the sensorless control contain the following additional functions, which supplement the behavior according to the parameterized V/f characteristic (Configuration 30 = 110).
7.9.4.1
Slip compensation
660 Operation Mode (slip compensation)
The load-dependent difference between the reference speed and the actual speed of the 3-phase
motor is referred to as the slip. This dependency can be compensated by the current measurement in
the output phases of the frequency inverter.
The activation of Operation Mode 660 for the slip compensation enables as speed control without
feedback. The stator frequency and speed are corrected depending on the load.
Operation Mode 660
0 - Off
1 - On
Function
The slip compensation is deactivated. Factory setting.
The load-dependent slip speed is compensated
The slip compensation is activated during the guided commissioning. The Stator Resistance 377 is
required to ensure a correct function and is measured during the guided commissioning.
If no guided commissioning is executed, the slip compensation can be activated manually. In these
cases, enter the value for the Stator Resistance 377 manually according to the motor data sheet.
For parameter Configuration 30, setting " 110 - IM: sensorless control " (V/f characteristic) must be
selected.
661 Amplification
662 Max. Slip Ramp
663 Frequency Lower Limit
The control behavior of the slip compensation can only be optimized via the parameters in the case of
specific applications. The parameter Amplification 661 determines the correction of the speed and
the effect of the slip compensation proportionally to the change of load. Parameter Max. Slip Ramp
662 defines the maximum frequency change per second in order to avoid an overload in the case of a
load change.
The parameter Frequency Lower Limit 663 determines the frequency as from which the slip compensation becomes active.
No.
661
662
663
Parameters
Description
Amplification
Max. Slip Ramp
Frequency Lower Limit
Control functions
Min.
0%
0.01 Hz/s
0.01 Hz
227
Setting
Max.
300.0%
650.00 Hz/s
999.99 Hz
06/2013
Fact. sett.
100.0%
5.00 Hz/s
0.01 Hz
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.9.4.2
Current limit value controller
610 Operation Mode (current limit value controller)
Via a load-dependent speed control, the current limit value controller ensures that the drive system is
not overloaded. This is extended by the intelligent current limits described in the previous chapter.
The current limit value controller reduces the load on the drive, e.g. during acceleration, by stopping
the acceleration ramp. The switch-off of the frequency inverter which happens when the acceleration
ramps have been set at an excessive gradient is thus prevented.
The current limit value controller is switched on and off via parameter Operation Mode 610.
Operation Mode 610
0 - Off
1 - On
Function
The current limit value controller functions and the intelligent current
limits have been deactivated. Factory setting.
The current limit value controller is active.
611 Amplification
612 Integral Time
The control behavior of the current limit controller can be set via the proportional part, parameter
Amplification 611 and the integrating part, parameter Integral Time 612. If, in exceptional cases,
optimization of the controller parameters is required, proceed with the following steps:
•
Change parameter Current Limit 613 with a big step, analyze the changes in the Scope.
•
For a more dynamic behavior increase Amplification 611 and/or decrease Integral Time 612.
•
For a less dynamic behavior decrease Amplification 611 and/or increase Integral Time 612.
Parameters
No.
Description
611 Amplification
612 Integral Time
Min.
0.01
1 ms
Setting
Max.
30.00
10000 ms
Fact. sett.
1.00
24 ms
The dynamism of the current limit value controller and the voltage controller is influenced by the setting of the parameter Dyn. Voltage Pre-Control 605.
613 Current Limit
614 Frequency Limit
Behavior in motor operation:
If the current set via parameter Current Limit 613 is exceeded, the activated current limit value controller will reduce the output frequency until the current limit is no longer exceeded. The output frequency is reduced as a maximum to the frequency set by the parameter Frequency Limit 614. If the
current value drops below the Current Limit 613, the output frequency is raised back to the reference value.
Behavior in generator operation:
If the current set via parameter Current Limit 613 is exceeded, the activated current limit value controller will increase the output frequency until the current limit is no longer exceeded. The output frequency is increased, as a maximum, to the set Maximum Frequency 419. If the current is below the
Current Limit 613, the output frequency is reduced to the required reference value again.
Parameters
Setting
No.
Description
Min.
Max.
Fact. sett.
613 Current Limit
0.0 A
oc⋅IFIN
oc⋅IFIN
614 Frequency Limit
0.00 Hz
999.99 Hz
0.00 Hz
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
228
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
7.9.5
Functions of field-orientated control
The field-orientated control systems are based on a cascade control and the calculation of a complex
machine model. In the course of the guided commissioning, a map of the connected machine is produced by the parameter identification and transferred to various parameters. Some of these parameters are visible and can be optimized for various operating points.
7.9.5.1
Current controller
700 Amplification
701 Integral Time
The current controller with the parameters Amplification 700 and Integral Time 701 is applicable for
field-orientated control (setting 410 or 610 of parameter Configuration 30).
In the control according to V/f-characteristic (setting 110 of parameter Configuration 30) the current
controller is only applicable for the function Flying Start (parameter Operation Mode Flying
Start 645).
The inner control loop of the field-orientated control comprises two current controllers. The fieldorientated control thus impresses the motor current into the machine via two components to be controlled.
This is done by:
− controlling the flux-forming current value Isd
− controlling the torque-forming current value Isq
By separate regulation of these two parameters, a decoupling of the system equivalent to an externally excited direct current machine is achieved.
The set-up of the two current controllers is identical and enables joint setting of amplification as well
as the integral time for both controllers. For this, the parameters Amplification 700 and Parameter
Integral Time 701 are available. The proportional and integration and component of the current controllers can be switched off by setting the parameters to zero.
Parameters
No.
Description
700 Amplification
701 Integral Time
Min.
0.00
0.00 ms
Setting
Max.
8.00
10.00 ms
Fact. sett.
0.13
10.00 ms
The guided commissioning has selected the parameters of the current controller in such a way that
they can be used without having to be changed in most applications.
If, in exceptional cases, an optimization of the behavior of the current controllers is to be done, the
reference value jump during the flux-formation phase can be used for this. The reference value of the
flux-forming current components leaps to the figure Current during Flux-Formation 781 with suitable
parameterization and then changes controlled to the magnetizing current after the expiry of the Max.
Flux-Formation Time 780. The operating point necessary for the adjustment demands the setting of
parameter Minimum Frequency 418, as the drive is accelerated after magnetizing. The measurement
of the jump reply, which is defined by the ratio of the currents mentioned, should be done in the motor supply line by means of a measuring current transformer of a sufficient bandwidth.
The internally calculated actual value for the flux-forming current component cannot
be output via the analog output for this measurement as the time resolution of the
measurement is not sufficient.
To set the parameters of the PI controller, the Amplification 700 is increased first until the actual
value overshoots distinctly during the control process. Now, the amplification is reduced to about fifty
percent again and then the Integral Time 701 is synchronized until actual value overshoots slightly
during the control process.
Control functions
229
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
The settings of the current controllers should not be too dynamic in order to ensure a sufficient reserve range. The control tends to increased oscillations if the reverse range is reduced.
The dimensioning of the current controller parameters by calculation of the time constant is to be
done for a switching frequency of 2 kHz. For other switching frequencies, the values are adapted internally so that the setting can remain unchanged for all switching frequencies. The dynamic properties of the current controller improve if the switching and scanning frequency increases.
The fixed time interval for the modulation results in the following scanning frequencies of the current
controller via parameter Switching Frequency 400.
Setting
Switching frequency
Scanning frequency
2 kHz
2 kHz
4 kHz
4 kHz
8 kHz
8 kHz
16 kHz
8 kHz
746 Cross-Coupling Factor
For an asynchronous motor (Configuration 30 = 410) and synchronous motor (Configuration 30 =
610), the coupling between the flux-forming current Isd and the torque-forming current Isq can be
undone largely by the activated cross-coupling compensation. In this way, it is possible to impress the
torque-forming current in the machine more quickly and the speed control circuit has a lower tendency toward vibration.
The cross-coupling exists between the flux-forming current Isd and the torque-forming current Isq
and is caused by the voltage drop at the stator inductivity and the stator leakage inductivity. For this
reason, the cross-coupling increases with the stator frequency. The cross-coupling becomes particularly apparent in the case of high stator frequencies at relatively small switching frequencies (e.g. 300 Hz
stator frequency at 4 kHz switching frequency), as with small switching frequencies, the current controller slows down.
No.
Parameters
Description
Min.
0.00%
746 Cross-Coupling Factor
Setting
Max.
300.00%
Fact. sett.
100.00%1)
75.00%2)
1)
Configuration 30 = 410
Configuration 30 = 610
2)
Cross-coupling compensation can be optimized as follows:
•
•
•
First, set the speed controller. To that end, define reference speed jumps at small rotary frequencies. See chapter 7.9.5.3 " Speed controller " .
Set a speed of approx. 2�3 of the rated speed.
Define reference speed jumps again. During the accelerations, currents Isq of approx. 50% of the
rated current should occur.
•
Starting from 0%, increase the value of Cross-Coupling Factor 746 in steps of 25%, for example.
•
The influence by Isq on Isd during the reference speed jumps should decrease with increasing
values of Cross-Coupling Factor 746. For checking, signal sources Isd and Isq can be oscilographed using the scope function of the PC user software. A minimum influence should be
reached at 100%.
•
Set the Cross-Coupling Factor 746 to a value slightly below the determined optimum value.
Very high values for Cross-Coupling Factor 746 (e.g. 125%) may result in an overcurrent circuit
break.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
230
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
7.9.5.2
Torque controller
The sensorless field oriented control for ASM (configuration 410) and the sensorless field oriented
control for PSM (configuration 610) can be used for sensorless torque control alternative to the speed
control. The torque control is usable above the Frequency Limit 624. Below the Frequency Limit 624
the current impression is active with the current reference frequency as reference value. In this case
the torque is not controlled, but results depending on the load and the Starting current 623. To
achieve a starting in torque control, the reference frequency should be set higher than Frequency
Limit 624. This is guaranteed in example by setting Minimum frequency 418 & gt; Frequency Limit 624.
f & lt; Frequency Limit 624: Current impression
f ≥ Frequency Limit 624: Direct Torque Control
The Frequency Limit 624 is set automatically during the motor setup.
The energy saving function shouldn’t be used when using the Torque controller, since it influences the
control dynamics significantly.
An overview of important parameters for using the Torque Controller is compiled in chapter 6.7.8
“Torque control”.
7.9.5.2.1 Torque reference
The reference torque can be specified as follows:
•
Set parameter n-/T-Control Change-Over 164 to " 6 - On " or link it to a digital signal and switch
this on.
•
Via parameter Reference Percentage Source 1 476 or Reference Percentage Source 2 494, select
a source for the reference torque.
For example:
− The reference torque can be set via the arrow keys of the operator panel if the following setting is
selected: Reference Percentage Source 2 494 = " 5 - keypad motorpoti (factory setting) " .
− The reference torque can be set via multifunction input 1 (MFI1A) if the following setting is selected: Reference Percentage Source 1 476 = " 1 - analog value MFI1A (factory setting) " .
− 100 % Torque refer to the calculated Torque from Rated Mech. Power 376 (Motor power) and
Rated Speed 372 (Motor nominal speed).
Parameter Torque 224 shows the actual torque.
Select an applicable operation mode for parameter Operation Mode Flying Start 645. Refer to chapter 7.3.5 “Flying Start”.
7.9.5.2.2 Upper limit and lower limit of the frequency in Torque Control
767 Frequency Upper Limit
768 Frequency Lower Limit
In many cases limitation of the speed is required in the operating points with reduced or without load
torque, because the speed regulates itself to the torque reference and the load behavior. To avoid an
unintentional speed (mostly too high speeds, in some cases also too small speeds and avoidance of
current impression), the frequency is limited by Frequency Upper Limit 767 and Frequency Lower
Limit 768 by the speed controller.
As from the limit value the drive is controlled to maximum speed (Frequency Upper Limit 767 and
Frequency Lower Limit 768), which corresponds to the behavior of the speed controller. Additionally,
the controller limits the speed to Maximum Frequency 419. This limitation is set by the speed control-
ler – changes in the speed controller affect the speed behavior in the limit area of the 3 mentioned
parameters.
In the current impression, the speed is limited additional to Minimum Frequency 418 – in Direct
Torque Control this limit is not active.
Control functions
231
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Parameters
No.
Description
767 Frequency Upper Limit
768 Frequency Lower Limit
Min.
-999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
Setting
Max.
999.99 Hz
999.99 Hz
Fact. sett.
999.99 Hz
-999.99 Hz
Note: Positive values limit the speed in clockwise direction; negative values limit the speed in anticlockwise direction. In example, if both values are positive ( & gt; 0 Hz), anticlockwise movement is inhibited.
WARNING
If the torque control is activated while the actual frequency lies outside the defined
range of Frequency Upper Limit 767 and Frequency Lower Limit 768 (in example
when switching on a stopped machine or when the Flying start synchronizes), the allowed frequency is driven to without ramps. The torque is only limited by the limitations
of the speed controller (current and torque). Therefore an unexpected dynamic behavior
can occur.
7.9.5.2.3 Limit Value Sources
769 Frequency upper limit source
770 Frequency lower limit source
The frequency can be limited by setting fixed values or linking an analog input.
The assignment is done for the torque controller via Frequency Upper Limit source 769 and
Frequency Upper Limit source 770. The frequency limits of the analog value relate
to 0 Hz and Maximum Frequency 419. Setting a torque limit is done for
Minimum Reference Percentage 518 and Maximum Reference Percentage 519.
Operation mode 769, 770
1-
Analog input MFI1A
2-
Analog input MFI2A
10 -
Fixed limit
708 - RxPDO1 Long1
709 - RxPDO1 Long2
2501 - PLC Output Frequency 1
2502 - PLC Output Frequency 2
10001 … 12502
Function
The source is the multifunctional input 1 in analog operation
mode (parameter Operation Mode MFI1 452). The scaling refers to 100 % = Maximum frequency 419 for the upper limit and
0 % = 0 Hz for the lower limit.
The source is the multifunctional input 2 in analog operation
mode (parameter Operation Mode MFI2 562). The scaling refers to 100 % = Maximum frequency 419 for the upper limit and
0 % = 0 Hz for the lower limit.
The selected parameter values are taken into account to limit the
speed controller. Factory setting.
Process data of system bus. Refer to instructions on system bus.
The value is processed as frequency.
Process data of system bus. Refer to instructions on system bus.
The value is processed as frequency.
Output value of a PLC function. Refer to application manual PLC.
Output value of a PLC function. Refer to application manual PLC.
Inverted values of signal sources 1 to 2502.
7.9.5.2.4 Switching over between speed control and torque control
Via the signal assigned to parameter n-/T-Control Change-Over 164, you can switch between speed
control and torque control. See chapter 7.6.6.10 " n-/T-control changeover " .
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
232
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
7.9.5.3
Speed controller
720 Operation mode (speed controller)
The control of the torque-forming current components is done in the outer control loop by the speed
controller. Via parameter Operation Mode 720, you can select the operation mode for the speed controller. The operation mode defines the use of the parameterizable limits. These are referred to the
direction of rotation and the direction of the torque and depend on the selected configuration.
Operation Mode 720
0 - Speed controller off
1-
Limits for
motor/generator op.
2-
Limits
pos./neg. torque
anticlockwise M
generator
Function
The controller is deactivated or the torque-forming component is
zero.
The limitation of the speed controller assigns the upper limit to the
motor operation of the drive. Independent of the direction of rotation, the same limit is used. The same applies in the case of regenerative operation with the lower limit. Factory setting.
The assignment of the limit is done by the sign of the value to be
limited. Independent of the motor or generator operating points of
the drive, the positive limitation is done by the upper limit. The lower
limit is regarded as a negative limitation.
Operation mode 2
anticlockwise M
clockwise
generator
motor
clockwise
motor
n
n
motor
M:
n:
motor
generator
generator
Current limit 728
Current limit generator op. 729
Torque
Speed
721 Amplification 1 (|f| & lt; P738)
722 Integral Time 1 (|f| & lt; P738)
723 Amplification 2 (|f| & gt; P738)
724 Integral Time 2 (|f| & gt; P738)
738 Speed Control Switch-Over Limit
748 Backlash Damping
The properties of the speed controller can be adapted for adjustment and optimization of the controller.
The amplification and integral time of the speed controller can be set via parameters Amplification 1
(|f| & lt; P738) 721 and Integral Time 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 722. For the second speed range, parameters Amplification 2 (|f| & gt; P738) 723, Integral Time 2 (|f| & gt; P738) 724 can be set. The distinction between the
speed ranges is done by the value set with parameter Speed Control Switch-Over Limit 738. Parameters Amplification 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 721 and Integral Time 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 722 are considered with the
default parameter Speed Control Switch-Over Limit 738. If parameter Speed Control Switch-Over
Limit 738 is set to a value greater than 0.00 Hz, parameters Amplification 1 (|f| & lt; P738) 721, Integral
Time 1(|f| & lt; P738) 722 will be active below this limit, and parameters Amplification 2 (|f| & gt; P738) 723,
Integral Time 2 (|f| & gt; P738) 724 will be active above this limit.
The parameterized amplification at the current operating point can additionally be assessed via the
parameter Backlash Damping 748 depending on the control deviation. In particular the small signal
behavior in applications with a gearbox can be improved by a value higher than zero percent.
Control functions
233
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
No.
721
722
723
724
738
748
Parameters
Description
Amplification 1 (|f| & lt; P738)
Integral Time 1(|f| & lt; P738)
Amplification 2 (|f| & gt; P738)
Integral Time 2 (|f| & gt; P738)
Speed Control Switch-Over Limit
Backlash Damping
Setting
Max.
200.00
60000 ms
200.00
60000 ms
999.99 Hz
300%
Min.
0.00
0 ms
0.00
0 ms
0.00 Hz
0%
Fact. sett.
-
1)
55.00 Hz
100%
The optimization of the speed controller can be done with the help of a reference value leap. The
amount of the leap is defined by the set ramp or limitation. The optimization of the PI controller
should be done at the maximum admissible reference figure change rate. First, the amplification is
increased until the actual value overshoots distinctly during the control process. This is indicated by a
strong oscillation of the speed and by the running noises. In the next step, reduce the amplification
slightly (1/2 ...3/4 etc.). Then reduce the integral time (larger I component) until the actual value
overshoots only slightly in the control process.
If necessary, check the speed control settings in the case of dynamic operations (acceleration, deceleration). The frequency at which the switch-over of the controller parameters is effected can be set
via parameter Speed Control Switch-Over Limit 738.
7.9.5.3.1 Limitation of speed controller
The output signal of the speed controller is the torque-forming current component Isq. The output
and the I portion of the speed controller can be limited via parameters Current Limit 728, Current
Limit Generator Op. 729, Torque Limit 730, Torque Limit Generator Operation 731 or Power Limit
739, Power Limit Generator Operation 740. The limits of the proportional portion are set via parameters P-Comp. Torque Upper Limit 732 and P-Comp. Torque Lower Limit 733.
728 Current Limit
729 Current Limit Generator Op.
The output value of the speed controller is limited by an upper and a lower current limit. From the set
values for Current limit 728 and Current limit generator operation 729, the limits are calculated,
considering the set magnetizing current. The parameter values are entered in Amperes. The current
limits of the controller can be linked to the fixed limits and analog input parameters. The assignment
is done via the parameters Isq Limit Source Motor Operation 734 and Isq Limit Source Generator
Op. 735.
Parameters
No.
Description
728 Current Limit
729 Current Limit Generator Op.
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
Min.
0.0 A
-0.01 A
1)
Setting
Max.
oc⋅IFIN
oc⋅IFIN
Fact. sett.
oc⋅IFIN
-0.01 A
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter
1)
1
If the minimum value is set, the value of Current Limit 728 is used.
The default settings for amplification and integral time refer to the recommended machine data. This enables a
first function test in a large number of applications. Switch-over between settings 1 and 2 for the current frequency range is done by the software according to the selected limit value.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
234
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
730 Torque Limit
731 Torque Limit Generator Operation
The output value of the speed controller is limited by an upper and a lower torque limit, parameter
Torque Limit 730 and parameter Torque Limit Generator Operation 731. The limit values are input
as a percentage of the rated motor torque. The assignment of fixed values or analog limit values is
done via the parameters Torque Limit Source Motor Op. 736 and Torque Limit Source Gen. Op.
737.
Parameters
No.
Description
730 Torque Limit
731 Torque Limit Generator Operation
Min.
0.00%
0.00%
Anticlockwise
operation
M
Setting
Max.
650.00%
650.00%
Fact. sett.
650.00%
650.00%
Clockwise
operation
Torque Limit Generator
Operation 731
Torque Limit 730
generator motor
motor generator
n
Torque Limit Generator
Operation 731
Torque Limit 730
Speed is limited by
Maximum Frequency 419
732 P-Comp. Torque Upper Limit
733 P-Comp. Torque Lower Limit
The output value of the P component of the torque controller is limited by parameter P-Comp. Torque
Upper Limit 732 and P-Comp. Torque Lower Limit 733. The limit values are input as torque limits as
a percentage of the rated motor torque.
Parameters
No.
Description
732 P-Comp. Torque Upper Limit
733 P-Comp. Torque Lower Limit
Min.
0.00%
0.00%
Setting
Max.
650.00%
650.00%
Fact. sett.
650.00%
650.00%
739 Power Limit
740 Power Limit Generator Operation
The power output by the motor is proportional to the product of speed and torque. This output power
can be limited at the speed controller output with Power Limit 739 and Power Limit Generator Operation 740. The power limits are entered in kW.
Parameters
No.
Description
739 Power Limit
740 Power Limit Generator Operation
PFIN = Nominal Frequency inverter power
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter
Control functions
Min.
0.00 kW
0.00 kW
235
Setting
Max.
2⋅ oc⋅PFIN
2⋅ oc⋅PFIN
06/2013
Fact. sett.
2⋅ oc⋅PFIN
2⋅ oc⋅PFIN
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.9.5.3.2 Limit value sources
734 Isq Limit Source Motor Operation
735 Isq Limit Source Generator Op.
736 Torque Limit Source Motor Op.
737 Torque Limit Source Gen. Op.
As an alternative to limiting the output values by a fixed value, linking to an analog input value is also
possible. The analog value is limited via parameters Minimum Reference Percentage 518, Maximum
Reference Percentage 519, but does not consider the Gradient Percentage Ramp 477 of the reference percentage value channel.
The assignment is done with the help of the parameters Isq Limit Source Motor Operation 734 and
Isq Limit Source Generator Op. 735 for the torque-forming current component Isq.
The sources for the torque limits can be selected via the parameters Torque Limit Source Motor Op.
736 and Torque Limit Source Gen. Op. 737.
Operation mode
734, 735, 736, 737
Function
Multifunction input 1 is the source. Via parameter Operation Mode
MFI1 452, multifunction input 1 must be set up as a voltage or
current input.
Multifunction input 2 is the source. Via parameter Operation Mode
Analog Input MFI2A
MFI2 562, multifunction input 2 must be set up as a voltage or
current input.
The percentage signal at the repetition frequency input (IN2D, terRepetition Percentage
minal X11.5). Operation Mode IN2D 496 must be set to 20 or 21.
Input
See chapter 7.6.7 " Input PWM/repetition frequency/pulse train " .
The selected parameter figures for limiting the speed controller are
Fixed Limit
taken into account. Factory setting.
RxPDO2 Word 1
Process data of the system bus. Refer to instructions on system bus.
RxPDO2 Word 2
Process data of the system bus. Refer to instructions on system bus.
PLC Output PercentOutput value of a PLC-function. Refer to application manual “PLC”.
age 1
PLC Output PercentOutput value of a PLC-function. Refer to application manual “PLC”.
age 2
101 - Analog Input MFI1A
102 -
105 110 714 715 2521 2522 -
The limit values and assignment to different limit value sources are data set related in
the configurations. The use of the data record changeover demands an examination of
the parameters in question.
7.9.5.3.3 Switching over between speed control and torque control
Via the signal assigned to parameter n-/T-Control Change-Over 164, you can switch between speed
control and torque control. See chapter 7.6.6.10 " n-/T-control changeover " .
7.9.5.4
Acceleration pre-control
725 Operation Mode
The acceleration pre-control controlled parallel to the speed controller reduces the reaction time of the
drive system to a change of reference values.
The acceleration pre-control is active in the speed-controlled configurations and can be activated via
parameter Operation Mode 725.
Operation Mode 725
0 - Off
1 - Switched on
Operating Instructions Agile
Function
The control system is not influenced. Factory setting.
The acceleration pre-control is active according to the limit values.
06/2013
236
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
726 Minimum Acceleration
727 Mech. Time Constant
The minimum acceleration time defines the modification speed of the reference speed value as from
which a torque necessary for acceleration of the drive is pre-controlled. The acceleration of the mass
is a function of the Mech. Time Constant 727 of the system. The value calculated from the increase
of the reference value and the multiplication factor of the torque required is added to the output signal of the speed controller.
Parameters
No.
Description
726 Minimum Acceleration
727 Mech. Time Constant
Min.
0.1 Hz/s
1 ms
Setting
Max.
6500.0 Hz/s
60000 ms
Fact. sett.
1.0 Hz/s
10 ms
For optimal setting, the acceleration pre-control is switched on and the mechanical time constant is
set to the minimum value. The output value of the speed controller is compared to the minimum acceleration time during the acceleration processes. The frequency ramp is to be set to the highest value occurring in operation at which the output figure of the speed controller is not yet limited. Set the
value of Minimum Acceleration 726 to half the set acceleration ramp. In this way, it is ensured that
the acceleration pre-control becomes active.
During several acceleration attempts, increase the Mech. Time Constant 727 until the output value
(signal source 37 – acceleration pre-control output) during the acceleration roughly corresponds to the
torque-forming current Isq (signal source 141). In the case of drives with a high friction or other high
resistance torque, deduct the corresponding portion from the torque-forming current Isq before. This
setting should also minimize overshooting of the speed controller. Alternatively, you can calculate the
mechanical time constant at a known mass moment of inertia. The mechanical time constant is the
time the drive needs during acceleration from standstill with rated torque applied until the Rated
Speed 372 is reached.
7.9.5.5
Field controller
717 Flux Reference Value
741 Amplification
742 Integral time
The flux-forming current component is controlled by the field controller. The guided commissioning
optimizes the parameters of the field controller by measuring the time constant and magnetizing
curve of the connected asynchronous motor. The parameters of the field controller are selected such
that they can be used without changes in most applications. The proportional and the integrating part
of the field controller are to be set via parameters Amplification 741 und Integral Time 742.
Parameters
No.
Description
717 Flux Reference Value
741 Amplification
742 Integral Time
Min.
0.01%
0.0
0.0 ms
Setting
Max.
300.00%
100.0
1000.0 ms
Fact. sett.
100.00%
5.0
100.0 ms
Please note, that changes within the Field controller parameters should only be done in the basic
speed area.
When an optimization of the Field controller is necessary, set the Integral Time 742 = Act. Rotor
Time Constant 227 / 2, meaning to the half of the rotor time constant. In most application cases, this
change is sufficient.
When further optimizations are necessary, follow the step described in the following procedure.
•
Set the output frequency in a way (i.e. via the frequency reference value), that the actual value Modulation 223 = 80…90 % Reference Modulation 750.
•
Now change the Flux Reference Value 717 from 100 % to 90 %. Oscillograph the actuating
variable Isd. The course of the signal of the flux-forming current Isd should reach the stationary
value after overshooting without oscillation.
Control functions
237
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
•
Change the parameters Amplification 741 and Integral Time 742 according to the application requirements.
•
Change the Flux Reference Value 717 back to 100 % und repeat the flux reference step
while you can analyze the changes with the oscillograph. Repeat these steps if necessary.
If a quick transition into field weakening is necessary for the application, the integral time should be
reduced. Increase the Amplification 741 in order to achieve a good dynamism of the controller.
An increased overshoot is necessary for a good control behavior in controlling of a load with low-pass
behavior, e.g. an asynchronous motor.
7.9.5.5.1 Limitation of field controller
743 Ref. Isd Upper Limit
744 Ref. Isd Lower Limit
The output signal of the field controller, the integrating and proportional components are limited via
parameters Ref. Isd Upper Limit 743 and Ref. Isd Lower Limit 744. The guided commissioning (setup) in Configuration 30 = 410 set parameter Ref. Isd Upper Limit 743 according to parameter Rated
Current 371.
In setting Configuration 30 = " 610 -PMSM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) " (synchronous
motor), parameters Ref. Isd Upper Limit 743 and Ref Isd Lower Limit 744 are set to 10% of the
value of Rated Current 371 during guided commissioning (setup).
Parameters
No.
Description
743 Ref. Isd Upper Limit
744 Ref. Isd Lower Limit
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter.
Min.
0.0
- IFIN
Setting
Max.
oc⋅IFIN
IFIN
Fact. sett.
IFIN
0.0
The limits of the field controller define not only the maximum current occurring, but also the dynamic
properties of the controller. The upper and lower limits restrict the modification speed of the motor
flux and the torque resulting from it. In particular the speed area above the nominal frequency should
be observed for the modification of the flux-forming component. The upper limit is to be estimated
from the product of the set magnetizing current and the correction factor Flux Reference Value 717,
although the limit must not exceed the overload current of the drive.
7.9.5.6
Modulation controller
750 Reference Modulation
752 Integral Time
753 Operation Mode (modulation controller)
The modulation controller, which is designed as an I regulator, automatically adapts the output value
of the frequency inverter to the machine behavior in the basic speed area and in the field weakening
area. If the modulation exceeds the figure set with parameter Reference Modulation 750, the fieldforming current component and thus the flux in the machine are reduced.
In order to make the best possible use of the voltage available, the figure selected via parameter Operation Mode 753 is put into proportion to the DC link voltage. That means that with a high mains
voltage there is also a high output voltage available, the drive only reaches the field weakening area
later and produces a higher torque.
Operation Mode 753
0 - Usq control
1 - U abs. value control
Function
The modulation is calculated from the ratio of torque-forming voltage
component Usq to the DC link voltage.
The modulation is calculated from the abs. voltage value / DC link voltage ratio. Factory setting.
The integrating part of the modulation controller is to be set via parameter Integral Time 752.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
238
Control functions
Parameter descriptions
Parameters
No.
Description
750 Reference Modulator
752 Integral Time
Min.
3.00%
0.0 ms
Setting
Max.
105.00%
1000.0 ms
Fact. sett.
102.00%
10.0 ms
The percentage setting of the Reference Modulation 750 is basically a function of the leakage inductivity of the machine. The default value was selected such that in most cases the remaining deviation
of 5% is sufficient as a reserve range for the current controller. For the optimization of the controller
parameters, the drive is accelerated with a flat ramp into the area of field weakening, so that the
modulation controller intervenes. The limit is set via parameter Reference Modulation 750. Then, the
control loop can be excited with a jump function by modifying the reference modulation (changeover
between 95% and 50%). By means of an oscillographed measurement of the flux-forming current
component on the analog output of the frequency inverter, the controlling process of the modulation
controller can be assessed. The course of the signal of the flux-forming current Isd should reach the
stationary value after overshooting without oscillation. An oscillating of the course of the current can
be damped by increasing the integral time.
7.9.5.6.1 Limitation of modulation controller
755 Reference Imr Lower Limit
756 Control Deviation Limitation
The output signal of the modulation controller is the internal reference flux. The controller output and
the integrating part are limited via the parameter Reference Imr Lower Limit 755 or the product of
Rated Magnetising Current 716 and Flux Reference Value 717. The magnetizing current parameter
forming the upper limit is to be set to the rated value of the machine. For the lower limit, select a
value which also builds up an adequate flux in the machine in the field weakening area. The limitation
of the control deviation at the output of the modulation controller prevents a possible oscillation of the
control loop in the case of load surges. The parameter Control Deviation Limitation 756 is stated as
an absolute value and acts both as a positive and a negative limit.
Parameters
No.
Description
Min.
755 Reference Imr Lower Limit
0.01⋅IFIN
756 Control Deviation Limitation
0.00%
IFIN: Nominal value of frequency inverter
oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter.
7.9.6
Setting
Max.
oc⋅IFIN
100.00%
Fact. sett.
0.01⋅IFIN
10.00%
Real-time tuning (optimizing motor parameters in operation)
1520 Operation mode real-time tuning
Motor parameters measured during commissioning (setup) at standstill will change during operation,
e.g. as a result of changing motor winding temperatures. Real-time tuning compensates these changes. While the drive is running, the controller settings are adjusted continuously to changing motor
properties and the control behavior is optimized. Real-time tuning can be used in V/f characteristic
control (Configuration 30 = 110) and the field-orientated control methods (Configuration 30 = 410
or 610).
Parameter Operation mode real-time tuning 1520 enables the following settings:
− Activation of real-time tuning.
− Optimized control parameters are to be saved after shut-down of the frequency inverter.
− Optimized controller parameters are to be applied in a new data set after a data set changeover.
Control functions
239
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Function
Operation mode real-time
tuning 1520
Real-time tuning is switched off. The controller settings and motor
parameters are not changed during operation. Factory setting.
Real-time tuning is switched on. After shut-down or restart of the
frequency inverter or after a data set changeover, the changed
controller parameters are deleted again and replaced by the static
values. The static values contain the motor data measured during
commissioning (setup).
Real-time tuning is switched on. Optimized control parameters are
saved after shut-down of the frequency inverter (non-volatile).
Each data set is saved separately. In this way, real-time tuning
may also be used for operating cases with motor changeover.
Real-time tuning is switched on. Optimized control parameters are
not saved after shut-down or restart of the frequency inverter.
Optimized controller settings are applied in a new data set after a
data set changeover.
Combination of " Latching " and " Taking Over " . Real-time tuning is
switched on. Optimized control parameters are saved after shutdown or restart of the frequency inverter (non-volatile). Optimized
controller settings are applied in a new data set after a data set
changeover.
0 - Off
1 - On
3 - Latching
5 - Taking Over
7-
7.10
Latching and Taking
Over
Special functions
The configurable functions of the corresponding control methods enable another field of application of
the frequency inverters. The integration in the application is made easier by special functions.
7.10.1 Pulse width modulation
400 Switching Frequency
The motor noises can be reduced by changing over the parameter Switching Frequency 400. A reduction of the switching frequency should be up to a maximum ration of 1:10 to the frequency of the
output signal for a sine-shaped output signal. The maximum possible switching frequency depends on
the drive output and the ambient conditions. For the required technical data refer to the corresponding table and the device type diagrams.
No.
Parameters
Description
Configuration 30
Selection
110
410, 610
400 Switching Frequency
Min.
2 kHz
4 kHz
Setting
Max.
16 kHz
Fact. sett.
2 kHz
4 kHz
The factory setting of parameter Switching Frequency 400 depends on the setting of parameter Configuration 30.
401 Min. Switching Frequency
The heat losses increase proportionally to the load point of the frequency inverter and the switching
frequency. The automatic reduction adjusts the switching frequency to the current operating state of
the frequency inverter in order to provide the output performance required for the drive task at the
greatest possible dynamics and a low noise level.
The switching frequency is adapted between the limits which can be set with the parameters Switching Frequency 400 and Min. Switching Frequency 401. If the Min. Switching Frequency 401 is larger than or equal to the Switching Frequency 400, the automatic reduction is deactivated.
Parameters
No.
Description
401 Min. Switching Frequency
Operating Instructions Agile
Min.
2 kHz
06/2013
240
Setting
Max.
16 kHz
Fact. sett.
2 kHz
Special functions
Parameter descriptions
580 Reduction Limit Ti/Tc
The change of the switching frequency depends on the heat sink temperature switch-off limit and the
output current. The temperature limit to be exceeded so that the switching frequency is reduced can
be set via parameter Reduction Limit Ti/Tc 580. If the heat sink temperature falls below the threshold set via parameter Reduction Limit Ti/Tc 580 by 5 °C, the switching frequency is increased again
step by step.
Parameters
No.
Description
580 Reduction Limit Ti/Tc
Min.
-25 °C
Setting
Max.
0 °C
Fact. sett.
-4 °C
The limit for the switching frequency reduction is influenced by the intelligent current
limits depending on the selected Operation Mode 573 and the output current. If they
have been switched off or provide the full overload current, the switching frequency is
reduced when the output current exceeds the limit of 87.5% of the long-term overload current (60 s). The switching frequency is increased if the output current drops
below the reference current of the next highest switching frequency.
7.10.2 Fan
39 Switch-On Temperature
The fans run in two power stages.
The fans ar switched on with the following conditions:
•
If the inside, capacitor or heat sink temperature exceeds the value of Switch-On Temperature
39, the inside fan and the heat sink fan will be switched on and run at half power.
A possible external fan is also switched on via the parameterized digital output.
•
Independent of the setting of Switch-On Temperature 39 the fans start at half power when
internal fixed temperature thresholds (internal temperature, Capacitor temperature) haven
been reached.
•
If the measured temperatures increase also at half power of the fans, the fans will be
switched to full power when a critical temperature threshold is reached.
To protect the device a device fault is triggered when reaching an internal switching
off temperature threshold.
The fans will be switched off again as soon as the heat sink temperature has dropped below the
Switch-On Temperature 39 by 5 °C and the internal temperatures dropped 5°C below their first
switch-on thresholds.
Parameters
No.
Description
39 Switch-On Temperature
Min.
0 °C
Setting
Max.
60 °C
Fact. sett.
30 °C
Further fan control setting options
Operation mode " 43 - external fan " for digital outputs additionally enables the control of an external
fan. Via the digital output, the external fan is switched on as soon as the Switch-On Temperature 39
for the internal fans was reached. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
Via parameter Standby Mode 1511, you can set that the internal fans are switched off if enable is
switched off. See chapter 8.3 " Standby mode " .
7.10.3 Standby mode and energy saving function
Refer to chapter 8 “Energy saving”.
Special functions
241
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.10.4 Brake chopper and brake resistor
506 Trigger Threshold
The frequency inverters feature a brake chopper transistor. The external brake resistor is connected
to terminals Rb1 and Rb2. The parameter Trigger Threshold 506 defines the switch-on threshold of
the brake chopper. The generator output of the drive, which leads to the increase in the DC link voltage, is converted to heat by the external brake resistor above the limit set via parameter Trigger
Threshold 506.
Parameters
No.
Description
AGL202
506 Trigger Threshold
AGL402
Min.
225.0 V
325.0 V
Setting
Max.
1000.0 V
1000.0 V
Fact. sett.
390.0 V
780.0 V
Set parameter Trigger Threshold 506 such that it is between the maximum DC link voltage which the
mains can generate and the maximum admissible DC link voltage of the frequency inverter.
UMains ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ 2 & lt; UdBC & lt; Udmax
If the parameter Trigger Threshold 506 is set larger than the maximum admissible DC link voltage,
the brake chopper cannot become active; the brake chopper is switched off.
If the parameter Trigger Threshold 506 is set to a value below the DC link voltage generated by the
mains, error message F0705 (chapter 13.1.1 " Error messages " ) is displayed if the start command is
issued to the frequency inverter.
If the DC link voltage exceeds the maximum value of DC 800 V, error message F0700 (see chapter
13.1.1 " Error messages " ) will be signaled.
The sampling time of the function is 62.5 µs. The brake chopper remains on for at least 62.5 µs after
the set trigger threshold was exceeded even if the value drops below the trigger threshold within this
period again.
Release or disable brake chopper
Via the signal assigned to parameter Brake Chopper Release 95, the brake chopper can be released
or disabled. See chapter 7.6.6.13 " Brake chopper release " .
Please note that by default the Motor chopper Trigger Threshold 507 and the Trigger
Threshold 506 are set up with different values. Check, that the two thresholds are set
up fittingly for your application.
Please check chapter 7.10.5 “Motor chopper”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
242
Special functions
Parameter descriptions
7.10.4.1
Dimensioning of brake resistor
WARNUNG
Connect a brake resistor following the instructions and safety information provided in
chapter 5.6.5 “Brake resistor”.
The following values must be known for dimensioning:
− Peak braking power Pb Peak in W
− Resistance Rb in Ω
− Relative operation time OT in %
Calculation of peak braking power Pb Peak
•
tb
Pb Peak =
(
2
J ⋅ n1 − n2
182 ⋅ t b
2
Pb Peak
J
n1
Rb
UdBC
Pb Peak
)
= Peak braking power in W
= Moment of inertia of drive system in kgm2
= Speed of drive system before the braking operation in
min-1
= Speed of drive system after the braking operation in
min-1
= Braking time in s
= Resistance in Ω
= Switch-on threshold in V
= Peak braking power in W
n2
Calculation of resistance Rb
•
Rb =
2
U d BC
Pb Peak
The switch-on threshold Ud BC is the DC link voltage at which the brake resistor is switched on. The
switch-on threshold can be set via parameter Trigger Threshold 506.
CAUTION
The resistance of the brake resistor must not be less than the minimum value Rb min 10%. The values for Rb min are listed in chapter 11 " Technical data " .
If the calculated resistance Rb of the brake resistor is between two standard series values, the lower
resistance must be selected.
•
Calculation of relative operation time OT
OT =
tb
tc
OT
tb
tc
= Relative operation time (percentage duty cycle)
= Braking time (duty cycle)
= Cycle time
Example:
tb = 48 s, tc= 120 s
t
OT = b = 0.4 = 40%
tc
In the case of infrequent short braking operations, typical values of the relative operation time OT are
at 10%, for long braking operations (≥ 120 s) typical values are at 100%. In the case of frequent
deceleration and acceleration operations, it is recommended that the relative operating time OT be
calculated according to the above formula.
The calculated values for Pb Peal, Rb and OT can be used by the resistor manufacturers for determining
the resistor-specific permanent power.
Special functions
243
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.10.5 Motor chopper
507 Trigger Threshold
The field-orientated control systems for asynchronous motors (configuration 410 FOC) contain the
function for adapted implementation of the generator energy into heat in the connected three-phase
machine. This enables the realization of dynamic speed changes at minimum system costs. The torque
and speed behavior of the drive system is not influenced by the parameterized braking behavior. The
parameter Trigger Threshold 507 of the DC link voltage defines the switch-on threshold of the motor
chopper function.
Parameters
Description
AGL202
507 Trigger Threshold
AGL402
No.
Min.
225.0 V
325.0 V
Setting
Max.
1000.0 V
1000.0 V
Fact. sett.
400.0 V
800.0 V
Set parameter Trigger Threshold 507 such that it is between the maximum DC link voltage which the
mains can generate and the maximum admissible DC link voltage of the frequency inverter.
UMains ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ 2 & lt; UdMC & lt; Udmax
If the parameter Trigger Threshold 507 is set larger than the maximum admissible DC link voltage,
the motor chopper cannot become active, the motor chopper is switched off.
If the set Trigger Threshold 507 is smaller than the maximum DC link voltage the mains can generate, error message F0706 (chapter 13.1.1 " Error messages " ) is displayed when the frequency inverter
is switched on.
The motor chopper function only works if activated via voltage Controller Operation
Mode 670. See chapter 7.9.2 “Voltage controller”.
For synchronous motors (Configuration 30 = 610), the motor chopper function is
deactivated to prevent damages to the motor. The other functions of the voltage controller are not affected by this.
Please note that by default the Motor chopper Trigger Threshold 507 and the Trigger
Threshold 506 are set up with different values. Check, that the two thresholds are set
up fittingly for your application.
Please check chapter 7.10.4 “Brake chopper and brake resist”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
244
Special functions
Parameter descriptions
7.10.6
Motor Protection
The protection of the motor against impermissible temperature rise requires monitoring mechanisms
for recognizing a thermal overload to prevent a possible damage to the motor.
The thermal state of a motor can be evaluated by different ways.
1.) Direct monitoring by temperature sensors inside the motor winding (Please check chapter 7.4.6
“Motor temperature”)
- PTC
- KTY
- PT100
- Thermal contact
2.) Indirect monitoring of the motor temperature
- Monitoring of the motor current based on the K characteristic of an integrated
motor circuit breaker
- Emulation of the motor heating by using a temperature-relevant mathematical model I2t
The choice of thermal control is mainly determined by type and operating conditions of the motor.
For safe motor protection it is generally sufficient using one of the available possibilities.
A combination of the two groups and their simultaneous operation is possible.
7.10.6.1
Motor protection by Motor Circuit Breaker
571 Operation Mode (motor circuit breaker)
Motor circuit breakers are used for protecting a motor and its supply cable against overheating by
overload. Depending on the overload level, they disconnect the motor from power supply immediately
in the case of a short-circuit or they disconnect the motor if an overload has occurred for some time.
1/1000 seconds
seconds
minutes
Conventional motor circuit breakers are commercially available for various applications with different
trigger characteristics (L, G/U, R and K), as shown in the diagram below. As frequency inverters in
most cases are used for supplying motors which are classified as operating equipment with very high
starting currents, only the K-characteristic was realized in this function.
x nominal current
Special functions
245
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
Unlike the operation of a conventional motor circuit breaker which disconnects the equipment to be
protected immediately if the trigger threshold is reached, this function provides the possibility of issuing a warning instead of disconnecting the equipment immediately.
The rated current of the motor circuit breaker refers to the rated motor current stated via parameter
Rated Current 371 of the corresponding data set. The rated values of the frequency inverter are to
be considered accordingly when it comes to dimensioning the application.
The function of the motor circuit breaker can be linked to different data sets. In this way, it is possible
to operate different motors via one frequency inverter. Thus, each motor can be equipped with its
own motor circuit breaker.
In case a motor is operated via the frequency inverter for which some setting values, e.g. minimum
and maximum frequency, are changed via the data set switch-over, only one motor circuit breaker
may be installed. This functionality can be set for single or multi-motor operation via parameter Operation Mode 571.
Function
0 - Off
The function is deactivated. Factory setting.
K-Char.,Mul.Motor
In each of the four data sets, the rated values are monitored. Over1Op.,Err.Sw.Off
loading the drive is prevented by the fault switch-off " F0401 " .
KThe rated values in the first data set are used independently of the
2 - Char.,Sing.Motor,Err. active data set. Overloading the drive is prevented by the fault switchSw.-Off
off " F0401 " .
In each of the four data sets, the rated values are monitored. OverK-Char.,Multi-Motor
11 loading the drive mechanism is signaled by a warning message
Op.,Warning
" A0200 " .
The rated values in the first data set are used independently of the
K-Char.,Single22 active data set. Overloading the drive mechanism is signaled by a
Motor,Warning
warning message " A0200 " .
I²t, Single-Motor,
Please check chapter 7.10.6.2 „Motor Protection by I2t- monitoring“
42 Error Switch Off
I²t, Multi-Motor Op- Please check chapter Motor Protection by I2t- monitoring7.10.6.2
51 eration, Warning
„Motor Protection by I2t- monitoring“
I²t, Single-Motor,
Please check chapter 7.10.6.2 “Motor Protection by I2t- monitoring”
53 Warning
I²t, Multi-Motor Operation,
Please check chapter 7.10.6.2 “Motor Protection by I2t- monitoring”
61 Warning and Error
Switch Off
I²t, Single-Motor,
Please check chapter 7.10.6.2 “Motor Protection by I2t- monitoring”
62 - Warning and Error
Switch Off
In each of the four data sets, the rated values are monitored. OverK-Char.,Multi-Motor
loading the drive is prevented by the fault switch-off " F0401 " . The
101Op.,Warning, stored internal state of the Motor circuit breaker is stored reset stable. These
settings are to be used for short-time mains shut downs.
The rated values in the first data set are used independently of the
active data set. Overloading the drive is prevented by the fault switchChar.,Sing.Motor,Err.
102off " F0401 " . The internal state of the Motor circuit breaker is stored
Sw.-Off, stored
reset stable. These settings are to be used for short-time mains shut
downs.
In each of the four data sets, the rated values are monitored. OverK-Char.,Multi-Motor
loading the drive mechanism is signaled by a warning message
111- Op.,Warning,
" A0200 " .The internal state of the Motor circuit breaker is stored reset
stored
stable. These settings are to be used for short-time mains shut downs.
The rated values in the first data set are used independently of the
K-Char.,Singleactive data set. Overloading the drive mechanism is signaled by a
122 - Motor,Warning,
warning message " A0200 " . The internal state of the Motor circuit
stored
breaker is stored reset stable. These settings are to be used for shorttime mains shut downs
Operation Mode 571
K-Char: K-characteristic of the motor circuit breaker
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
246
Special functions
Parameter descriptions
Multiple motor operation
Parameter Operation Mode 571 = 1 or 11, (101 or 111).
In multiple motor operation, it is assumed that each data set is assigned to a corresponding motor.
For this, one motor and one motor circuit breaker are assigned to each data set. In this operation
mode, the rated values of the active data set are monitored. The current output current of the frequency inverter is only taken into account in the motor circuit breaker activated by the data set. In
the motor circuit breakers of the other data sets, zero current is expected, with the result that the
thermal decay functions are taken into account. In combination with the data set changeover, the
function of the motor circuit breakers is similar to that of motors connected alternately to the mains
with their own circuit breakers.
Single motor operation
Parameter Operation Mode 571 = 2 or 22, (102 or 122).
The internal state of the motor circuit breaker is stored reset stable. These settings are to be used for
short-time time mains shut downs. This way the motor protection is considered correctly also in applications where a short mains power off or a shutdown orccurs.
Reset stable
Parameter Operation Mode 571 = 101, 102, 111 or 122.
The internal state of the motor protection switch is latched reset stable. These be used when regularly
short mains interruptions occur. This way the motor protection correctly for short mains failures or
short shut downs of the application.
In settings 101, 102, 111 and 112 of Operation Mode 571 the same values should be set
in all data sets.
572 Frequency Limit
The motor protection, especially of self-ventilated motors is improved by an adjustable frequency
limit. Percentage reference is the rated frequency.
Parameters
No.
Description
572 Frequency Limit
Setting
Max.
300%
Min.
0%
Fact. sett.
0%
In calculation the tripping time the measured output current in operating points below the frequency
limit is evaluated by a factor between 1 and 2. The determination of this factor is a function of the stator frequency. The increased thermal load of self-ventilated motors in the lower speed range is therefore considered.
The table shows in extracts factors for motor rated frequency 50Hz.
Frequency limit 572
300%
200%
150%
100%
80%
60%
40%
20%
10%
0
200%
200%
200%
200%
200%
200%
200%
200%
200%
5
188%
182%
177%
168%
162%
153%
139%
114%
100%
10
177%
168%
160%
147%
139%
129%
114%
100%
100%
20
160%
147%
137%
122%
114%
106%
100%
100%
100%
30
147%
132%
122%
109%
103%
100%
100%
100%
100%
50
129%
114%
106%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100
106%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
150
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
Special functions
247
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.10.6.2
Motor Protection by I2t- monitoring
571 Operation Mode (I2t- monitoring)
To protect the motor against overload the I2t monitoring provides a further possibility for the user.
This kind of motor protection is mainly used in servo technology.
When using servo motors the I2t- monitoring is a proven alternative to motor protection switch.
By integrating temperature-dependent parameters, measurable or known, the heating of a mathematical model is simulated. The kind of the I2t monitoring mode can be selected by Operation Mode 571.
This parameter is switchable via data set.
The I²t monitoring works by function (Iact/In)² as shown in the figure.
The monitored value is evaluated via a PT1 element with the thermal time constant of the stator.
If the output of PT1 element is bigger than 120%, then an error message is generated and the drive
switches off. The threshold of 120% prevents, that an overshoot leads to an immediate shutdown.
In the application should be avoided exceeding 100% capacity of the stator winding permanently.
The output of the first PT1 element is linked to the input of the second PT1 element which includes
the thermal motor time constant. This output may be permanently 100%.
This corresponds to the complete thermal capacity of the motor. If 102% is reached, the drive
switches off with an error message. Both outputs are connected to the adjustable alarm limit.
Operation Mode 571
42 – I²t, Single-Motor,
Error Switch Off
Function
The I²t capacity of the motor is monitored with rated values from the active dataset.
If the fixed threshold values exceed 100%motor
(120%stator), the drive switches off with fault
" F0401 " in the active dataset.
51 – I²t, Multi-Motor Operation,
Warning
The I²t capacity of the motors regarding their related ratings is monitored in each of the four data
sets. If the Warning Limit Motor I2t 615 is reached,
the warning message " A0200 " is signaled from the
active data set.
52 – I²t, Single-Motor,
Warning
The I²t capacity of the motor is monitored with rated values from the active dataset.
If the Warning Limit Motor I2t 615 is reached, the
warning message " A0200 " is signaled from the active data set.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
248
Special functions
Parameter descriptions
Operation Mode 571
Function
61 – I²t, Multi-Motor Operation,
Warning and Error Switch Off
The I²t capacity of the motors regarding their related ratings is monitored in each of the four data
sets. If the Warning Limit Motor I2t 615 is reached,
the warning message " A0200 " is signaled from the
active data set. If the fixed threshold values exceed
100%motor (120%stator), the drive switches off with
fault " F0401 " in the active dataset. Both incidences
are triggered from the active dataset.
62 – I²t, Single-Motor,
Warning and Error Switch Off
The I²t capacity of the motor is monitored with rated values from the active dataset.
If the Warning Limit Motor I2t 615 is reached, the
warning message " A0200 " is signaled from the active data set. If the fixed threshold values exceed
100%motor (120%stator), the drive switches off with
fault " F0401 " in the active dataset. Both incidences
are triggered from the active dataset.
608 Thermal time constant motor
609 Thermal time constant rotor
615 Warning limit motor I2t
The thermal time constant of the motor is in the range from few minutes to a couple of hours.
This motor-specific parameter is set via Thermal time constant motor 608.
Substantially smaller is the thermal stator time constant. To protect the stator winding additional monitoring is required which is determined by Thermal time constant stator 609.
These values can be taken from the corresponding motor data sheets.
When estimated time constants are used because the required data are not available then an optimal
thermal motor protection cannot be guaranteed.
A warning limit allows the user to prevent an imminent I²t-fault trip through appropriate measures.
Warning limit motor I2t 615 is used to set the warning signal between 6% and 100% of thermal
capacity.
No.
608
Parameters
Description
Thermal time constant Motor
609
Thermal time constant Stator
615
Warning Limit Motor I2t
Control level
1 in AGL
3 in ACU
1 in AGL
3 in ACU
1 in AGL
3 in ACU
Min
1 min
Setting
Max
Fact. setting
240 min
30 min
1s
600 s
15 s
6%
100%
80%
Output signals
Digital signals signal that of the function " motor protection " has been triggered.
180 - Warning motor
14 - protection
1)
2)
Triggering of the function " motor protection " according to Operation
Mode 571 is signaled.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
Special functions
249
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.10.7 V-belt monitoring
581 Operation Mode (V-belt monitoring)
582 Trigger Limit Iactive
583 Delay Time
Continuous monitoring of the load behavior and thus of the connection between the 3-phase machine
and the load is the task of the V-belt monitoring system. Parameter Operation Mode 581 defines the
functional behavior if the Active Current 214 or the torque-forming current component Isq 216 (field
-orientated control method) drops below the set Trigger Limit Iactive 582 for a time longer than the
set Delay Time 583.
Operation Mode 581
0 - Off
1 - Warning
2 - Error
Function
The function is deactivated. Factory setting.
If the active current drops below the threshold value, the warning " A8000 "
is displayed.
The unloaded drive is switched off and fault message " F0402 " is displayed
The error and warning messages can be output via the digital outputs (Signal 22 - " Warning V-Belt " )
and transmitted to an overriding controller, for example. The Trigger Limit Iactive 582 is to be parameterized as a percentage of the Rated Current 371 for the application and the possible operating
points.
Parameters
No.
Description
582 Trigger Limit Iactive
583 Delay Time
Min.
0.1%
0.1 s
Setting
Max.
100.0%
600.0 s
Fact. sett.
10.0%
10.0 s
7.10.8 Traverse function
With the traverse function, a triangle-shaped frequency signal with the start-up and shut-down times
to be set is superimposed on the output frequency. The resulting chronological order of the reference
frequency of master drive and slave drive are shown in the following diagrams. The function can be
used, for example, for drives which wind up thread on coils in textile machines. To avoid winding errors at the turning point of the thread guide, a proportional step is performed which causes a quick
speed change.
435 Operation Mode (Traverse function)
Via parameter Operation Mode 435, the drive is configured as a master drive or slave drive.
Operation mode 435
0 - Off
1 - Master drive
2 - Slave drive
Operating Instructions Agile
Function
The traverse function is deactivated. Factory setting.
Operation as master drive.
Operation as slave drive.
06/2013
250
Special functions
Parameter descriptions
436 Ramp-up Time
437 Ramp-down Time
438 TraverseAmplitude
439 Proportional Step
In the case of the master drive, the superimposed traverse frequency is linearly opposite to the limit
Traverse Amplitude 438 and then reverses its direction. When the direction is reversed, a proportional step is effected. Via a handshake signal, the master drive informs the slave drive that the traverse
output has changed its direction. The traverse function of the slave drive has the same gradient as the
traverse function of the master drive, but an opposite sign. When the slave drive reaches the limit
Traverse Amplitude 438 before switch-over of the handshake signal, the frequency is maintained until
switch-over is effected. If the handshake signal is received before the frequency limit is reached, the
direction is reversed immediately.
The Percentage values of Traverse Amplitude 438 and Proportional Step 439 refer to the current
frequency value set up by Reference Frequency 48.
Proportional Step 439
f
Master drive
Traverse Amplitude 438
Reference
Frequency 48
0
f
t
Slave drive
Reference
Frequency 48
0
Ramp-up
Time 436
t
Ramp-down
Time 437
Handshake
No.
436
437
438
439
Parameters
Description
Ramp-up Time
Ramp-down Time
Traverse Amplitude
Proportional Step
Input signals
Reference Frequency 48
Handshake Traverse Function 49
Min.
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01%
0.00%
t
Setting
Max.
320.00 s
320.00 s
50.00%
50.00%
Fact. sett.
5s
5s
10%
0.01%
Traverse function
Output signals
Operation Mode 435
Ramp-up Time 436
Ramp-down Time 437
Traverse Amplitude 438
Proportional Step 439
14 - Traverse Function Output
15 - Traverse Function Handshake
(from Master drive)
Signal " 14 - Traverse Function Output " is added to the reference frequency value.
During traverse operation, the configured traverse parameter values cannot be changed.
The source of the handshake signal is selected via Handshake Traverse Function 49.
Special functions
251
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
48 Reference Frequency
For traverse mode, the reference value source is selected via parameter Reference Frequency 48.
Traverse mode becomes active when Operation Mode 435 is switched on. In traverse mode, the
values for Ramp-up Time 436 and Ramp-down Time 437 are active.
Reference Frequency 48
0 - Ramp output (factory setting)
1 … 5 - Fixed frequencies 1 … 4
9 - Zero
10 - Stator frequency
12 - Tech. controller freq. output
14 - Traverse function output
16 - I-limit output
21 - Rotor frequency
50 - Reference analog value MFI1A
51 - Reference analog value MFI2A
56 - PWM Input
62 - Reference frequency channel
Attention:
WARNING
93
109
115 … 118
154
155
230
288
688
708 … 738
774, 775
2501 … 2504
-
Slip compensation
Udc-controller
Fixed frequencies 5 … 8
Reference ramp value
Actual speed
Internal reference frequency
Repetition frequency input
Electronic gear output
RxPDO Long (system bus)
Out-F PDPconv-long (Profibus)
PLC-output frequency 1 … 4
The frequency range for traverse mode is added additional to the frequency reference.
Therefore the added frequency can result in values smaller than Minimum Frequency
418 or bigger than Maximum Frequency 419.
To prevent too high frequencies, the summed frequency is limited:
Limitation of the summed Frequency
Maximum Frequency 419
Maximum Frequency 419 & lt; = 100 Hz
Maximum Frequency 419 +20 Hz
Maximum Frequency 419 & gt; = 100 Hz
Maximum Frequency 419 x 1.2
Traverse function with Setting Reference Frequency 48 0 – Ramp output:
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
252
Special functions
Parameter descriptions
7.10.9 System data
For monitoring the application, process parameters are calculated from electrical control parameters.
389 Factor Actual System Value
1543 Base Parameter Actual System Value
Actual values (e.g. actual frequency, torque) can be scaled. The drive can be monitored via the actual
value Actual System Value 242.
The actual value to be monitored and scaled must be selected. For parameter Base Parameter Actual
System Value 1543, the number of the actual value parameter must be set. The value of the actual
value parameter is multiplied by the Factor Actual System Value 389 and can be read out via parameter Actual System Value 242.
Actual System Value 242 = (actual value from parameter 1543) x Factor Actual System Value 389
No.
389
Parameters
Description
Factor Actual System Value
Min.
-100.000
Setting
Max.
100.000
Fact. sett.
1.000
Parameters
Setting
No.
Description
Min.
Max.
Base Parameter Actual Sys- Parameter number
1543
0
1600
tem Value
of actual value
Factory setting:
Actual System Value 242 = (Actual Frequency 241) x 1.000
Fact. sett.
241
(Actual frequency)
•
Set an actual value (parameter number) in parameter Base Parameter Actual System Value 1543.
•
Set a factor in parameter Factor Actual System Value 389.
Parameter Actual System Value 242 shows the scaled actual value.
7.10.10 Service interval monitoring
Refer to chapter 10.3 “Monitoring of service interval”.
7.10.11 Copy parameters
Parameter values can be saved on a memory card via operator panel or via PC control software VPlus.
Note:
Field bus communication is not possible or faulty during data storage or data reading by means of the
memory card.
Note:
To use the copy function, use the memory card (“Resource pack”) offered by Bonfiglioli Vectron.
Bonfiglioli Vectron doesn’t take any responsibility for the malfunctioning of the memory cards of other
manufacturers.
Special functions
253
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.10.11.1 Copying using the operator panel
Storage on a memory card
Parameter values of a frequency inverter can be saved on standard digital memory cards (Bonfiglioli
Vectron “Resource Pack”) and uploaded on another frequency inverter.
LOAD
SAVE
SAVE
Save parameter values in a file on the memory card.
•
On the operator panel in menu " Copy " , select item " Save " .
•
Confirm by pressing " ENT " . The number of the next available file is displayed.
•
Confirm by pressing " ENT " . The parameter values are copied to the file on the memory card.
A progress indicator indicates the parameter numbers the values of which are currently copied to the
memory card.
Number of next
available file
Progress indicator
Please note, that always the highest existent number on the memory card is used to
determine the next free data file number.
New Data file number = Highest existent Data file number + 1
If a file with number 9999 already exists, the data set to be stored cannot be stored
correctly. Always take care, that at least number 9999 is available before Saving.
LOAD
Uploading parameter values from memory card to a frequency inverter.
•
On the operator panel in menu " Copy " , select item " Load " .
•
Confirm by pressing " ENT " . Using the arrow buttons, select the file you want to upload to the
frequency inverter.
•
Confirm by pressing " ENT " . The parameter values of the selected file are uploaded to the frequency inverter.
A progress indicator indicates the parameter numbers the values of which are currently uploaded to
the frequency inverter.
File selection
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
254
Progress indicator
Special functions
Parameter descriptions
Messages
No memory card plugged.
No file with parameter values on memory card.
Parameter values were saved on memory card.
Parameter values were uploaded to frequency inverter.
Insufficient memory. The parameter values were not copied to the memory card completely.
No more file numbers available.
Error while writing on the memory card.
Error while reading from the memory card.
Data content invalid.
Fault when loading from memory card, memory card has contact problems. Contact
mounting of card.
Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions. Non-permissible parameter value.
Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions. Non-permissible parameter set.
Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions. Non-permissible write access.
Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions. Write error EEPROM.
Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions. Checksum error EEPROM.
Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions. Value is only allowed to be written at
inhibited state.
Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions. Error parameter type.
Error while writing parameters of LOAD functions. Unknown parameter. The mentioned
parameter is not contained inside the target device.
If an error occurs in the LOAD function while the parameters are written, the error number and the
parameter number will be displayed alternately.
− Press button " ENT " to continue the function.
− Press button " ESC " to cancel the function.
Please check the compatibility of different firmware versions when copying parameter
sets between different devices. When copying from a device with a newer firmware
version into devices with older firmware versions in individual cases the warning message “Err 111” may appear.
The market software of the Agile device series is downward compatible. Data from
devices with older firmware versions can be transferred to devices with newer firmware.
Parameters are always saved in control level 3 “Professional” on the memory card.
This is independent of the currently selected control level.
Special functions
255
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter descriptions
7.10.11.2 Copying using the PC control software
Parameter values can be saved on standard digital memory cards (Bonfiglioli Vectron “Resource
Pack”) using the PC control software VPlus and uploaded on a frequency inverter.
VPlus
SAVE
LOAD
Activate in the Saving mask for the usage on a MMC card always the function “Save to Multimedia
Card”. To save a file for a MMC card only file names in the range from 0001 to 9999 are allowed to be
used. The file names must be entered in the format “four-digit” + file extension for the usage on a
MMC card.
Please note, that when storing via VPlus always the parameters of the selected control
level are stored. Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends to read out the frequency inverter in
control level 3 in VPlus before storing the file.
7.10.12
Converter Profibus from/to Internal Notation
1370 In-F-PDP-word 1
1371 In-F-PDP-word 2
1372 In-F-intern-long 1
1373 In-F-intern-long 2
1374 In-F-Convert Reference
The Converter Profibus/Internal notation can convert a 16 bit Word into an internal 32 Bit frequency
value and vice versa. This is useful in example, when several devices are linked together via Systembus and for commercial reasons only one device is equipped with a Profibus Option. Through the routing of the Profibus Word via the Systembus (“Tunneling”) the necessary bandwidth can be reduced
and the parameterization of the “Gateway” (Systembus Master with Profibus Slave communication) be
simplified. The converter is used in this case in a device without Profibus module to convert the Profibus Notation into an internal reference value.
A similar procedure can be used to convert in example the Actual Frequency into a value according to
Profibus notation.
The converter can also be used for other purposes, in example when using the internal PLC programming.
In-F-PDP-word 1 1370 and In-F-PDP-word 2 1371 convert the Profibus Notation into the internal
Frequency. 0x4000 in Profibus-Notation (=100 %) refers to In-F-Convert Reference 1374 in Hz.
In-F-intern-long 1 1372 and In-F-intern-long 2 1373 convert an internal frequency value into Profibus Notation. 0x4000 in Profibus-Notation (=100 %) refers to In-F-Convert Reference 1374 in Hz.
The Profibus Notation is limited to values from -200 % (0x8000) to +200 % (0x7FFF).
0x4000
0x7FFF
0x8000
0xC000
=
=
=
=
100 %
200 %
-200 %
-100 %
= In-F-Convert Reference 1374
= 2x In-F-Convert Reference 1374
= -2x In-F-Convert Reference 1374
= -In-F-Convert Reference 1374
The values converted this way can be used as internal source.
774 – Out-F-PDP-Conv1-long1 as output of In-F-PDP-word 1 1370 (Profibus-Not. Frequency)
775 – Out-F-PDP-Conv1-long2 as output of In-F-PDP-word 2 1371 (Profibus-Not. Frequency)
776 – Out-F-PDP-Conv1-word1 as output of In-F-PDP-long 1 1372 (Frequency Profibus-Not.)
777 – Out-F-PDP-Conv2-word2 as output of In-F-PDP-long 2 1373 (Frequency Profibus-Not.)
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
256
Special functions
Energy saving
8
Energy saving
Energy can be saved in a drive by reducing the losses in the electric motor or by reducing the energy
consumption of the frequency inverter. In addition, the generator energy generated during braking
operation can be used instead of converting it to heat.
Energy saving options
The frequency inverter offers the following energy saving options:
− Standby mode of frequency inverter
− Standby mode of operator panel
− Energy saving function: The operating point of the motor is optimized so that the power consumption is kept to a minimum.
− Quadratic V/f characteristic in the case of control of an asynchronous motor
− DC-link connection
− Energy-optimized braking
− PID controller (technology controller): When the reference value is reached, the motor is switched
off.
− External DC 24 V power supply. Power supply can be switched off while the system is not in operation.
− Temperature-controlled fans
− Automatic switching frequency changeover
− In the frequency inverter, special energy saving circuitry is integrated
8.1
Energy saving function
The operating point of the motor is optimized so that the power consumption is kept to a minimum
and energy saving is maximized. The energy saving function can be switched on if one of the following control methods for parameter Configuration 30 is selected:
− " 110 - IM sensor-less control " (V/f characteristic)
− " 410 - IM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) "
Via the following parameters, the energy saving function can be set up:
− Operation Mode Energy Saving Function 1550
− Flux Reduction 1551
− Energy Saving Function On 1552
The energy saving function is suitable for:
− partial load operation of a drive
− drives without high or frequent load variations
The energy saving function is not suitable for operation of a synchronous motor. The energy saving
parameters cannot be set if " 610 - PMSM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) " is selected for
parameter Configuration 30.
110 - IM sensor-less control (V/f characteristic)
In the case of the sensor-less control of an asynchronous motor according to the V/f characteristic,
the optimum operating point of the motor is adjusted in order to keep power consumption to a minimum.
410 - IM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC)
In the case of the field-orientated control of an asynchronous motor, the optimum operating point of
the motor is adjusted in order to keep power consumption to a minimum.
Energy saving function
257
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Energy saving
1550 Operation Mode Energy Saving Function
Parameter Operation Mode Energy Saving Function 1550 defines if the power consumption (magnetic flux) is reduced by an adjustable value or by an automatically determined value. Evaluation must
be switched on via parameter Energy Saving Function On 1552.
Function
Operation Mode Energy
Saving Function 1550
0 - Off
1 - manual
2 - automatic
Energy saving function is switched off. Factory setting.
Energy saving function can be switched on via a digital input or a logic
signal.
The digital input or the logic signal can be selected for parameter Energy
Saving Function On 1552.
Energy is saved by reducing the flux. The value of the flux reduction can
be set via parameter Flux Reduction 1551.
Energy saving function can be switched on via a digital input or a logic
signal.
The digital input or the logic signal can be selected for parameter Energy
Saving Function On 1552.
Energy is saved by reducing the flux. The value of the flux reduction is
determined automatically.
1551 Flux reduction (energy saving function)
In order to save energy, the magnetic flux is reduced by the value of Flux Reduction 1551. One of
the following control methods must be selected:
− Configuration 30 = " 110 - IM sensor-less control " (V/f characteristic)
− Configuration 30= " 410 - IM: sensor-less field-orientated control (DMC) "
For parameter Operation Mode Energy Saving Function 1550, " 1 - manual " must be selected.
No.
1551
Parameters
Description
Flux Reduction
Min.
0%
Setting
Max.
100%
Fact. sett.
0%
High values impair the dynamic behaviour of the drive.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
258
Energy saving function
Energy saving
1552 Energy Saving Function On
The signal at a digital input or a logic signal switches on the energy saving function. The digital input
or the logic signal must be selected for parameter Energy Saving Function On 1552.
For parameter Operation Mode Energy Saving Function 1550, " 1 - manual " or " 2 - automatic " must
be selected.
Function
Energy Saving Function
On 1552
7 - Off
71 - IN1D
72 - IN2D
73 - IN3D
74 - IN4D
75 - IN5D
76 - MFI1D
77 - MFI2D
.
.
.
Reference Frequency reached
Setting Frequen164 cy
.
.
.
163 -
8.2
No signal for switch-on of the energy saving function. Factory setting.
The signal at digital input IN1D (terminal X11.4) switches on the energy
saving function.
The signal at digital input IN2D (terminal X11.5) switches on the energy
saving function.
The signal at digital input IN3D (terminal X11.6) switches on the energy
saving function. For Operation Mode Terminal X11.6 558 " 0 - Input
IN3D must be selected.
The signal at digital input IN4D (terminal X12.1) switches on the energy
saving function.
The signal at digital input IN5D (terminal X12.2) switches on the energy
saving function.
The signal at multifunction input 1 (terminal X12.3) switches on the energy saving function. For Operation Mode MFI1 452 " 3 - Digital NPN
(active: 0 V) " or " 4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V) " must be selected.
The signal at multifunction input 1 (terminal X12.3) switches on the energy saving function. For Operation Mode MFI1 562 " 3 - Digital NPN
(active: 0 V) " or " 4 - Digital PNP (active: 24 V) " must be selected.
The energy saving function is switched on if the frequency is reached.
The energy saving function is switched on if the value of Setting Frequency 510 is reached.
Quadratic V/f characteristic
For applications where the torque increases quadratically to the speed, e.g. control of a fan, the power consumption can be reduced and energy can be saved. In the low speed range where the full
torque is not required, energy is saved.
Setting the quadratic V/f characteristic is possible if the following control method is selected for parameter Configuration 30:
" 110 - IM sensor-less control " (V/f characteristic)
606 Type V/f characteristic
Via parameter Type V/f characteristic 606, you can switch the characteristic from linear to quadratic.
Type V/f characteristic 606
1 - Linear
2 - Quadratic
Quadratic V/f characteristic
Function
Linear V/f characteristic: U ~ f. Factory setting.
See chapter 7.7 " V/f characteristic " .
Quadratic V/f characteristic: |U| ~ f2.
259
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Energy saving
The quadratic characteristic follows the function: |U| ~ f2.
U [V]
P603
P601
P600
P604 f [Hz]
P419 (fmax)
P602
P418 (fmin)
After switching over to the quadratic characteristic, the characteristic is defined by the following parameters:
− Starting Voltage 600
− Voltage Rise 601
− Rise Frequency 602
− Cut-Off Voltage 603
− Cut-Off Frequency 604
The parameters must be adjusted to the application. Additionally, check the settings for Starting Current 623 and Frequency Limit 624.
The parameters are described in chapters 7.7 " V/f characteristic " and 7.3.2 " Starting behavior " .
The working range is between Minimum Frequency 418 and Maximum Frequency 419.
8.3
Standby mode
Standby reduces the power consumption of the frequency inverter. The consumption is reduced and
energy is saved.
1510 Time until Keypad Standby
The display of the operator panel is switched off if no button is pressed within the time set in parameter Time until Keypad Standby 1510. Standby mode of the operator panel is indicated by a spot lighting up on the operator panel.
Standby mode is cancelled automatically is a warning or an error is signaled.
Standby mode of the operator panel is switched off if Time until Keypad Standby 1510 is set to zero.
In this case, the display is switched on permanently.
No.
1510
Parameters
Description
Time until Keypad Standby
Min.
0 Min
Setting
Max.
60 Min
Fact. sett.
0 Min
If the display of the operator panel is to be switched off as soon as enable of the frequency inverter is switched off – and not after a certain time –parameter Standby
Mode 1511 can be set.
1511 Standby Mode (frequency inverter)
The frequency inverter reduces power consumption if
− the standby mode of the frequency inverter is switched on via parameter Standby Mode 1511,
and
− enable of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA and STOB is switched off
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
260
Standby mode
Energy saving
Attention!
WARNING
Do not select the operation modes 11, 21 or 22, if the DC-link connection (“+” and “-”
at terminal X11) of the frequency inverter is connected to other devices.
WARNING
The operation modes to switch off the I/O’s (settings 12, 21 or 23) have the following
effects:
•
The digital inputs are no longer evaluated, the last known values remain internally (i.e. Digital inputs 250).
•
The digital outputs are set to zero-potential, internally the values are set to zero
(i.e. Digital outputs 254).
•
The output X13.4 DC 10Vout is switched to zero-potential.
•
The analogue inputs are further evaluated, (i.e. Analog Input 251).
•
The analogue outputs are set to zero-potential, internally the values are set to
zero (i.e. Analog Output 257).
WARNING
For the the digital inputs (settings 12, 21 or 23) of the energy saving function “Pull-up”
(PNP-Logic) or “Pull-down” (NPN-Logic) resistances are switched on to minimize the
internal losses. When the energy saving function is activated, the digital inputs carry up
to DC 24 V (PNP-logic) or DC 0 V (NPN-logic).
Bonfiglioli Vectron recommends not to use the settings 12, 21 and 23 for the engery saving function,
if:
•
The digital input signals are used for Agile devices and third party products at the same time.
•
The digital input signals on the wire are connected with Pull-down (PNP-logic) or Pull-up
(PNP-logic) resistances to Ground or DC 24 V (in example due to interference resistance).
Standby Mode 1511
0 - Off
1 - Step1 (=Keypad+fan)
Function
The Standby mode of the frequency inverter is switched off.
Factory setting.
The Standby mode is switched on. The following functions are
switched off if enable is switched off:
− the display of the operator panel 1
− the internal fans 2
Standby mode is switched on. The following functions are
switched off if enable is switched off:
11 - Step1+Power unit
− the display of the operator panel
− the internal fans
− the power unit
1
2
This setting is independent of the setting of parameter Time until Keypad Standby 1510.
The internal fans will continue to run for a sufficiently long time and will be switched off then.
Standby mode
261
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Energy saving
Function
Standby mode is switched on. The following functions are
switched off if enable is switched off:
Standby Mode 1511
− the display of the operator panel
12 - Step1+I/O
− the internal fans
− the digital and analog inputs and outputs 1
− the voltage output DC 10 V at terminal X13.4
Standby mode is switched on. The following functions are
switched off if enable is switched off:
− the display of the operator panel
13 - Step1+Communication 2
− the internal fans
− an optional communication module
Standby mode is switched on. The following functions are
switched off if enable is switched off:
− the display of the operator panel
− the internal fans
21 - Step1+Power Unit+I/O
− the power unit
− the digital and analog inputs and outputs
− the voltage output DC 10 V at terminal X13.4
Standby mode is switched on. The following functions are
switched off if enable is switched off:
22 -
− the display of the operator panel
Step1+ Power Unit +
Comm.
− the internal fans
− the power unit
− an optional communication module
Standby mode is switched on. The following functions are
switched off if enable is switched off:
Step1+I/O + Communica23 tion
− the display of the operator panel
− the internal fans
− the digital and analog inputs and outputs
− the voltage output DC 10 V at terminal X13.4
− an optional communication module
Standby mode is switched on. The following functions are
switched off if enable is switched off:
− the display of the operator panel
31 - Full
− the internal fans
− the digital and analog inputs and outputs
− the voltage output DC 10 V at terminal X13.4
− an optional communication module
− the power unit
1
2
The enable inputs STOA an STOB remain functional.
The operation modes for communication module switch-off can be selected only if a communication module is
installed.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
262
Standby mode
Energy saving
If a fault is triggered, a deactivated keypad and a deactivated CM-Module (if existent)
are switched on again.
Deactivated digital inputs are not switched on again. When the digital signals are in
Standby, one of the following procedures can reset a fault:
• Reset the fault via Keypad with the STOP key
• Reset the fault via PLC (via Field bus communication)
• Set STOA and STOB to switch the device again operational and reset the fault
in sequence via digital input set up in Error acknowledgement 103.
8.4
Further energy saving options
DC-link connection
By DC-link connection of several frequency inverters, energy can be saved, as the energy recovered
when one motor is decelerated can be used for accelerating the other drive. In this case, the acceleration energy does not have to be taken from mains supply.
If the deceleration energy from a motor is not used for accelerating the other motor it will be used for
covering the consumption of the coupled frequency inverters.
Energy-optimized braking
The voltage controller can be set up such that the kinetic energy recovered during deceleration operations is not converted to heat in a brake resistor. The brake ramp will be adjusted automatically such
that the DC-link voltage does not exceed a certain value. The motor is decelerated in an energysaving way. The consumption of the frequency inverter is covered by the deceleration energy of the
drive, so that no energy is taken from mains supply.
The voltage controller is described in chapter 7.9.2 " Voltage controller " .
PID controller (technology controller): saving energy when the reference value is reached
The PID controller (technology controller) can switch off the motor when the reference value (PID
desired set value) is reached. Saving energy is possible particularly in the case of asynchronous motors, as these motors consume the magnetizing current even when they are at a standstill. The function can be used for filling level controls, for example. The function can be set up via parameter Backlash 618.
See chapter 7.9.3 " PID controller (technology controller) " .
External DC 24 V power supply
Via an external 24V power supply, the control component of the frequency inverter can be powered
independent of mains supply. The frequency inverter can be disconnected from mains supply via contactor, for example. Even with mains supply switched off, parameterization is still possible, the function of inputs and outputs and the communication are maintained.
The power consumption of the inverter during extended interruptions of operation can almost be reduced to zero.
See chapter 5.7.6 “External DC 24 V power supply”.
Temperature-controlled fans
The fans are controlled in two stages. This is done for the inside fan and the heat sink fan together. If
the inside, capacitor or heat sink temperature set via Switch-On Temperature 39 is exceeded, the
heat sink fan and the inside fan are switched on at half power. The fans will be switched off again as
soon as the temperatures have dropped below the Switch-On Temperature 39 by 5 °C again.
If the internally defined maximum inside, DC-link capacitor or heat sink temperature thresholds are
reached (5 °C below maximum temperature), the fans are switched to full power. If the temperature
drops to 5 °C below the switch-on threshold again, the fans return to the half-power stage.
See chapter 7.10.2 " Fan " .
The control of the fans can additionally be set via parameter Standby Mode 1511.
See chapter 8.3 " Standby mode " .
Further energy saving options
263
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Energy saving
Automatic switching frequency changeover
The power losses of semiconductor components depend on the switching frequency and the level of
the switched current. In the case of a high current load, e.g. during acceleration of high loads, the
switching frequency of the pulse width modulation may be reduced temporarily in order to reduce the
losses of the frequency inverter. If the current drops again after the acceleration phase, a higher
switching frequency will be set automatically.
See chapter 7.10.1 " Pulse width modulation " .
Circuitry measures integrated in Agile
The following energy saving measures were integrated in the frequency inverter and do not require
any setup.
− The integrated power supply units supplying the internal assembles are optimized to ensure minimum power losses.
− Low-loss current measurement: The own consumption of the measuring system is optimized to
ensure minimum power losses.
− Supply of optional communication modules: If no communication module is connected, energy
supply to the module slot is switched off.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
264
Further energy saving options
Actual values
9
Actual values
The various control functions and methods include electrical control variables and various calculated
actual values of the machine or system. The different actual values can be read out for operational
and error diagnosis via a communication interface or in the " Actual " menu of the operator panel.
9.1
No.
222
223
228
229
230
Actual values of frequency inverter
Actual values of frequency inverter
Function
Direct voltage in DC-link.
Output voltage of the frequency inverter relative to the mains
Modulation
voltage (100% = UFIN).
Total of Reference frequency source 1 475 and Reference freInternal Reference Frequency
quency source 2 492.
Total of Reference percentage source 1 476 and Reference
Reference percentage
percentage source 2 494 as reference value of the reference
percentage channel.
Actual value signal at the Actual percentage source 478.
Actual percentage value
Status of digital inputs in decimally encoded form:
Description
DC–link voltage
− of enable signal (STOA AND STOB)
− of the six digital inputs
− of multifunction input 1 in setting Operation mode MFI1
452 " 3 - digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - digital PNP (active: 24 V) " .
243
Digital Inputs (Hardware)
− of multifunction input 2 in setting Operation mode MFI2
562 " 3 - digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - digital PNP (active: 24 V) " .
− of digital input/output in setting Operation mode terminal
X11.6 558 = " 0 - input IN3D " .
244
Working hours counter
245
Operation hours counter
246
Capacitor temperature
249
Active data set
Represents the status of the physical inputs (also refer to actual
value Digital inputs 250).
Operating hours in which the output stage of the inverter is
active.
Operating hours of the frequency inverter in which supply voltage is available.
Measured capacitor temperature. Warning or shutdown if temperature is too high.
According to Data set change-Over 1 70 and Data set changeOver 2 71 of the data set currently used.
Status of digital inputs in decimally encoded form:
− of enable signal (STOA AND STOB)
− of the six digital inputs
250
Digital inputs
− of multifunction input 1 in setting Operation mode MFI1
452 " 3 - digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - digital PNP (active: 24 V) " .
− of multifunction input 2 in setting Operation mode MFI2
562 " 3 - digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - digital PNP (active: 24 V) " .
− of digital input/output (terminal X11.6) in setting Operation
mode terminal X11.6 558 = " 0 - input IN3D " .
251
Analog input MFI1A
Actual values of frequency inverter
Input signal at multifunction input 1. Via parameter Operation
mode MFI1 452, multifunction input 1 must be set up as a
voltage or current input.
265
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Actual values
No.
252
253
Actual values of frequency inverter
Function
Signal on repetition frequency input according to Operation
Repetition frequency input
mode IN2D 496.
Input signal at multifunction input 2. Via parameter Operation
Analog input MFI2A
mode MFI2 562, multifunction input 2 must be set up as a
voltage or current input.
Status of digital outputs in decimally encoded form:
Description
− of digital output OUT1D
254
− of multifunction output in setting Operation mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550 = " 1 - Digital MFO1D "
Digital outputs
− of digital input/output in setting Operation modeterminal
X11.6 558 = " 1 - output OUT3D " .
− of relay output
255
Heat sink temperature
256
Inside temperature
257
Analog output MFO1A
258
PWM input
259
Actual Error
269
Warnings
273
Application Warnings
275
Controller Status
277
STO Status
278
Frequency MFO1F
282
283
470
Reference bus frequency
Reference ramp frequency
Revolutions
1530
Service Interval DC-link
1531
Service Interval Fan
1533
Maintenance Note
1541
Status device test
Measured heat sink temperature. Warning or shutdown if temperature is too high.
Measured inside temperature. Warning or shutdown if temperature is too high.
Output signal at multifunction output 1 in setting Operation
mode MFO1 (X13.6) 550 = " 10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A "
Pulse-width modulated signal at PWM input according to Operation mode IN2D 496.
Error message with error code and abbreviation. See chapter
13.1.1 " Error messages " .
Warning message with warning code and abbreviation.
Please note: Warnings 269 is not affected by Create warning
mask 536.
Warning message application with warning code and abbreviation. Please note: Warnings Application 273 is not affected by
Create warning mask 626.
The reference value signal is limited by the controller coded in
the controller status.
Signal status of digital inputs A (STOA) and B (STOB) for enable.
Output signal at multifunction output in setting Operation mode
MFO1 (X13.6) 550 = " 20 - repetition frequency (FF) MFO1F "
or " 30 - Pulse Train (PT) MFO1F " .
Reference value from serial interface.
Reference value from reference frequency channel.
Actual value of position distance of positioning operation.
The time remaining until next service in percent of maintenance
interval. If a value of 0% is displayed, service is required. It
must also be checked if a component must be replaced. Refer
to chapter 10.3.1 “DC-link”.
The time remaining until next service in percent of maintenance
interval. If a value of 0% is displayed, service is required. It
must also be checked if a component must be replaced. Refer
to chapter 10.3.2 “Fan”.
Service status. Refer to chapter 10.3 “Monitoring of service
interval”.
Service of device test. Refer to chapter 7.2.3 “Device test”.
The actual values can be read out and monitored in the " Actual " menu of the operator
panel.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
266
Actual values of frequency inverter
Actual values
9.1.1
STO Status
Parameter STO Status 277 can be used for extended diagnosis of the two digital inputs STOA and
STOB for enable. The statuses of the inputs are shown in bit-encoded form.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Meaning
STOA input missing.
STOB input missing.
Switch off STOA input.
Switch off STOB input.
Timeout STOA.
Timeout STOB.
Diagnosis error.
Frequency inverter error (fault).
The signal states at digital inputs STOA and STOB can be linked to functions of the frequency inverter.
70 -
Inverter Release
Inverter Release
inverted
Inverter Re525 lease(Hardware)
Inverter Re537 - lease(Hardware)
inverted
270 -
9.2
Enable signal of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA (X11.3)
and STOB (X13.3).
The signal is not available if parameter Local/Remote 412 is set to
“2 - Control via Remote-Contacts”.
Operation mode 70 inverted (LOW active).
Enable signal of the frequency inverter via digital inputs STOA (X11.3)
and STOB (X13.3).
Operation mode 525 inverted (LOW active).
Actual values of machine
The frequency inverter controls the behavior of the machine in the various operating points. Control
parameters and actual values of the machine can be displayed.
No.
Description
210 Stator Frequency
211 rms Current
212 Output Voltage
213 Active Power
214 Active Current
215 Isd
216 Isq
221 Slip Frequency
224 Torque
225 Rotor Flux
226 Winding Temperature
227
Act. Rotor Time Constant
235 Flux-Forming Voltage
Actual values of machine
Actual values of machine
Function
The output voltage (motor voltage) of the frequency inverter.
Calculated effective output current (motor current) of the frequency
inverter.
Calculated effective value of linked output voltage (motor voltage) of
frequency inverter.
Active power calculated from the voltage, the current and the control
variables.
Active current calculated from the rated motor parameters, the control variables and the current.
Current component of the field-orientated control forming the magnetic flux.
Torque-forming current component of field-orientated control.
Difference from the synchronous frequency calculated from the rated
motor parameters, the control variables and the current.
Torque at the current output frequency calculated from the voltage,
the current and the control variables.
Current magnetic flux relative to the rated motor parameters.
Measured motor temperature value. Parameter Operation mode motor temp. 570 must be set up for temperature evaluation.
Calculated value of rotor time constant.
Voltage component of the field-orientated control forming the magnetic flux.
267
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Actual values
No.
236
238
239
240
241
Actual values of machine
Function
Voltage component of the field-orientated control forming the
Torque-Forming Voltage
torque.
Magnetic flux calculated according to the rated values and the operAbsolute Flux Value
ating point of the motor.
Reactive current calculated from the rated motor parameters, the
Reactive Current
control variables and the current.
Actual Speed
Measured or calculated speed of drive.
Actual Frequency
Measured or calculated frequency of drive.
Description
The actual values can be read out and monitored in the " Actual " menu of the operator
panel.
9.3
Actual values of the system
The calculation of the actual figures of the system is based on the parameterized system data. Specific to the application, the parameters are calculated from the factors, electrical variables and the controls. The correct display of the actual figures is a function of the parameterized data of the system.
9.3.1
Actual system value
The drive can be monitored via the actual value Actual system value 242. See chapter 7.10.9 " System
data " .
Actual system value
No.
Description
242 Actual System Value
9.4
Function
Calculated actual value of drive.
Actual value memory
The assessment of the operating behavior and the service of the frequency inverter in the application
are facilitated by storing various actual values. The actual value memory guarantees monitoring of the
individual variables for a definable period. The parameters of the actual value memory can be read
out via a communication interface and displayed via the operator panel. In addition, the operator
panel enables monitoring of the peak and mean values in the " Actual " menu branch.
Actual value memory
No.
Description
231 Peak Value Long Term Ixt
232 Peak Value Short Term Ixt
287 Peak Value Vdc
288 Average Value Vdc
289 Peak Value Heat Sink Temp.
Average Value Heat Sink
Temp.
Peak Value Inside Tempera291
ture
Average Value Inside Tem292
perature
290
293 Peak Value Iabs.
294 Average Value Iabs
Operating Instructions Agile
Function
Utilization of the device-dependent overload of 60 seconds.
Utilization of the device-dependent overload of 1 second.
The maximum DC link voltage measured.
The mean DC link voltage calculated in the period of observation.
The highest measured heat sink temperature of the frequency
inverter.
The mean heat sink temperature calculated in the period of
observation.
The maximum measured inside temperature in the frequency
inverter.
The mean inside temperature calculated in the period of observation.
The highest abs. current calculated from the measured motor
phases.
The mean abs. current calculated in the period of observation.
06/2013
268
Actual values of the system
Actual values
Actual value memory
No.
Description
295 Peak Value Active Power pos.
Peak Value Active Power
296
neg.
297 Average Value Active Power
298 Peak Value Capacitor Temp.
Average Value Capacitor
299
Temp.
301 Energy, positive
302 Energy, negative
Function
Calculated maximum active power in motor operation.
Calculated maximum active power in generator operation.
The mean active power calculated in the period of observation.
Maximum measured capacitor temperature.
The mean capacitor temperature calculated in the period of
observation.
The calculated energy to the motor in motor operation.
The calculated energy from the motor in generator operation.
The actual values can be read out and monitored in the " Actual " menu of the operator
panel.
237 Reset Memory
Parameter Reset Memory 237 in menu " Para " of the operator panel enables resetting of the mean
and peak values. The mean value and the peak value are reset to zero.
Reset Memory 237
0
10
12
20
21
30
31
32
33
-
34 35 40
41
50
52
53
54
56
100
101
102
-
No Reset
Peak value long-term Ixt
Peak value short-term Ixt
Peak value Vdc
Average Value Vdc
Peak value Tc
Average Value Tc
Peak value Ti
Average Value Ti
Peak Value Capacitor
Temp.
Average Value Capacitor
Temp.
Peak value Iabs.
Average value Iabs
Peak value Pactive pos.
Peak value Pactive neg.
Average value Pactive
Energy, positive
Energy, negative
All peak values
All average values
All values
Actual value memory
Function
Values of actual value memory remain unchanged.
Reset Peak Value Long Term Ixt 231.
Reset Peak Value Short Term Ixt 232.
Reset Peak Value Vdc 287.
Reset Average Value Vdc 288.
Reset Peak Value Heat Sink Temp. 289.
Reset Average Value Heat Sink Temp. 290.
Reset Peak Value Inside Temperature 291.
Reset Average Value Inside Temperature 292.
Reset Peak Value Capacitor Temp. 298.
Reset Average Value Capacitor Temp. 299.
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Peak Value Iabs 293.
Average Value Iabs. 294.
Peak Value Active Power pos. 295.
Peak Value Active Power neg. 296.
Average Value Active Power 297.
Energy, positive 301.
Energy, negative 302.
Reset all saved peak values.
Reset all saved average values.
Reset whole actual value memory.
269
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Actual values
9.5
No.
Actual values of the CAN system bus
Description
978
Node-State
979
CAN-State
9.6
No.
Actual values CANopen
Description
1290
Node-State
1291
CAN-State
9.7
No.
11
282
411
9.8
No.
1431
Actual values of the system bus
Function
System bus state indication.
Refer to system bus instructions.
System bus state indication.
Refer to system bus instructions.
Actual values CANopen
Function
Status indication of CANopen® communication.
Refer to CANopen® instructions.
Status indication of CANopen® communication.
Refer to CANopen® instructions.
Actual values Modbus and VABus
Actual values of frequency inverter
Description
Function
VABus SST Error Register
Modbus or VABus error register. Refer to VABus instructions.
Reference Bus Frequency
Reference value from serial interface.
Modbus or VABus error status word. Refer to Modbus or VABus
Status Word
instructions.
Actual values Ethernet
Description
Module Info
Operating Instructions Agile
Actual values of frequency inverter
Function
MAC ID: physical biunique Network address
06/2013
270
Actual values of the CAN system bus
Service
10
Service
This chapter contains information for maintaining the device.
10.1
Safety
WARNING
Any service work must be carried out by qualified staff.
Unauthorized opening and improper interventions can lead to personal injury or material
damage. Repairs on the frequency inverters may only be carried out by the manufacturer or persons authorized by the manufacturer.
During any service work, comply with the documentation.
Disconnect the frequency inverter from mains voltage and protect it against being energized unintentionally.
Verify that the frequency inverter is discharged.
When the frequency inverter is disconnected from power supply, the mains, DC-link
voltage and motor terminals may still be live for some time. Wait for some minutes until
the DC link capacitors have discharged before starting to work at the unit.
Do not touch the terminals because the capacitors may still be charged.
If voltage supply is switched on, no covers of the frequency inverter may be removed.
After service, all covers must be installed and the terminals must be checked.
The frequency inverter complies with protection class IP20 only if the covers are mounted properly.
Avoid soiling during service work.
After service, make sure that no foreign particles (e.g. chips, dust, wires, screws, tools)
are inside the frequency inverter.
Do not touch electronic components or contacts. The frequency inverter is equipped
with components which are sensitive to electrostatic energy and can be damaged if
handled improperly.
Only use original spare parts.
10.2
Regular service work
Cleaning instructions
•
Use dry, oil-free air to remove dust.
•
Use appropriate air pressure for cleaning.
•
Do not use solvents for cleaning circuit boards.
•
Use antistatic materials for cleaning in order to avoid electrostatic charging.
Safety
271
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Service
BONFIGLIOLI recommends regular maintenance of the frequency inverter. Service periods depend on
the field of application and the ambient conditions.
Test/inspection
object
Case and
heat sink
Test/inspection and measure
•
Remove any soiling and dust.
•
Check screws for tight fit, tighten if necessary.
•
Check component for damage and replace, if necessary.
•
Remove any soiling and dust.
•
Check for unusual operating noise.
Door filter in electrical
cabinet
Environment
•
Clean or replace.
•
Check if ambient conditions meet specifications. See chapter 11.2
" Device data " .
Cooling
•
Check if frequency inverter or motor emits excessive heat or if components change their color. In this cases:
Fan
− Check for overload.
− Check heat sink and motor for soiling.
− Check ambient temperature.
Electrical cables
Check cable connections for safe connection.
•
Check cables for damage, color changes and heat impact.
•
Check cable insulation and shields for wear and tear.
•
Brake resistor
•
Replace damaged cables.
•
Check for color changes and heat impact. Check connection.
Test run after service
Check the frequency inverter in a test run (if possible).
Test/inspection
Error list and error
environment
Power supply
Output current
Vibration or unusual
noise of motor
Measure
Display error via operator panel or PC software VPlus. Eliminate cause of
error and acknowledge error.
See chapter 13.1 „Error list " .
Measure mains voltage. Note rated values on the rating plate of the frequency inverter.
Measure voltage of external DC 24 V supply (if installed). Specification: See
chapter 5.7.6 " External DC 24 V power supply " .
Measure output current. Check the drive system and the load behavior if
the output current is greater than the nominal value of the frequency inverter over extended periods.
Check the coupled load. Fix loose components.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
272
Regular service work
Service
10.3
Monitoring of service interval
During operation of electric drives, mechanical and electrical components are exposed to wear and
tear.
The service interval remaining until the next service (percentage of maintenance interval) of the following components can be monitored:
− DC-link of frequency inverter
− Fan of frequency inverter
1533 Maintenance Note
When the service interval until service has expired (value 0%), the frequency inverter can indicate
− via parameter Maintenance Note 1533 that maintenance is required or
− output a warning message
The behavior can be set up.
The service interval remaining until service can be displayed via parameters. Service is required as
soon as the remaining service interval until maintenance has expired (value 0%). It must also be
checked if the component must be replaced.
10.3.1 DC-link
Signalling when service is required
The DC-link of the frequency inverter is equipped with electrolyte capacitors. The service interval for
electrolyte capacitors is mainly defined by the temperature. In high temperatures the electrolytic liquid
will evaporate, which reduces the capacitance of the capacitor. The temperature inside the electrolyte
capacitor depends on two factors: the ambient temperature and the internal heating caused by current ripple. The temperature of the electrolyte capacitors is measured by a sensor, so that high ambient temperatures are taken into account for service interval calculation.
1534 Operation Mode Service Interval DC-link
Via parameter Operation Mode Service Interval DC-link 1534, you can set how the warning is to
occur when the remaining service interval until service has expired. The information can be indicated
in a parameter or a service message can be output.
Function
Operation Mode Service Interval DC-link 1534
0 - No Action
1-
Service Parameter
Message
2 - Alarm Message
The service interval remaining until service is monitored. The remaining service interval (in percent) can be indicated via parameter
Service Interval DC-link 1530. No service info or message is output.
The service interval remaining until service is monitored. The remaining service interval (in percent) can be indicated via parameter
Service Interval DC-link 1530. As soon as the remaining time until
service has expired, parameter Maintenance Note 1533 will show
the message " M0001 Service DC-Link " . Factory setting.
The service interval remaining until service is monitored. The remaining service interval (in percent) can be indicated via parameter
Service Interval DC-link 1530. As soon as the time remaining until
service has expired:
− Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 will show the message
" M0001 Service DC-Link " .
− A warning message will be output and a warning signal will be
set. The warning will also be displayed on the operator panel.
Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 displays message " M0000 " if the remaining service interval until
service of the DC-link has not elapsed and no service is required.
Monitoring of service interval
273
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Service
Warning signal
Expiry of the time remaining until service is signaled.
264 -
Warning service
50 - DC-link
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the
parameters 531, 532, 533, or 554.
See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
Operation Mode Service Interval DC-link 1534 must be set to " 2 - Warning " .
Time remaining until next service
1530 Service Interval DC-link
Parameter Service Interval DC-link 1530 indicates the service interval remaining until next service in
percent. If a value of 0% is displayed, service is recommended. It should also be checked if the component must be replaced.
High ambient temperature and frequency inverter is not in operation:
Even with the frequency inverter switched off, the electrolyte capacitors may age due
to high ambient temperatures. The times at which the frequency inverter is switched
off are not considered in the calculation of the time remaining until next service. As a
result, the indicated service interval until next service may be too long.
The remaining service interval until service is an estimated value.
The remaining service interval until service (parameter Service Interval DC-link 1530) can be set to
100% if setting " 1 - DC-link " is selected for parameter Reset Service Intervals 1539.
10.3.2 Fan
Signalling when service is required
The service interval remaining until service of the fan largely depends on the wear and tear of the
bearing components. For this reason, the service interval remaining until service depends on the
speed and operating time of the fan. The service interval remaining until service is calculated from
these two values.
1535 Operation Mode Service Interval Fan
Via parameter Operation Mode Service Interval Fan 1535, you can set how the warning is to occur
when the remaining service interval until service has expired. The information can be indicated in a
parameter or a service message can be output.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
274
Monitoring of service interval
Service
Function
Operation Mode Service Interval Fan 1535
The service interval remaining until service is monitored. The remaining service interval until service can be indicated via parameter
Service Interval Fan 1531. No service info or message is output.
The service interval remaining until service is monitored. The remaining service interval until service can be indicated via parameter
Service Interval Fan 1531. As soon as the remaining time until
service has expired, parameter Maintenance Note 1533 will show
the message " M0002 Service fan " . Factory setting.
The service interval remaining until service is monitored. The remaining service interval until service can be indicated via parameter
Service Interval Fan 1531. As soon as the time remaining until
service has expired:
0 - No Action
1-
Service Parameter
Message
2 - Alarm Message
− Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 will show the message
" M0002 Service fan " .
− A warning message will be output and a warning signal will be
set. The warning will also be displayed on the operator panel.
Parameter Maintenance Note 1533 displays message " M0000 " if the remaining time until service of
the fan has not elapsed and no service is required.
Warning signal
Expiry of the time remaining until service is signaled.
265 -
Warning service
51 - fan
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the
parameters 531, 532, 533, or 554.
See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
Operation mode service interval fan 1534 must be set to " 2 - Warning " .
Service interval remaining until next service
1531 Service Interval Fan
Parameter Service Interval Fan 1531 indicates the service interval remaining until next service in
percent of maintenance interval. If a value of 0% is displayed, service is required. It should also be
checked if the component must be replaced.
The service interval remaining until service is an estimated value. The service interval
actually remaining until next service also depends on the ambient conditions, for example. As a result, the indicated service interval until next service may be too high.
Service the fan regularly. See chapter 10.2 " Regular service work " .
The service interval remaining until service (parameter Service Interval Fan 1531) can be set to
100% if setting " 2 - fan " is selected for parameter Reset Service Intervals 1539.
Monitoring of service interval
275
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Service
10.3.3
Reset service interval
1539 Reset Service Intervals
The remaining service interval until service (in percent) can be reset to the initial value via parameter
Reset Service Intervals 1539.
Reset Service Intervals 1539
0 - No Action
Reset Service Interval
1DC-Link
Reset Service Interval
2Fan
Operating Instructions Agile
Function
No service interval remaining until service is reset.
The service interval remaining until service of the DC-link is reset.
Parameter Service Interval DC-link 1530 indicates 100% again.
The service interval remaining until service of the fan is reset. Parameter Service Interval Fan 1531 indicates 100% again.
06/2013
276
Monitoring of service interval
Technical data
11 Technical data
This chapter contains the technical data of the Agile series.
11.1
General technical data
CE conformity
The frequency inverters Agile meet the requirements of the low voltage directive
2006/95/EEC and EN 61800-5-1.
EMC directive
For compliance with standard 2004/108/EC, comply with installation instructions
in this document.
Interference immunity
The frequency inverters Agile meet the requirements of EN 61800-3 for use in
industrial environments.
UL Approval
Devices that are marked with the UL proof label fulfill the requirements according
to UL508c.
Ambient temperature
Operation: 0…55 °C; as from 40 °C power reduction should be considered.
Environmental class Operation: 3K3 (EN60721-3-3),
maximum relative humidity 85%, no water condensation.
Degree of protection
IP20 if covers and connection terminals are used properly.
Altitude of installa- Up to 1000 m at rated specifications.
tion
Up to 3000 m at reduced power.
Storage
Storage according to EN 50178.
BONFIGLIOLI recommends that the unit be connected to mains voltage for 60
minutes after one year, at the latest.
Overload capacity
(oc)
Continuous operation 100% IN
Up to 150% IN for 60 s
Up to 200% IN for 1 s
Overload capacity can be used every 10 minutes.
Functions
− Control methods adjusted to motors and application (configuration)
− Adjustable speed/torque control
− Various protection functions for motor and frequency inverter
− Positioning relative to a reference point
− Flying Start function
− S-ramps for jerk limitation during acceleration and deceleration
− PID controller (technology controller)
− Parameterizable Master-Slave operation via system bus
− Error memory
− Simplified and extended control via PC (commissioning, parameterization, data
set backup, diagnosis with Scope)
− Energy saving function
− Automatic service messages
− Self-learning controllers
− Communication: System bus, CANopen®, Modbus and VABus. Profibus with
optional communication module.
Parameterization
− Freely programmable digital inputs and outputs
− PLC functions, can be realized via table functions or a graphical PC user interface
− Four separate data sets incl. motor parameter
− Pre-defined motor data BONFIGLIOLI motors
General technical data
277
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Technical data
11.2
Device data
This chapter contains the Technical data of the different sizes of the Agile series.
General are valid for AGL202 and AGL402 devices are the following characteristics:
Output motor side
Output voltage
U
V
Maximum value of input voltage, three-phase
Protection
Short circuit proof and earth fault proof
Rotary field frequency
f
Hz
0 ... 1000, depending on switching frequency
Integrated brake chopper
yes
Input mains side
Mains configuration
TT, TN, IT
AGL202: 230 (-20 %) … 240 (+10 %)
Mains voltage range
U
V
AGL402: 380 (-15%) … 480 (+10%)
Mains frequency
f
Hz
45 ... 69
Overvoltage category
EN 50178 III, EN 61800-5-1 III
Ambient conditions
0 ... 40 (EN 60721-3-3),
Cooling agent temperature (air)
Tn
°C
40 … 55 with power reduction (derating)
Storage temperature
TL
°C
-25 ... 55
Transport temperature
TT
°C
-25 ... 70
Operation: maximum 85
Relative air humidity
%
non-condensing
Storage:
5 … 95
AGL202 devices in the sizes 1 to 3 can be operated either with single phase or three
phase connection. In single pase operation a lower power compared to three phase
operation is available. The type codes correlate to the three phase power.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
278
Device data
Technical data
11.2.1
AGL202 (3~:0.18 to 0.55 kW, 1~:0.09 to 0.25 kW, 230 V)
Type
230 V
Agile 202
-01
Size
Output motor side
Selected Mains supply
Recommended
P
kW
motor shaft power
Output current
I
A
Long-term
I
A
overload current (60 s)
Short-time
I
A
overload current (1 s)
Switching frequency
f
kHz
Output, brake resistor
Minimum brake resistor
R
Ω
Recommended brake resistor
R
Ω
(385 V)
Input mains side
Rated current
I
A
Maximum mains current 1)
I
A
Fuses
I
A
Fuses UL type
I
A
Mechanics
HxWxD mm
Dimensions 2)
Weight (approx.)
m
kg
Degree of protection
Terminals
A
Installation
Interior fan
Heat sink fan
Ambient conditions
Power dissipation (2 kHz
switching frequency)
P
-02
-03
-05
1
1ph
3ph
1ph
3ph
1ph
3ph
1ph
3ph
0.09
0.18
0.12
0.25
0.18
0.37
0.25
0.55
0.8
1.3
1.0
1.5
1.3
2.0
1.5
3.0
1.2
2
1.5
2.25
1.95
3.0
2.25
4.5
1.6
2.6
2.0
3
2.6
4.0
3.0
6.0
2, 4, 8, 16
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
300
220
250
200
220
140
200
100
1.7
2.5
6
1.2
2.2
6
1.9
1.4
2.5
2.0
2.9
2.5
3.6
3.3
6
6
6
6
Bussmann FWP-10A14Fa
3.0
4.2
6
2.5
4.0
6
200 x 60 x 170
1.1
IP20 (EN60529)
0.2 … 4 (flexible with sleeve)
0.2 … 6 (rigid)
Mains and motor
terminals:
mm
Terminals relay out0.1 … 1.5
put:
vertical
no
no
2
W
12
12
19
19
29
29
42
42
1) According to DIN EN 61800-5-1.
2) Dimensions of the basic device. Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4.2
“Installation” for the standard assembly and chapter 12.9 “Assembly variants”.
Device data
279
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Technical data
11.2.2 AGL202 (3~:0.75 to 2.2 kW, 1~:0.37 to 1.1 kW, 230 V)
Type
230 V
Agile 202
-07
Size
Output motor side
Selected Mains supply
Recommended
P
kW
motor shaft power
Output current
I
A
Long-term
I
A
overload current (60 s)
Short-time
I
A
overload current (1 s)
Switching frequency
f
kHz
Output, brake resistor
Minimum brake resistor
R
Ω
Recommended brake resistor
R
Ω
(385 V)
Input mains side
Rated current
I
A
Maximum mains current 1)
I
A
Fuses
I
A
Fuses UL type
I
A
Mechanics
HxWxD mm
Dimensions 2)
Weight (approx.)
m
kg
Degree of protection
Terminals
A
Installation
Interior fan
Heat sink fan
Ambient conditions
Power dissipation (2 kHz
switching frequency)
P
-09
-11
-13
1
1ph
3ph
1ph
3ph
1ph
3ph
1ph
3ph
0.37
0.75
0.55
1.1
0.75
1.5
1.1
2.2
2.0
3.5
3.0
5.0
3.5
6.0
5.0
9.0
3.0
5.25
4.5
7.5
5.25
9.0
7.5
13.5
4.0
7.0
6.0
10
7.0
12.0
10.0
18.0
2, 4, 8, 16
100
100
100
100
37
37
37
37
100
100
100
100
92
63
70
41
4.2
5.5
6
3.4
5.1
6
5.3
4.9
7.6
6.5
6.9
6.7
11.4 10.8
6
6
10
10
Bussmann FWP-10A14Fa
11.2
15.5
16
9.5
14.5
16
200 x 60 x 170
1.1
IP20 (EN60529)
0.2 … 4 (flexible with sleeve)
0.2 … 6 (rigid)
Mains and motor
terminals:
mm
Terminals relay out0.1 … 1.5
put:
vertical
no
yes
2
W
53
53
70
70
89
89
122
122
1) According to DIN EN 61800-5-1.
2) Dimensions of the basic device. Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4.2
“Installation” for the standard assembly and chapter 12.9 “Assembly variants”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
280
Device data
Technical data
11.2.3 AGL202 (3~:3.0 to 4.0 kW, 1~:1.5 to 2.2 kW, 230 V)
Type
230 V
Agile 202
-15
Size
Output motor side
Selected Mains supply
Recommended
P
kW
motor shaft power
Output current
I
A
Long-term
I
A
overload current (60 s)
Short-time
I
A
overload current (1 s)
Switching frequency
f
kHz
Output, brake resistor
Minimum brake resistor
R
Ω
Recommended brake resistor
R
Ω
(385 V)
Input mains side
Rated current
I
A
Maximum mains current 1)
I
A
Fuses
I
A
Fuses UL type
I
A
Mechanics
HxWxD mm
Dimensions 2)
Weight (approx.)
m
kg
Degree of protection
Terminals
A
Installation
Interior fan
Heat sink fan
Ambient conditions
Power dissipation (2 kHz
switching frequency)
P
-18
2
1ph
3ph
1ph
3ph
1.5
3.0
2.2
4.0
6.0
12.0
9.0
15.0
9.0
18.0
13.5
22.5
12.0
24.0
18.0
30.0
2, 4, 8, 16
18.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
72
37
41
27
14.2
20.6
16
12.5
19.5
18.5
28.0
16
25
Bussmann FWP-20A14Fa
17.0
25.5
25
200 x 80 x 196
1.5
IP20 (EN60529)
0.2 … 4 (flexible with sleeve)
0.2 … 6 (rigid)
Mains and motor
terminals:
mm
Terminals relay out0.1 … 1.5
put:
vertical
yes
yes
2
W
133
133
167
167
1) According to DIN EN 61800-5-1.
2) Dimensions of the basic device. Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4.2
“Installation” for the standard assembly and chapter 12.9 “Assembly variants”.
Device data
281
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Technical data
11.2.4
AGL202 (3~:5.5 to 7.5 kW, 1~:3.0 kW, 230 V)
Typ
230 V
Agile 202
-19
Size
Output motor side
Selected Mains supply
Recommended
P
kW
motor shaft power
Output current
I
A
Long-term
I
A
overload current (60 s)
Short-time
I
A
overload current (1 s)
Switching frequency
f
kHz
Output, brake resistor
Minimum brake resistor
R
Ω
Recommended brake resistor
R
Ω
(385 V)
Input mains side
Rated current
I
A
Maximum mains current 1)
I
A
Fuses
I
A
Fuses UL type
I
A
Mechanics
HxWxD mm
Dimensions 2)
Weight (approx.)
m
kg
Degree of protection
Terminals
A
Installation
Interior fan
Heat sink fan
Ambient conditions
Power dissipation (2 kHz
switching frequency)
P
-21
3
1ph
3ph
1ph
3ph
3.0
5.5
3.0
7.5
12.0
21.0
12.0
26.0
18.0
31.5
18.0
39.0
24.0
42.0
24.0
44.0
2, 4, 8, 16
18.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
32
19
32
18.5
26.7
40.0
35
22.5
26.7
33.0
40.0
35
35
Bussmann FWP-30A14Fa
30.0
41.5
35
200 x 125 x 205
3
IP20 (EN60529)
0.2 … 4 (flexible with sleeve)
0.2 … 6 (rigid)
Mains and motor
terminals:
mm
Terminals relay out0.1 … 1.5
put:
vertical
yes
yes
2
W
235
235
235
321
1) According to DIN EN 61800-5-1.
2) Dimensions of the basic device. Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4.2
“Installation” for the standard assembly and chapter 12.9 “Assembly variants”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
282
Device data
Technical data
11.2.5
AGL402 (0.25 to 2.2 kW)
Type
Agile 402
-02
-03
400 V, 3-phase
-05
-07
-09
1
-11
-13
Size
Output motor side
Recommended motor shaft power
P
kW 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
Output current
I
A
0.8
1.2
1.5
2.1
3.0
4.0
5.5
Long-term overload current (60 s)
I
A
1.2
1.8
2.25 3.15
4.5
6.0
8.2
Short-time overload current (1 s)
I
A
1.6
2.4
3.0
4.2
6.0
8.0
11.0
Switching frequency
f
kHz
2, 4, 8, 16
Output, brake resistor
Minimum brake resistor
R
Ω
300
300
300
300
300
220
220
Recommended brake resistor
R
Ω 2432 1594 930
634
462
300
220
(770 V)
Input mains side
Rated current
I
A
0.8
1.2
1.8
2.4
2.8
3.3
5.8
Maximum mains current 1)
I
A
1.1
1.5
2.0
2.7
3.9
5.2
7.3
Fuses
I
A
6
6
6
6
6
6
10
Fuses UL type
I
A
Bussmann FWP-10A14Fa
Mechanics
HxWxD mm
Dimensions 2)
200 x 60 x 170
Weight (approx.)
m
kg
1.1
Degree of protection
IP20 (EN60529)
Mains and motor ter- 0.2 … 4 (flexible with sleeve)
minals:
0.2 … 6 (rigid)
Terminals
A
mm2
Terminals relay out0.1 … 1.5
put:
Installation
vertical
Interior fan
no
Heat sink fan
no
Yes
Ambient conditions
Power dissipation (2 kHz switchP
W
19
29
42
53
70
89
122
ing frequency)
1) According to DIN EN 61800-5-1.
2) Dimensions of the basic device. Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4.2
“Installation” for the standard assembly and chapter 12.9 “Assembly variants”.
Device data
283
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Technical data
11.2.6
AGL402 (3.0 to 11.0 kW)
Type
Agile 402
-15
Size
Output motor side
Recommended motor shaft power
Output current
Long-term overload current (60 s)
Short-time overload current (1 s)
Switching frequency
Output, brake resistor
Minimum brake resistor
Recommended brake resistor
(770 V)
Input mains side
Rated current
Maximum mains current 1)
Fuses
Fuses UL type
Mechanics
Dimensions 2)
Weight (approx.)
Degree of protection
-19
4,0
9,5
14,2
19,0
5,5
12,0
18,0
24,0
400 V, 3-phase
-19
-21
-22
-23
9,2
20,0
30,0
40,0
11,0
23,0
34,5
43,0
3
P
I
I
I
f
kW
A
A
A
kHz
R
Ω
106 106 106
48
48
48
48
R
Ω
148 106 106
80
58
48
48
I
I
I
A
A
A
14,2
17,2
16
I
A
6,8 7,8 13,8
9,8 12,8 17,2
10 10
16
Bussmann
FWP-20A14Fa
HxWxD mm
m
-
Terminals
A
Installation
Interior fan
Heat sink fan
Ambient conditions
Power dissipation (2 kHz switching frequency)
P
3,0
7,5
11,2
15,0
-18
2
5,5
7,5
13,0
17,0
19,5
25,5
26,0
34,0
2, 4, 8, 16
15,8
20,0
23,0
28,1
25
25
Bussmann
FWP-30A14Fa
26,0
33,6
35
200 x 125 x 205
3
IP20 (EN60529)
Mains and motor ter- 0.2 … 4 (flexible with sleeve)
minals:
0.2 … 6 (rigid)
mm2
Terminals relay out0.1 … 1.5
put:
vertical
yes
yes
kg
-
W
200 x 80 x 196
1,5
133 167 230
235
321
393
470
1) According to DIN EN 61800-5-1.
2) Dimensions of the basic device. Comply with the notes of the assembly variants in chapter 4.2
“Installation” for the standard assembly and chapter 12.9 “Assembly variants”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
284
Device data
Technical data
11.2.7
Increase of switching frequency
Increasing the switching frequency is permissible if the output current is reduced. Comply with the
applicable standards and regulations for this operating point. The specified output currents are the
maximum values for continuous operation.
230 V devices:
Frequency inverter
Type
-01
-02
-03
-05
-07
-09
-11
-13
-15
-18
-19
-21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
Nominal Power
[kW]
1phase 3phase
0.09
0.18
0.12
0.25
0.18
0.37
0.25
0.55
0.37
0.75
0.55
1.1
0.75
1.5
1.1
2.2
1.5
3.0
2.2
4.0
3.0
5.5
3.0
7.5
Output current
Switching frequency.
1phase Operation
2 kHz
4 kHz
8 kHz
0.8 A
1.0 A
1.3 A
1.5 A
2.0 A
3.0 A
3.5 A
5.0 A
6.0 A
9.0 A
12.0 A
12.0 A
0.8 A
1.0 A
1.3 A
1.5 A
2.0 A
3.0 A
3.5 A
5.0 A
6.0 A
9.0 A
12.0 A
12.0 A
0.8 A
1.0 A
1.3 A
1.5 A
2.0 A
3.0 A
3.5 A
5.0 A
6.0 A
9.0 A
12.0 A
12.0 A
Switching frequency.
3phase Operation
16 kHz
0.5
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.3
2.0
2.3
3.3
4.0
6.0
8.0
8.0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
2 kHz
4 kHz
8 kHz
16 kHz
1.3
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.5
5.0
6.0
9.0
12.0
15.0
21.0
26.0
1.3
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.5
5.0
6.0
9.0
12.0
15.0
21.0
26.0
1.3
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.5
5.0
6.0
9.0
12.0
15.0
21.0
26.0
0.9A
1.0 A
1.3 A
2.0 A
2.3 A
3.3 A
4.0 A
6.0 A
8.0 A
10.0 A
14.0 A
17.3 A
400 V devices:
Frequency inverter
Type Type
-02 1 0.25
-03 1 0.37
-05 1 0.55
-07 1 0.75
-09 1 1.1
-11 1 1.5
-13 1 2.2
-15 2 3.0
-18 2 4.0
-19 2 5.5
-19 3 5.5
-21 3 7.5
-22 3 9.2
-23 3 11.0
1)
Output current
Switching frequency
2 kHz
4 kHz
8 kHz
0.8 A
0.8 A
0.8 A
1.2 A
1.2 A
1.2 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
2.1 A
2.1 A
2.1 A
3.0 A
3.0 A
3.0 A1)
4.0 A
4.0 A
4.0 A
5.5 A
5.5 A
5.5 A1)
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
9.5 A
9.5 A
9.5 A1)
12.0 A
12.0 A
12.0 A1)
13.0 A
13.0 A
13.0 A
17.0 A
17.0 A
17.0 A
20.0 A
20.0 A
20.0 A
23.0 A
23.0 A
23.0 A1)
16 kHz
0.5 A
0.8 A
1.0 A
1.4 A
2.0 A1)
2.7 A
3.7 A1)
5.0 A
6.3 A1)
8.0 A1)
8.7 A
11.4 A
13.4 A
15.4 A1)
Reduction of switching frequency in thermal limit range.
Device data
285
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Technical data
11.3
Control electronics
Voltage output DC 24 V
Terminals
Maximum output current
Voltage output DC 10 V
Terminal
Maximum output current
Minimum output current
Voltage input DC 24 V
Terminal
Input for external power supply.
Input voltage range
Rated input current
Input peak current
External fuse
Safety
Digital inputs
Terminals
X11.1 (DC +24 V), X11.2 (DC 0 V)
DC 100 mA
X13.4
DC 8.2 mA
DC 2.3 mA 1
2
X13.1 (DC 24 V), X13.2 (DC 0 V)
DC 24 V ±10%
Max. DC 1.0 A (typically DC 0.45 A)
Typically & lt; DC 15 A (max. 100 µs)
Standard fuse elements for rated current, characteristic: slow
Safety extra low voltage SELV according to EN 61800-5-1
X11.4, X11.5, X12.1, X12.2
PNP High: DC 15…24…30 V
Low: DC 0…5
Signal level
NPN High: DC 0…5
V
Low: DC 15…24…30
Maximum input voltage
DC 30 V (DC 6 mA at DC 24 V)
Input resistance
3.9 kΩ
Response time
2 ms
Other properties
PLC compatible
Digital inputs for enable and safety function STO
Terminals
X11.3, X13.3
Signal level
Low:
DC 0 … 3 V
High: DC 15 … 30 V
Maximum input voltage
DC 30 V (DC 10 mA at DC 24 V)
Input resistance
1.8 kΩ
Response time
Enable is activated 10 ms after triggering.
Digital output
Terminal
X13.5
Output voltage
DC 22 V (DC 15 … 28 V)
Maximum output current
DC 100 mA 3
Other properties
Overload and short-circuit proof, overvoltage-protected
1
2
3
V
V
Depending on value at 24 VDC voltage input.
Connect ground (GND) of external power supply to terminal X13.2 (GND).
The value is reduced if additional control outputs are used.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
286
Control electronics
Technical data
Digital input/output
Terminal
Digital Input
Signal level
X11.6
PNP High: DC 15…24…30 V Low: DC 0…5
V
NPN High: DC 0…5
V Low: DC 15…24…30 V
DC 30 V (DC 6 mA at 24 V)
3.9 kΩ
2 ms
PLC compatible
Maximum input voltage
Input resistance
Response time
Other properties
Digital output
Output voltage
DC 24 V (DC 15 … 30 V**)
Maximum output current
DC 100 mA*
Other properties
Overload and short-circuit proof, overvoltage-protected
Multifunction inputs (digital/analog input)
Terminal
X12.3, X12.4
Digital Input
High: DC 15…24…30
Low: DC 0…5
PNP
V
V
(digital)
(digital)
Signal level
High: DC 0…5
Low: DC 15…24…30
NPN
V
V
(digital)
(digital)
Maximum input voltage
DC 30 V (DC 6 mA at DC 24 V)
Input resistance
3.9 kΩ
Response time
2 ms
Other properties
PLC compatible
Voltage input (analog)
Input voltage
DC 0 … 10 V
Input resistance
78 kΩ
Resolution
10 Bit
Current input (analog)
Input current
DC 0 … 20 mA
Input resistance
250 Ω
Resolution
9 Bit
Multifunction output (digital/analog/frequency/pulse train output)
Terminal
X13.6
Digital output
Output voltage
DC 24 V (DC 15 … 30 V**)
Maximum output current
DC 100 mA
Other properties
Overload and short-circuit proof, overvoltage-protected
Analog output (PWM)
Output voltage
DC 24 V (DC 15 … 30 V**)
Maximum output current
DC 100 mA*
Other properties
Pulse-width modulated signal fPWM = 126 Hz
Frequency output
Output voltage
DC 24 V (15 … 30 V**)
Maximum output current
DC 100 mA
Maximum output frequency
150 kHz
Other properties
Pulse train output
Output voltage
DC 24 V
Maximum output current
DC 100 mA*
Maximum output frequency
150 kHz
*
**
The maximum output current of an output of 100 mA is reduced if additional control outputs are used.
Dependent on the voltage supply of the control unit and the connected load on the different outputs. Maximum guaranteed value: 15 VDC.
Control electronics
287
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Technical data
Relay output (floating changeover contact)
Terminal
X10
make
AC 240 V/5 A, DC 24 V/5 A (ohmic)
contact:
Contact load capacity
break
AC 240 V/3 A, DC 24 V/1 A (ohmic)
contact:
Response time
40 ms
11.4
Operation diagrams
Installation height
The nominal values of the frequency inverter apply to installation altitudes up to 1000 meters above
sea level 1. If the installation altitude exceeds 1000 meters, the output power and cooling agent temperature (ambient temperature) must be reduced.
Reduction of output current
Power reduction (derating).
Above 1000 m: Reduction by 5%/1000 m.
Maximum altitude 3000 m.
Reduction of cooling agent temperature
Above 1000 m: Reduction by 3.3°C/1000 m.
Maximum cooling agent temperature 55 °C.
I [%]
T [°C]
100
55
52
48
95
90
0
1000
2000
3000
0
H [m]
Reduction of output current I depending on installation altitude H.
1
1000
2000
3000
H [m]
Reduction of cooling agent temperature T
depending on installation altitude H.
NN: sea level
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
288
Operation diagrams
Technical data
Temperature
The nominal values of the frequency inverter apply to a cooling agent temperature between 0 and
40 °C (ambient temperature).
Reduction of output current
Power reduction (derating).
Above 40 °C: Reduction by 2.5%/K; Tmax = 55 °C
I [%]
100
80
63
40
20
0
10
20
30
40
50
T [°C]
55
Reduction of output current I depending on cooling agent temperature T.
Mains voltage
Reduction of output current (Derating) at constant output power
Above 400 V: 0.22%/V, Umax = 480 V
I [%]
100
82
0
0
400
420
440
460
480
U [V]
Reduction of output current I depending on output voltage U (= mains voltage).
Operation diagrams
289
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12
Options
BONFIGLIOLI provides optional components for mechanical and electrical installation, commissioning
and communication.
12.1
Safety
WARNING
To avoid serious physical injury or considerable damage to property, only qualified staff
may work on the device.
The electrical installation must be carried out by qualified electricians according to the
general and regional safety and installation directives.
12.2
Shield sheets
With an optional shield sheet an EMC conform cabling can be effected. Shield sheets for control cables
and shield sheets for motor cables are available for each construction size.
12.2.1 Shield sheet for control cables
With an optional shield sheet, the shields of control and communication cables can be connected to PE
potential. The shield sheet offers three ways of shielding the cables: by means of shielding clamp,
shielding connector or shielding connection clamp.
Assembly
Fix the shield sheet:
•
Operating Instructions Agile
Remove the lower cover.
06/2013
290
Safety
Options
•
•
Push the shield sheet from the bottom into the frequency inverter
housing completely.
•
Tighten the screw. Maximum tightening torque: 3 Nm.
•
Shield sheets
Loosen the lower screw slightly (don't turn out completely).
Fix the lower cover.
291
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.2.1.1
Dimensions
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
292
Shield sheets
Options
12.2.2
Shield sheet for motor cables
With an optional shield sheet, the shield of the motor cable can be connected to PE potential.
12.2.2.1
Size 1 and 2 (3~: 0.18 kW to 5.5 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 2.2 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
-15 2
-18 2
-19 2
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
--
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
--
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
-0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
•
3
Shield sheets
2
Assemble the shield sheet (1) together
with the fixing bracket (2) onto the
mounting plate (3).
1
293
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.2.2.2
Size 3 (3~: 5.5 kW to 11.0 kW; 1~: 3kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Agile 202
Mains supply
1ph.
3ph.
Power
kW
kW
-19 3
3
5.5
-21 3
3
7.5
-22 3
---23 3
---
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
5.5
7.5
9.2
11
•
Assemble the shield sheet (1) together with the fixing bracket (2) onto the
mounting plate (3).
2
1
3
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
294
Shield sheets
Options
12.3
Brake resistor
The brake resistors convert the regenerative energy into heat when the drive is braking.
The resistor must be selected according to the duty cycle and braking power.
Mains
voltage
V
230
230
230
230
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
Typ3
Resistor
Value
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
Brake resistor
160/100
432/37
667/24
1332/12
213/300
471/136
696/92
1330/48
2000/32
4000/16
8000/7
Ω
100
37
24
12
300
136
92
48
32
16
7,5
Rated power
Continuous power
kW
1,6
4,3
6,6
13,3
2,1
4,7
6,9
13,3
20
40
80
W
160
432
667
1332
213
471
696
1330
2000
4000
8000
295
Maximum
permissible operating
voltage
V
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
900
06/2013
Integrated
thermal protection
Optional
Optional
Ja
Ja
Optional
Optional
Ja
Ja
Ja
Ja
Ja
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.3.1
230 V devices
The following table shows the cross reference of brake resistors, that can be used for a majority of
applications.
The column “Percentage duty cycle” shows, how long inside a duty cycle the brake resistor can be
operated with nominal power.
Frequency inverter
Type
Agile 202
-01
-02
-03
-05
-07
-09
-11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-13 1
-15 2
-18 2
-19 3
-21 3
1ph.
kW
0,09
0,12
0,18
0,25
0,37
0,55
0,75
1,1
-1,5
2,2
3,0
3,0
--
3ph.
kW
0,18
0,25
0,37
0,55
0,75
1,1
1,5
-2,2
3,0
4,0
5,5
-7,5
Recommended
brake resistor
Type
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
2x
160/100
160/100
160/100
160/100
160/100
160/100
432/37
432/37
432/37
432/37
432/37
667/24
667/24
BR 432/371)
Power at percentage duty cycle,
cycle time 120 s
Percentage duty cycle
% (1ph.)
% (3ph.)
100
89
100
64
89
43
64
29
43
21
29
15
57
29
39
--20
29
14
20
11
22
12
22
--11
1) 2x BR432/37 parallel
For the connection of a brake resistor refer to chapter 5.6.5 “Brake resistor”.
12.3.2
400 V devices
The following table shows the cross reference of brake resistors, that can be used for a majority of
applications.
The column “Percentage duty cycle” shows, how long inside a duty cycle the brake resistor can be
operated with nominal power.
Frequency inverter
Type
Agile 402
-02
-03
-05
-07
-09
-11
-13
-15
-18
-19
-19
-21
-22
-23
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
kW
0,25
0,37
0,55
0,75
1,1
1,5
2,2
3,0
4,0
5,5
5,5
7,5
9,2
11
Recommended
brake resistor
Type
BR 213/300
BR 213/300
BR 213/300
BR 213/300
BR 213/300
BR 213/300
BR 213/300
BR 213/300
BR 471/136
BR 471/136
BR 471/1361)
BR 1330/48
BR 1330/48
BR 1330/48
BR 1330/48
Power at percentage duty cycle,
cycle time 120 s
Percentage duty cycle
%
85
58
39
28
19
14
10
16
12
9
24
18
14
12
1) the maximum breaking power of this combination is limited to 4,4kW
For the connection of a brake resistor refer to chapter 5.6.5 “Brake resistor”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
296
Brake resistor
Options
12.4
Line choke
Line chokes reduce mains harmonics and reactive power.
The line choke must be installed between mains connection and input filter.
In chapter 11.2 “Device data” the devices, that require a line choke, are marked.
1: Line choke
2: Input filter
12.4.1 1x230 V connection
Frequency inverter
1phase operation
Type
Agile 202
kW
-01
0.09
-02
0.12
-03
0.18
-05
0.25
-07
0.37
-09
0.55
-11
0.75
-13
1.1
-15
1.5
-18
2.2
-19
3.0
-21
3.0
Recommended line choke
Type
Rated current
Power dissipation
A
W
LCVS006
6
8
LCVS008
8
8
LCVS015
15
12
LCVS018 (*)
18
On request
On request
15
(*) Usage allowed using the maximum continous line current of 18 A.
Line choke
297
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.4.2
230 V connection
Frequency inverter
3phase operation
Typ
Agile 202
kW
-01 1
0.18
-02 1
0.25
-03 1
0.37
-05 1
0.55
-07 1
0.75
-09 1
1.1
-11 1
1.5
-13 1
2.2
-15 2
3.0
-18 2
4.0
-19 3
5.5
-21 3
7.5
12.4.3
Typ
-02
-03
-05
-07
-09
-11
-13
-15
-18
-19
-19
-21
-22
-23
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
Rated current
Inductance
Power dissipation
A
mH
W
LCVT004
4
7.32
20
LCVT006
LCVT008
LCVT010
LCVT015
LCVT018
LCVT025
LCVT034
6
8
10
15
18
25
34
4.88
3.66
2.93
1.95
1.63
1.17
0.86
25
30
30
45
70
70
85
Inductance
Power dissipation
A
mH
W
LCVT004
4
7.32
20
LCVT006
LCVT008
LCVT010
LCVT015
LCVT015
LCVT018
LCVT025
LCVT034
6
8
10
15
15
18
25
34
4.88
3.66
2.93
1.95
1.95
1.63
1.17
0.86
25
30
30
45
45
70
70
85
3x400 V connection
Frequency inverter
Agile 402
Recommended line choke
Typ
kW
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
5.5
7.5
9.2
11
Recommended line choke
Typ
Operating Instructions Agile
Rated current
06/2013
298
Line choke
Options
12.4.4
Dimensions
LCVS006 … LCVS018
Type
LCVS006
LCVS008
LCVS010
LCVS015
LCVS018
Type
LCVT004
LCVT006
LCVT008
LCVT010
LCVT015
LCVT018
LCVT025
LCVT034
Line choke
Dimensions
a
b
c
mm mm mm
60
62
75
60
67
75
66
80
70
78
78
80
85
85
95
Dimensions
a
b
c
mm mm mm
80
65
95
100
65
115
100
75
115
100
75
115
125
85
135
155
90
135
155 100 160
155 100 190
Assembly
n2
n1
d
mm mm mm
44
38
3,6
44
43
3,6
50
51
4,8
56
49
4,8
64
50
4,8
n2
mm
55
60
60
60
100
130
130
130
Assembly
n1
d
mm mm
37
4
39
4
48
4
48
4
55
5
57
8
57
8
57
8
299
Weight
Connection
kg
0,5
0,6
0,8
1,1
1,8
mm
0,75 … 2,5
0,75 … 2,5
0,75 … 2,5
0,75 … 4,0
0,75 … 4,0
Weight
kg
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.5
3.0
4.0
4.0
4.5
Nm
1,0 … 1,2
1,0 … 1,2
1,0 … 1,2
1,5 … 1,8
1,5 … 1,8
PE
2,5 mm2
2,5 mm2
M4
M4
M4
Connection
mm
0.75 … 2.5
0.75 … 2.5
0.75 … 2.5
0.75 … 2.5
0.75 … 4.0
0.75 … 4.0
0.75 … 10
2.5 … 16
06/2013
Nm
1.0 … 1.2
1.0 … 1.2
1.0 … 1.2
1.0 … 1.2
1.5 … 1.8
1.5 … 1.8
4.0 … 4.5
2.0 … 4.0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
PE
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
M5
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.5
Input filter
Input filters damp the conducted radio-frequency interference voltage.
The filter must be installed upstream on mains input side of the frequency inverter.
1: Line choke
2: Input filter
Circuit diagram of input filter (schematic)
12.5.1
Footprint filter
The filter can be installed below the frequency inverter or next to the frequency inverter onto the
mounting plate.
Frequency inverter
Agile 402
kW
Size
0.25 … 2.2
1
3.0 … 4.0
2
5.5 … 11.0
3
Operating Instructions Agile
Recommended Filter
Type (Order code)
FTV001B-AGL
FTV002B-AGL
FTV003B-AGL
06/2013
300
Product Code (Type Plate)
FS28364-8-07
FS28364-10-07
FS28364-26-07
Input filter
Options
Filter
Rated
current
Rated voltage
Type
A
V
FTV001B-AGL
8
3x480/275
FTV002B-AGL
10
3x480/275
FTV003B-AGL
26
3x480/275
Safety terminal block: Flex wire AWG 10,
Operating
frequency
Operational
leakage
current
Hz
mA
50/60 Hz
3.5
50/60 Hz
3.5
50/60 Hz
3.5
Flex wire 4 mm2, Solid wire
Operational
temperature
range
°C
-25 … 100
-25 … 100
-25 … 100
6 mm2
Weight
kg
0.9
1.1
1.7
Dimensions
FTV001B-AGL
L1
L2
L3
L 2'
L 1'
FTV002B-AGL
L1
L2
L3
L 1'
'
2
L
L 3'
L 3'
'
1
L
L 2'
Input filter
301
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
FTV003B-AGL
L1
L2
L3
L 1'
'
2
L
L 3'
L 3'
'
1
L
L 2'
12.5.2
Booktype filter
The filter can be installed next to the frequency inverter onto the mounting plate. The connection
terminal consists of a safety terminal block.
Frequency inverter
kW
Size
0.25 … 2.2
1
3.0 … 4.0
2
5.5 … 7.5
3
9.2 … 11.0
3
Filter
Rated
current
Type
A
FTV007A
7
FTV016A
16
FTV030A
30
1)
At 25 °C, 50 Hz.
Recommended filter
Type
FTV007A
FTV016A
FTV016A
FTV030A
Rated
voltage
Operating
frequency
V
3x480
3x480
3x480
Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Operational
leakage current
mA
33
33
33
302
Operational
temperature
range
°C
-25 … 100
-25 … 100
-25 … 100
Power
loss 1)
Weight
W
3.8
6.1
11.8
kg
0.5
0.8
1.2
Input filter
Options
Dimensions
FTV007A
FTV016A
FTV030A
A
190
250
270
B
40
45
50
C
70
70
85
D
160
220
240
E
180
235
255
F
20
25
30
G
4.5
5.4
5.4
H
1
1
1
I1
10.6
10.6
12.6
I2
22
22
25
J
M5
M5
M5
K
20
22.5
25
L1
31
31
40
L2
29.5
29.5
39.5
Filter input/output connector cross sections
-33
-44
16 mm²
10 mm²
Solid wire
10 mm²
6 mm²
Flex wire
AWG 6
AWG 8
AWG type wire
1.5 – 1.8 Nm
1.5 – 1.8 Nm
Recommended torque
12.5.3
Interference suppression class
The emitted interference of the Agile devices was measured with typical setups. With the complied
limit values, the Agile devices can be used with shielded motor cables in industrial and residential
environments. Using main chokes or filters reduce the emitted interference of the devices.
12.5.3.1
AC 3x400 V
Interference suppression class Agile size 1
Installation measure
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Agile 1
Class C3
Without EMC input filter, with line choke
Class C3
With footprint filter FS28364-8-07
Class C1
With footprint filter FS28364-8-07 and line choke upstream on mains
input side
With booktype filter FTV007A
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV007A and line choke upstream on mains input
side
Class C1
Class C1
Interference suppression class Agile size 2
Installation measure
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Agile 2
Class C3
Without EMC input filter, with line choke 10 A
Class C3
With footprint filter FS28364-10-44
Class C1
With footprint filter FS28364-10-44 and line choke 10 A upstream on
mains input side
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV016A
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV016A and line choke 10 A upstream on mains
input side
Class C1
Input filter
303
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
Interference suppression class Agile size 3, AGL 402-19 (5.5 kW), AGL 402-21 (7.5 kW)
Installation measure
Agile 3
AGL402-19 (5.5 kW)
AGL402-21 (7.5 kW)
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Without EMC input filter, with line choke 15 A or 25 A
Class C3
With footprint filter FTV003B-AGL
Class C1
With footprint filter FTV003B-AGL and line choke 25 A upstream on
mains input side
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV016A
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV016A and line choke 15 A upstream on mains
input side
Class C1
Interference suppression class Agile size 3, AGL 402-22 (9.2 kW)
Installation measure
Agile 3
AGL402-22 (9.2 kW)
-
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Without EMC input filter, with line choke 15 A or 25 A
Class C3
With footprint filter FTV003B-AGL
Class C1
With footprint filter FTV003B-AGL and line choke 25 A upstream on
mains input side
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV016A
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV016A und Netzdrossel vor dem Filter
Class C1
Interference suppression class Agile size 3, AGL 402-23 (11 kW)
Installation measure
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Agile 3
AGL402-23 (11 kW)
-
Without EMC input filter, with line choke 15 A or 25 A
Class C3
With footprint filter FTV003B-AGL
Class C1
With footprint filter FTV003B-AGL and line choke 25 A upstream on
mains input side
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV030A
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV030A and line choke 25 A upstream on mains
input side
Class C1
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
304
Input filter
Options
12.5.3.2
AC 3x230 V
Interference suppression class Agile size 1
Installation measure
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Agile 1
Class C3
Without EMC input filter, with line choke
Class C3
With footprint filter FS28364-8-07
Class C1
With footprint filter FS28364-8-07 and line choke upstream on mains
input side
With booktype filter FTV007A
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV007A and line choke upstream on mains input
side
Class C1
Class C1
Interference suppression class Agile size 2
Installation measure
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Agile 2
Class C3
Without EMC input filter, with line choke 10 A
With footprint filter FS28364-10-44
With footprint filter FS28364-10-44 and line choke 10 A upstream on
mains input side
On request
With booktype filter FTV016A
With booktype filter FTV016A and line choke 10 A upstream on mains
input side
Interference suppression class Agile size 3, AGL 202-19 (5.5 kW), AGL 202-21 (7.5 kW)
Installation measure
Agile 3
AGL202-19 (5.5 kW)
AGL202-21 (7.5 kW)
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Without EMC input filter, with line choke 15 A or 25 A
Class C3
With footprint filter FTV003B-AGL
Class C1
With footprint filter FTV003B-AGL and line choke 25 A upstream on
mains input side
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV016A
Class C1
With booktype filter FTV016A and line choke 15 A upstream on mains
input side
Class C1
Input filter
305
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.5.3.3
AC 1x230 V
Interference suppression class Agile size 1
Installation measure
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Agile 1
Class C3
Without EMC input filter, with line choke
With footprint filter FS28364-8-07
With footprint filter FS28364-8-07 and line choke upstream on mains
input side
With booktype filter FTV007A
On request
With booktype filter FTV007A and line choke upstream on mains input
side
Interference suppression class Agile size 2
Installation measure
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Agile 2
Class C3
Without EMC input filter, with line choke
With footprint filter
With footprint filter and line choke upstream on mains input side
On request
With booktype filter
With booktype filter and line choke upstream on mains input side
Interference suppression class Agile size 3, AGL 202-19 (5.5 kW), AGL 202-21 (7.5 kW)
Installation measure
Agile 3
AGL202-19 (3.0 kW)
AGL202-21 (3.0 kW)
Without EMC input filter, without line choke
Without EMC input filter, with line choke 15 A or 25 A
With footprint filter
With footprint filter and line choke upstream on mains input side
On request
With booktype filter
With booktype filter and line choke upstream on mains input side
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
306
Input filter
Options
12.6
Communication module
Option slot for communication module (CM)
CM-232
RS232 VABus or Modbus
CM-485
RS485 VABus or Modbus
CM-PDPV1 Profibus DP-V1
CM-CAN CANopen or system bus
Further communications modules are listed in chapter 3.1 “Inverter type and warning signs on the
device”. The VABus protocol is used for communication with the PC software VPlus for parameter
settings, monitoring and diagnosis.
Installation and commissioning of a communication module are described in the separate instruction
manuals of the communication protocols.
12.7
USB adaptor
Via an optional USB adaptor the communication interface X21 can be connected to the USB interface
of a PC. It enables parameter settings, monitoring and diagnosis via PC software VPlus.
X21 (RJ45)
RJ45
USB
VPlus
Adaptor
12.8
Resource pack
The frequency inverter can be extended by an optional resource pack (memory card).
Resource pack
− Capacity = 2 GB
− SPI protocol
− Parameter copy function
− Integrated documentation
Parameter values of a frequency inverter can be saved on standard digital memory cards and uploaded on another frequency inverter. Refer to chapter 7.10.11 “Copy parameters”.
Note:
To use the copy function, use the Resource pack offered by Bonfiglioli Vectron.
Bonfiglioli Vectron doesn’t take any responsibility for the malfunctioning of the memory cards of other
manufacturers.
Communication module
307
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9
Assembly variants
Assembly variants of the Agile device series:
− Standard
(included in the scope of supply, see chapter 4.2 “Installation”)
− Feed-through
(This assembly set is not included in delivery.)
− Cold Plate
(This assembly set is not included in delivery.)
− Vibration-proof
(This assembly set is not included in delivery.)
− DIN rail for size 1
(This assembly set is not included in delivery.)
Feed-through
Cold Plate
Vibration-proof
DIN rail
3
2
1
1
1: Mounting plate
2: Mounting plate as external heat sink
3: DIN rail
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
308
Assembly variants
Options
12.9.1
Feed-through assembly (This assembly set is not included in delivery.)
The feed-through assembly facilitates the thermal separation.
The heat sink of the frequency inverter can be fed through the mounting plate. The power dissipation
can be passed on to an external cooling cycle.
12.9.1.1
Cooling air flow rate required and energy dissipation
The required cooling air flow rate and the device-specific energy dissipation Pdof the heat sink are
listed in the following table. Additionally, the thermal radiation (energy dissipation, interior) of the
frequency inverter is indicated.
Type
Agile 202 / 402
-01
Size
Cooling air
Cooling air flow rate, required
Influencing factors
Energy dissipation, heat sink
[2 kHz]
Energy dissipation, interior
-02 -03
-05
-07
-09
-11
-13
1
m3/h
-
-
-
-
-
-
30
30
Pd
W
12
19
29
42
53
70
89
122
Pd interior
W
10
10
11
12
15
18
21
25
-15
-18
2
-19
Type
Agile 402
Size
Cooling air
-19
-21
-22
-23
3
m3/
h
60
60
100
100
100
100
100
Pd
W
133
167
230
235
321
393
470
Pd interior
W
31
35
45
48
61
68
81
Cooling air flow rate, required
Influencing factors
Energy dissipation, heat sink
[2 kHz]
Energy dissipation, interior
Separation of energy dissipation:
Pd interior
Energy dissipation, interior
Pd
Energy dissipation, heat sink
1
Mounting plate
2
Pd interior Pd
Heat sink
2
1
Assembly variants
309
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9.1.2
Size 1 (3~: 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
60
43
222
260
(+10)
58
195 222 (+10)
6
Place a seal between frequency inverter and mounting plate.
Use screws M6 with minimum length 30 mm.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
310
Assembly variants
Options
12.9.1.3
Size 2 (3~: 3.0 kW to 5.5 kW; 1~: 1.5 kW to 2.2 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-15 2
-18 2
-19 2
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
1.5
2.2
--
3ph.
kW
3.0
4.0
--
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
3.0
4.0
5.5
80
56
222
(+10)
251
78
205 222 (+10)
6
Place a seal between frequency inverter and mounting plate.
Use screws M6 with minimum length 30 mm.
Assembly variants
311
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9.1.4
Size 3 (5.5 kW to 11.0 kW)
12.9.1.4.1
With heat sink fan
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Agile 202
Mains supply
1ph.
3ph.
Power
kW
kW
-19 3
3
5.5
-21 3
3
7.5
-22 3
---23 3
---
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
5.5
7.5
9.2
11
155
90
62
220 250
128
90
205 220 (+10)
6
Place a seal between frequency inverter and mounting plate.
Use screws M6 with minimum length 30 mm.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
312
Assembly variants
Options
12.9.1.4.2
Without heat sink fan
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Agile 202
Mains supply
1ph.
3ph.
Power
kW
kW
-19 3
3
5.5
-21 3
3
7.5
-22 3
---23 3
---
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
5.5
7.5
9.2
11
155
90
62
220 250
128
90
165 220 (+10)
6
Place a seal between frequency inverter and mounting plate.
Use screws M6 with minimum length 30 mm.
Assembly variants
313
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9.2
Cold Plate (This assembly set is not included in delivery.)
The “Cold Plate” variant enables installation of the frequency inverter on suitable surfaces which have
sufficient thermal conductivity to dissipate the heat developing during the operation of the frequency
inverter.
Cooling is realized by means of a sufficient cooling area of the mounting plate or via an additional
cooler.
12.9.2.1
Range of application
The “Cold Plate” variant enables the use of the frequency inverter in the following applications:
− Installation in a housing, where a high type of protection is required but the volume of the housing
limits thermal compensation.
− Use in highly polluted cooling air affecting the function and service life of the fan.
− Use of several frequency inverters in limited space conditions, e.g. installation of frequency inverters on a liquid-cooled plate (sum cooler).
− Direct assembly on (or in) a machine case, with parts of the machine constructions taking over the
cooling function.
12.9.2.2
Required thermal properties of the external heat sink
The heat in the frequency inverter due to the energy dissipation of the electronic components (rectifier and IGBT) must be dissipated to a heat sink via the cold plate of the frequency inverter.
The capacity to dissipate this heat mainly depends on
− the size of the heat sink surface,
− the ambient temperature and
− the heat transmission resistance.
An increase of the heat transmission rate can only be realized to a certain extent by increasing the
surface of the heat sink. An additional increase of the heat dissipation by increasing the heat sink is
not possible.
The frequency inverter must be mounted with the cold plate on an external heat sink with the lowest
thermal resistance possible.
Thermal resistance
The thermal resistance Rth is calculated from the difference between the maximum heat sink temperature and the ambient temperature, referred to the energy dissipation of the frequency inverter. The
ambient temperature to be considered refers to the immediate environment of the frequency inverter.
Rth =
Th max − Ta
Pd
Max. permissible heat sink temperature of the frequency inverter
Ambient temperature of the heat sink
Difference between the maximum heat sink temperature and the ambient temperature (Th max– Ta)
Energy to be dissipated by the heat sink
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
314
Th max = 75 °C
Ta = 35 °C
∆T = 40 K
Pd: device-specific
Assembly variants
Options
The following tables list the maximum permissible thermal resistance Rthof the external heat sink and
the device-specific energy dissipation Pd of the external heat sink. The thermal resistance Rth is given
in the unit Kelvin per Watt (K/W). The value of Rth can typically be taken from the data sheet of the
external heat sink. Additionally, the thermal radiation (energy dissipation, interior) of the frequency
inverter is indicated in the table.
Type
Agile 402/ Agile 202
-01
Size
Influencing factors
Energy dissipation, heat sink
[2 kHz]
Energy dissipation, interior
Thermal resistance
Th max – Ta
Thermal resistance
Mechanics
Cooling surface of Cold Plate
Weight (approx.)
-02 -03
-05
-07
-09
-11
-13
1
Pd
W
12
19
29
42
53
70
89
122
Pd interior
W
10
10
11
12
15
18
21
25
∆T
Rth
K
40
K/W 3.33 2.11 1,38 0.95 0.75 0.57 0.45 0.33
HxB
m
mm
kg
190 x 83
1.1
Type
Agile 402/ Agile 202
-15
Size
Influencing factors
Energy dissipation, heat sink [2 kHz]
Pd
Energy dissipation, interior
Pd interior
Thermal resistance
Th max – Ta
∆T
Thermal resistance
Rth
Mechanics
Cooling surface of Cold Plate
Weight (approx.)
HxB
m
W
W
K
K/
W
mm
kg
-18
2
133
31
-19
-19
-21
-22
-23
321
61
393
68
470
81
0.12
0,10
0.09
3
167
35
235
48
40
0.30
0.24
0.17 0.17
190 x 103
1.35
190 x 148
2.6
The thermal resistance values and the technical data apply in the following conditions:
− No airflow.
− Clearance of approx. 300 mm above and below as well as 100 mm on both the left and right side
of the frequency inverter.
The energy dissipation values are also valid for the switching frequencies of 4, 8, 12 and 16 kHz, as at
these operating points, the output current is reduced.
Separation of energy dissipation:
Energy dissipation, interior
Pd
Energy dissipation, heat sink
Cold Plate of frequency inverter
2
1
Pd interior
1
Pd interior Pd
Mounting plate as external heat sink
2
Assembly variants
315
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9.2.3
Additional fan or liquid cooling
The size of the heat sink can be reduced if fans are installed or a liquid cooling system is used in addition to the " Cold Plate " assembly.
The size of the external heat sink can be reduced proportionally to the increase in the flow rate of the
cooling medium.
In the following a fan cooling system is described as an example. For calculating the maximum permissible heat resistance Rth enforced for cooling by means of a fan, a proportionality factor is introduced.
This factor describes the increase of the maximum permissible thermal resistance at increasing flow
rate of the cooling air.
The maximum permissible thermal resistance Rth
follows:
enforced
R th enforced =
for enforced air cooling can be calculated as
R th
α
Rth: Maximum permissible thermal resistance with free circulation of air. Calculate according to the
formula for Rth in the previous chapter or use the value indicated in the table.
α: Proportionality factor.
The relation is shown, as an example, in the following table for the Agile 402-23 frequency inverter.
Rth [K/W]
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
12.9.2.4
Thermal resistance for enforced air cooling
Vair [m/s]
Rth enforced [K/W]
α
0
1
0.09
1
0.65
0.14
2
0.45
0.20
4
0.28
0.32
6
0.20
0.45
Application notes
− Comply with the operation diagrams for power reductions (derating).
− Comply with the thermal limiting values of the frequency inverter. Refer to chapter 11 “Technical
data” and 12.9.2.4.1 “Temperature monitoring”.
− Additional power losses Pd interior are dissipated as heat into the interior of a control cabinet. These
losses may amount to 30% of the total energy dissipation and must be considered in the calculation of the volume of the control cabinet. The values are listed in the tables in chapter 12.9.2.2
“Required thermal properties of the external heat sink”.
− If several frequency inverters or other heat-producing devices are mounted on a common heat sink
(sum cooler), the losses of all devices must be added up. Calculate the maximum permissible
thermal resistance Rth using the formula (chapter 12.9.2.2 “Required thermal properties of the external heat sink”).
− The contact surface of the external heat sink must have a sufficient thermal conductivity.
12.9.2.4.1
Temperature monitoring
The heat sink temperature and the interior temperature can be monitored:
− The temperatures can be displayed in the actual value menu. Refer to chapter 9.1 “Actual values
of frequency inverter”.
− When the maximum permitted temperatures are reached error-switch-off is effected and an error
message is triggered.
− Before the maximum permitted temperatures are reached a warning message is triggered. An error-switch-off can be avoided. The temperature values for the warnings can be set via parameter.
Refer to chapter 7.4.2 “Temperature”.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
316
Assembly variants
Options
Error-switch-off is effected at:
− Maximum heat sink temperature
− Maximum interior temperature
In the factory setting a warning message is triggered when
− the maximum heat sink temperature is reached (minus 5 °C)
− the maximum interior temperature is reached (minus 5 °C)
The warning messages can be output via digital outputs.
12.9.2.5
12.9.2.5.1
Assembly
Safety
WARNING
To avoid serious physical injury or considerable damage to property, only qualified staff
may work on the devices.
During operation, the heat sink can reach a temperature of up to 75 °C. Do not touch
the heat sink during operation.
The heat sink may be hot even some time after the frequency inverter was switched off.
Comply with the following requirements:
− The installation surface of the external heat sink must at least be as large as the cold plate surface.
− The contact surfaces of the external heat sink and cold plate must be plane.
− The contact surfaces must be clean and degreased.
•
For fixing the frequency inverter, drill 6 threaded holes M6 in the installation surface. For the installation dimensions, refer to the following chapters.
•
Deburr the threaded holes.
•
Clean the contact surfaces of the external heat sink and cold plate.
•
Apply a thin and uniform film of heat conducting paste on the cold plate.
The heat conducting paste compensates the roughness of the contact surfaces and
thus the heat transmission resistance between the cold plate and the heat sink. In this
way, the cooling efficiency is increased.
•
Mount the frequency inverter vertically on the heat sink using six M6 bolts. The bolts must have a
minimum length of 30 mm. Tighten all bolts uniformly.
The maximum tightening torque of the fixing bolts in a typical construction is 3.4 Nm.
After the mechanical installation continue with the electrical installation according to chapter 5
“Electrical Installation”. Comply with the safety instructions provided there.
Assembly variants
317
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9.2.5.2
Size 1 (3~: 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
Operating Instructions Agile
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
06/2013
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
318
Assembly variants
Options
12.9.2.5.3
Size 2 (3.0 kW to 5.5 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-15 2
-18 2
-19 2
Assembly variants
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
1.5
2.2
--
3ph.
kW
3.0
4.0
--
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
3.0
4.0
5.5
319
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9.2.5.4
Size 3 (5.5 kW to 11.0 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Agile 202
Mains supply
1ph.
3ph.
Power
kW
kW
-19 3
3
5.5
-21 3
3
7.5
-22 3
---23 3
---
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
5.5
7.5
9.2
11
320
Assembly variants
Options
12.9.3
Vibration-proof (This assembly set is not included in delivery.)
12.9.3.1
Size 1 (3~: 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
48
278
Assembly variants
228
(+10)
321
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9.3.2
Size 2 (3~: 3.0 kW to 5.5 kW; 1.5 kW to 2.2 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-15 2
-18 2
-19 2
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
1.5
2.2
--
3ph.
kW
3.0
4.0
--
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
3.0
4.0
5.5
196
40
58
228
(+10)
278
80
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
322
Assembly variants
Options
12.9.3.3
Size 3 (3~: 5.5 kW to 11.0 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Agile 202
Mains supply
1ph.
3ph.
Power
kW
kW
-19 3
3
5.5
-21 3
3
7.5
-22 3
---23 3
---
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
5.5
7.5
9.2
11
125
90
278
Assembly variants
139
67
228
(+10)
323
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Options
12.9.4
DIN rail (This assembly set is not included in delivery.)
Size 1 can be assembled on a DIN rail.
12.9.4.1
Size 1 (3~: 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW; 1~: 0.09 kW to 1.1 kW)
Valid for the following devices
Frequency inverter
Type
Mains supply
Power
-01 1
-02 1
-03 1
-05 1
-07 1
-09 1
-11 1
-13 1
Agile 202
1ph.
kW
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
Agile 402
3ph.
kW
0.18
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
During the assembly a good contacting of the frequency inverter to the DIN rail must be assured.
A good PE-connection of the frequency inverter to the assembly material and the DIN rail requires
metallic conducting contact.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
324
Assembly variants
Error protocol
13 Error protocol
The various control methods and the hardware of the frequency inverter include functions which continuously monitor the application. The operational and error diagnosis is facilitated by the information
stored in the error protocol.
13.1
Error list
Last errors
The last 16 fault messages are stored in chronological order and the No. of errors 362 shows the
number of errors which have occurred since initial commissioning of the frequency inverter. On the
operator panel, the error code FXXXX is displayed. The meaning of the error key is described in the
following chapter " 13.1.1 " Error messages " . Via the PC user interface, the number of operation hours
(h), operation minutes (m) and the fault message can additionally be read out. The current operating
hours are shown by parameter Operating hours counter 245. The error message can be acknowledged via the operator panel buttons or according to the link Error acknowledgement 103.
Error list
No.
Description
310 Last Error
311 Last Error but one
312 to 325
362 No. of Errors
Function
hhhhh:mm ; FXXXX fault message.
hhhhh:mm ; FXXXX fault message.
Error 3 to error 16.
Number of errors occurred after the initial commissioning of the
frequency inverter.
363 No. of self acknowledged errors
Automatic error acknowledgment enables acknowledgment of errors Overcurrent F0507 and Overvoltage F0700 without intervention by an overriding control system or the user. The No. of self acknowledged errors 363 shows the total number of automatic error acknowledgments.
No.
Description
363 No. of self acknowledged
Errors
Error list
Error list
Function
Total number of automatic error acknowledgment with synchronization.
325
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Error protocol
13.1.1
Error messages
259 Actual Error
Parameter Actual Error 259 shows the error code.
Error code
Code
F00
00
F01
00
01
02
03
F02
00
01
F03
00
01
03
F04
00
01
02
03
F05
00
06
07
08
09
11
Error messages
Meaning
No fault has occurred.
Overload
Frequency inverter overloaded, check load behaviour. Reduce ramps and speed.
Frequency inverter overloaded in low output frequency range.
Frequency inverter overloaded (60 s), check load behaviour.
Short-term overload (1 s), check motor and application parameters.
Heat Sink
Heat sink temperature too high, check cooling and ventilator.
Heat sink temperature too cold, check allowed ambient temperature.
Inside
Inside temperature too high, check cooling and ventilator.
Inside temperature too cold, check allowed ambient temperature.
Capacitor temperature too high, check cooling and ventilator.
Motor connection
Motor temperature too high or sensor defective, check connection at terminal X12.4.
Motor circuit breaker tripped, check drive.
V-belt monitoring reports no load on the drive.
Phase failure, check motor and wiring.
Output current
Overloaded, check load situation and ramps.
Motor phase current too high, check motor and wiring.
Message from phase monitoring, check motor and wiring.
Message from phase monitoring, check motor and wiring.
Message from phase monitoring, check motor and wiring.
Motor still rotates. The motor is still excited and rotates and
− drive start command applies and the flying start function is deactivated or
− a device test is tried to start
F06
xx
F07
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
F08
01
04
05
Internal Error.
Internal Error. Please contact your Bonfiglioli office.
DC–link voltage
DC link voltage too high, check deceleration ramps and connected brake resistor.
DC link voltage too small, check mains voltage.
Power failure, check mains voltage and circuit.
Phase failure mains, check mains fuses and circuit.
Reference DC-Link Limitation 680 too small, check mains voltage.
Overvoltage brake chopper. Refer to chapter 13.3 “Troubleshooting” (Shut-down).
Overvoltage motor chopper. Refer to chapter 13.3 “Troubleshooting” (Shut-down).
Electronics voltage
Electronics voltage DC 24 V too low, check control terminal.
Electronics voltage too high, check wiring of control terminals.
Fault in the the A/D converter. Remove all external connections (signal terminals etc.)
and check if the fault remains
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
326
Error list
Error protocol
Code
06
F10
F11
10
00
01
01
02
04
05
F12
06
07
08
09
F13
00
10
01
02
07
08
F14
09
50
54
F20
Error list
10
11
Error messages
Meaning
Voltage supply for optional communication module too low. Communication via bus
system faulty.
Disconnect bus system wiring and acknowledge the error message. Check connections
and wiring of the bus system.
Replace the communication module if the error occurs, even if the bus system is disconnected.
If the communication module is replaced and the error occurs, contact the service of
BONFIGLIOLI.
Brake chopper
Brake chopper overcurrent. Also refer to chapter 7.10.4 " Brake chopper and brake
resist " .
Output frequency
Output frequency too high, check control signals and settings.
Maximum frequency achieved by control. Check deceleration ramps and connected
brake resistor.
Enable
The STO Diagnosis software recognized a fault in the STO switch-off paths. Check
wiring, connect screens. Check the EMC environment. If the fault remains, exchange
the device.
Fault of the STO diagnosis function. If the device remains after a new start up, exchange the device.
Internal Fault. Contact the BONFILGLIOLI customer service.
Enable signals STOA and STOB were not actuated at the same time, but with a high
time offset. Check the circuitry of the enable input signals.
The voltage of the STO signals is too low. Check the dimensioning of the DC 24 V supply, that supplies the STO inputs.
The STO diagnosis software was not able to detect a clear defined STO level. Check
the wiring and STO triggering device. Ensure, that clear signal levels can be received
(DC 0 V / DC 24 V). If the fault persists, check if the fault persists with another drive.
The STO diagnosis software has recognized that the STO signal levels of the device
don’t correlate to each other at different measurement points. Check the wiring, put
the screens on correctly. If the fault persists, exchange the device.
The STO diagnosis software recognized that an STO signal is too high inside the device. Check the wiring; apply a clear defined signal level (0V / 24 V). If the fault persists, exchange the device.
Motor connection
Earth fault on output, check motor and wiring.
Minimum current monitoring, check motor and wiring.
Control connection
Reference value on multifunctional input 1 faulty, check signal.
Reference value on multifunctional input 2 faulty, check signal.
Overcurrent on multifunctional input 1, check signal.
Overcurrent on multifunctional input 2, check signal.
No actual value for technology controller. Missing actual value was reported according
to setting for Operation mode actual value failure 440.
Temperature measurement with KTY measuring resistor defective. Check signal and
measuring resistor.
External error; drive responded according to parameter setting for Operation mode ext.
error 535. Error was triggered via the logic signal or digital input signal assigned to
parameter External error 183.
Modbus and VABus
Communication error according to parameter X21: VABus Watchdog-Timer 1502.
Communication error according to parameter CM: VABus Watchdog Timer 413.
327
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Error protocol
Error messages
Meaning
CANopen
Code
F20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
2A
2B
2C
F20
5x
F20
6x
F20
7
F21
nn
F22
00
01
02
03
10
F23
nn
F24
00
F27
nn
F28
nn
F30
3n
F0B
13
F0C
40
CAN Bus OFF
CAN Guarding
Error state
SYNC error (SYNC timing)
CAN error state
RxPDO1 length error
RxPDO2 length error
Number of received bytes differs from mapping.
RxPDO3 length error
RxPDO1 Timeout
RxPDO was not received in expected time.
Ensure, that the RxPDO can be received in the set up “Event
RxPDO2 Timeout
time” (Subindex 5).
RxPDO3 Timeout
DeviceNet
DeviceNet Fault. Please check DeviceNet manual.
Profibus
Profibus Fault. Please check Profibus manual.
Internal Error.
Internal Error. Please contact your Bonfiglioli office.
System bus
Fault message on system bus master when a fault at system bus slave occurs,
nn = node-ID of slave (hex)
Communication fault, system bus, timeout sync-telegram
Communication fault, system bus, timeout RxPDO1
Communication fault, system bus, timeout RxPDO2
Communication fault, system bus, timeout RxPDO3
Communication fault, system bus, bus-off
CANopen
Heartbeat error, nn = triggering node.
CM module recognition
Unknown CM module. Check compatibility firmware and CM module.
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet Fault. Please check manual of used Ethernet module.
EtherCAT
EtherCAT fault.
User Error
User triggered Error of Internal PLC. Please check the application manual VPLC.
Optional components
Assembly of communication module was done without disconnection of mains supply.
Disconnect mains supply.
Internal monitoring
After 6 warm starts in less than 3 minutes this fault is triggered, due to the expectation
that a faulty programming of the PLC or the function table is at hand. Additionally the
PLC / Function table is stopped (P. 1399 = 0 only in RAM).
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
328
Error list
Error protocol
Output signals in the case of error messages
Errors are signaled via digital signals.
162 Error Signal
3-
1)
2)
A monitoring function signals an error with indication via parameter Actual
error 259.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions.
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
In addition to fault messages mentioned, there are further fault messages. However these messages
are only used for internal purposes and are not listed here. If you receive fault messages which are
not listed here, please contact the BONFILGLIOLI customer service.
13.2
Error environment
Actual values at the event of a failure
The parameters of the error environment help troubleshooting both in the settings of the frequency
inverter and also in the complete application. The error environment documents the operational behavior of the frequency inverter at the time of the last four faults.
Error environment
No.
330
331
332
335
336
337
Description
DC–link voltage
Output voltage
Stator frequency
Phase current Ia
Phase current Ib
Phase current Ic
338 rms Current
339 Isd/reactive current
340 Isq/active current
341
Rotor magnetizing current
342 Torque
343 Analog input MFI1A
344 Analog input MFI2A
346 Analog output MFO1A
Function
Direct voltage in DC-link.
Calculated output voltage (motor voltage) of the frequency inverter.
The output voltage (motor voltage) of the frequency inverter.
Measured current in motor phase U.
Measured current in motor phase V.
Measured current in motor phase W.
Calculated effective output current (motor current) of the frequency
inverter.
Current component forming the magnetic flux or the calculated
reactive current.
Current component forming the torque or the calculated active
current.
Magnetizing current relative to the rated motor parameters and the
operating point.
Torque calculated from the voltage, the current and the control
variables.
Input signal at multifunction input 1 (terminal X12.3) in analog
Operation mode MFI1 452 (voltage or current).
Input signal at multifunction input 2 (terminal X12.4) in analog
Operation mode MFI2 562 (voltage or current).
Output signal at multifunction output 1 (terminal X13.6) in setting
" 10 - Analog (PWM) MFO1A " of parameter Operation mode MFO1
(X13.6) 550.
348
DC-link Cap. Temperature
Measured capacitor temperature.
349
Repetition frequency
output
Signal at multifunction output 1 in setting " 20 - repetition frequency
(FF) MFO1F " for Operation mode MFO1 (X13.6) 550 and according
to selection for RF/PT: Output Value MFO1F 555.
Error environment
329
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Error protocol
Error environment
No.
Description
Function
Decimally encoded status
− of the enable signal (STOA AND STOB)
− of the six digital inputs and
350 Status of digital inputs
− of multifunction input 1 (if Operation mode MFI1 452 = " 3 digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - digital PNP (active: 24 V)) " and
− of multifunction input 2 (if Operation mode MFI2 562 =
" 3 - digital NPN (active: 0 V) " or " 4 - digital PNP (active: 24 V)) " .
Decimally encoded status
− of digital output at terminal X12.5.
351 Status of digital outputs
− of multifunction output at terminal X13.6 (if Operation mode
MFO1 (X13.6) 550 = " 1 - Digital MFO1D "
− of digital input/output at terminal X11.6 (if Operation mode terminal X11.6 558 = " 1 - output OUT3D " )
− of relay output at terminal X10
352 Time since release
353 Heat sink temperature
354 Inside temperature
355 Controller status
356
357
358
359
360
Warning status
Int. value 1
Int. value 2
Long value 1
Long value 2
Application Warning
367
State
Time of the error in hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s) after
enable signal:
hhhhh:mm:ss .sec/10sec/100sec/1000.
Measured heat sink temperature.
Measured inside temperature.
The reference value signal is limited by the controller coded in the
controller status.
The warning messages coded in warning status.
Software service parameter.
Software service parameter.
Software service parameter.
Software service parameter.
The application warnings coded in warning status.
361 Checksum
The Checksum 361 parameter shows whether the storage of the error environment was free of errors
(OK) or incomplete (NOK).
Error environment
No.
Description
361 Checksum
Operating Instructions Agile
Function
Check protocol of the error environment.
06/2013
330
Error environment
Error protocol
13.3
Troubleshooting
The list shows a selection of possible measures if problems occur. Not all problems listed will result in
an error message.
Problem
Error message
Shut-down
Cause
Brake resistor connection
Brake resistance
High generator power
High DC-link voltage
Main phase failure
Overcurrent
Short-circuit or overload
Earth fault
Overtemperature
Electromagnetic interference
Overfrequency
Parameter setting
not possible.
Enable is switched on
and motor is running.
Access limited.
Setup is active.
Changes disabled by
password.
Motor does not
turn after pressing of RUN.
Parameter setting
No enable
Error in control cables
Troubleshooting
Possible remedy
See chapter 13.1.1 “Error messages”.
Check.
Check value. Reduce value if necessary.
Reduce deceleration value.
Check brake resistance.
Check brake resistor connection.
Reduce deceleration value.
Check DC-link voltage limitation (P680).
DC-link voltage higher than brake chopper trigger
threshold (P506). Check value. Increase value if necessary.
DC-link voltage higher than motor chopper trigger
threshold (P507). Check value. Increase value if necessary.
Check mains connection.
Check motor data.
Check motor connection.
The parameterizable motor circuit breaker (P571) has
been triggered. Short-circuit at motor connection or
overload.
Check load for earth fault.
Overload. Reduce load and ensure sufficient cooling.
Comply with permissible ambient conditions.
Reduce output power or switching frequency.
Check EMC.
Switch-off limit (P417) exceeded. Increase value if
necessary.
Maximum frequency increase (P681) of DC-link voltage limitation exceeded. Increase value if necessary.
Most parameters cannot be written during operation.
Switch off enable and select " Para " menu on operator panel.
Select higher control level (P28).
Wait until setup is finished and the message " ready "
is displayed.
Entry must correspond to password (P27).
For P412, select " 3 - Control via keypad " or " 4 - Control via keypad or contacts " (factory setting).
Check P418 (Minimum frequency) and P419 (Maximum frequency).
Switch on both enable inputs STOA and STOB.
Check control cable connections.
331
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Error protocol
Problem
Motor does not
turn after a start
command at digital input.
Cause
Parameter setting
Reference value too low.
No enable
Error in control cables
Motor does not produce
enough torque.
Possible remedy
Select correct source for reference value.
For example, for speed setting via a multifunction
input, set at least one of parameters P475 or P492 to
" 1 - analog input 1 " (terminal X12.3) or " 2 - analog
input 2 " (terminal X12.4).
For P452 (terminal X12.3) and P562 (terminal X12.4),
select the correct signal to set the reference value
( " 1 - voltage " or " 2 - current " ).
For P68 (Start clockwise) or P69 (Start anticlockwise), select the required digital input.
Check P418 (Minimum frequency).
Set digital input for the start command to the required evaluation ( " 0 - NPN " or " 1 - PNP " ).
Check actual value P228 (internal reference frequency). Check voltage or current value at reference value input.
Switch on both enable inputs STOA and STOB.
Check control cable connections.
Carry out setup (again).
Long cables will reduce the torque.
V/f characteristic: Check start-up behavior (P620),
flux-formation (P780 and P781) and starting current
(P623).
Field-orientated control: Check start-up behavior
(flux-formation P780 and P781) and torque limit
(P730), reset to factory settings if necessary.
Motor does not
turn after a start
command via a
communication
interface
Parameter setting
Via P412 set the controller to " 1 - state machine " or
" 2 - remote contacts " .
No enable
Switch on both enable inputs STOA and STOB.
Motor turning in
wrong direction.
Incorrect connection of
motor phases.
Check motor cables.
Exchange two motor phases (e.g. U and V) at the
frequency inverter terminals.
Connect terminals U, V and W of the frequency inverter to the corresponding terminals U, V and W of
the motor.
Check if P493 or P495 is set to " 3 - Inverted " . The
reference value will be inverted.
Check if for P68 (Start clockwise) and P69 (Start
anticlockwise) the required digital inputs are selected.
Check the characteristic parameters if the reference
value is defined via MFI1 or MFI2 and " 6 - voltage
characteristic " or " 7 - current characteristic " is selected.
Parameter setting
Motor turning in
one direction
only.
Parameter setting
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Check if P493 or P495 is set to " 2 - positive only " . In
this case, the reference value can only be positive.
Factory setting: " 1 - (+/- reference value) " .
Check values for P420 (acceleration clockwise) and
P422 (acceleration anticlockwise). The value
0.00 Hz/s blocks the corresponding direction of rotation.
332
Troubleshooting
Error protocol
Problem
The motor is very
hot.
Cause
Load too high.
Motor temperature monitoring connection
Ambient temperature
too high.
Setup not carried out.
Possible remedy
Reduce load.
Reduce acceleration and deceleration values.
Check rated current.
Use larger motor.
Check connection of thermal contact or measuring
resistance at MFI2.
Check setting of P570 (temperature evaluation).
Check setting of P617 (for KTY or PT1000).
Comply with permissible ambient conditions.
Ensure sufficient cooling.
Carry out setup.
For an asynchronous motor, switch to control according to V/f characteristic (set P30 to 110).
Time until motor
starts seems
quite long
Flying Start is used.
Switch off Flying Start (if possible, not recommended
for synchronous motors).
Use P.645 = 20 (if possible).
Motor stops during start-up.
Load torque too high.
Reduce load torque.
Reduce acceleration values.
Use larger motor.
Motor does not
accelerate or
motor accelerates
very slowly.
Reference value too low.
Setup not carried out.
Check P418 (Maximum frequency).
Check acceleration and deceleration values.
Set P475 and P492 to the appropriate reference frequency source.
For definition of reference value via multifunction
input: For P452 (terminal X12.3) and P562 (terminal
X12.4), select the correct signal to set the reference
value ( " 1 - voltage " or " 2 - current " ).
Check values for P420 (acceleration clockwise) and
P422 (acceleration anticlockwise).
Carry out setup.
Control according to V/f
characteristic not suitable.
Mechanical brake
For high torques at low speed, field-orientated control (DMC) may be suitable. Set P30 to 410 (asynchronous motor) or 610 (synchronous motor).
Check if a mechanical brake is effective.
High load torques in the
case of field-orientated
control (DMC)
High load torques in the
case of sensor-less control (V/f characteristic)
PID controller
Check amplification and integral time settings of control functions.
Ramps too smooth.
Speed vibrations
The reference value is
defined via an external
source.
The motor cables are
too long.
Troubleshooting
Switch on slip compensation (P660).
Check parameters of V/f characteristic.
If the PID controller is used, check amplification,
integral time and derivative time.
Avoid electromagnetic interference on the control
cables.
Install mains and motor cables separately from the
control cables.
Use shielded control cables.
If an analog reference value is defined: Select a filter
time constant P451 for MFI1 or P561 for MFI2.
Carry out setup.
Shorten cables.
333
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Error protocol
Problem
Overvoltage
Cause
High load torques in the
case of field-orientated
control (DMC)
Possible remedy
High load torques may cause error messages due to
overvoltage.
For an asynchronous motor, switch to sensor-less
control according to V/f characteristic (set P30 to
110).
Noise from drive
Motor noise or switching
noise in frequency inverter
Reduce switching frequency (P400).
Install input filter.
Install output filter.
Connect motor and frequency inverter to PE potential.
Install mains and motor cables separately from the
control cables.
Avoid motor vibration.
Set blocking frequencies (P447, P448) and hysteresis
(P449) to disable output frequency ranges.
Output frequency is
resonant frequency of
system
PID controller
output signal
defective
Connection
Digital inputs
have 0 V instead
of a voltage of
approx. 20 V
Parameter setting
Set P475 or P492 to " 30 - Technology controller " .
Set P476 or P494 to the source for the reference
value.
Set P478 to the source for the actual value.
Start signal (P68 or P69) starts the PID controller.
Check connection for actual value signal.
Energy saving function
Caused by functionality (see chapter 8.3).
Operating Instructions Agile
If undesired: Deactivate Energy saving function
(P1511) or select an operation mode, that doesn’t
switch off the I/O’s.
06/2013
334
Troubleshooting
Operational and error diagnosis
14 Operational and error diagnosis
Operation of the frequency inverter and the connected load are monitored continuously. Various functions document the operational behavior and facilitate the operational and error diagnosis.
14.1
Status of digital signals
The status display of the digital input and output signals enables checking of the various control signals and their assignment to the corresponding software functions, in particular during commissioning.
Parameters Status digital inputs 350 and Status digital outputs 351 show decimal values which must
be converted to binary values in order to obtain the status information.
Coding of the status of the digital signals
Assignment:
Bit
7
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
sig.
sig.
sig.
sig.
sig.
sig.
sig.
sig.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A decimal value is displayed, indicating the status of the digital signals in bits after conversion into a
binary figure.
Example:
Decimal figure 33 is displayed. Converted into the binary system, the number reads 00100001. Thus,
the following contact inputs or outputs are active:
Digital input or output 1
Digital input or output 6
14.2
Controller status
The controller status can be used to establish which of the control functions are active. If a several
controllers are active at the time, a controller code composed of the sum total of the individual codes
is displayed. Display of the controller status via the operator panel can be parameterized via parameter Controller status message 409.
Coding of the controller status
CXXXX
Controller code
Code
C 00 00 C 00 01 UDdyn
C 00 02 UDstop
C 00 04 UDctr
C 00 08 UDlim
Status of digital signals
ABCDE
Controller abbreviation
Controller status
No controller active.
Voltage controller is in the rise phase according to Operation Mode 670.
The output frequency in the case of a power failure is below the Shutdown
Threshold 675.
Failure of the mains voltage and power regulation active according to Operation Mode 670 of the voltage controller.
The DC link voltage has exceeded the Reference DC-Link Limitation 680.
335
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Operational and error diagnosis
Code
C 00 10 Boost
Controller status
The Dyn. Voltage Pre-Control 605 accelerates the control characteristics.
The output current is limited by the current limit value controller or the speed
controller.
The output power or the torque is limited by the speed controller.
Switch-over of field-orientated control between speed and torque-controlled
control method.
The Operation Mode 620 selected in starting behavior limits the output current
Overload limit of the long-term Ixt (60 s) reached, intelligent current limits
active
Overload limit of the short-term Ixt (1 s) reached, intelligent current limits
active.
Max. heat sink temperature TK reached, intelligent current limits of Operation
Mode 573 active.
Max. motor temperature TPTC reached, intelligent current limits of Operation
Mode 573 active.
Reference frequency reached the Maximum Frequency 419. The frequency
limitation is active.
C 00 20 Ilim
C 00 40 Tlim
C 00 80 Tctr
C 01 00 Rstp
C 02 00 IxtLtLim
C 04 00 IxtStLim
C 08 00 Tclim
C 10 00 PTClim
C 20 00 Flim
Example:
The controller status is displayed:
C0024 UDctr Ilim
The controller status results from the hexadecimal sum of the controller codes (0004+0020 = 0024).
At the same, the power failure regulation and also the current limitation of the speed controller are
active.
14.3
Warning status and warning status application
The current warning is displayed by a message in the warning status and can be used for an early
message of a critical operational condition. Warnings are also displayed on the operator panel. If several warnings are present, the warning status is displayed as the sum of the individual warning codes.
Via the actual value parameters Warning 269, Application Warnings 273, Warning status 356 (in
error environment) and Application warning status 367 (in error environment), all warnings present
at the time of the error are displayed.
Coding of the warning status
AXXXX
Warning code
ABCDE
Abbreviation for the warning
The warning masks created through parameters Create warning mask 536 and Create warning mask
application 626 have no influence on the warnings displayed.
356 Warning Status
The parameter displays the warning at failure switch-off.
Meaning of code displayed by parameter Warning Status 356:
Code
A 00 00 A 00 01 Ixt
A 00 02 IxtSt
A 00 04 IxtLt
Warning status
No warning message present.
Frequency inverter overloaded (A0002 or A0004)
Overload for 60 s relative to the nominal output of the frequency inverter
Short-time overload for 1 s relative to the nominal output of the frequency
inverter.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
336
Warning status and warning status application
Operational and error diagnosis
Code
A 00 08 Tc
A 00 10 Ti
A 00 20 Lim
A 00 40 INIT
A 00 80
A 01 00
A 02 00
A 04 00
A 08 00
A 10 00
A 20 00
A 40 00
A 80 00
Warning status
Maximum heat sink temperature TK minus the Warning Limit Heat Sink Temp.
407 reached.
Maximum inside temperature Ti minus the Warning Limit Inside Temp. 408
reached.
The controller stated in Controller Status 275 limits the reference value.
Frequency inverter is being initialized
Warning behavior according to parameterized Operation Mode Motor Temp.
PTC
570 at maximum motor temperature TMotor.
Phase Supervision 576 reports a phase failure.
Mains
Motor circuit breaker parameterized in Operation Mode 571 tripped.
PMS
The Maximum Frequency 419 was exceeded. The frequency limitation is acFlim
tive.
The input signal MFI1A is lower than 1 V / 2 mA according to the operation
A1
mode for the Error/Warning Behaviour 453.
The input signal MFI2A is lower than 1 V / 2 mA according to the operation
A2
mode for the Error/Warning Behaviour 563.
SYS
A slave on the system bus signals an error.
UDC
The DC link voltage has reached the type-dependent minimum value.
WARN2 In Application Warning State 367, a warning is present.
Example:
The following warning status is displayed:
A008D Ixt IxtLt Tc PTC
The warning status results from the hexadecimal sum of the warning codes (0001+0004+0008+0080
= 008D).
The short-term overload (1 s), warning limit heat sink temperature and warning limit motor temperature warnings are present.
Output signals
Warnings are signaled via digital signals.
169 - general warning
11 - General warning
1)
2)
Signal if a message is output via Warnings 269.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
Warning status and warning status application
337
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Operational and error diagnosis
273 Application Warnings
367 Application warning status
Parameter Application Warnings 273 displays the current warning.
Parameter Application warning status 367 displays the warning at failure switch-off.
Meaning of code displayed by parameters Application Warnings 273 and Application Warning
State 367:
A 00
A 00
Code
00 NO WARNING
01 BELT
A 00
40
SERVICE
Warning status
No warning message present.
Warning V-belt by Operation Mode 581.
Service of DC link or fan required. The time remaining until next service has expired. At least for one of the parameters Operation Mode
Service Interval DC-link 1534 or Operation Mode Service Interval
Fan 1535 the setting “2 - Warning” is selected.
− Service of DC-link required. The value of Service Interval DClink 1530 has reached the value 0%.
− Service of fan required. The value of Service Interval Fan 1531
has reached the value 0%.
A 00
A 01
80
00
User 1
User 2
The signal set on digital input User Warning 1 1363 is active.
The signal set on digital input User Warning 2 1364 is active.
Output signals
Application Warnings are signaled via digital signals.
216 Warning, application
26 -
1)
2)
Signal if a message is output Application Warnings 273.
1)
For linking to frequency inverter functions
For output via a digital output. Select the signal source for one of the parameters 531, 532, 533,
554. See chapter 7.6.5 " Digital outputs " .
2)
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
338
Warning status and warning status application
Parameter list
15 Parameter list
The parameter list is structured according to the menu branches of the control software. The parameters are listed in ascending numerical order. A headline (shaded) can appear several times, i.e. a subject area may be listed at different places in the table.
The parameter is available in the four data sets.
The parameter value is set by the SETUP routine.
The parameter cannot be written when the frequency inverter is in operation.
IFIN, UFIN, PFIN: Nominal values of frequency inverter, oc: Overload capacity of frequency inverter
15.1
Actual values (Menu Actual)
No.
11
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
235
236
238
239
240
241
242
243
Actual value parameter
Description
Unit
Display range
RS485/RS232
VABus SST Error Register
0 ... 15
Actual values of machine
Stator Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
rms Current
A
0.0 ... Imax
Output Voltage
V
0.0 ... UFIN
Active Power
kW
0.0 ... Pmax
Active Current
A
0.0 ... Imax
Isd
A
0.0 ... Imax
Isq
A
0.0 ... Imax
Slip Frequency
Hz
0.0 ... 999.99
Actual values of frequency inverter
DC–Link Voltage
V
0.0 ... Udmax-25
Modulation
%
0 ... 100
Actual values of machine
± 9999.9
Torque
Nm
Rotor Flux
%
0.0 ... 100.0
Winding Temperature
deg.C
0 ... 999
0 ... τmax
Act. Rotor Time Constant
ms
Actual values of frequency inverter
Internal Reference Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... fmax
Reference Percentage Value
%
± 300.00
Actual Percentage Value
%
± 300.00
Actual value memory
Peak Value Long Term Ixt
%
0.00 ... 100.00
Peak Value Short Term Ixt
%
0.00 ... 100.00
Actual values of machine
Flux-Forming Voltage
V
0.0 ... UFIN
Torque-Forming Voltage
V
0.0 ... UFIN
Absolute Flux Value
%
0.0 ... 100.0
Reactive Current
A
0.0 ... Imax
Actual Speed
1/min
0 ... 60000
Actual Frequency
Hz
0.0 ... 999.99
Actual values of the system
Actual System Value
Hz
0.0 ... 999.99
Actual values of frequency inverter
Digital Inputs (Hardware)
00 ... 255
Actual values (Menu Actual)
339
06/2013
Chapter
CM
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.1
9.1
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.4
9.4
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.3.1
9.1
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter list
No.
244
245
246
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
269
270
273
274
275
277
278
282
283
Actual value parameter
Description
Unit
Display range
Working Hours Counter
h
99999
Operation Hours Counter
h
99999
Capacitor Temperature
deg.C
0 ... Temax
Active Data Set
1 ... 4
Digital Inputs
00 ... 255
± 100.00
Analog Input MFI1A
%
Repetition Frequency Input
Hz
0.0 ... 999.99
Analog Input MFI2A
%
± 100.00
Digital Outputs
00 ... 255
Heat Sink Temperature
deg.C
0 ... Tkmax
Inside Temperature
deg.C
0 ... Timax
Analog Output MFO1A
V
0.0 ... 24.0
PWM-Input
%
0.00 … 100.00
Actual error
FXXXX
Actual error
0 ... 0xFFFF
Warnings
AXXXX
Warnings
0 ... 0xFFFF (bit-coded)
Application Warnings
AXXXX
Application Warnings
0 ... 0xFFFF (bit-coded)
Controller Status
CXXXX
STO Status
XXXX
Frequency MFO1F
Hz
0.00 ... fmax
Reference Bus Frequency
Hz
-1000.00 … 1000.00
Reference Ramp Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
Chapter
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
CM
9.1
CM
9.1
CM
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
Note:
The parameters Current error 260, Warnings 270 and Application Warnings 270 are only accessible Fieldbus. They cannot be accessed via the VPlus PC-Software or the Operator Panel.
No.
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
301
302
310
311
Description
Unit
Actual value memory
Peak Value Vdc
V
Average Value Vdc
V
Peak Value Heat Sink Temp.
deg.C
Average Value Heat Sink Temp.
deg.C
Peak Value Inside Temperature
deg.C
Average Value Inside Temperature
deg.C
Peak Value Iabs.
A
Average Value Iabs
A
Peak Value Active Power pos.
kW
Peak Value Active Power neg.
kW
Average Value Active Power
kW
Peak Value Capacitor Temp.
deg.C
Average Value Capacitor Temp.
deg.C
Energy positive
kWh
Energy negative
kWh
Error list
Last error
h:m; F
Last Error but one
h:m; F
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
340
Display range
Chapter
0.0 ... Udmax
0.0 ... Udmax
0 ... Tkmax
0 ... Tkmax
0 ... Timax
0 ... Timax
0.0 ... oc⋅IFIN
0.0 ... oc⋅IFIN
0.0 ... oc⋅PFIN
0.0 ... oc⋅PFIN
0.0 ... oc⋅PFIN
0 ... Temax
0 ... Temax
0 ... 99999
0 ... 99999
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
9.4
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
13.1
13.1
Actual values (Menu Actual)
Parameter list
No.
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
330
331
332
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
346
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
367
Description
Unit
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
h:m; F
Error environment
DC-Link Voltage
V
Output Voltage
V
Stator Frequency
Hz
Phase current Ia
A
Phase current Ib
A
Phase current Ic
A
rms Current
A
Isd / Reactive Current
A
Isq / Active Current
A
Rotor Magnetizing Current
A
Torque
Nm
Analog Input MFI1A
%
Analog Input MFI2A
%
Analog Output MFO1A
V
DC-link Cap. Temperature
deg.C
Repetition Frequency Output
Hz
Status of Digital Inputs
Status of Digital Outputs
h:m:s.ms
Time since Release
Heat Sink Temperature
deg.C
Inside Temperature
deg.C
Controller Status
Warning Status
Int. Value 1
Int. Value 2
Long Value 1
Long Value 2
Checksum
Error list
No. of Errors
No. of self acknowledged Errors
Error environment
Application Warning State
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
Error
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Actual values (Menu Actual)
341
Display range
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
00000:00; FXXXX
Chapter
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
13.1
0.0 ... Udmax
0.0 ... UFIN
0.00 ... 999.99
0.0 ... Imax
0.0 ... Imax
0.0 ... Imax
0.0 ... Imax
0.0 ... Imax
0.0 ... Imax
0.0 ... Imax
± 9999.9
± 100.00
± 100.00
0.0 ... 24.0
0 ... Temax
0.00 ... 999.99
00 ... 255
00 ... 255
00000:00:00.000
0 ... Tkmax
0 ... Timax
C0000 ... CFFFF
A0000 ... AFFFF
± 32768
± 32768
± 2147483647
± 2147483647
OK / NOK
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
14.1
14.1
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
14.3
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
13.2
0 ... 32767
0 ... 32767
13.1
13.1
A0000 … AFFFF
14.3
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter list
No.
411
Description
Unit
Bus controller
Status Word
Positioning
Display range
7.3.1
9.7
CM
0 ... 0xFFFF
U
Digital outputs
Actual Warning Mask
Actual Appl. Warning Mask
Auto set-up
SETUP Status
System bus
0.000 ... 1⋅106
978
Node-State
-
1…3
979
CAN-State
-
1…3
470
537
627
797
Revolutions
AXXXXXXXX
AXXXX
OK/NOK
CAN bus
1290
Node-State
-
0 … 127
1291
CAN-State
-
0…4
CAN bus
1431
Module Info
Service Interval DC-link
Service Interval Fan
Maintenance Note
%
%
%
Device test status
-
7.6.5.8
7.6.5.9
6.8
9.5
Systemb.
9.5
Systemb.
9.6
CM-CAN
9.6
CM-CAN
0 … 100
0 … 100
M----
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
T----
7.2.3
9.1
Device test
1541
9.1
9.8
Ethernet
Service 1
1530
1531
1533
Chapter
The column “chapter” refers to the chapter number and/or the corresponding document, that contains
a detailed parameter description.
CM:
Please refer to the manual of the used communication profile.
CM-CAN:
Please refer to the CAN communication manual.
CM-PDPV1:
Please refer to the PROFIBUS communication manual.
CM-485:
Please refer to the VABus communication manual.
CM-Modbus:
Please refer to the Modbus communication manual.
Systembus:
Please refer to the Systembus communication manual.
Ethernet:
Please refer to the Ethernet communication manual (i.e. Profinet, VABus/TCP,
Modbus TCP).
1
For maintenance work contact the service of BONFIGLIOLI.
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
342
Actual values (Menu Actual)
Parameter list
15.2
Parameters (Menu PARA)
No.
0
1
10
12
15
16
27
28
29
30
34
39
48
Parameters
Description
Unit
Inverter data
Serial Number
Optional Modules
RS485/RS232
CM: VABus Baud Rate
Inverter data
Inverter Software Version
Copyright
Power Module Software Version
Set Password
Control Level
User Name
Configuration
Program(ming)
Fan
Switch-On Temperature
deg.C
Traverse function
Reference Frequency
Digital inputs
Handshake Traverse Function
Frequency Motorpoti Up
Frequency Motorpoti Down
-
Setting range
Characters
Characters
Selection
Chapter
7.1
7.1
CM-CAN
Characters
Characters
Characters
0 ... 999
1 ... 3
32 characters
Selection
0 ... 9999
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1.3
7.1.1
7.1
7.1.2
7.1.4
0 ... 60
7.10.2
Selection
7.10.8
Selection
Selection
Selection
66 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 1
-
Selection
67 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 2
-
Selection
Start Clockwise
Start Anticlockwise
Data Set Change-Over 1
Data Set Change-Over 2
PercentMotorpoti Up
Percent Motorpoti Down
Fixed Percent Change-Over 1
Fixed Percent Change-Over 2
JOG Start
Start 3-Wire Ctrl.
Brake Chopper Release
Error Acknowledgment
Electronic gear
125 Source Master Reference
Digital inputs
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
7.6.6.12
7.5.3.3.1
7.5.3.3.1
7.6.6.5,
7.5.1.3
7.6.6.5,
7.5.1.3
7.6.6.2
7.6.6.2
7.6.6.11
7.6.6.11
7.5.3.3.2
7.5.3.3.2
7.6.6.6
7.6.6.6
7.5.1.6
0
7.6.6.13
7.6.6.8
Selection
7.5.4
131 Fixed Frequency Change-Over 3
-
Selection
7.6.6.5,
7.5.1.3
Digital inputs
164 n-/T-Control Change-Over
183 External Error
204 Thermal contact for P570
-
Selection
Selection
Selection
7.6.6.10
7.6.6.15
7.6.6.9
49
62
63
68
69
70
71
72
73
75
76
81
87
95
103
Parameters (Menu PARA)
343
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter list
Parameters
Description
Unit
Setting range
Actual value memory
237 Reset Memory
Selection
CANopen/CAN system bus
No.
276 CAN Interface (CM-CAN/X12)
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
383
384
-
Selection
Rated motor parameters
Rated Voltage
V
0.17⋅UFIN ... 2⋅UFIN
Rated Current
A
0.01⋅IFIN ... 10⋅ oc⋅IFIN
Rated Speed
U/min 30 … 60000
No. of Pole Pairs
1 ... 24
Rated Cosine Phi
0.01 ... 1.00
Rated Frequency
Hz
10.00 ... 1000.00
0.1⋅PFIN ... 10⋅PFIN
Rated Mech. Power
kW
Further motor parameters
Stator Resistance
mOhm 0 ... 65535
Leakage Coeff.
%
1.0 ... 20.0
Voltage Constant
mVmin 0.0 … 6500.0
Stator Inductance
mH
0.1 … 500.0
CAN bus
385 CAN Baud Rate
-
Selection
387 CAN Node Number
-
-1 … 127
388 Error Behaviour
-
Selection
System data
389 Factor Actual System Value
Profibus
-100.000 … 100.000
391 Profibus Node-ID
-
0…126
-
Selection
9.4
6.2.10.2
CM-CAN
7.2.1
7.2.1
7.2.1
7.2.1
7.2.1
7.2.1
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.2
7.2.2
7.2.2
6.2.10.2
CM-CAN
6.2.10.2
CM-CAN
CM-CAN
7.10.9
6.2.10.2
CM-PDPV1
Bus controller
392 State transition 5
Chapter
CM
RS485/RS232
394 VABus-CM Node-ID
1 … 30
395 Protocol (CM/X21)
Selection
Pulse width modulation
400 Switching Frequency
Selection
401 Min. Switching Frequency
Selection
Error/warning behavior
405 Warning Limit Short Term Ixt
%
6 ... 100
406 Warning Limit Long Term Ixt
%
6 ... 100
407 Warning Limit Heat Sink Temp.
deg.C -25 ... 0
408 Warning Limit Inside Temp.
deg.C -25 ... 0
409 Controller-Status Message
Selection
Bus controller
410 Control Word
0 … 0xFFFF
411 Status Word
0 … 0xFFFF
412 Local/Remote
Selection
RS485/RS232
413 VABus-CM Watchdog Timer
s
0 … 1000
Special functions/dataset changeover
414 Data Set Selection
Selection
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
344
6.2.10.2
CM-485
7.10.1
7.10.1
7.4.1
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.3.1
CM
CM-485
CM
Parameters (Menu PARA)
Parameter list
Parameters
Description
Unit
Setting range
Error/warning behavior
417 Frequency Switch-off Limit
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
Frequency Limits
No.
Chapter
7.4.4
418 Minimum Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
7.5.1.1
419 Maximum Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
7.5.1.1
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
430
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
Frequency ramps
Acceleration (Clockwise)
Hz/s
0.00 ... 9999.99
Deceleration (Clockwise)
Hz/s
-0.01 ... 9999.99
Acceleration Anticlockwise
Hz/s
-0.01 ... 9999.99
Deceleration Anticlockwise
Hz/s
-0.01 ... 9999.99
Emergency Stop Clockwise
Hz/s
0.01 ... 9999.99
Emergency Stop Anticlockwise
Hz/s
0.01 ... 9999.99
Maximum Leading
Hz
0.01 ... 999.99
Ramp Rise Time
ms
0 ... 10000
Traverse function
Operation Mode
Selection
Ramp-up Time
s
0.01 … 320.00
Ramp-down Time
s
0.01 … 320.00
Traverse Amplitude
%
0.01 … 50.00
Proportional Step
%
0.01 … 50.00
PID controller (technology controller)
Operation Mode Actual Value FailSelection
ure
Max. I-component
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
Maximum Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
Minimum Frequency
Hz
-999.99 … 0.00
Amplification
-15.00 ... 15.00
Integral Time
ms
0 ... 32767
Derivative Time
ms
0 … 1000
Reference frequency channel/blocking frequencies
1st Blocking Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
2nd Blocking Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
Frequency Hysteresis
Hz
0.00 ... 100.00
Multifunction input 1 (MFI1)
Tolerance Band
%
0.00 ... 25.00
Filter Time Constant
ms
Selection
Operation Mode MFI1
Selection
Error/Warning Behaviour
Selection
Characteristic Curve Point X1
%
0.00 ... 100.00
Characteristic Curve Point Y1
%
-100.00 ... 100.00
Characteristic Curve Point X2
%
0.00 ... 100.00
Characteristic Curve Point Y2
%
-100.00 ... 100.00
Positioning
Operation Mode
Selection
Signal Source
Selection
Positioning Distance
U
0.000 ... 1 106
Signal Correction
ms
-327.68 ... 327.67
Load Correction
-32768 ... 32767
Activity after Positioning
Selection
Waiting Time
ms
0 ... 3.6 106
Parameters (Menu PARA)
345
06/2013
7.5.1.4
7.5.1.4
7.5.1.4
7.5.1.4
7.5.1.4
7.5.1.4
7.5.1.4
7.5.1.4
7.10.8
7.10.8
7.10.8
7.10.8
7.10.8
7.9.3
7.9.3
7.9.3
7.9.3
7.9.3
7.9.3
7.9.3
7.5.1.5
7.5.1.5
7.5.1.5
7.6.1.1.2
7.6.1.1.3
7.6.1
7.6.1.1.3
7.6.1.1.2
7.6.1.1.2
7.6.1.1.2
7.6.1.1.2
7.3.7
7.3.7
7.3.7
7.3.7
7.3.7
7.3.7
7.3.7
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter list
No.
473
474
475
476
477
478
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
492
493
494
495
496
497
Parameters
Description
Unit
Setting range
Motor potentiometer
Ramp Frequency-Motorpoti
Hz/s
0.01 ... 999.99
Operation Mode
Selection
Frequency reference channel
Reference Frequency Source 1
Selection
Reference percentage channel
Reference Percentage Source 1
Selection
Ref. perc. val. channel/ramp
Gradient Percentage Ramp
%/s
0 ... 60000
PID controller (technology controller)
Actual Percentage Source
Selection
Fixed frequencies
Fixed Frequency 1
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
Fixed Frequency 2
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
Fixed Frequency 3
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
Fixed Frequency 4
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
Reference Frequency RAM
Hz
-999.99 … 999.99
Fixed Frequency 5
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
Fixed Frequency 6
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
Fixed Frequency 7
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
Fixed Frequency 8
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
JOG Frequency
Hz
-999.99 ... 999.99
Frequency reference channel
Reference Frequency Source 2
Selection
Operation Mode
Selection
Reference percentage channel
Reference Percentage Source 2
Selection
Operation Mode
Selection
PWM input/repetition frequency input/pulse train
Operation mode IN2D
Selection
Repetition frequency input
Rep.Freq. : Divider
1 ... 8192
Brake Chopper
Chapter
7.5.3.3.1
7.5.3
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.2.4
7.9.3
7.5.1.3
7.5.1.3
7.5.1.3
7.5.1.3
CM
7.5.1.3
7.5.1.3
7.5.1.3
7.5.1.3
7.5.1.6
7.5.1
7.5.1.2
7.5.2
7.5.2.2
7.6.7
7.6.7.2
V
AGL202: 225.0 … 1000.0
AGL402: 325.0 … 1000.0
7.10.4
V
506 Trigger Threshold
AGL202: 225.0 … 1000.0
AGL402: 325.0 … 1000.0
7.10.5
Motor chopper
507 Trigger Threshold
Motor potentiometer
509 Ramp Percentage-Motorpoti
%/s
Digital outputs
510 Setting Frequency
Hz
Setting Frequency Switch Off Del517
Hz
ta
Percentage value limits
518 Minimum Reference Percentage
%
519 Maximum Reference Percentage
%
Fixed percentages
520 Fixed Percentage 1
%
521 Fixed Percentage 2
%
522 Fixed Percentage 3
%
523 Fixed Percentage 4
%
524 Reference Percentage RAM
%
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
346
0.00 … 600.00
7.5.3.3.2
0.00 ... 999.99
7.6.5.2
0.00 … 999.99
7.6.5.2
0.00 ... 300.00
0.00 ... 300.00
7.5.2.1
7.5.2.1
-300.00
-300.00
-300.00
-300.00
-300.00
7.5.2.3
7.5.2.3
7.5.2.3
7.5.2.3
CM
...
...
...
...
...
300.00
300.00
300.00
300.00
300.00
Parameters (Menu PARA)
Parameter list
Parameters
No.
Description
Unit
Setting range
529 Actual Percentage RAM
%
-300.00 ... 300.00
Digital outputs
531 Op. Mode OUT1D (X13.5)
Selection
532 Op. Mode OUT2D (X10/Relay)
Selection
533 Op. Mode OUT3D (X11.6)
Selection
Error/warning behavior
535 Op. Mode ext. Error
Selection
536 Create Warning Mask
Selection
Digital outputs
Reference Value Reached: Toler549
%
0.01 ... 20.00
ance Band
Multifunction output 1 (MFO1)
550 Operation Mode MFO1 (X13.6)
Selection
551 Analog: Voltage 100%
V
0.0 ... 22.0
552 Analog: Voltage 0%
V
0.0 ... 22.0
553 Analog: Source MFO1A
Selection
554 Digital: Source MFO1D
Selection
555 RF/PT: Output Value MFO1F
Selection
556 RF: Division Marks
30 ... 8192
557 PT: Scaling Frequency
0 … 32000
Digital input/output
558 Operation Mode Terminal X11.6
Selection
559 Digital Inputs PNP/NPN
Selection
Multifunction input 2 (MFI2)
560 Tolerance Band
%
0.00 … 25.00
561 Filter Time Constant
Selection
562 Operation Mode MFI2
Selection
563 Error/Warning Behaviour
Selection
564 Characteristic Curve Point X1
%
0.00 … 100.00
565 Characteristic Curve Point Y1
%
-100.00 … 100.00
566 Characteristic Curve Point X2
%
0.00 … 100.00
567 Characteristic Curve Point Y2
%
-100.00 … 100.00
Error/warning behavior
570 Operation Mode Motor Temp.
Selection
Motor Protection
571 Operation Mode
Selection
572 Frequency Limit
%
0 ... 300
Intelligent current limits
573 Operation Mode
Selection
574 Power Limit
%
40.00 ... 95.00
575 Limitation Time
min
5 ... 300
Error/warning behavior
576 Phase Supervision
Selection
578 Allowed No. of Auto-Acknowl.
0 ... 20
579 Restart Delay
ms
0 ... 1000
Pulse width modulation
580 Reduction Limit Ti/Tc
deg.C -25 ... 0
V-belt monitoring
581 Operation Mode
Selection
582 Trigger Limit Iactive
%
0.1 ... 100.0
583 Delay Time
s
0.1 ... 600.0
Parameters (Menu PARA)
347
06/2013
Chapter
CM
7.6.5
7.6.5
7.6.5
7.4.5
7.6.5.8
7.6.5.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.6.6
7.6.2.1.2
7.6.2.1.3
7.6.2
7.6.2.1.3
7.6.2.1.2
7.6.2.1.2
7.6.2.1.2
7.6.2.1.2
7.4.6
7.10.6.1
7.10.6.1
7.9.1
7.9.1
7.9.1
7.4.7
7.4.8
7.4.8
7.10.1
7.10.7
7.10.7
7.10.7
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter list
Parameters
Description
Unit
V/f characteristic
600 Starting Voltage
V
601 Voltage Rise
%
602 Rise Frequency
%
0.0 ... 100.0
-100 ... 200
0 ... 100
7.7
7.7
7.7
603 Cut-Off Voltage
AGL202: 30.0 ... 280.0
AGL402: 60.0 ... 560.0
7.7
No.
V
Setting range
604 Cut-Off Frequency
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
605 Dyn. Voltage Pre-Control
%
0 ... 200
606 Type V/f characteristic
Selection
I 2 t Monitoring
608 Thermal Time Constant Motor
min
1 … 240
609 Thermal Time Constant Rotor
s
1 … 600
Current limit value controller
610 Operation Mode
Selection
611 Amplification
0.01 ... 30.00
612 Integral Time
ms
1 ... 10000
0.0 ... oc⋅IFIN
613 Current Limit
A
614 Frequency Limit
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
I 2 t Monitoring
615 Warning Limit Motor I2t
%
6 … 100
PID controller (technology controller)
616 Backlash Motor Power of
Selection
Error/warning behavior
617 Max. Temp. Motor Winding
°C
0 … 200
PID controller (technology controller)
618 Backlash
%
0.00 … 30.00
Starting behavior
620 Operation Mode
Selection
621 Amplification
0.01 ... 10.00
622 Integral Time
ms
1 ... 30000
623 Starting Current
A
0.0 ... oc⋅IFIN
624 Frequency Limit
Hz
0.00 ... 100.00
625 Brake Release Time
ms
-5000 … 5000
Warning application
626 Create Appl. Warning Mask
Selection
Stopping behavior
630 Operation Mode
Selection
Direct current brake
0.00 ... √2⋅IFIN
631 Braking Current
A
632 Braking Time
s
0.0 ... 200.0
633 Demagnetizing Time
s
0.1 ... 30.0
634 Amplification
0.00 ... 10.00
635 Integral Time
ms
0 ... 1000
Stopping behavior
Switch-Off Threshold Stop Func637
%
0.0 ... 100.0
tion
638 Holding Time Stop Function
s
0.0 ... 200.0
Flying Start
645 Operation Mode Flying Start
Selection
Auto start
651 Operation Mode
Selection
PWM input
652 PWM Offset
%
-100.00 … 100.00
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
348
Chapter
7.7
7.8.1
7.7
7.10.6.2
7.10.6.2
7.9.4.2
7.9.4.2
7.9.4.2
7.9.4.2
7.9.4.2
7.10.6.2
7.9.3
7.4.6
7.9.3
7.3.2
7.3.2
7.3.2
7.3.2
7.3.2
7.3.2
7.6.5.9
7.3.3
7.3.6
7.3.6
7.3.6
7.3.6
7.3.6
7.3.3
7.3.3
7.3.5
7.3.4
7.6.7.1
Parameters (Menu PARA)
Parameter list
Parameters
No.
Description
653 PWM-Amplification
Unit
%
Pulse train
654 Pulse Train Scaling Frequency
Slip compensation
660 Operation Mode
661 Amplification
%
662 Max. Slip Ramp
Hz/s
663 Frequency Lower Limit
Hz
Voltage controller
670 Operation Mode
671 Mains Failure Threshold
V
672 Reference Mains Support Value
V
673 Mains Support Deceleration
Hz/s
674 Acceleration on Mains Resumption
Hz/s
675 Shutdown Threshold
Hz
676 Reference Shutdown Value
V
677 Amplification
678 Integral Time
ms
680 Reference DC-Link Limitation
V
Setting range
5.0 … 1000.0
0 … 32000
7.6.7.3
Selection
0.0 ... 300.0
0.01 ... 650.00
0.01 ... 999.99
7.9.4.1
7.9.4.1
7.9.4.1
7.9.4.1
Selection
-200.0 ... -50.0
-200.0 ... -10.0
0.01 ... 9999.99
0.00 ... 9999.99
0.00 ... 999.99
7.9.2
7.9.2
7.9.2
7.9.2
7.9.2
7.9.2
AGL202: 225.0 … 387.5
AGL402: 325.0 … 775.0
7.9.2
0.00 ... 30.00
0 ... 10000
7.9.2
7.9.2
AGL202: 225.0 … 387.5
AGL402: 325.0 … 775.0
7.9.2
681 Max. Frequency Rise
Hz
0.00 ... 999.99
683 Gen. Ref. Current Limit
A
0.0 ... oc⋅IFIN
Electronic gear
685 Gear Factor Numerator
-300.00 ... 300.00
686 Gear Factor Denominator
0.01 ... 300.00
687 Analog factor at 100%
0.00 ... 100.00
688 Analog factor at 0%
0.00 ... 100.00
689 Operation Mode
Selection
Current controller
700 Amplification
0.00 ... 8.00
701 Integral Time
ms
0.00 ... 10.00
Further motor parameters
716 Rated magnetising current
A
0.01⋅IFIN ... oc⋅IFIN
Field controller
717 Flux Reference Value
%
0.01 ... 300.00
Further motor parameters
718 Rated Slip Correction Factor
%
0.01 ... 300.00
Frequency Limits
719 Slip Frequency
%
0 ... 10000
Speed controller
720 Operation Mode
Selection
721 Amplification 1(|f| & lt; P738)
0.00 ... 200.00
722 Integral Time 1(|f| & lt; P738)
ms
0 ... 60000
723 Amplification 2(|f| & gt; P738)
0.00 ... 200.00
724 Integral Time 2(|f| & gt; P738)
ms
0 ... 60000
Acceleration pre-control
725 Operation Mode
Selection
726 Minimum Acceleration
Hz/s
0.1 ... 6500.0
727 Mech. Time Constant
ms
1 ... 60000
Speed controller
728 Current Limit
A
0.0 ... oc⋅IFIN
729 Current Limit Generator Op.
A
-0.01 ... oc⋅IFIN
Parameters (Menu PARA)
349
Chapter
7.6.7.1
06/2013
7.9.2
7.9.2
7.5.4.3.1
7.5.4.3.1
7.5.4.3.2
7.5.4.3.2
7.5.4.2
7.9.5.1
7.9.5.1
7.2.2
7.9.5.5
7.2.2
7.5.1.1
7.9.5.3
7.9.5.3
7.9.5.3
7.9.5.3
7.9.5.3
7.9.5.4
7.9.5.4
7.9.5.4
7.9.5.3.1
7.9.5.3.1
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter list
No.
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
746
748
750
752
753
755
756
Parameters
Description
Unit
Torque Limit
%
Torque Limit Generator Operation
%
P-Comp. Torque Upper Limit
%
P-Comp. Torque Lower Limit
%
Isq Limit Source Motor Op.
Isq Limit Source Generator Op.
Torque Limit Source Motor Op.
Torque Limit Source Gen. Op.
Speed Control Switch-Over Limit
Hz
Power Limit
kW
Power Limit Generator Operation
kW
Field controller
Amplification
Integral Time
ms
Ref. Isd Upper Limit
A
Ref. Isd Lower Limit
A
Current controller
Cross-Coupling Factor
%
Speed controller
Backlash Damping
%
Modulation controller
Reference Modulation
%
Integral Time
ms
Operation Mode
Reference Imr Lower Limit
A
Control Deviation Limitation
%
Torque controller
767 Frequency Upper Limit
Hz
768 Frequency Lower Limit
Hz
769 Frequency upper limit source
770 Frequency lower limit source
Starting behavior
779 Min. Flux-Formation Time
ms
780 Max. Flux-Formation Time
ms
781 Current during Flux-Formation
A
Auto set-up
796 SETUP Selection
-
Setting range
0.00 ... 650.00
0.00 ... 650.00
0.00 ... 650.00
0.00 ... 650.00
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
0.00 ... 999.99
0.00 ... 2⋅ oc⋅PFIN
0.00 ... 2⋅ oc⋅PFIN
Chapter
7.9.5.3.1
7.9.5.3.1
7.9.5.3.1
7.9.5.3.1
7.9.5.3.2
7.9.5.3.2
7.9.5.3.2
7.9.5.3.2
7.9.5.3
7.9.5.3.1
7.9.5.3.1
0.0 ... 100.0
0.0 ... 1000.0
0.0 … oc⋅IFIN
-IFIN ... IFIN
7.9.5.5
7.9.5.5
7.9.5.5.1
7.9.5.5.1
0.00 … 300.00
7.9.5.1
0 ... 300
7.9.5.3
3.00 ... 105.00
0.0 ... 1000.00
Selection
0.01⋅IFIN ... oc⋅IFIN
0.00 ... 100.00
-999.99 ...
999ohne.99
-999.99 ... 999.99
Selection
Selection
1 ... 10000
1 ... 10000
0.1⋅IFIN ... oc⋅IFIN
900 Node-ID
-
-1 ... 63
903 Baud-Rate
-
Selection
ms
ms
-
3500 ... 50000
0 ... 2047
0 ... 50000
0 ... 2047
0 ... 2047
Selection
0 ... 2047
0 ... 2047
Boot-Up Delay
SYNC-Identifier
SYNC-Time
RxSDO1-Identifier
TxSDO1-Identifier
SDO2 Set Active
RxPDO1 Identifier
TxPDO1 Identifier
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
350
7.9.5.2
7.9.5.2
7.9.5.2.3
7.9.5.2.3
7.3.2
7.3.2
7.3.2
6.8
Selection
System bus
904
918
919
921
922
923
924
925
7.9.5.6
7.9.5.6
7.9.5.6
7.9.5.6.1
7.9.5.6.1
6.2.10.2
Systemb.
6.2.10.2
Systemb.
Systemb.
Parameters (Menu PARA)
Parameter list
Parameters
Description
Unit
Setting range
RxPDO2 Identifier
0 ... 2047
TxPDO2 Identifier
0 ... 2047
RxPDO3 Identifier
0 ... 2047
TxPDO3 Identifier
0 ... 2047
TxPDO1 Function
Selection
TxPDO1 Time
ms
0 ... 50000
TxPDO2 Function
Selection
TxPDO2 Time
ms
0 ... 50000
TxPDO3 Function
Selection
TxPDO3 Time
ms
0 ... 50000
RxPDO1 Function
Selection
RxPDO2 Function
Selection
RxPDO3 Function
Selection
SYNC Timeout
ms
0 ... 60000
RxPDO1 Timeout
ms
0 ... 60000
RxPDO2 Timeout
ms
0 ... 60000
RxPDO3 Timeout
ms
0 ... 60000
Selection
TxPDO1 Boolean1
Selection
TxPDO1 Boolean2
Selection
TxPDO1 Boolean3
Selection
TxPDO1 Boolean4
Selection
TxPDO1 Word1
Selection
TxPDO1 Word2
Selection
TxPDO1 Word3
Selection
TxPDO1 Word4
Selection
TxPDO1 Long1
Selection
TxPDO1 Long2
Selection
TxPDO2 Boolean1
Selection
TxPDO2 Boolean2
Selection
TxPDO2 Boolean3
Selection
TxPDO2 Boolean4
Selection
TxPDO2 Word1
Selection
TxPDO2 Word2
Selection
TxPDO2 Word3
Selection
TxPDO2 Word4
Selection
TxPDO2 Long1
Selection
TxPDO2 Long2
Selection
TxPDO3 Boolean1
Selection
TxPDO3 Boolean2
Selection
TxPDO3 Boolean3
Selection
TxPDO3 Boolean4
Selection
TxPDO3 Word1
Selection
TxPDO3 Word2
Selection
TxPDO3 Word3
Selection
TxPDO3 Word4
Selection
TxPDO3 Long1
Selection
TxPDO3 Long2
Emergency Reaction
Selection
Operation Mode
Selection
Further motor parameters
1190 Stator Resistance
Ohm
0.001 … 100.000
No.
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
941
942
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
972
973
974
975
976
977
989
1180
Parameters (Menu PARA)
351
06/2013
Chapter
Systemb.
7.2.2
Operating Instructions Agile
Parameter list
Parameters
No.
Description
Unit
1192 Peak Current
A
Mux/DeMux
1250 Mux Input Index (write)
-
1251 Mux Input Index (read)
-
1252 Mux Inputs
1253 DeMux Input
-
Setting range
0.01% IFIN…
100000% oc IFIN
EEPROM:
RAM:
EEPROM:
RAM:
Selection
Selection
0
17
0
17
…
…
…
…
Chapter
7.2.2
16
33
16
33
7.6.6.17
7.6.6.17
7.6.6.17
7.6.6.17
User warnings
1363 User warning 1
1364 User warning 2
Selection
Selection
7.6.6.14
7.6.6.14
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
0.01 Hz…999.99 Hz
7.10.12
7.10.12
7.10.12
7.10.12
7.10.12
1375
1376
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
Convert PDP/internal
In-F-PDP-word1
In-F-PDP-word2
In-F-intern-long1
In-F-intern-long2
Convert-Reference
Hz
Modbus (RTU/ASCII)
Modbus Parity
Modbus Address
CANopen
CANopen 0x3008 Perc. Actual
Value Source
CANopen 0x3011 Act.ValueWord 1
CANopen 0x3012 Act.ValueWord 2
CANopen 0x3021 Act.ValueLong 1
CANopen 0x3022 Act. ValueLong 2
-
1420 CANopen Mux Input Index (write)
-
1421 CANopen Mux Input Index (read)
-
1422 CANopen Mux Inputs
CANopen Obj 0x3007 Actual Per1423
centage Value Source
1451 OS Synctime
CANopen
1432 IP Address
1433 Netmask
1434 Gateway
1435 DNS Server
1436 DHCP Option
1437 IP Command
1438 Reload IP-Settings
1440 Email function
1441 Email Text (Body)
VABus (X21)
1500 VABus-X21 Baud rate
1501 VABus-X21 Node-ID
1502 VABus-X21 Watchdog Timer
s
Modbus (RTU/ASCII)
1503 Modbus Mode
1504 Modbus Baud rate
Baud
1505 Modbus Watchdog Timer
s
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
352
6.2.10.2
CM-Modbus
Selection
1 … 247
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
Selection
EEPROM:
RAM:
EEPROM:
RAM:
Selection
0
17
0
17
…
…
…
…
16
33
16
33
CM-CAN
Selection
700 … 900
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
Selection
Selection
0…1
Selection
Text
Ethernet
Selection
1 … 30
0 … 1000
6.2.10.2
CM-485
CM-485
Selection
Selection
0 … 1000
6.2.10.2
CM-Modbus
CM-Modbus
Parameters (Menu PARA)
Parameter list
Parameters
No.
1510
1511
1520
1534
1535
1539
1540
1542
1543
1550
1551
1552
Description
Unit
Standby
Time until Keypad Standby
Min
Standby Mode
Real-time tuning
Operation Mode Real-Time Tuning
Service1)
Operation Mode Service Interval
DC-link
Operation Mode Service Interval
Fan
Reset Service Intervals
Device test
Start device test manual
Start device test automatic
Base Parameter Actual System
Value
Energy saving function
Operation Mode Energy Saving
Function
Flux Reduction
%
Energy Saving FunctionOn
-
Setting range
Chapter
0 … 60
Selection
8.3
8.3
Selection
7.9.6
Selection
10.3.1
Selection
10.3.2
Selection
10.3.3
Selection
Selection
7.2.3.4
7.2.3.5
0 … 1600
7.10.9
Selection
8.1
0 … 100
Selection
8.1
8.1
1) For maintenance work contact the service of BONFIGLIOLI.
The column “chapter” refers to the chapter number and/or the corresponding document, that contains
a detailed parameter description.
CM:
Please refer to the manual of the used communication profile.
CM-CAN:
Please refer to the CAN communication manual.
CM-PDPV1:
Please refer to the PROFIBUS communication manual.
CM-485:
Please refer to the VABus communication manual.
CM-Modbus:
Please refer to the Modbus communication manual.
Systembus:
Please refer to the Systembus communication manual.
Ethernet:
Please refer to the Ethernet communication manual (i.e. Profinet, VABus/TCP,
Modbus TCP).
Parameters (Menu PARA)
353
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Index
Index
A
Acceleration (Ramps)............................... 147
Acceleration pre-control ........................... 235
Acknowledge error messages ................... 202
automatic ............................................ 142
via keypad ............................................. 98
via logic signal ..................................... 201
via Parameter 34 Program(ming) ........... 113
Actual values
memory .............................................. 269
of frequency inverter ............................ 266
of machine .......................................... 268
of system ............................................ 269
Adaptor USB ........................................... 308
Analog inputs ............................................ 84
Analog outputs .......................................... 84
Assembly
Cold Plate
size 1............................................... 322
size 2............................................... 322
size 3............................................... 323
DIN rail
size 1............................................... 328
Feed-through
size 1............................................... 311
size 2............................................... 312
size 3............................................... 314
Standard
size 1................................................. 28
size 2................................................. 29
size 3................................................. 30
Vibration-proof
size 1............................................... 324
size 2............................................... 325
size 3............................................... 326
Auto set-up............................................. 108
Auto start ............................................... 129
B
Blocking frequencies ................................ 150
Blocking Frequencies ................................. 86
Brake
Control via digital output ...................... 191
Direct current brake ............................. 131
Brake chopper......................................... 241
Release ............................................... 204
Brake resistor.......................................... 241
connection ............................................ 41
dimensioning ....................................... 242
C
Cable length ........................................ 39, 40
CANopen .................................................. 75
CE conformity ......................................... 278
Cold Plate ............................................... 318
size 1 .................................................. 322
size 2 .................................................. 322
size 3 .................................................. 323
Commissioning .......................................... 51
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Communication ......................................... 98
modules .............................................. 308
Setup ............................................... 55, 74
Compressor, Application example ............. 105
Conductor cross-section ............................. 34
Configuration .......................................... 111
Connection ............................................... 32
Control ................................................... 122
Control functions ..................................... 212
Intelligent current limits ........................ 212
PID ..................................................... 219
Power failure regulation ........................ 216
Voltage controller ................................. 214
Control level ........................................... 110
Control panel
Lock....................... 123, 144, 153, 161, 163
Control signals ........................................ 196
Control terminals
Setting options ...................................... 47
Standard settings ................................... 43
Conveying plant, Application example ....... 104
Copy parameter values ............................ 253
Copying with Memory Card
Warning message ................................ 255
Copyright.................................................. 13
Current controller .................................... 228
Current limit value controller .................... 227
Current limitation .................................... 192
D
Data set ............................................ 94, 203
changeover ......................................... 203
Deceleration (Ramps) .............................. 147
Decommissioning ...................................... 22
Demultiplexer ......................................... 205
Designated use ......................................... 15
Device test ............................................. 117
Diagnosis................................................ 339
Digital input 2
Operation mode ................................... 207
Pulse train ........................................... 209
PWM ................................................... 208
Repetition frequency ............................ 208
Digital input/output ................................. 185
Digital inputs...................................... 83, 196
Evaluation logic....................... 48, 186, 196
Logic signal ......................................... 196
Digital outputs ................................... 83, 186
Logic signals ........................................ 187
Dimensions ............................................... 27
DIN rail .................................................. 328
size 1 .................................................. 328
Direct current brake ................................ 131
Direction of rotation ......................... 147, 155
Check ................................................... 71
Start clockwise, start anticlockwise . 199, 200
DMC (Direct Moment Control)................... 111
354
Parameters (Menu PARA)
Index
E
Electrical connection .................................. 32
Electrical connections ................................ 20
Electrical Installation.................................. 31
Safety ................................................... 31
Electronic gear ................................... 95, 163
Actual value......................................... 166
Gear factor .......................................... 165
Offset ................................................. 166
Operation modes ................................. 163
EMC ......................................................... 32
Emergency stop ...................................... 148
Enable
Status of inputs ................................... 268
Energy saving .................................... 97, 258
Energy saving function............................. 258
Error behavior ......................................... 135
Error environment ................................... 333
Error list ................................................. 329
Error message
Memory card copying ........................... 255
Error messages ....................................... 330
of auto-setup ......................................... 70
Error protocol.......................................... 329
Error/Warning behaviour
Multifunction input 1 ............................ 174
Multifunction input 2 ............................ 180
External error................................... 137, 204
External fan ............................................ 192
External power supply ............................... 49
F
Factory reset
Complete reset .................................... 113
Factory setting
single parameter via keypad ................... 60
Fan
external .............................................. 192
Switch-On Temperature ........................ 240
Fan, Application example ........... 100, 101, 103
Feed-through
size 1 .................................................. 311
size 2 .................................................. 312
size 3 .................................................. 314
Feed-through assembly............................ 310
Field bus................................................... 98
Field controller ........................................ 236
Field-orientated control
Asynchronous motor ............................ 111
Synchronous motor .............................. 111
Filter time constant.................................. 179
Multifunction input 1 ............................ 173
Multifunction input 2 ............................ 179
Fixed Frequencies...................................... 86
Fixed frequency ...................................... 146
Changeover .................................. 147, 201
Fixed percentage ..................................... 154
Changeover .................................. 155, 201
Flux forming finished ............................... 191
Flux reduction ......................................... 259
Flying Start ............................................. 129
Frequency
Parameters (Menu PARA)
Limits .................................................. 145
Ramps ................................................ 147
Frequency Limit ...................................... 247
Function table ......................................... 205
G
Gear factor ............................................. 165
fixed ................................................... 165
variable ............................................... 165
General information about the documentation
............................................................ 11
Group drive .............................................. 40
H
Hysteresis ............................................... 150
Frequency hysteresis ............................ 150
of analog input signal .................... 172, 179
I
Installation .......................................... 20, 27
mechanical ............................................ 27
Intelligent current limits ........................... 212
J
JOG .................................................. 59, 150
Start ................................................... 201
K
Keypad ..................................................... 52
KTY ........................................................ 140
L
Leading .................................................. 149
M
Machine data .......................................... 113
Mains Connection .................................33, 36
Maintenance ........................................... 272
DC-link ................................................ 274
Fan ..................................................... 275
Master drive, Traverse function ................ 250
Maximum frequency ................................ 145
Mechanical installation
Safety ................................................... 27
Memory card........................................... 308
Menu ....................................................... 52
Minimum frequency ................................. 145
Modbus .................................................... 77
Modulation controller ............................... 237
Monitoring
Analog input signal................. 173, 174, 180
Controller intervention .......................... 136
Effective current .................................. 250
Heat sink temperature .......................... 136
Inside temperature .............................. 136
Load behavior ...................................... 250
Motor temperature ........................ 137, 202
Output frequency ................................. 137
Overload ............................................. 135
Phase failure........................................ 141
Warning mask ..................................... 192
Warning mask application ..................... 195
Monitoring functions .................................. 96
Motor chopper ........................................ 243
Motor connection ...................................... 38
Motor data .............................................. 113
Motor potentiometer ................... 85, 156, 200
control via digital inputs........................ 157
355
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Index
control via operator panel ..................... 160
Motor protection
motor circuit breaker ............................ 244
Motor Protection ..................................... 244
Motor Protection by I2t- Monitoring ........ 248
Mounting .................................................. 27
Multifunction input .................................. 168
Multifunction input 1
Characteristic....................................... 170
Error/Warning behaviour ...................... 174
Filter time constant .............................. 173
set as analog input ............................... 169
set as digital input................................ 174
Tolerance band .................................... 172
Multifunction input 2
Characteristic....................................... 177
Error/Warning behaviour ...................... 180
Filter time constant .............................. 179
set as analog input ............................... 175
set as digital input................................ 181
Tolerance band .................................... 178
Multifunction output ................................ 181
Analog ................................................ 183
Characteristic....................................... 182
Digital ................................................. 184
Operation mode ................................... 182
Pulse train ........................................... 185
Repetition frequency ............................ 184
Multiplexer.............................................. 205
N
NPN .......................................... 48, 186, 196
O
OC (overload capacity) ............................ 278
Operator panel .......................................... 52
Menu .................................................... 52
Options .................................................. 291
Assembly
Variants ........................................... 309
Brake resistor ...................................... 296
Communication module ........................ 308
DIN rail ............................................... 328
Input filter ........................................... 301
Line choke ........................................... 298
Resource pack ..................................... 308
Shield sheet......................................... 291
USB adaptor ........................................ 308
Overload capacity .................................... 278
P
Parameter
Copy ................................................... 253
List ..................................................... 343
Password ................................................ 112
Percentage
Limits .................................................. 154
Ramps ................................................ 155
Reference value ................................... 151
PID controller.......................................... 219
PLC ........................................................ 205
PNP........................................... 48, 186, 196
Positioning .............................................. 132
Poti F ....................................................... 56
Operating Instructions Agile
06/2013
Poti P ....................................................... 58
Power failure regulation ........................... 216
Profibus .................................................... 75
Protective functions ................................... 96
PT1000................................................... 141
PTC ........................................................ 140
Pulse train
Input .................................................. 209
Output ................................................ 185
Pulse train input ........................................ 87
Pulse width modulation ............................ 239
Pump, Application example ................. 99, 101
PWM input ......................................... 86, 208
R
Ramp
Frequency ........................................... 147
Percentage .......................................... 155
Ramp rise time ........................................ 149
Rated motor parameters .......................... 113
Reference frequency .................................. 81
inverted .............................................. 145
Reference frequency channel ................... 142
Reference percentage
inverted .............................................. 154
Reference percentage channel.................. 151
Reference torque ...................................... 92
Reference value ...................................... 142
Fixed frequency ................................... 146
Fixed percentage ................................. 154
JOG frequency ..................................... 150
Motor potentiometer ............................ 156
Reached .............................................. 190
Release brake ......................................... 191
Repetition frequency (RF)
Input .................................................. 208
Output ................................................ 184
Repetition frequency input ......................... 87
Resource pack ........................................ 308
S
SA Warning messages auto set-up .............. 68
Safety
Electrical Installation .............................. 31
General ................................................. 14
mechanical installation............................ 27
S-curve .................................................. 149
Service .............................................. 22, 272
Setting frequency .................................... 189
Setup ....................................................... 60
Asynchronous motor via operator panel ... 61
Communication ...................................... 74
Synchronous motor via operator panel ..... 65
SF Error messages auto-setup .................... 70
Shield sheet ............................................ 291
Slave drive, traverse function ................... 250
Slip compensation ................................... 226
Speed control............................................ 82
Speed controller ...................................... 232
Switch-over speed/torque control .......... 202
SS Status messages auto-setup .................. 68
Standby mode......................................... 261
Start anticlockwise............................ 199, 200
356
Parameters (Menu PARA)
Index
U
UL Approval ............................................ 278
USB adaptor ........................................... 308
User Name ............................................. 110
User warning .......................................... 204
V
V/f ......................................................... 111
Characteristic ....................................... 210
Linear .............................................. 211
Quadratic ......................................... 260
V/f characteristic ....................................... 90
V/f Starting behaviour................................ 88
VABus ...................................................... 78
Vibration-proof
size 1 .................................................. 324
size 2 .................................................. 325
size 3 .................................................. 326
Voltage controller .................................... 214
Voltage input ............................................ 49
W
Warning behavior .................................... 135
Warning code
of warning mask .................................. 194
of warning mask application .................. 195
Warning limit motor I2t ............................ 249
Warning mask ......................................... 192
Warning mask, application ....................... 195
Warning message
Memory card copying ........................... 255
Warning messages .................................. 340
of auto set-up ........................................ 68
Warning status ........................................ 340
Warranty and liability ................................. 12
Start clockwise ................................. 199, 200
Starting behavior ..................................... 123
FOC ...................................................... 89
V/f ........................................................ 88
Status device test .................................... 120
Stopping behavior ................................... 127
Stopping behaviour ................................... 89
Storage .................................................... 20
Switching frequency ................................ 239
Synchronization....................................... 129
System bus ............................................... 76
System data............................................ 253
T
TCP/IP ..................................................... 79
Technical data ........................................ 278
Technology controller .............................. 219
Thermal time constant motor ................... 249
Thermal time constant rotor ..................... 249
Thermocontact ........................................ 202
Three-wire control ................................... 200
Tolerance band ................................ 172, 178
Multifunction input 1 ............................ 172
Multifunction input 2 ............................ 178
Torque
Control ................................................ 230
Control, Application example ................. 107
Reference value ..................................... 92
Torque control .......................................... 82
Transport ................................................. 20
Travel application, Application example ..... 106
Traverse function .................................... 250
Handshake .......................................... 203
Type designation ....................................... 24
Parameters (Menu PARA)
357
06/2013
Operating Instructions Agile
Bonfiglioli worldwide network.
Bonfiglioli Australia
2, Cox Place Glendenning NSW 2761
Locked Bag 1000 Plumpton NSW 2761
Tel. (+ 61) 2 8811 8000 - Fax (+ 61) 2 9675 6605
www.bonfiglioli.com.au - sales@bonfiglioli.com.au
Bonfiglioli New Zealand
88 Hastie Avenue, Mangere Bridge, Auckland
2022, New Zealand - PO Box 11795, Ellerslie
Tel. (+64) 09 634 6441 - Fax (+64) 09 634 6445
npollington@bonfiglioli.com.au
Bonfiglioli Brazil
Travessa Cláudio Armando 171 - Bloco 3
CEP 09861-730 - Bairro Assunção
São Bernardo do Campo - São Paulo
Tel. (+55) 11 4344 1900 - Fax (+55) 11 4344 1906
www.bonfigliolidobrasil.com.br
bonfigliolidobrasil@bonfiglioli.com
Bonfiglioli Österreich
Molkereistr 4 - A-2700 Wiener Neustadt
Tel. (+43) 02622 22400 - Fax (+43) 02622 22386
www.bonfiglioli.at
info@bonfiglioli.at
Bonfiglioli Canada
2-7941 Jane Street - Concord, Ontario L4K 4L6
Tel. (+1) 905 7384466 - Fax (+1) 905 7389833
www.bonfigliolicanada.com
sales@bonfigliolicanada.com
Bonfiglioli China
19D, No. 360 Pu Dong Nan Road
New Shanghai International Tower
200120 Shanghai
Tel. (+86) 21 5054 3357 - Fax (+86) 21 5970 2957
www.bonfiglioli.cn - bdssales@bonfiglioli.com.cn
Bonfiglioli Deutschland
Sperberweg 12 - 41468 Neuss
Tel. (+49) 02131 2988-0
Fax (+49) 02131 2988-100
www.bonfiglioli.de - info@bonfiglioli.de
Bonfiglioli España
TECNOTRANS BONFIGLIOLI S.A.
Pol. Ind. Zona Franca sector C, calle F, n°6
08040 Barcelona
Tel. (+34) 93 4478400 - Fax (+34) 93 3360402
www.tecnotrans.com - tecnotrans@tecnotrans.com
Bonfiglioli France
14 Rue Eugène Pottier BP 19
Zone Industrielle de Moimont II
95670 Marly la Ville
Tel. (+33) 1 34474510 - Fax (+33) 1 34688800
www.bonfiglioli.fr - btf@bonfiglioli.fr
Bonfiglioli India
PLOT AC7-AC11 Sidco Industrial Estate
Thirumudivakkam - Chennai 600 044
Tel. +91(0) 44 24781035 - 24781036 - 24781037
Fax +91(0) 44 24780091 - 24781904
www.bonfiglioliindia.com - bonfig@vsnl.com
Bonfiglioli Italia
Via Sandro Pertini lotto 7b
20080 Carpiano (Milano)
Tel. (+39) 02 985081 - Fax (+39) 02 985085817
www.bonfiglioli.it
customerservice.italia@bonfiglioli.it
Bonfiglioli South East Asia
No 21 Woodlands indusrial park E1
#02-03 Singapore 757720
Tel. (+65) 6893 6346/7 - Fax (+65) 6893 6342
www.bonfiglioli.com.au
sales@bonfiglioli.com.sg
Bonfiglioli South Africa
55 Galaxy Avenue,
Linbro Business Park - Sandton
Tel. (+27) 11 608 2030 OR - Fax (+27) 11 608 2631
www.bonfiglioli.co.za
bonfigsales@bonfiglioli.co.za
Bonfiglioli Türkiye
Atatürk Organíze Sanayi Bölgesi,
10015 Sk. No: 17, Çigli - Izmir
Tel. +90 (0) 232 328 22 77 (pbx)
Fax +90 (0) 232 328 04 14
www.bonfiglioli.com.tr
info@bonfiglioli.com.tr
Bonfiglioli United Kingdom
Industrial Solutions
Unit 7, Colemeadow Road
North Moons Moat - Redditch,
Worcestershire B98 9PB
Tel. (+44) 1527 65022 - Fax (+44) 1527 61995
www.bonfiglioli.com
uksales@bonfiglioli.com
Mobile Solutions
3 - 7 Grosvenor Grange, Woolston
Warrington - Cheshire WA1 4SF
Tel. (+44) 1925 852667 - Fax (+44) 1925 852668
www.bonfiglioli.co.uk
mobilesales@bonfiglioli.co.uk
Bonfiglioli USA
3541 Hargrave Drive Hebron, Kentucky 41048
Tel. (+1) 859 334 3333 - Fax (+1) 859 334 8888
www.bonfiglioliusa.com
Bonfiglioli Vietnam
Lot C-9D-CN My Phuoc Industrial Park 3
Ben Cat - Binh Duong Province
Tel. (+84) 650 3577411 - Fax (+84) 650 3577422
www.bonfiglioli.vn
salesvn@bonfiglioli.com
Bonfiglioli has been designing and developing innovative
and reliable power transmission and control solutions
for industry, mobile machinery and renewable energy
applicacations since 1956.
Bonfiglioli Riduttori S.p.A.
Via Giovanni XXIII, 7/A
40012 Lippo di Calderara di Reno
Bologna (Italy)
tel: +39 051 647 3111
fax: +39 051 647 3126
bonfiglioli@bonfiglioli.com
www.bonfiglioli.com
COD. VEC 671 R3